^^^ 


••IMHHM^IHR 


.  • 


> 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


UWTJ 

,  TE'XAS 


' 


THE 


STYLE 


A  Complete  Stenographic  Text-book. 

PITMAN  SYSTEM. 

FOP  Class,  Correspondence  and  Self-Instruction. 

BY 

ELDON    MORAN. 

AUTHOR  THE  "MOHAN  SERIES "  OF  STENOGRAPHIC  INSTRUCTION 
BOOKS  AND  riSESIDKNT  AMERICAN  HOME  UNIVERSITY. 


THIRTY-KINTH    EDITION 


MOBAN  SHOKT-HAND  COMPANY 

ST.  Louis,    U.  8.  A. 
1909 


Popular  Short-Hand  Books. 

MOHAN -I'll  MAN  SERIES. 

Over  80,000  of  these  books  have  been  sold. 

THE  REPORTING  STYLE         -         -  1.50 

Complete    text- book.     Practical,   theoretical 
and  professional.    40,000  sold.    812  pages. 

KEY  TO  THE    REPORTING  STYLE"     -    200 

tugraved. 

POCKET  SHORT-HAND  DICTIONARY     1.00 
Contains    0,000    engraved    characters,    for    all 
doubtful  words. 

SHORT-HAND  STUDENTS  MANUAL    -    1.00 
Amanuensis    Course    for    high    schools    and 
"liDim-  study."     Simple  and  easy;  best  book 
for  the  average  student-    144  pages. 

100  VALUABLE  SUGGESTIONS         -         1.00 
Practical  and  useful  advice  and  information; 
serviceable  to  student,  teacher  and  reporter. 

HIGHER  LESSONS  IN  SHORT-HAND    -     .50 
For  advanced  and  professional  work. 

SHORT-HAND  SIGN-BOOK        -        -        -    .35 
All  word  and  phrase  signs  arranged  alphabet- 
ically; flexible;  vest-pocket  edition. 

SHORT-HAND  NUTSHELL        -        -        -    .25 
The   Pitman   System    boiled    down.     Graded 
Lesson  Series;  handy  size. 

SHORT-HAND  FOR  BUSY  PEOPLE         -     .10 
Presents  proper  characters  Jor  all  most  fre- 
quently occurring  words.    Vest  Pocket  Booklet. 

SKILL    CERTIFICATE,     single    copy    five 

cents;  per  dozen .26 

A  pocket  Diploma.  Indicates  student's  qualifi- 
cations, speed  and  experience. 

INTRODUCTION  CARD          -         -        .        .10 
For   stenographers    and    students    who    wish 
Short- hand  correspondents. 

Published  and  for  sale  by 

THE  MORAN  SHORT-HAND  CO 

Specimen  Page*  Frtt.  ST.  T,ouis. 


—  OOPYKIGHTID— 


At   this    date,  August,  1906,  the  38th      edition 

of  the  Reporting  Style  is  printed.  The  publishers  are  grateful 
to  the  two  hundred  Teachers  and  College  Proprietors  who 
have  seen  fit  to  adopt  this  manual  on  its  merits.  Its  novel 
features  have  been  thoroughly  tested,  and  its  reputation  estab- 
lished as  a  satisfactory  exponent  of  the  Pitman  System,  and  a 
simple  and  practical  text-book. 

The  engraving  is  abundant  and  most  excellent  in  quality. 
The  subject  is  presented  in  an  easy  and  progressive  series  of 
graded  lessons.  The  learner  is  drilled  in  writing  exercises 
which  contain  words  most  used  in  business  correspondence. 
Permanent  outlines  only  are  given;  that  is,  the  student  is  never 
allowed  to  express  any  word  by  a  long  form  which  must  after- 
wards be  unlearned  to  give  place  for  the  short  or  reporting 
form.  This  is  now  universally  regarded  as  the  correct  method. 
The  explanation  is  simple,  and  the  book  is  well  adapted  for 
use  by  young  learners.  An  important  advantage  also  possessed 
by  but  few  such  works,  is  that  the  subject  is  exhaustively 
treated  in  a  single,  compact  volume.  A  key  to  all  the  exer- 
cises, both  letter-press  and  engraved,  has  recently  been  pub- 
lished for  the  convenience  of  teachers,  and  as  an  aid  to  students 
who  undertake  self  instruction.  The  series  has  just  been 
further  enriched  also  by  the  addition  of  a  Pocket  Dictionary 
containing  engraved  outlines  for  six  thousand  carefully  se- 
lected words  and  phrases. 

Two  improvements  are  made  in  the  present  edition : 
(1st)  Four  additional  pages  of  practice  matter  are  added  in 
the  early  part.  (2d)  Many  hyphens  have  been  removed  from 
the  exerei.-es  throughout,  requiring  a  correspondingly  less 
amount  of  phrasing.  These  two  steps  are  taken  most  willingly 
in  response  to  suggestions  offered  by  many  friendly  critics. 


448626 


CONTENTS. 


Introduction    -              ...  5 

Long  and  Short  Hand  Compared  10 

General  Directions        -       -       -  11 

Definition  of  Terms              -       -  18 

LESSON'S. 

I.  Consonant  Alphabet, 

Sec  1-       -       -       -    14 
II.  Consonant  Alphabet, 

Sec.  2-  -    16 

III.  Word-Signs  -    22 

IV.  Bay  (upward  R)  and 

Phrasing 


V.  Long  Vowels 


-  26 

-  32 


VI.  Diphthongs  and  the  S- 


Circle- 

VII.  Short  Vowels       - 
VIII  Consonant  Position 
IX.  S-Circle  Junctions 
X.  Phraseography    - 
XI.  Sez-Circle,    Emp  and 

Coalescents     -       -    64 
XII.  Double  Consonants,  — 

the  L-hook  -  -  70 
Xin.  R-hook  Series,  Div.  1  -  76 
XIV.  "  "  Div.  2-  80 

XV.  Triple  Consonant  Se- 

ries 
XVL  Rel-hook,     Aspirate 

Tick  and  Dot  - 
XVIL  W-hoofcs,   Brief   Way 

and  Yay 

XVIII.  F-hook  ... 

XIX.  N-hook  -       -       - 

XX.       "      ,  Continued 

XXI.  Shun-hook    -       - 

XXII.  S-shun  and  In-hooks  -  114 

XXIIL  St  and  Str  Loops  -       -  118 

XXIV.  LengtheningPrinciple-  123 

XXV.  Halving  Principle       -  128 

XXVI.  Added  D  -  133 

XXVII   Shortened  Double  Con- 


- 84 

-  88 
y 

-  92 
.  % 

-100 

-  104 
-108 


sonants     •       •       -  138 
XXVin.  Half  -  length    Final 

Hooked  Stems-       -  1-12 

XXIX.  Half-leugth  L,  R,  M,N-  147 

XXX   Intervocalization         -  152 

XXXI.  Prefixes  -       -       .       -  157 

XXXII.  Affixes    -       -       -       -  163 

XXXIII.  Variable  Letters  -       -  167 

XXXIV.  Consonant  Position     -  1T3 
XXXV.  Vocalization  -       -       -  182 

XXXVL  Primitive  and  Deriva- 
tive   -       -       -       -  192 
XXXVTI.  Syllabication  -       -       -  200 
XXXVIII  General  Principles       -  805 
XXXIX.  Names  and  Negatives-  228 
XL.  Expedients  and  Punct- 
uation      ...  227 
XXI.  Numbers,  Special  Rules 

and  Suggestions     -  232 
XLII.  Rules  for  Phrasing 
XLIII.  Amanueusis  Reporting-  251 
XLIV. 

Continued 

XLV.  Speech  Reporting  - 
XL VI.  Convention  Reportii^ 
XLVII.  Law  Reporting       -       -  209 
XLVIU.  Objections,  Rulings,  Ex- 
ceptions,  Exhibits, 
and  Indices     -       -  277 
XXIX.  Transcripts  and  Profes- 
sional Conduct       -  285 
L.  Systems  and  Improve- 
ments      -       -       -  290 
Vocabulary      -  2;c 

Spiritual  Freedom  -       -       -       -  310 

Fac-Similes 311 

Notes,— 21,  48,  62,  83,  87,  117,  126, 

132,  137,  141,  156,  226. 
Suggestions  to  Teachers,— 21,  30, 
31, 37,  43,  49,  53.  63,  75,  91,  95, 
103,  112,  113,  146. 


INTRODUCTORY. 


SYSTEM.  This  book  presents  what  is  known  as  the  Amer- 
ican style  of  the  Pitman  System.  Speaking  broadly,  we 
regard  the  Pitman  as  vastly  superior  to  those  few  systems 
which  differ  radically  from  it,  and  a  more  desirable  acquisi- 
tion than  a  knowledge  of  any  one  of  the  several  others  which 
are  based  directly  upon  it.  For  all  English  speaking  coun- 
tries it  is  unquestionably  the  method  of  the  future. 

TEACHING.  The  aim  of  this  work  is  to  pre.-ent  the  Pit- 
man System  in  the  concrete — not  merely  in  the  abstract;  to 
teach  the  how  of  short-hand,  rather  than  the  why  of  it.  The 
method  of  instruction  employed  is  practical  an<J  progressive. 
The  principles  are  taken  up  and  explained  in  an  orderly  man- 
ner, and  the  student  directed  how  to  apply  them  correctly  in 
the  work  of  forming  the  characters  rapidly  and  artistically. 
Two  or  three  new  principles  only  are  introduced  in  a  single 
lesson,  and  a  list  of  words  inserted  which  are  to  be  written 
in  accordance  therewith.  The  words  chosen  for  this  purpose 
are  those  in  common  use.  The  drill  which  enables  the  learn- 
er to  write  and  read  them  with  the  required  speed,  fixes  the 
characters  firmly  in  the  memory.  No  word  or  phrase  is  in- 
troduced until  the  learner  has  been  fully  directed  how  to 
write  it  in  the  proper  manner.  The  student  who,  taking  the 
lessons  in  turn,  masters  each,  will  upon  completing  the  course 
be  a  competent  writer  of  short-hand. 

PLAN.  Each  lesson  is  composed  in  part  of  one  or  more 
pages  of  engraved  matter.  Each  full  page  plate  contains,  1st,  a 
list  of  words  illustrating  the  principles  found  in  the  same 
lesson;  2nd,  a  list  of  words  and  phrase  signs  falling  under 
these  principles;  3rd,  also  list  of  word-forms,  and  series  of 
sentences.  A  key  to  each  plate  appears  on  the  opposite  page. 
A  dotted  base  line  is  used  in  all  engraved  matter. 


6  INTRODUCTORY. 

Also,  as  matter  for  writing  practice,  each  lesson  is  sup- 
plied with  a  list  of  selected  words,  a  series  of  phrases,  -in  ex- 
ercise, a  speed  sentence,  and  an  engraved  exerci-e  f6A*eauing 
practice.  Suggestions,  and  hints  to  teachers,  occur  from 
time  to  time  at  the  close  of  the  lessons.  The  exercises  are 
composed  of  sayings  and  proverbs,  carefully  selected  from  the 
best  authors,  ancient  and  modern.  By  writing  them  repeat- 
edly these  wise  maxims  become  familiar,  and  give  the  student 
the  advantage  of  a  mind  stored  with  the  best  precepts  of  all 
countries.  The  course  or  lessons  is  followed  by  a  Vocabulary 
of  word  and  phrase  signs,  and  difficult  outlines. 

Hyphens  are  used  to  indicate  which  words  are  to  be 
phr?sed.  Difficult  words  are  marked  with  a  star,  and  th  -ir 
outlines  are  given  in  the  vocabulary.  As  a  convenience  :n 
teaching,  the  word-lists  are  numbered  by  line.  The  thrt3 
figures  given  parenthetically  at  the  close  of  each  exercise  in- 
dicate, 1st,  the  number  of  words  contained;  2nd,  the  min- 
utes and  seconds  in  which  it  should  be  written;  3rd,  the  time 
in  which  the  notes  are  to  be  read  afterwards.  To  illustrate, 
the  figures  (175-5-2)  at  the  close  of  exercise  6,  p.  43,  indicate 
that  the  exercise  contains  175  words;  that  it  is  to  be  written 
in  5  minutes,  and  the  notes  to  be  read  in  2  minutes.  As  a 
rule,  the  student  will  be  expected  to  write  the  exercise  in 
schedule  time,  before  proceeding  to  the  next  lesson.  But  this 
is  not  required  of  pupi  s  who  are  quite  young.  On  the  other 
hand,  apt  writers  often  make  better  time  than  is  here  required 

To  THE  LEARNER.  If  possible,  put  yourself  under  the 
tuition  of  a  competent  teacher.  It  will  save  you  time  and  keep 
you  on  the  right  track,  which  is  important.  But  if  you  have 
no  instructor,  you  are  recommended  to  compare  your  notes 
frequently  with  the  engraved  pages.  Criticise  your  own  work. 
At  stated  times  write  as  some  one  dictates  aloud  to  you,  and 
invariably  read  over  your  notes  afterwards. 

ELDON  MORAN. 

AMERICAN  HOME  UNIVERSITY, 

St.  Louis.  October,  1898. 


LONG  AXD  SHORT  HAND  COMPARED. 

The  character  ^^^—^^.  represents  making.  Separat- 
ing the  letters  we  have,  "~^  m  .  a  —  k  ^^  ng=making. 
The  short  vowel  t  in  ing  is  not  written.  Nor  is  it  strictly 
necessary  to  write  a,  making  usually  being  written  simply 

s~~~^ ~^^  The  short  method  is  six  times  swifter  than  the 

long-hand,  and  there  are  six  general  principles  by  which  the 
common  system  is  abbreviated,  six  steps,  so  to  speak,  in  the 
ladder  leading  from  the  old  style  up  to  the  new. 

I.  A  letter  for  a  sound.    In  dough  but  two  sounds  are 
heard,  those  of  dando;  nevertheless  five  letters,  d-o-u-g-h, 
are  employed  to  express  them.    In  short-hand  but  two  letters 
are  required,  one  for  each  sound,  thus   |-  dough. 

II.  A  single  stroke  for  a  letter.    The  long-hand  d  is  written 
with  five  strokes  of  the  pen,  while  the  short-hand  |  d  re- 
quires but  one;  the  long-hand  o  requires  four  strokes,  the 
short-hand  -  o  but  one. 

III.  Omission  of  vowels.    It  is  possible  to  write  almost 
entirely  without  vowels.     To  illustrate,  this   sentence  is 
eas'.ly  decipherable:  "G-d  s-  -d  1-t  th-r-  b-  1-ght,  -nd  th-r-  w-s 
1-ght."    This  principle  is  utilized  in. short-hand. 

IV.  Tfie  use  of  word-signs.    Several  hundred  abbrevia 
tions,  called  word-signs,  are  employed;  e.  g.,  /    ch  for  which, 
r~  I  for  will,  -N^WST  for  thing,  ^_  v  for  have,  (  th  for  think, 

I    o  for  before,  etc. 

V.  Phraseography ,  or  joining  words  together.    In  long- 
hand, the  pen  is  lifted  from  the  paper  upon  the  completion 
of  each  word.    In  short-hand,  from  three  to  ten  words  are 
written  before  this  is  necessary;  e.  g.,  It-is-better  to-have-a 
lion  at-thc-head  of -an  army  of  sheep  than-a  sheep  at-the-head 
of-an  army  of -lions. 

VI.  The  use  of  expedients.    The  most  frequently  recurring 
phrases,  such  as,  in-order-to,  on-the-other-hand,  from-time-to- 
time,  day -after-day,  are  represented  by  brief  signs  which 
express  two  or  more  of  the  principal  words  of  each. 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS. 

1.  Always  write  on  ruled  paper. 

2.  Hold  your  pen  in  a  nearly  upright  position. 

3.  Use  good  black  ink,  and  whatever  pen  you  find  most 
satisfactory.    The    "Lady    Falcon"    is    very   good;   also, 
Gillott  Nos.  803  and  404.    The  Esterbrook  school  pen,   and 
certain  Nos.  of  the  Spencerian  are  used  by  some. 

4.  Read  over  at  least  once  everything  you  write. 

5.  Practice  every  day  without  fail,  if  only  a  few  minutes. 

6.  Practice  on  no  matter  not  found  in  your  lessons. 

7.  Write  by  sound — that  is,  what  is  read  to  you.    If  possi- 
ble, get  a  fellow  student  with  whom  to  practice  daily. 

8.  Occassionally  read   over  an  exercise  written  a  week 
previously. 

9.  Each  exercise  should  be  written  slowly  at  first,   gradu- 
ally increasing  the  speed  afterwards. 

10.  Learn  each  word  well,  for  it  is  always  expressed  by 
the  same  character  in  actual  reporting. 

11.  Form  the  habit   of  phrasing,  or  joining  words  to- 
gether. 

12.  Write  small ;  remember  the  standard,  one-sixth  of  an 
inch. 

13.  Hold   your  note-book  firmly   by   placing  your  left 
thumb  and  finger  two  inches  above  the  base  line. 

14.  Always   carry  some  short-hand  matter  with  you  to 
study  spare  moments. 

15.  Whenever  proper  in  writing,  employ  the  characters 
you  have  learned. 

16.  Corresponding    with   other  short-hand   students    is 
earnestly  recommenced. 

17.  When  thirty-five  lessons  have  been  learned,  the  stu- 
dent's practice  need  not  be  limited  to  the  exercises  here  given, 
but   easy    newspaper    articles,    the    prose    part   of  school 
readers,  printed  collections  of  business  letters,  and  published 
reports  of  law  and  convention  proceedings,  may  be  profita- 
bly used  for  this  purpose.     Gre*.t  care  snould  be  taken  to 
write  -each  article  properly  the  first  time,  and  to  re- write  it 
afterwards  not  less  than  half  a  dozen  times  with  gradually 
increased  speed. 


TABLE  OP  ALPHABETS. 

CONSONANT  STEMS. 


8    X  B 

4     I        D 

?/ 


Chay 


/    J 


.K 
,Gay 


LONG 

VOWEL3 

SHORT 

VOWELS 

IT 

DIPH-       \ 
THOXGS 


C]wEE-P 

\V     c  ;WA-KK 

ClWA-D 
Y         uJYA-LE 


10  \^V 

11  (    Ith 

12  (     The 

13  )    3 


15          Ish 


16 


VQWEL  ALPHABET. 


ET 

A 


D 


A, 
OW 


OOALESCENT8. 


OT 

L 


WA-LK 

3JWO-KE 
DfWOO 


-jYO-KE 
nlTOU-TH 


17 


18 


20 
21 


) 


M 

N 
Ing 


2         1 


22         1   Way 
f        Yea 


Hay. 


0 
I 

TIT  FOOT 

I 


l 
WOW 


EW 


CJWE-ND 
ciwA-PT 


'{WO-T 

3IWO-BSB 
3JWOO- 


^JTOU-NO 


LESSON  I. 

CONSONANT  ALPHABET — SECTION  I. 
i.         1  I  •        4  •  •  7  8 

\p  \b  |t  |d  /ch  /j  _k  _g 
8.  For  convenience  the  fifth  letter,  /  ch,  is  called  chay, 
and  the  eighth,  —  gay.  All  these  characters  are  used  in  the 
same  way  as  the  corresponding  long-hand  letters,  with  this 
important  exception,  that  no  sign  is  ever  employed  unless 
the  sound  it  represents  is  actually  heard  when  the  word  is 
•poken.  Hence  in  add  (ad),  there  is  but  oned;  in  dipped 
(dipt),  but  one  p;  in  ditch  (dich),  t  is  omitted  because  silent; 
in  lack  (lak),  c  is  dropped  for  the  same  reason;  in  dodge  (doj), 
silent  d  is  omitted,  and  g  represented  by .;",  because  j  exactly 
expresses  this  sound;  in  gem  (Jem),  g  also  in  short-hand  is 
better  expressed  by  j;  in  cap  (kap),  c  is  not  used  because  the 
sound  for  which  it  stands  is  better  expressed  by  k. 

3.  The  first  six  letters,  \  jt>,  \  5,  |  tt  \  d,  /  ch,  /j, 
are  always  struck  downwards;  but  horizontal  letters,  as  — k, 
—  g,  are  written  from  left  to  right.  The  letters  which  prop- 
erly express  the  consonant  sounds  of  a  word,  when  connect- 
ed together,  are  called  a  word-form.  This  should  be  executed 
without  lifting  the  pen  from  the  paper,  each  successive  letter 
being  written  in  its  proper  direction,  beginning  where  the 

preceding  one  ends.  For  illustration,  see  /      check,  (Line  10, 

Plate  1);  /  jap  (L  11);  Z-,  jacket  (L  12);  \  page  (L  18). 
In  some  N  of  these  |  words,  &sjack-  /  ett  it  will  be 
seen  that  one  letter  falls  below  the  line;  this  is  a  common  oc- 
currence, and  quite  necessary.  The  rule  for  placing  letters 
is  that  the  first  downward  letter  should  rest  on  the  line.  This 

requires  that  some  letters  be  written  one  space  above,  as k 

in  cage  (L  13),  which  in  this  case  is  necessary  in  order  that 
//i  the  first  downward  stroke,  may  rest  on  the  line.  De- 
vote leveral  hours  to  this  lesson.  Copy  Plate  1  twenty  times. 
Remember  the  three  rules:  1st.  Practice.  2d.  Practice! 

8d.     PRACTICE  ! 

—10— 


Plate  i. 

P-l    B-2       T  3  »-4       CH-5    J-6    K-7       G-8 

i   \  \       I     /  /       -  —  \\    I  I    // •  = 

*  \\\\\      1 1 1 1  I        ///// 

3  \\\\\    Mill      ///// 

*  \\  \\  \\  \\  \\  \\  \\  \\  \\  \\ 

5   II    II     |    II    II    II  II   II    II   H 


\\ 


\\ 


\\ 


\\ 


9       I    I       

lOCh-K,  check 
11   J — P   jap 
12J-K.— T.  , 


Z_ 


13P-J.  page;K    J.  coge\ 


\         /          \          /       \      / 

14  B-J.  budge  J—B.  job\     /         \       /       \      /          \        / 

~~J         /  /         /  / 


15  J-  K.Jack  G-Ch.  Gatch 


LESSON  H. 
CONSONANT  ALPHABET— SECTION  II. 

4.  Letters  11  and  12   (L  1,  plate  2)  are  named  (  ith  and 
(  the,  the  first  having  the  force  of  th  in  th-ink  or  bo-JA,  and 
the  second  the  force  of  th  in  th-em  or  brea-/A-e.    )  Z  (No.  14) 
has  the  force  of  z,  and  is  equivalent  to  s  in  ha-s,  wa-s,  goe-s, 
etc.    Letters  15  and  16  are  designated  _J  ish  and  J  zhe,  the 
first  having  the  power  of  sh  in  sh-a.ll  or  fi-sh,  or  of  ci  in 
vi-c*-ous;  the  second  that  of  s  in  plea-s-ure  or  z  in  sei-2-ure. 
The  name  of  the  17th  letter  is  f~  lay.    Letter  21,  called 
N^'fngr,  is  used  to  express  ng,  as  in  si-»<7,  bri-ng,  etc.;  also  n 
when  it  occurs  before  k  or  g,  as  in  si-»-k,  dri-n-k  (pronounced 
si-n^-k,  dri-n<7-k).    Letters  22,  28  and  24  are  named  "^  way, 

f  yayi  </  hay^  respectively.  W  and  y  in  long-hand  are 
sometimes  vowels,  as  in  cow  or  day,  and  in  such  cases  the 
short-hand  letters  way  and  yay  should  not  be  used.  W  and 
y  are  consonants  only  when  they  begin  syllables,  and  vowels 
when  they  end  them.  </  Hay  has  the  force  of  h  in  A-eat  or 
A-ead,  but  must  not  be  used  to  indicate  h  in  physic  (the  di- 
graph ph  being  equivalent  to  y),  or  in  dough  (in  which  A  is 
silent).  ,/  Hay  and  f  lay  are  written  upwards. 

5.  Beginners  write  too  large.    One-sixth  of  an  inch  is  the 
proper  length  ;  but  young  persons  may  write  larger.    The 
light  lines  should  be  made  as  thin  as  possible,  and  the  shad- 
ed strokes  only  heavy  enough  to  be  readily  distinguished. 
In  these  respects  the  learner's  work  should,  so  far  as  prac- 
ticable, conform  to  that  shown  in  the  engravings  (plates  1 
and  2).    The  earnest  student  will  carefully  compare  and 
rigidly  correct  his  own  exercises  before  submitting  them  to 
his  instructor  for  criticism. 

6.  The  writer  is  very  apt,  at  first,  to  allow  |  t  and  |  d  to 
lean  to  the  right,  and  to  give  too  little  slant  to  the  oblique 
letters.     Give  upright  letters  a  slight  inclination  in  the 
opposite  direction,  and  the  others  an  extra  degree  of  slant, 

until  the  fault  disappears. 

—12— 


.  v/ , 

^ 


4 


n^  X^JK,    Plate 

2=9. 

'VF    i.       V-10       .  TH-11   TH-12 
1        V         V              f         '  ( 

8-13       Z—  14          SH-15      ZH-16 

)        )               J 

^^—  ^^^^^" 

L-17     R-1S      M-19       N-20 

2       /"            ^         ^         ^ 

— 

^5"    F_v       V       V        V.          Vw 

KG  -81     W—  88       Y—  38       H-84 

^      ^     f    S 

4    sn-zn     J    J    J    J 

J  J   J  J   J   J 

5     TH-TH^zC    (        )     )         ( 

:  (  )>   «  )  > 

6    L-Y,  R-W   f     f        ^^ 

rr  -^  rr  ~\^ 

7     M-H—  N-NG       ^_^        <^  ^ 

^  -^  —  *  ^_-  ^ 

8     RM-ML      "\_^       __y^        ^N 

^  -y  ~v^_/" 

9   s-cn,  J-M    ^7  /^         ^ 

/ 

7  A    VA    VA 

11    L-V,  lovo;  Il-T,hat/X\^    ^ 

^       ?d      }{ 

1    ^V_  ^1  A.  ^1 

12    M-K-NG  making  ^_^ 

-  —  ^      -  —  ^ 

13    P-K—  X-K  picnicV—^^^— 

v^  v__  ' 

14    M—  M—  K  mimic  ^~^^-^_ 

--^^_      ^-^-^_ 

15  c  /  r 

they   /judge    lake          may 

deluge             lovely          lady 

14  REPORTING 


7.  The  pen  may  be  held  between  the  thumb  and  the  first 
and  second  fingers,  not  far  from  the  nib,  and  i"  a  nearly  up- 
right position,  as  shown  in  fig.  J  (plate  2-B).    Stenographers 
often  hold  their  pen  as  shown  in  fig.  K,  and  the  student  may 
sometimes  adopt  this  manner  with  advantage. 

KEY  TO  PLATE  2-B. 

8.  Figures.    A  shows  attitude  of  straight  letters;  B  and  C 
show  direction  of  writing  them,  the  rule  being  toward  the 
centre;  D,  E,  F  and  O  show  attitude  and  curvature  of  tin- 
bending  stems  ;  H  and  1  the  direction  of  writing  the  curves  ; 
</  ami  K  ways  of  holding  the  pen. 

L  1.    Bell  no  may  wake  live  so  long   hotel. 
L  2.    Early  'head  bank  anthem    name  thick  shame. 
In  lines  8  to  6  will   be  found,  in   a  different  order,   tin- 
proper  outlines  for  the  words  in  Exercise  2. 

9.  It  will  be  observed  that  several  different  words  may 

have  the  same  outline,  as  |  _  t-k   for  both  take  and  took  ; 

I  g-d  for  guide  and  giddy  ;  \—  b-g  for  big  and  beg. 
When  ambiguity  is  likely  to  result,  some  of  the  vowels  are 
inserted.  (Vowels  are  explained  in  lesson  5.)  The  need  for 


vowels  is  rare.    In  the  sentence,   "Those    \—  boys 
bread,"  the  context  enables  the  reader  to  determine  when 

this  character  \  signifies  big,  and  when  beg.  Here  b-g 
first  denotes  an  adjective,  and  then  a  verb ;  and  it  is  a  princi- 
ple of  language  that  the  same  character  may  represent  two 
or  more  different  parts  of  speech  without  danger  of  conflict. 
10.  Straight  letters  should  be  made  without  crook  or 
curvature,  curves  bent  uniformly  throughout,  and  the  shad- 
ed strokes  allowed  to  taper  at  the  extremities.  Words 
whose  outlines  are  horizontal,  as  '  "^ ^_^  making,  or 

^~^^~ ^  mimic,  should  be  written  on  the  line.  If  the  first 
stroke  is  upward,  as  in  t^r  hotel,  it  should  begin  also  on 
the  line.  The  system  is  so  philosophically  arranged  that  if  a 


$Iate  2=33. 


^ — — 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


shaded  stroke  be  made  too  light,  or  a  thin  stroke  be  made  too 
heavy,  no  uncertainty  of  meaning  is  at  all  likely  to  result. 
To  illustrate,  the  sentence,  "It  is  pest  to  bay  as  you  go,"  is  of 
no  doubtful  signification.  In  this  case,  N^p  and  \  b  are 
interchanged,  which  is  the  practical  result  of  shading  the 
wrong  stem.  It  is  another  principle  of  language  that  both 
sounds  in  any  pair  of  cognates,  as  \  p  and  \  6,  |  t  and  |  d, 
V^^and  ^_  v;  etc.,  may  safely  be  expressed  by  the  same 
sign.  Hence,  strictly,  shading  is  not  necessary  at  all  in  this 
system;  but  since  it  materially  improves  the  legibility  of 
short-hand  notes,  it  should  not  be  neglected. 

11.  The  beginner  should  spend  some  time  in  outlining 
words  orally,  taking  the  following  as  an  illustrative  exer- 
cise :   T-k,  take  ;  b-k,  book  ;  p-g  (pronounced  pee-gay)  pig  ; 
b-g,  big;  d-ch,  (pronounced  dee-chay)  ditch  ;  b-j,  budge  ;  j-b, 
job;  t-b,  tub;  k-j,  cage;  p-j,  page;  b-k-t,  bucket;  t-k-t,  tick- 
et ;  j-k-t,  jacket ;  k-b-j,  cabbage ;  p-k-j,  package ;   b-t-k,  be- 
take; b-j-t,  budget;  b-d-k,  bedeck  ;  j-j,  judge  ;  d-k-t,  docket. 

12.  The  learner  is  asked  to  read  this  sentence  to  some 
friend:    "  That  larj  felo  lookt  hi  and  lo  for  the  lime  kil  on  the 
naro  ej  ov  the  hil."    Immediately  afterwards  read,   "  That 
large  fellow  looked  high  and  low  for  the  limekiln  on  the  narrow 
edge  of  the  hill."    Would  it  not  be  the  same  to  him?    Or,  do 
you  think  he  could  tell  from  your  reading  how  the  words 
were  spelled?    In  the  first  sentence  they  are  spelled  more 
nearly  as  they  are  pronounced,  and  one  of  the  chief  differ- 
ences between  short-hand  and  long-hand,  so  called,  is  that 
in  the  former  the  spelling  of  a  word  depends  entirely  upon 
the  particular  kind,  and  the  arrangement,  of  the  sounds  it 
contains.    This  is  not  true  in  common  writing.    In  sound- 
writing  no  more  letters  are  employed  than  there  are  distinct 
sounds  heard;  thusfo,  foe;  na,  nay;  do,  dough;  fabl,  fable; 
mikst,  mixed;  kwil,  quill;    hwen,  when.    There  are  no  silent 
letters  in  short-hand.    Hence  the  usual  manner  of  spelling  a 
word  has  nothing  whatever  to  do  in  determining  the  way  in 
which  it  is  to  be  written. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND, 


ORAL  EXERCISE. 

13.  K-m,  came;  t-m,  time;  n-m,  name;  j-m,gem;g-m,  game; 
1-v,  love;  th-f,  thief;  h-v,  heavy;  m-v,  move;  sh-v,  shave; 
m-m-k,  mimic;  k-m-k,  comic;  b-k-m,  became;  d-l-j,  deluge; 
h-t-1,   hotel;   n-g-j,  engage;    s-k-p,  escape;    m-n-th,  month; 
n-th-ng,  nothing;  d-m-j,  damage;  b-ng-k,  bank;  1-ng-k,  link; 
1-f-ng,  laughing;  w-k-ng,  waking;  s-s-t-m,  system ;  s-t-n-g-r-f-r, 
stenographer;  t-k-s,  tax;   k-w-1,  quill;  h-w-t,  white;  i-zh-r, 

erasure. 

^*^ 

EXERCISE  2. 

14.  1  Being  2  namely  3  time  4  among  5  death  6  ask  7  b_e- 
came  8  book   9  go   10  bucket  11  be  12  jig  13  touch   14  pay 
15  bedeck  16  betake  17  jug~J8  dpg"f9  pitch  20  take~~21  keep 
22  dodge    23  pig    24  pick    25  ditch  26  deck   27  came  28  it 
29  polish   30  do    31  also    32  package.         (32—2—1). 


SUGGESTIONS. — If  you  meet  with  any  difficulty,  or  if  you 
do  not  find  short-hand  clear  and  easy,  do  not  for  that  reason 
throw  down  your  pen.  You  cannot  afford  to  wait  for  your 
class  to  meet,  or  until  your  lesson  by  mail  is  returned. 
Study,  write,  read,  practice;  woi-k  away!  The  oftener  you 
copy  the  characters,  the  better  will  you  understand  the  prin- 
ciples. Obstacles  melt  away  before  an  earnest  worker. 
Leave  110  lesson  until  you  can  say  "yes "  to  these  questions: 
Do  you  understand  the  principle?  Can  you  write  the  Exer- 
cise correctly?  Write  it  in  the  required  time?  Read  it  after- 
wards? Have  you  written  it  at  dictation? 

To  THE  TEACHER. —  Wh,  x,  and  q  will  embarrass  most  be- 
ginners. The  instructor  should  explain  these  letters,  as  the 
needs  of  the  learner  may  demand.  X  is  equivalent  to  ks, 
since  tax  and  tacks  are  pronounced  tl:^  same.  In  rare  cases, 
x  is  a  subvocal,  having  the  force  of  gz,  as  in  example,  pro- 
nounced egz-ample.  In  quick,  q  is  equal  to  kw  ;  thus,  kwick. 
Wh  equals  hw  ;  thus,  h  uttered  before  wile,  the  two  in  quick 
succession,  produces  while. 


LESSON  III. 

WORD-SIGNS. 

15.  KEY. — 1.  Which    come  for    shall    usual    will    have 
them  was.     2.    Him   your    together   advantage    language 
change  think  object  faithful.    8.    Health  income  Novem- 
ber   efficient    become    chapter.      4.      Especially    familiar 
popular   he  help    never. 

WORD-FORMS. — 5.  Alabama  behead  duet  keg  annul 
period  anatomy  nothing.  6.  Doing  helping  paying 
asylum  fail  gypsy  ink  thumb.  7.  Asiatic  bishop  Fanny 
manual  along  vowel  denial. 

SENTENCES. — 1.  They  may  wake  up  Dick.  2.  They  have 
enough  cash  for  your  big  Dakota  job.  8.  No  timid  thief  will 
long  escape  death.  4.  They  also  think  they  have  enough 
ingenuity.  5.  So  it  may  be  they  will  effect  it.  6.  They  will 
pay  money  into  bank  for  your  November  honey.  7.  Bishop 
Matthew  will  never  deviate.  8.  Never  take  Fanny  mail 
which  came  for  Lilly. 

16.  There  are  several  hundred  short  words,  as  have,  him, 
which,  is,   will,  for,  etc.,   which  are  very  common.     The 
reporter  must  write  them  over  and  over  again  so  often,  that 
to  save  time  they  are  expressed  by  abbreviated  outlines,  some 
of  the  letters  being  dropped.    Thus  for  is  written  V^_  f,  in- 
stead of      V fr,  r  being  omitted.    Hence  V_  f,  being  an 
abbreviation,^^    must   be     memorized    as    the   word-sign 
for  the  word  for.    Word-signs  are  characters  which  express 
one  or  more  of  the  leading  consonants  of  the  words  they  are 
used  to  represent.    These  characters  are  for  convenience 
called  word-signs,  and  the  words  represented  by  them,  sign- 
words.    For  example,  V^  is  the  word-sign,  and  for  the  sign- 
word. 

17.  These  Signs  cannot  be  too  thoroughly  committed  to 
memory,  since  the  words  they  represent  are  those  which  occur 
most  frequently.    Remember  always  to  use  the  proper  word- 
sign,   and  not  the  full  outline,  whenever  any  sign-word  is  to 

—18— 


/  _ 


mate  3. 

j  r     ^    (    > 
/    ^  /     (   \ 


6     /A 


Y 


8ENTBNCB8 


.    (T) 


^  _  \  |  _ 


: 


(;•( 


)  I 
r  \ 


\ 


v,    r 


L 


20  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HANT). 

be  written.     For  example,    come  should  be    written  — , 

never  ^^  ;  which  / ,  never  </^>  The  word-signs 
given  in  each  lesson  should  be  /  copied  from  fifty 
to  one  hundred  times.  In  this  way  the  pupil  memorizes 
while  learning  to  execute  them. 

18.  Proper  nouns  are  underscored  with  a  short  double 
dash,  as  shown  in  Alabama.    L  5. 

19.  The  tick  at  the  beginning  of  £     h  should  be  written  in 
a  horizontal  position,  and  not  inclined  in  such  a  manner  as  to 

form  a  hook,  thus  £^  It  is  sometimes  inconvenient  to  write 
this  tick  when  h  is  not  the  first  consonant  in  the  word. 
In  such  cases  it  is  clearly  enough  indicated  by  retracing  the 
preceding  letter  a  short  way,  as  in  behead.  L  5. 

20.  A  single  movement  of  the  pen  is  sufficient  to  indicate 
duet,  or  keg,  and  similar    words,    the  stroke    tapering  or 
thickening  gradually.    L  5.    The  letter  I  is  sometimes  writ- 
ten downward  (as  in  vowel,  manual,  L  7),  and  is  then  called 
el  to  distinguish  it  from  lay  (upward).    Sh  when  struck  up- 
ward is  called  shay.    (See  bishop,  L  7).    Always  use  lay  and 
ish,  unless  eJand  shay  are  specified. 

21.  One  of  the  purposes  in  sometimes  using  el  instead  of 
lay,  and  shay  instead  of  ish,  is  to  secure  better,  that  is  sharp- 
er, angles  at  their  junctures  with  other  letters.    The  legibil- 
ity of  an  outline  depends  to  a  large  extent  upon  its  angular- 
ity.   For  this  reason  a  distinct  angle  should  be  made  in 
joining   (   ith  and  V^  3/*,  V_  efand  ^_^en,  (   ith  and  ^^ing, 


(as  in        \^_x  nothing),  and  other  letters   making    similar 

junctions. 

22.  The  participial  ending  i-n-g,  is  usually  denoted  by  the 
consonant  ^^ng.  In  some  cases  it  is  more  convenient  to 
express  ing  by  placing  a  large  dot,  its  affix  sign,  at  the  end 
ot  the  word,  as  in  doing,  helping,  paying.  (L  6.)  The  dot 
should  be  used  in  all  cases  where  the  use  of  the  stem  ng  re- 
sults in  a  word-form  that  is  either  awkward  or  unangular. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


The  dot,  however,  cannot  be  used  for  ing,  the  final  letters 
of  some  nouns,  as  th-ing,  noth-ing. 

23.  Speed  in  short-hand  is  of  no  consequence  unless  what 
is  written  can  be  read  afterwards.    Legibility,  or  read-ability, 
depends  in  part  upon  the  accurate  forming  of  the  characters. 
To  do  this  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  them  slowly  ;  oa  the 
contrary,  experienced  stenographers  produce  the  more  per- 
fect outlines  with  a  somewhat  rapid  movement,  just  as  an 
experienced  penman  executes  the  most  graceful  curve  by 
a  quick  stroke,   rather  than  by  slowly  drawing  it.     The 
student  should  learn  at  the  outset  to  write  the  characters, 
rather  than  draw  them.    Nevertheless,  the  beginner  needs 
time  at  first,  and  ought  to  form  each  character  a  number  of 
times  with  care  and  deliberation,  until  the  proper  outline  is 
firmly  impressed  upon  his  mind,  before  attempting  to  write 
it  quickly.    Afterwards  write  it  rapidly,  and  continue  doing 
so  until  it  can  be  formed  both  accurately  and  quickly.    All 
beginners  form  the  characters  too  large,  and  are  apt  to  place 
them  too  far  apart.    A  great  saving  of  time,  and  a  consequent 
gain  in  speed,  will  be  the  result  in  the  long  run,  if  the  words 
are  written  both  small  and  closely  together.    The  learner 
should  begin  acquiring  this  habit  now.    The  light  letters 
should  be  quite  thin,  and  very  little  shading  will  be  found 
sufficient  to  distinguish  the  heavy  strokes. 

EXERCISE  3. 

24.  1  Wait  2  bulk  3  depth  4  effect  5  effigy  6  error  7  wade 
8  fare     9  dare     10  farm     11  remedy     12  policy     13  agency 
14  enough    15  army    16  delay    17  am  v  18  waking    19  engage 
20  image  21  inform  22  invoke  23  know  24  comic  25  shadow 
26  share  27  baggage  28  bath    29  below  30  betime   31  buffalo 
32  cab     33  detail    34  dig     35  dull    36  fair     37  far    38  fellow 
39  gash      40  gum      41  gush      42  hack      43  honey     44  lavish 
45  levity    46  link    47  log   48  monk    49  omit    50  pair    51  pang 
52  remove    53  shake     54  sham  ^  55  shove    56  going     57  tank 
68  thief      59  tick      60  timid      61  top      62  vacate      63  fatigue 
64  Jacob    65  Matthew   66  Lilly    67  Lucy    68  Dakota  69  Dick 
70  Jack.    Using  shay  (upward),   71  fish  72  dish  73  push. 

(73—3:30—2.) 


LESSON  IV. 

BAT  (OB  UPWABD    R),   AND    PHRASE  WRITING. 

25.  KET.    1.    Arc    wreck  ferry  forehead  tyranny    herb 
rub  Rachel  allegory.    2.    Heretic   retire  repair  are-many 
I-say    I-shall   I-guide   I-do    I-am.    8.    He-may  he-will    he- 
may-have    he-was    he-has-no    he-is  making    he-is-never   he- 
became    he-is  v  he-has.     4.     You-will    you-know    will-you- 
come  ,are-you-ready  ,you-may-go  as-many-as  v  as-long-as. 

WORD-SIGNS.  5.  In  that  I  is  his  as,  has  notwithstand- 
ing you,  are.  rather,  represent.  6.  Regular  irregular  leg- 
ible illegible  dignity  reform  perform  essential  peculiar. 

7.  Magazine  magnanimous  New  York  republic  majesty 
do-as-you  as-you-will  which-is-so. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Timothy  married  Rachel  for-love.  2. 
They  live  in  Alabama.  8.  Jacob  married  Ruth  for- 
money.  4.  They  live  in  Tennessee.  6.  That  match  was 
foolish.  6.  They  both  do  wrong.  7.  They  may  move 
into  Dakota  for  health.  8.  Tom  will  avenge  that 
wrong.  9.  I-admire  them-that-are  upright.  10.  I-abhqr 
them-that  do  wrong  for  pay.  11.  It-will-be  no  advantage 
for-them,  notwithstanding  they-may  become  rich. 

26.  /  Ray.    R  is  more  commonly  expressed  by  a  straight 
upward  stroke,  called  ray,  than  by  the  downward  curve  ~^\ 
or.    There  are  three  reasons  for  this;  1st,  ray  is  more  quickly 
written;  2nd,  it  more  frequently  secures  angularity  of  out- 
line; 3rd,  it  prevents  many  words  from  extending  too  far 
below  the  line.    The  student  will  hereafter  use  ray  in  all 
cases  where  ar  is  not  specified. 

27.  Phrasing.    In  short-hand  two  or  more  commonly  re- 
curring words  are  often  written  together  without  the  pen 
being  lifted  from  the  paper.    A  series  of  words  which  may 
thus  be  joined  is  called  a  phraseogram,  and  the  character 
which  expresses  them,  a  phascograph;  thus  the  words,  you- 
may-go,    constitute  a    phraseogram,    while    the    character 
rv^~>ta—  is  termed  a  phraseograph.    Much  speed  is  gained 
by  phrasing,  with  no  sacrifice  of  legibility. 

—22— 


Plate  4. 


>— , 


•VI 


o 


WORD-SIGNS. 
(  V        O       O 


8ENTKNCES. 


(   A 


\ 


4- 


Y  /\    "7    i  V" 


VI 


\ 


I    24                          REPORTING  STYLE  OF  STWRT-IIAXD. 
(    


I.—  In  phraseography,  only  half  the  sign  for  "I"  is  commonly 
written,  whichever  of  the  two  "ticks"  '  or  ',  makes  the 
best  angle  with  the  word  to  which  it  is  joined;  c.  (/.,  in  l-<jni<l? 
or  /-«/»  (L  2),  the  downward  tick  is  used;  but  when  the 
second  tick  is  employed,  it  is  invariably  struck  upward*  as  in 
I-do,  (L2).  With  )  s,  )  z,  _J  sh,  and  J  zh,  the  whole  sign  fjr 
/  should  be  written,  as  in  I-say,  or  1-shall.  L  2. 

The  sign  ;  I,  when  standing  alone,  or  when  it  begins  a 
phrase,  is  always  written  above  the  line,  or"1  -the  words  com- 
bined with  it  adapt  themselves  to  its  position.  Example: 
I-am  is  written  above  the  line,  although  am,  when  standing 
alone,  is  placed  upon  it. 

28.  HE. — In  phrases  he  is  indicated  by  a  tick    precisely 
like  the  latter  half  of  the  sign  for  /,  excepting  that  it  is 
always  struck  downward,  as  in    he-became,  or  he-is.    L  3. 
When  the  tick-sign  for  he  does  not  make  an  angle  with  the 
following  word,  he  may  be  expressed  by  the  joined  hay,  writ- 
ten only  half  its  usual  length,  as  in  he-hurried.     (L  3).     It 
will  be  found  convenient  occasionally  to  express  he  by  writ- 
ing the  tick  separately,  one  space  above  the  line,  thus,       he. 
When  he  is  attached  to  another  word,  ho\ve\  er,  it  has  no  pnxi- 
tion  of  its  own,  but  adapts  itself  to  that  of  the  word  to  which 

,  it  is  joined;  as,  for  instance,  in  he-may  the  tick  is  written 
on  the  line,  while  in  lie-was  (L  3)  it  is  necessarily  one  space 
above. 

29.  You. — The  sign  for  you  when  joined  to  other  words 
maybe  inverted  if  necessary  to  secure  a  good  angle.     S<  e 
you-know,    L  4. 

80.    AR. — The  verb  are  in  phrases  is  expressed  by  "^  or,  in- 
stead of  /  ray,  when  necessary  to  secure  an  angle.    See  are- 
.inany,  L  2. 

31.  Bay  and  chay  are  never  mistaken  one  for  the  other. 
Note  the  following  points  of  distinction  :  Kay  slants  more, 
and  is  a  trifle  longer,  than  -chay.  They  are  invariably  written, 
one  upward,  and  tho  other  downward,  and  as  they  are 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


j    almost   always   joinec'   to  other  letters  in    writing  words, 
the  manner  of  joining  indicates  the  direction ;  for  example, 

/^      would  not  be  read  ray-lay,  nor    ^  I  chay-te. 

32.  ^  Ar  is  always  used  before  ^~^  m,  never  before  |  t, 
I  d  or  </  A,  and  not  usually  after  —  k,  —  g  or  </  h.    Ray 
is  used  after  ^~^  m,  and  before  — •>  n  and  —  ng.    In  begin- 
ning a  word,  either  r  makes  a  distinct  angle  by  junction 
with  a  following  —  k,  —  g,  \  p  or  \  6.     In  such  cases 
~^\  ar  is  used  if  the  vowel  precedes  it,  as  in  arc,  or  herb; 
when  no  such  vowel  occurs,  /    ray  is  employed,  as  in  wreck, 
or  rub.    H  at  the  end  of  words  is  usually  struck  upward  if 
followed  by  a  final  vowel,  as  in  ferry.    See  L  1. 

33.  Write,  using  ray:    1  Ring  2  road  3  revive  4  reveal  (el) 
6  revenue  6  ready  7  repeal  8  rash  9  rate  10  range  11  wrong 
12  abhor    13  birth    14  bureau    15  arrive    16  earth    17  march 
18  mark  19  marry  20  married  21  marriage  22  memorial  (el) 
23  merry      24  admire      25  memory      26  mirror      27  narrow 
28  notary    29  period    30  perish    31  rare    32  rarefy  33  injury 
34  theory     35  thorough     36  tornado     87  variety     38  victory 
39  hurry  40  poetry  41  Arizona  42  arch  43  burial  (el)  44  bury 
45  carry    46  cherry   47  forge  48  harsh    49  horror  50  inferior 
51  morrow     52  ravage     53  red    54  jury    55  review    56  write 
57  repel    58  revenge    59  revoke    60  revolve    61  rich    62  tardy 
63  terror    64  torch    65  upright     66  urge     67  vary    68  verify 
69  votary      70  wrath      71  wretch      72  notoriety      73  Darius 
74  Ezra  75  Mark  76  Theodore  77  Mary  78  Marion  79  Rachel 
80  Rosa  81  Ruth  82  Barrett.  (82—3—1:30) 

PHRASES. 

34.  As-he     as-it-was     do-so     do-that     do-they     has-that 
have-also    have-become    have-long     I-am-also     I-am-ready 
I-became    I-have    I-know-that    I-was    in-any    in-his    in-it 
in-any-way  in-them  in -which  in-your  may-have  may-never 
take-it  take-that  take-them  it-was. 


26  EXPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

EXERCISE  4. 

85.  1.    He-may-think   he-is   wrong.     2.    Are-you-ready? 
8.  I-am  hurrying  notwithstanding  your  delay.    4.  I-ain-going 
into  New- York.    5.  He-will  argue  it.    6.  1-shall  reform  them. 
7.  I-think  he-will-be  popular  enough  as  deputy.    8.  I-say 
Tom  will-do  nothing  for-them.    9.  I-will  inform-you  that-it- 
may  do  for  March,  never  for  November.    10.  His  daily  income 
will  make-him  rich  enough.    11.  I  judge  that  Theodore  will 
go  up  into  Dakota.    12.  Among  so-many  your  book  will-have 
noadvantage.    13.  Ezra  Barrett  is  rather  peculiar.    14.  They- 
may  never  do-so.    15.  Darius  will-never  march  any  regular 
army  into  Arizona.    16.  As-you-may  know  his  help  as  usual 
is  efficient.  (118—4—1:15) 

86.  SPEED  SENTENCE. — You-may-keep  your  March-maga- 
zine for  Tom  Meredith.  (4 — 1) 


To  THE  TEACHEB. — Young  pupils,  or  those  not  accustomed 
to  handling  a  pen,  find  curves  more  difficult  than  straight 
items.  If  in  the  student's  work  these  letters  present  an  ir- 
regular or  cramped  appearance,  the  teacher  may  require 
additional  practice  in  curved  outlines,  as  m-l-l,  n-f-l,  sh-m-l, 
m-n-l-r,  etc.  Extended  practice  in  writing  these  and  similar 
outlines  over  and  over  again  many  times,  will  tend  to  render 
the  curves  flowing  and  even. — Require  every  pupil  to  write 
mostly  with  a  pen;  pencil  work  should  be  the  exception. 
See  to  it  that,  in  each  case,  the  pen  is  of  the  proper  stiffness 
to  enable  the  pupil  to  do  the  best  work.  Nor  should  the 
learner  ever  I  e  allowed  to  use  a  cheap  quality  of  paper;  he 
will  do  bad  work,  make  poor  progress,  and  get  discouraged. 
It  is  true  economy  to  use  the  very  best  materials  only.  The 
paper  should  always  be  ruled;  but  double  ruling  is  not  neces- 
sary or  best,  except  as  a  guide  to  those  just  beginning  who 
write  too  large  a  hand.  Heavy  foolscap  is  very  suitable; 
but  when  the  lines  are  far  apart  the  characters  should  occu- 
py less  than  half  the  space  between  them. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


READING  PRACTICE.  The  amount  of  this  that  may  be  neces- 
sary will  depend  on  yourself.  If  you  read  your  own  writ- 
ing with  difficulty,  you  should  practice  only  so  much  the 
more.  Those  who  employ  their  time  mainly  in  writing, 
with  a  view  of  gaining  speed,  producing  inaccurate  and 
misshapen  characters  which  they  rarely  attempt  to  read, 
may  rest  assured  that  they  are  making  progress  backwards 
instead  of  forwards.  When  all  the  list  words  of  a  single 
lesson  have  been  carefully  written,  they  should  then  be  read 
over  and  over  again,  until  the  whole  can  be  rendered  in  the 
time  indicated. 

EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  Short-hand  is  not 
only  valuable  as  a  profession ;  it  is  equally  useful  as  an  accom- 
plishment. No  thinking  man  can  afford  to  be  without  this 
rapid  method  of  transferring  his  thoughts  to  paper.  By 
means  of  it,  first  draughts  of  letters  and  articles  are  made, 
and  notes  of  lectures,  business  transactions,  and  private 
memoranda  recorded,  much  more  fully  and  in  but  a  fraction 
of  the  time  otherwise  required.  Its  great  utility,  both  as  a 
discipline  and  personal  convenience,  is  abundantly  attested 
by  literary  men  of  note  who  are  skilled  in  its  use. 


QUESTIONS  FOR  REVIEW. 

Which  letters  are  written  downwards? — In  what  direction 
is  k  written? — What  other  letters  are  written  in  the  same 
direction? — In  Notary  (n-t-ray),  which  letter  is  placed  on 
the  base-line? — Name  all  the  letters  which  are  written  up- 
wards.— Spell  exquisite  stenographically. — Name  five  sign- 
words  from  memory. — How  are  proper  names  signified? — 
What  class  of  words  are  represented  by  word-signs? — In 
what  two  ways  may  the  syllable  i-n-g  be  expressed? — In 
what  respects  are  ray  and  chay  unlike? — Name  three  words 
in  which  ray  is  used; — three  words  iu  which  ar  is  used  in 
preference  to  ray. — Name  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  consec- 
utively. 


TICKS. 

KEY. — 1.  I-think  I-have  I-take  I-will  I-live  I-write 
I-know  I-may  I-say  I-was. 

2.  He-came    he-is-in    he-has-no    he-has-it    he-is-a 

he-has-a  as-he-may   he-and-I    he-and-you   he- 
is- so. 

3.  And-a   and-the    and-he-may  and-I  and-you  and- 

he-is   and-it-is  and-make  and-do    and-which. 

4.  And-will  and-also  and-think  and-for   and-I  and- 

that  and-is  and-his  and-as   and-have. 

6.  A-long  a-day  a-time  an-advantage  in-a  is-a  as-a 
which -a  for-a  was-a. 

6.  The-time  the-advantage  the-long  the-jury  the- 
name  in -the  for- the  have -the  is -the  as -the. 

':.  That-is-the  that-is-a  as-he-is  as-I-am  as-he-was 
is-he-so  is-he-making  as-he-may  as-he-has  do- 
as- he. 

LONG  VOWELS. 

8.  Eke  key  fee  eave  Lee  ear  bee  eel  ease  pea. 

9.  Abe  age  jay  fay  ray  shay  lay  May  nay  hay. 

10.  Taw  awed  daw  caw  saw  law  raw  maw  Orr  haw. 

11.  Toe  owed  Coe  go  oath  sow  show  roe  o  re  ohm. 

12.  Pooh  coo  woo  pa  ma  bah  fa  shah  la  ha. 

13.  Otho    Eno    array  Ora  Asia   Eva   Oho   Esau    ado 

era. 

14.  Maul  balk  tame  leech  mole  dope  keel  Jake  poach 

hoop. 

15.  Toto   Dora    Como    Mocha    Tokay    Roma  \  awake 

Polo   delay  obeyed. 

PRACTICAL  TEST. — After  having  studied  the  Ticks  and 
Long  Vowels,  and  copied  the  Exercise  opposite  several 
times,  the  student  is  recommended  to  write  off  in  Short- 
hand all  the  matter  on  this  page,  comparing  his  work  af- 
terwards character  by  character  with  the  engraved  plate. 
Continue  copying  and  comparing  while  mistakes  are 
found. 

—  2S- 


1_ 


<L^  .  * 

Q S        &       ef-  p ^ 


*V 


Si  7          -*~^ 

*  .T  .n    c   ^ 
s  \r~  ^  u  / 

6    U    /  S^   ^ 

^     4 

yJlJL  ^  ^ 

8...ZI...VZ   ^ 

o     \      /     /    V 

10  r  'i  r  ...r 


•v  •? 

, -^      .  b 


-O  _D 


) 


? 


13  -4 

14  ^^ 

15  -     IX 


"> ") 

.  5 

_17 
„  X 

/    <,    i 

W^ 

#-^  f  \> 
.r  •>  \ 


C  S  ,-  "^  ^ 

"  I-   -I    —  — -C    )-    A    ^    ^  ^ 

~*i  A  y  v.  ^  •)"  •L-'X 


LESSON  V. 
LONG  VOWELS. 

87.  KEY.  1.  Eat  key  peak  oak  hoe  coach  peer  par 
park.  2.  Coop  raw  pshaw  beach  tame  calm  Maude  yoke 
pool.  8.  The-loaf  the-porch  and-a  and-the  a-book-and 
a-guide  to-day  to-morrow. 

SENTENCES.  1.  The-yoke  is  heavy.  2.  It-is-a  loaf  of 
dough.  8.  It-may  thaw  before  to-morrow.  4.  Who-will 
make-a  bowl  of  tea?  5.  Take-the  pole  and-leap  on  to-the 
porch.  6.  Sheep  ought-never  to  roam  too  far.  7.  Your 
yellow  pony  is  calm  notwithstanding  all-the  uproar. 
8.  The-knavishhawk  has  both  a-beak  and-a  tail. 

88    \    \    \.    r    i-    i. 

Bee         bay  bah        taw       toe        too 

Me  may  ma        caw      coe         coo 

39.  The  six  long  vowels  are  denoted  by  a  large  dot  and 
dash  placed  beside  the  consonant  signs  at  three  different 
points,  called  thejlrst,  second,  and  third  vowel  places,  being 
respectively  at  the  beginning,  middle  and  end  of  the  stem. 
The  long  sound  of  e  is  expressed  by  putting  a  large  dot  in  the 
first  place,  or  at  the  beginning  of  the  stem,  as  in  bee,  me,  eat 
or  key;  the  long  sound  of  o  by  writing  the  dash  in  the  second 
place,  or  at  the  middle  of  the  letter,  as  in  toe,  coe,  oak,  or  hoe. 
See  L  1. 

40.  An  easy  way  to  remember  the  long  vowels,  and  the 
order  of    their   occurence,   is  to   memorize  the   following 
rhyme: 

In  th-e  g-ay  c-a-r 

S-ee  gr-ay  Cz-a-r. 
In  sm-«-ll  g-o-ld  b-oo-ts 

T-a-11  d-o-e  sh-oo-ts. 

41.  A  word  is  said  to  be  vocalized  when  the  vowel  signs  are 
added  to  its  outline.    A  Nominal  Consonant  is  any  letter,  as 
I  t  or  —  k  cancelled,  its  office  being  simply  to  indicate  vow- 
el place  when  words  having  no  consonant  are  to  be  written 

as  ./     ah  or  '— •/—  awe. 

-30— J 


$late  5. 

<  7  V 


TTOKD-SKiNS. 

the          ought 
a       an    and          •  / 


already      before       oh      of         to 
g     '  .  .          ^ 


SENTENCES.  (V) 

®u  c  , 
su  v 


TRANSLATE.  (  1 


who       all         two1      too 
\ 

/  \  \ 


or         but         on 


should 


v/*  x  r 

V 


-   x    L,  XV 
)        V    £- 


32  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


42 

.A                                  B                              C 

•    1st  place.                                     aw  s              1st 

a 

1st    2d     3d               \ 
•    2d  place.                                       o       > 

ah 

ah 

»    3d  place.         ow     o      oo         oo 

\x3d           e  /» 

-;3d. 
3d. 
1st. 

43.  These  dots  and  dashes,  or  the  sounds  they  represent, 
are  denominated  first,  second,  and  third  place  vowels,  accord- 
ing as  they  occupy  the  first,  second,  or  third  positions.    By 
noticing  Figures  A  B  C  D,  above,  it  will  be  seen   that  a 
first-place    vowel    is    written    at    the    beginning,    and    a 
third-place  at  the  end  of  the  stem,  no  matter  whether  the  con- 
sonant is  written  downward,  upward  or  to  the  right. 

The  base-line  has  nothing  whatever  to  do  in  determining 
the  place  of  the  vowel  signs. 

44.  In   *|  eat  and     i    oak  the  vowels  e  and  o  precede  the 

consonants  |  t  and — A;,- hence  the  dot  and  dash  are  writ- 
ten before  the  stems,  e  being  placed  at  the  left  of  /,  and  o 
abore  k.  In  |-  toe  and  key,  •  the  vowels  come  last,  and 
for  this  reason  o  is  placed  after,  or  on  the  right  side  of  t,  in 
the  first  word,  and  e  after  or  below  k,  in  the  second. 

45.  Dash  vowels  ure  written  so  as  :c  stand  out  from  the 
stems  beside  which  they  are  placed,  as  for  example,  in  oak 
and  raw  the  dashes  o  and  aw  are  placed  zz  right  angles  with 
k  and  r. 

46.  Attention  is  called  to  the  manner  of  writing  peer  and 
par  in  L  1.    If  to  the  word  \.  pa,  r  should  be  added,  the 
character  \5/x  par  would         the  result.    Buf  if  to  the 
word  ./    eer,  p  should  be  prefixed,   the  result  would  be 
\5^/'  peer,  written  precisely  the  same  as  par.  just  shown. 
Placing  vowels  in  angles  renders  the  meaning  uncertain,  and 
is  alao  inconvenent.     To  avoid  this  it  is  necessary  to  obsi-rvo 
the  rule  that  when  a  third-place  dot  or  dash  occurs  between 
two  consecutive  consonants.it  is  annexed  to  the  second,  nof, 
to  theirs/.    For  example  the  first  place  vowel.-  inbeach  an^. 
Maude,  and  the  second  place  vowels  in  tame  and  yoke  (L  2)  ai'o 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  33 

placed  beside  the  first  consonant,  while  the  third  place  vowels 
in  coop  andpool  (L  2)  are  written  beside  the  second.  The  rule 
holds  good  whether  a  sharp  angle  occurs  between  the  two 
stems  or  not;  thus  calm  is  written  — ^~^*,  and  not 

• 

47.  Caution     The  student  must  njt  forget  that  short- 
hand is  Avritten  *>y  sound.    Vowels  in  the  sense  here  used  do 
not  refer  to  the  letters,  a,  e,  i,  etc.,  but  to  the  vowel  sounds 
that  are  actually  heard  in   the  distinct  utterance  of    any 
word.    Hence,  to  write  a  word  properly,  no  regard  whatever 
should  be  had  to  its  spelling.    In  yoke,  for  instance,  there  is 
but  one  vowel,  that  of  o  long;  final  e,  being  silent,  is  not  rep- 
resented.   A  good  plan  is  to  speak  each  word  aloud  before 
writing  it;  or  better  s'Jll,  have  the  list  distinctly  pronounced 
to  you  by  another  person. 

48.  Remark.    Only  one  0ut  of  many  hundreds  of  vowels 
is  actually  written  in  taking  short-hand  notes;  but  enough 
more  are  indicated  by  the  manner  of  combining  the  conso- 
nant signs,  to  render  the  system  entirely  legible.    The  possi- 
bility of  reading  almost  solely  from  the  consonants  may  be 
shown  by  the  fact  that  a  page  of  print  is  easily  decipherable, 
all  the  vowels  having  been  previously  blotted  out;  for  in 
such  cases  the  consonant  element,  which  is  the  more  impor- 
tant, still  remains,  and  the  blots  indicate  where  the  vowels 
are  to  be  supplied.    This  crudely,  and  very  inadequately,  il- 
lustrates the  method  employed  in  short-hand. 

49.  The  vowels  are  used  rarely;  nevertheless  they  must  be 
thoroughly  mastered,  in  order  that  they  may  be  inserted 
without  a  moment's  hesitation  when  a  rapid  report  is  being 
made.    The  pupil  is  cautioned  against  forming  the  long-vow- 
el signs  too  small,  a  common  error,  which  results  in  confus- 
ing them  with  short  vowels. 

The  word-signs  in  this  lesson  are  difficult.  The  memory 
will  be  aided  by  observing  that  each  one  is  in  fact  the  prin- 
cipal vowel-sign  in  the  word  it  represents.  They  are  given 
different  positions  for  the  sake  of  distinction. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-IIAXD. 


50.  THE. — Any  one  of  the  three  ticks  which  denote  1  or 
he  may  also  be  used  to  indicate  the,  that  one  always  being 
selected  which  secures  the  best  angle.    This  tick  has  no  posi- 
tion of  its  own.     In  the-porch,  and  the-loaf  (L  3),  the  is  iirst 
written  above,  and  then  on  the  line. 

51.  A,  an,  and,  in  phrasing  are  all  denoted  by  a  brief  tick, 
written  horizontally  or  vertically  (downward),  as  angle  may 
require,  as  in  a-book-and  a-guide.    See  L  3.     When   cither 
tick  maybe  used,  the  horizontal  should' be  given  the  prefer- 
ence. 

62.  The  tick  signs  for  a,  an,  and,  and  the  are  more  com- 
monly used;  the  dots  being  written  when  a  tick  is  inconven- 
ient, or  does  not  join  well.  The  pupil  should  guard  against 
the  common  error  of  forming  these  ticks  too  large;  make  them 
as  short  and  light  as  possible. 

53.  The  words  which  in  this  book  the  pupil  is  required  to 
vocalize,  are  the  very  ones  which  will  be  most  likely  to  re- 
quire vowels  when  regular  reporting  work  is  to  be  done.    A 
fuller  explanation  of  this  subject  will  be  found  in  Lesson  35 

Vocalize  the  following  list,  observing  the  rule  explained 
in  section  46  above.  In  the  last  three  lines  the  long  vowels 
only  are  to  be  written. 

54.  1    Ate  tea  ace.  saw  sea  low  oaf  foe    ail    ache  gay 
2  aid  dough  awl    ale   lea   ape    Poe    paw    Joe    shoe 

A        3  thaw  jaw   aim   woe   gnaw  knee   nay  Esau  oar  (ar)  era 

4  (ar)  ado  age  aught  fee  hay    oat  ode  sew. 

5  (1st    place)     Cheek    chalk    heap     heed    tall   leaf    leap 

6  meal  peal  bawl  beak  beam   beer  hawk  deal  kneel  (el) 

7  leak    peach   reap    sheep    team    teeth    wreath    wreathe 

8  Neal  (el)  Paul. 

9  (2nd  place)  Cake  coach  coal  comb  dale  dame  bail  bowl 

10  cape    joke    fame     gale    game    jail    choke    knave   lame 

11  loaf  nail  (el}  pole  porch  vale  abate  bore  (ar)  roam  (ar) 

12  rogue    rope    babe    bait    poll     dome    goal    loathe    pail 

13  poke  pope  rake  robe  tale  tape  vague  Job. 

14  (3d  place)   Tool   root  balm  mar  doom  rood  tomb;  (us- 

15  ing  ar)  lark  tar  czar  tour  jar. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  35 

16  (Long  vowels  only)    Antique  aurora  (ar)  boquet  foliage 

17  elate  jubilee    oatmeal  parade  pillow   pony  potato  up- 

18  roar  yellow    Ada    Cora  Edith   Eva  Laura  Nora  lower 

19  (ar)  (140—6:45—2:45). 
/^"55.    PHRASES.    All-are     all-his     all-my    all-right    ail-that 

all-the-way  all-which  all-you  all-your  and-have  as-it-should 

r'TSefore-his  before-the    before-you    but-a    but-may    but-that 

,  but-the    but-as     for-a  for- which    has-a  have-a    of-that  of- 

the-way  in-the-way    of-theni    on-that  should-be    should-do 

should-never    should-have  take-the   to-him   to-live    to-love- 

~them  too-many  who-may  who-was. 

EXERCISE  5. 

56.  1.    The-day  is  coming  and  you-may-look   for-a  vic- 
tory before-long.    2.    Should-you-come  to-day  Maude  and- 
Laura   will-make  a-boquet  and-an.  antique  foliage  wreath 
for-you.    3.    Are-you-going  to-go  to  sea  to-day?    4.    Paul, 
take  your  oar  and-go-and  row  a-league.     5.    The-knave  is 
taking  coal  into-the  coach.     6.    They-have-a  tall  coop  in-the 
park.  (65—2:30—1). 

57.  Speed  Sentence.    Cora,  you-may-go  and  help  Laura 
make  oatmeal  cake  for  tea.    (3 — 1). 


^To  THE  TEACHER. — The  young  learner  and  the  adult  stu- 
dent take  hold  of  short-hand  in  a  manner  entirely  different. 
The  young  pupil  does  not  execute  so  well,  but  takes  more  de- 
light in  the  merely  mechanical  operation  of  writing  and  re- 
writing the  characters  many  times.  The  older  person  forms 
the  outlines  better,  but  dislikes  practice.  He  prefers  to  study, 
while  the  young  student  would  much  rather  spend  his  time 
writing.  This  is  why  in  the  long  run  the  young  succeed 
best.  Short-hand  writing  is  something  to  be  done,  not  mere- 
ly thought  about;  learning  the  art  requires  the  application  of 
the  hand  more  than  the  head. 


LESSON  VI. 
DIPHTHONGS  AND  THE  S-CIRCLE. 

58.    KEY.    1.  Type  voice  vow  boy  oil  cow  Illinois  wide. 

2.  Spy  sauce    doze    ooze    sow  seed    Saul  snail    assignee. 

3.  Spell    search    goes  zinc    zeal  sense   Tom's   bells    ring. 

4.  Owing     owes     owed    wipe    wife     Viola     loyal     twice 
surveyor. 

5.  PHKASES.    As-far-as    as-far-as-may    be-such     does-he 
does-never  how-many  in-any-case  has-he. 

6.  WOKD-SIGNS.     How    high    now    its    several     special 
subject  advantageous  always.    7.    Knowledge  acknowledge 
January  February  electricity  something  sufficient  forsake 
for-the-sake-of. 

SENTENCES.  1.  The-savage  toils  a-long-time  before-he 
slays  the  shy  fowl.  2.  The-slave  knows  how  to  sail  the-big 
ship  on-the  sea.  3.  But-the  voyage  to  Hayti  will-be  too-long 
for-the  boy  Guy.  4.  Rufus  may-make  many  rhymes,  but 
it-was  Poe  who  wrote  the  rich  poetry  which  all  admire. 

5.  James,  do-you  think  it  will  tire  you  to  carry  this  wide 
vase  two-miles?    6.    I-think  all  of-your  boys  ought-to  come 
to-the  service  on  Sunday. 

DIPHTHONGAL  SCALE. 

59-  ;v  I  as  in  n-t-ght.  ;A  oi  in  c-ot'-l. 

|A  ow  in  end-ow.  JL  wi  in  wi-pe. 

The  diphthongs  i,  oi,  and  ow  are  represented  by  angular 
signs  as  shown  in  type,  voice,  vow.  L  1.  They  always  point 
either  up  or  down,  no  matter  whether  the  consonant  beside 
which  they  are  placed  is  slanting  or  otherwise,  /may  be 
written  in  the  1st,  2nd  or  3rd  vowel  place,  according  to 
convenience,  as  in  spy.  L  2. 

60.  The  triphthong  wi  and  the  three  dipthongal  signs, 
may  occasionally  be  joined  to  consonant  letters  at  the  be- 
ginning or  end  of  words,  as  in  oil,  cow,  wide.  (L  1).  When 

A 

medial,  however,  they  cannot  be  joined;  thu-.          f       cowl 

—36— 


Plate  6. 


\ 


C 


),  T 


3  V 


\ 


rttHASKS 
P  \  I  I 

A         /°        * 

J^N        '         WimU-SHJNS. 


\ 


ES.      (T) 


/  s 


r 


x> 


r 

fe)  f 


^ 


\       /    XI     • 


1          V^       vW^i 


\, 


448626 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SffOBT-HAXJ). 


cannot  be  written          A/*"  »  since  this  character  would  be 
ambiguous,  expressing  either  cowl  or  coil. 

61.  THE  CIRCLE.    S  and  z  are  denoted  in  outlines  by  a 
small  circle.    This,  when  joined  to  curved  letters,  is  written 
within  or  following  the  direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  sense,  or 
bells.    L  3. 

62.  When  the  circle  is  attached  to  a  straight  letter,  at  the 
beginning  or  end  of  a  word-form,  it  is  always  written  upon 
the  right  of  the  letter  if  downward,  as  in  spell;  on  the  left  of 
upward  letters,  as  in  search;  and  upper  side  of  horizontal  let- 

!   ters,  as  in  goes.     See  L  3. 

63.  The  following  table,  which  illustrates  the  proper  man- 
ner  of  attaching   the  circle  to  straight  and  curved  stems, 
should  be  copied  many  times,  until  the  pupil  can,  without 
taking  thought,  execute  it  properly.    Written  exercises  should 
be  compared  with  it  every  day  until  errors  cease  to  be  found. 
When  joined  to  straight  letters  the  circle  is  struck  with  a  h-ft 
movement,  as  the  letter  o  is  written  in  long-hand.     This  rule 
will  enable  the  learner  to  test  the  accuracy  of  his  writing. 
For  Jbtinction,  s  when  represented  by  the  circle,  is  called 

iss.  and  the  combined  characters  |  ,  f ,  b ,  etc.,  may  be  named 
either  iss-te,  iss-de,  de-iss,  or  ste,  sed,  des,  etc. 

64.  TABLE  OF   8-CIRCLE  JOININGS. 

\>  Xb  b  /°€     Q-Di-oVoVoC  £  3  3  6         d<3~OQ-PQ-pC>^^0 

65.  S  and  z  being  cognates,  are  both  expressed  by  a  sin- 
gle sign,  namely  the  circle,  with  no  danger  of  ambiguity. 
The  circle  is  not  employed  *o  denote  z  when  it  begins  ;i  word 
as  in  zinc,  zeal.    L  3. 

66.  The  possessive  or  plural  of  sword,  formed  in  long- 
hand by  the  addition  of  s  or  es,  is  indicated  in  short-hand  by 
affixing  the  s-circle  to  its  word-sign,  or  outline,  as  in  Tom's 
bells  ring.    L  3. 

67.  S  and  z  when  standing  alone,  as  in  ooze  or  sow,  can- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  30 

not  be  represented  by  the  circle,  which  it  is  impossible  to 
vocalize.    L  2.  .p 

68.  The  character    |    is  read  seat,  the  order  of  pronunci- 
ation   being,  first,  the  circle;  second,  the  vowel;  and  third, 
the  stem.     8  is  read  first,  although  e  is  actually  placed  be- 
fore, that  is,  at  the  left,  of  it.    If  e  should  be  read  first,  the 
word  would  be  east;  but  this  plan  would  be  worse,  since  the 
circle  cannot  be  vocalized.    The  stem  J  s  would  have  to  be 
employed  in  east,  as  in  all  words  where  s  is  preceded  by  a 
vowel.     See  seed,  Saul,  L  2. 

69.  The  vowel  word-signs  i     but  and     '  or  are  not  com- 
monly phrased;  for,  since  a  and  and  are  written  in  the  same 
manner,  ambiguity  would  be  the  frequent  result;  thus,  l— 

would  express  either  and-go,  or  but-go,  and      /   either    or. 
acknowledge,  or  and-acknowledge. 

70.  Caution. — Beginners  are  disposed  to  write  the  s-circle 
too  large.    There   is  very  little  danger   of  getting   it  too 
small.    The  diphthongal  signs  should  be  made  light,  rather 
small  and  sharp-angled.    The  word -sign  n  you  should  be  a 
complete  semi-circle,  and  quite  small;  not  large  and  flattened 

out,  thus   /•> 

71 .  In  forsake,  composed  of  for  and  sake,  the  letter  V^  /  is 
used  for  the  first  part  because  it  is  the  sign  for  the 
word /or.   But  in  \^y     forage,  which  is  in  no  wise  a  com- 
pound word,  the  first  syllable  for  cannot  be  expressed  by  V^ 
simply.    The  learner  is  cautioned  against  using  word-signs 
in  any  way,  except  to  express  just  those  words  which  they 
^taeeintended  to  represent. 

72.  1  %Using    diphthongs,   write:    Tie    pipe    vile     knife 
2  mile   defy   boil  coil    foil  row   toy  vouch  Guy   buy  die 

^JJ__chime  couch   coy  dike    fowl   hide    nigh   owl  foul  pike 

4  pile  rhyme  shy  sigh  spike  dye  thigh  tire  (ar)  toil  annoy 

5  diet    envoy  royal    Isaac  sour  (ar).    Using    dot   vowels 

6  also;    t£U  Elijah  Eliza  Ida  Myra. 

,.  •  . 


40  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-I1AXD. 

7  Using    the    s-circlc:    Case    safe    save    sale     sake    said 

8  same  famous  fix  harness  immense  less  Sabbath  safety 

9  savage  scale  (el)  sell  senate  sketch  service  summer  de- 

10  vise    refuse  police   story  soon    small  smith  son   smoke 

11  solid  slave   suppose  spell  study    Sunday  space  this  yes 

12  Saturday  cell  cemetery  notice  sex  sink  skip  sledge  slim 

13  sling  slip  spark  spool  such  sun  surface/surge  surpass 

14  survey  swing    Swiss   valise    stay    wages    wax    Horace 

15  James  Rufus  Samuel  Thomas;  (using  ar)  cellar  Caesar 

16  force  spare  sir  circus. 

17  Vocalize:     Lace    seal    seat    site    slow    snow    sail    race 

18  choose   dose  abase  choice  geese  gaze  spoil  vice  pause 

19  seam  scene    raise    voice  invoice  nice   noise  soul  chase 

20  cheese    dice    entice  sage  sauce  siege  slay   vase    sleeve 

21  slope  sly  snail   (el)    snake  soap  sole  sty  repose   Miles 

22  (using  ar)  soar  score  spire.  (168 — 6 — 3:15). 

73.  PHRASES.    All-such    all-this    be-said    be-ihis    before- 
this    do-such    do-this   does-it    does-that   does-the  does-this 
does-your    for-such  for-this    has-this   have-them  have-such 
have-this  how-may  in-its-own  in-this  is-this  it-make8  such- 
was  to-his  to-this  which-has  which-makes. 

EXERCISE  6. 

74.  1.    That  boy  of-yours  makes  enough  noise.    2.    Do- 
you  say  he-is  going  to  tie  the-rope  to-the  cow's  neck?    8. 
He  ought  to-make  less  noise  so  that-he-may  keep  his  seat 
in-the  Senate.    4.    May   honesty  be-your    policy    notwith- 
standing your  name  may  become  less  famous.    5.     I- will 
help-you  take-an  invoice  of  all-your-stock.    6.    You-should 
never  for  any  reason  or  on-any  day  make-a  foolish  vow. 
7.    Do-you  endorse  the  study  of-such-a  subject  as-this?    8. 
Yes,  and  I-think  you-should  study  it  thoroughly  oq-all  days 
but  Sundays.    9.    I-suppose  you-will  make-it  your  special 
object  to  know  it  all  before  the-month  of  November.     10. 
Several  boys  have  come  to-day  to-sell  milk.     11.     You-will 
have-no  magazine  for  sale  in-this  language  for-several  days. 
12.    It-was  said  in-the  Senate  of-Illinois  that  for  the  space 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


of  two  days  all  bells  should  ring  the-alarm.  13.  The  Sen- 
ate of-this  republic  will  long  be  famous  for-its  safe  and-dig- 
nified  policy.  (175-5—2). 

75.  SPEED   SENTENCE.    How- many-days   do-you  suppose 
he- will-be  in  surveying  enough  space  for-the  cemetery? 

(5-1) 

76.  TRANSLATE. 

•^          \o      \       /  VP     6       V^      8       x    2  \o 

'-N,    /°    ^    £.    W_    ^  ,  3  (     I  / 
,    A_P    >    M     C     \  .  *  C,   ^*rs_ 

r  ^r   r   *y    >   n/x «  ^_^ 
*-   °  \  \  ^  r   '  M.X  « c  F 

^   _^n^-^\cv_A 


To  THE  TEACHER. — To  the  novice  the  short-hand  letters 
are  all  very  much  alike  in  appearance.  By  holding  up  to 
th-e  learner  the  features  of  dissimilarity,  each  individual  let- 
ter will  be  more  quickly  recognized,  and  firmly  fixed.  The 
elementary  characters  may  be  differentiated  in  the  follow- 
ing manner:  Consonants.  These  may  be  classified,  1st,  (on 
the  basis  of  form)  into  straight  and  curved;  2nd,  (as  to  size) 
into  light  and  heavy,  3rd,  (as  to  attitude)  into  vertical,  hor- 
izontal and  oblique.  Vowels.  These  are,  1st,  long  and  short; 
2nd,  light  and  heavy;  3rd,  first,  second  and  third  place;  4th, 
dots,  dashes  and  angles;  5th,  simple  and  diphthongal. 


DIPHTHONGS. 
KEY. — 1.    Pie  gibe  Ike  fie  vie  ice  eyes  isle  lie  rye. 

2.  Foy  roy  hoy  bough  Dow  ouch  mow  wow   Howe 

cite. 

3.  Seip  spice  sty  Tice  guise  scythe    sire    mice    sine 

hies. 

4.  Joyce  soil  Royce  spouse  douse  scow  sour   rouse 

mouse  ounce. 

5.  Slice  Sepoy  Sinai  Eli  silo  solo  Iva  Ina  Isa   Rio. 

SHORT  VOWELS. 

6.  Dick  Jim   jig  itch  dig  fib  Fitch  fig  rid  lid. 

7.  Mill  nib  gib  kip  lick   myth  nick  nip  pig  ship. 

8.  Chess  deck    ebb   Ed  etch   ledge    neck   peck    peg 

sedge. 

9.  Hess  Jess  knell  mesh  check  chef  ell  Israeli  wreck 

shed. 

10.  Add   ash    rash   chap    rap    fang   batch    jam   lamb 

ram. 

11.  Map  Mab  match  Madge  mack  lang  rat  nab  nag 

rag. 

12.  Knob  notch  mock  lop  cop  Lodge    rock   top    rod 

rob. 

13.  Bus  fuss  gum  lull  cubj  muff  muss  rug  rum  rung. 

14.  HUBS  mush  mum  nudge   Russ   rush  rut   rub    sup 

sub. 

15.  Puss  nook   rook    shook  muddy  ferry  folly  funny 

volley  shadow. 

TEST  EXERCISE. — The  learner  is  recommended  to  copy 
the  engraved  exercise  on  the  page  opposite  a  number  of 
times.  Then  write  in  Short-hand  the  entire  list  of  words 
given  above  and  compare  your  work  with  the  engraving 
Repeat  the  operation  several  times  if  errors  are  found 
As  a  flnal  test,  transcribe  the  engraved  exercise  into  long- 
hand. Compare  your  transcript  with  the  key  printed 
above,  mark  your  mistakes  and  try  again. 


vc 


L   A  X   /  L 


s/   L   \   I    /   /7 

*>•/  r  9  z 

10. 1 
ii 


S\    /\       \ 


LESSON  VII. 
SHORT  VOWELS. 

77.  KEY.    1.    Big  job  beg  cup  tack  shaggy  echo  poem 
fiat.    2.    Assail    lazy  rose    rosy  sense    essence    race  racy. 
3.    Herb  Arab  array   audit  borrow   buggy  cameo  elbow. 

4.  WORD-SIGNS.    We    with    were    would     what    New- 
York-City  public  publish-ed  for-the-purpose-of. 

5.  PHRASES.    As-we      for-we-were      were-it      what-is-it 
what-would-be    with-advantage   would-know  would-rather. 
6.    As-to-do  he-should-be    for-his-purpose   how-much  how- 
you    think-you-may  what-it-is  does-nothing.    7  and  8.    For 
key  see  list  words  sec  86. 

SENTENCES.  1.  I-saw  him  buy  a  tall  silk  hat.  2.  We 
shall  soon  dig  a  ditch  along  the  road.  3.  Samuel  Adams 
will  lay  a  gas  pipe  in-it.  4.  What-would  you-like  to-have 
to  eat?  5.  Now  you-may-make  some  coffee  to-take  to-the 
picnic.  6.  I-will  also  boil  some  cabbage  and-take  some 
mellow  peaches.  7.  They-may  thiuk-that-we  live  in-a 
palace. 

78.  SHORT-VOWEL  SCALE. 

|  it        •[  et       ,|  at       I  ot         |    ut        I   oot  (as  in  f-oo-t). 

The  six  short  vowels  here  illustrated  are  indicated  by 
a  small  light  dot  and  dash  written  in  the  three  vowel  places. 
For  example,  a  light  dot  when  written  in  the  second  place 
has  the  force  of  e  in  beg,  and  a  light  dash  the  same  power  as 
u  in  cup  (L  1).  A  light  dash,  first  place,  is  equivalent  to 
o  in  job.  The  learner  will  observe  that  the  short  vowel 
signs  are  quite  small.  This  is  necessary  to  render  them 
easily  distinguishable  from  the  long. 

These  mnemonical  rhymes  will  aid  in  recollecting  the  short 
vowels,  and  the  order  in  which  they  occur : 

j  Bill  gets  bat;  j  Lot  cuts  wood. 

I  Kills  red  rat.  j  Dot  does  good. 

79.  By  referring  to  L  1  the  pupil  will  see  that  in  tack  and 
shaggy  the  third-place  vowels  are  located  beside  the  second 


Plate  7, 

L  /,  _ 

Q_9          <_P 


WORD-SIGNS. 


PHRASES. 

e 


SENTENCES 


X> 
A 


T  \ 

•onniaira  » 

y:-.i    i   v   / 
•\ 


••©T  ^  v  .  r  ^ 

L    J   C 


® 


n 


u 


V 


46  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND 

consonant,  rather  than  the  first.  This  is  according  to  the 
rule  governing  third-place  vowels,  occuring  between  t\\<> 
consonants.  Second-place  short  vowels,  also,  are  appended 
to  the  second  stem,  and  in  this  respect  the  rule  differs  from 
that  governing  second-place  long  vowels,  which,  it  will  be 
remembered,  are  written  by  the  first  consonant.  The  fol- 
lowing figures  illustrate  the  entire  rule,  and  will  aid  in 
remembering  it.  The  numbers  1, 2,  3,  represent  first,  second 
and  third-place  vowels,  those  that  are  long  being  signified  by 
the  full-faced  type. 
80.  A  .B  C  D 


81.  This  rule  for  placing  vowels,  both  long  and  short, 
between  two  consecutive  consonants,  may  be  briefly  stated 
as  follows : 

Write  beside  the  1st  consonant :    Beside  the  2nd  consonant : 
First-place  long  vowels,  Second-place  short  vowels, 

First-place  short  vowels,  Third-place  sho  rt  vowels, 

Second-place  long  vowels.  Third-place  long  vowels. 

Stated  in  the  fewest  possible  words,  the  rule  is : 
Second-place  long  and  all  first-place  vowels  are  written  by  the 
first  stem,  and  all  others  by  the  second. 

82.  Besides  keeping  vowels  out  of  angles,  a  further  ad- 
vantage of  this  rule  is  that  second-place  vowels,  though  they 
be  insufficiently  or  wrongly  shaded,  are  known  by  the 

tion  they  occupy  by  the  first  or  second  consonant ;  thus 
would  be  read  bake,  because  the  writer  evidently  meant  to 
make  the  dot  large,  since  it  occupies  a  position  where  a  large 
dot  only  could  properly  be  placed.  For  a  similar  reason, 

the  character  \  .    would  be  read  beck.    The  few  exceptions 
to  this  rule  are  given  in  lesson  XXXV. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  47 

83.  The  vowel  in  herb  (L  3)  is  represented  by  a  second- 
place  dot,  rather  than  the  light  dash.     Strictly,  however,  the 
e  in  herb  (and  words  where  it  occurs  before  r)  is  not  the  same 
as  e  in  met,  or  u  in  cup,  although  the  dot,  rather  than  the 
dash,  is  used  in  such  cases.    Other  shades  of  vowel  sound, 
also,  are  unprovided  for  in  the  Scale  ;  but  for  all  practical 
purposes  these  are  indicated  clearly  enough  by  the  signs  for 
those  vowels  which  most  nearly  approach  them. 

r 

84.  In  |~  Dio  it  is  necessary  to  place  two  vowels  on  one 

side  of  a  letter.  Here  v  t  is  put  nearer  to  |  d  than  -  o, 
since  the  symbols  should  be  written  in  the  same  order  in 
which  the  sounds  occur.  See  also  cameo,  L  3. 

When  two  concurrent  vowels  occur  between  two  conso- 
nants, the  first  vowel  is  placed  by  the  first  stem,  and  the 
second  by  the  last,  without  reference  to  what  place  either  of 
the  vowels  may  occupy.  See  poem,  fiat,  L  1. 

85.  Since  every  vowel  is  of  necessity  in  the  first,  second 
or  third  place,  the  stem  )  s  must  be  written  if  a  vowel  occurs 
in  connection  with  it ;  for  if  a  dot  or  dash  were  placed  beside 
a  circle,  there  would  be  nothing  to  show  whether  a  first, 
second,  or  third-place  vowel  were  meant.    Hence  if  s  is  pre- 
ceded by  an  initial,  or  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  the  full-length 
stem,  instead  of  the  circle,  must  invariably  be  used.    See 
assail,  lazy,  racy,  L  2.    This  rule  holds  good  in  all  cases 
whether  tlie  vowels  are  actually  written  or  not,  since  the  use  of 
the  stem  in  these  circumstances  indicates  where  the  reader 
is  to  supply  them.    For  example,  the  circle  is  used  in  sense 
and  rose,  but  the  stem  must  be  employed  in  essence  and  rosy. 
See  L  2. 

86.  1  Write  :    111  kick  lock  rock  chorus  edge  egg  else 

2  gui,ss  kiss  mass  haughty  enemy  alas  Asia  gem  valley 

3  malice    autumn    lion    idiom    idiot    maniac    mazy    dozy 

4  posy  daisy  gauzy    dizzy  hazy  noisy  espy  acme  agony 

5  allure    ally  alto    apex  dock    appease    bang  botch    chip 

6  chop    cob    coffee  dairy   duck   dumb   L»utch    epic  essay 


48  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SfTORT-ffAXI). 

7  foggy   gang  gas    gaudy  hobby  mug  lag    lap  pack    lash 

8  latch    lath  leg   lip  luck    lung    mellow   mess    mob    odd 

9  opera  palace  palm  pith  rack  shock  silk  solemn  Stoic 

10  tally   Adam    Amos    Ellis    Emory    Jesse    Agnes    Anna 

11  Ella  Emily  Emma  Hannah  (using  ar)  arrow  attire  err. 

(96—6—2) 

87.  PHRASES.    And-we      as-it-should     for- we     have- we 
such-as  that-you  we-do  we-have  they-were  we-were  what- 
all     what-do     what-does      with-the    with-that    would-say 
would-never  how-you. 

/  EXERCISE  7. 

88.  1.    Rub  your  sore  eye  with-your  elbow.    2.  They-that 
talk  too-much  effect  nothing.    3.  He*t-d  a-gossip  as-j'ou  won  Id 
a -liar.    4.    You  -  will- never   sell    your   fowls    on- a    rainy 
day.    5.    Do-you-acknowledge  that-the  sky  is  hazy  in   au- 
tumn?   6.    Yes,  but  it-is-never  so  in  summer.    7.    Iha\t'-no 
memory  of  any-such  tale  as-that  in-your  book.    8.    To  edit 
such-a  book  is-a  big  job.    9.    It-is-in-no-way  sufficient  for- 
this  purpose.    10.    "The-Idiot  aud-the  Maniac,"  is-the  sub- 
ject of-my  poem.     11.    You-may-receive-the  essay  and-takr- 
it  to-the  notary.     12.    They  eat  nothing  but  milk  and-eggs 
on  Sunday.  (111—3:15—1:30). 

89.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    All-the  ships  of-the  navy  will  soon 
sail  into-tbe  sea  and-engage  with-the  haughty  enemy. 

(4-1.) 


SUGGESTION. — It  is  well  to  encourage  ihe  tendency,  which 
is  quite  natural,  of  picturing?  in  one's  mind  the  characters 
which  represent  words  heard  spoken  in  conversation,  also 
to  cultivate  the  habit  of  mentally  outlining  and  phrasing 
words  and  sentences. — Word  and  phrase  signs  must  be  so 
thoroughly  learned  as  to  be  written  and  read  instantly. 
Spare  hours  may  be  given  with  advantage  to  writing  and 
reading  these  abbreviations  over  and  over  man^  times. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHOUT-HAND.  49 

90.  TRANSLATE. 

•     . 'V     ^v  ^—  P        -v •/      I      x'"         N         I 

)    \r^     f         F  v/T  I*  x 

/  '  ' 

/    . 


To  THE  TEACHEK. — Vowels  trouble  most  students,  mainly 
because  they  are  not  well  learned.  But  they  are  so  few  that 
one  can  easily  become  as  familiar  with  them  as  with  the 
faces  of  his  own  brothers  and  sisters.  Vowels  are  so  impor- 
tant that  no  good  teacher  will  omit  a  brief  review  of  them  as 
a  part  of  the  regular  daily  program.  Each  member  should 
be  able  when  required  to  give  the  place,  size,  form,  length, 
and  kind  of  every  one.  This  review  should  be  partly  oral, 
the  long  vowels  for  convenience  being  named,  tee,  toy,  tah, 
taiv,  toe,  too;  and  the  short,  it,  et,  at,  ot,  ut,  oot.  The  whole 
class  may  be  called  upon  to  repeat  them  both  forwards  and 
backwards,  individually  and  in  concert.  Then  give  all  first- 
place,  tee,  taw,  it,  ot,  oi,  I;  next  second-place,  and  last,  third- 
place.  The  teacher  will  observe  that  the  more  thoroughly  a 
pupil  learns  a  thing,  the  better  will  he  like  it;  and,  per 
contra,  the  better  he  likes  it,  the  more  he  will  want  to  learn 
of  it.  This  is  true  particularly  of  anything  intrinsically 
scientific  and  beautiful,  as  the  vowel  scale. 


LESSON  VIII. 
CONSONANT  POSITION. 

91.  KEY.    1.    King    me    deep    leave    occupy   teach  at- 
tach allowed    attack.    2.    Nigh  away    awake    ahead  July 
purify  ago  nuisance. 

WORD-SIGNS.  8.  Common  each  watch  hear  her  ever 
give-n  dollar  thing.  4.  Whom  home  large  much  thank 
youth  hath  had  advertise  advertising.  5.  Anything  En- 
glish-language A.  M.  P.  M.  however  must-be  forthwith  to- 
become  single. 

SENTENCES.  6.  Talks  on-the  subject  of  electricity  will- 
be  given  in-the-month  of  July.  7.  It-is-a  common-thing 
to  hear  her  laugh  aloud  at-your  huge  fool's-cap.  8.  The- 
Judge  said  that-the  jury  should  occupy  this  cool  room.  9. 
They  will  to-day  say  what-the  damages  in-this-case  should- 
be. 

PHRASES.  10.  By-and-by  by-the-by  by-the-way  in-as- 
much-as  she-shall  a-year-ago  for-a-long-time.  11  Of-the- 
case  as-long-as-it-may  many-think-that  ought-to-be  long- 
enough  shall-never. 

92.  What  is    called  consonant  position  is  a  contrivance 
made  use  of  to  save  writing  vowels  in  a  certain  limited  num- 
ber of  common  words.    With  reference  to  the  line  of  writ- 
ing, words  occupy  three  different  places,  known  as  the  first, 
second,  and  third  consonant  positions.     Second-position  words 
rest  on  the  line.    Most  words  which  have  already  been  in- 
troduced are  of  this  class. 

93.  First-position  horizontal  words  are  written  one  space 
above  the  line,  as  king  and  me.    Other  first  position  words 
are  written  half  a  space  above  the  line,  as  deep,  leave  occupy, 
teach.     Here,  in  each  case,   the  first  descending  letter  rests 
half  a  space  above  the  line.    L  1. 

94.  Third-position  horizontal  words  are  written  just  be- 
low the    line,    as    ago    and  nuisance.    Other  third-position 
words  are  written  through  the  line,    the  first  descending 
letter  resting  one-half  a  space  below  it,  as  in  awake,  ahead, 
purify.     L  2. 


Plate  8. 


-      I 
I I I 


- /v- 


SENTENCES. 


\ 


10 


11 


...X : 


I 

PHRASES. 


TRANSLATE. 


)  - 

X 

'  -  r 

f  .  ...  \     l_o 


-^      ^ 


68  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

95.  There  are  only  a  few  hundred  words,  all  told,  that 
there  is  any  need  of  writing  elsewhere  than  on  the  line. 
These  are  specified  in  the  lessons  which  follow,  and  should 
be  memorized  by  the  pupil.     It  would  be  inexpedient  at  this 
time  to  attempt  to  explain  fully  the  general  theory  of  Con- 
sonant Position.     It  is  sufficient  to  state  that  words  which 
are  written  in  the  first  position  usually  contain  a.  first  pltice 
vowel,  and  those  in  the  third  position,  a  third  place  vowel. 
The  learner,  however,  will  distinctly  bear  in  mind  that  it  is 
by  no  means  true  that  all  words  which  contain  first  or  third 
place  vowels  are  for  that  reason  to  be  put  in  the  first  or  third 
positions. 

96.  The  student  who  consults  other  text-books,  or  a  ste- 
nographic dictionary,   will  find  a  large  number  of   words 
marked  for  the  first  and  third  positions.    It  is  nevertheless 
true,  however,  that  practical  reporters  generally,  no  matter 
what  system  is  followed,  or  text-book  studied,  write  nearly 
all  the  words  on  the  line  in  actual  reporting.    The  notes  thus 
taken  are  perfectly  legible,  although  such  words  as  music, 
academy,  month,  factory,  etc.,  are  written  in  the  second  posi- 
sion  rather  than  in  the  third.    Our  aim  is  to  teach  the  art  as 
it  is  practiced  by  the  best  stenograpliers.    This  subject  is  treat- 
ed at  length  in  Lesson  XXXIV. 

97.  1    Write  in   first  position:    Cause  cease  song  these 
2  wise  since   sight   side    seek  sing   office  city   offset     ear 
8  weakness  sin  seen  seem  abide  by  she  ease  easy  easily 

4  enjoy  fall  (el)   feel   (el)  joy  joyous  law   leave  lie   meek 

5  avoid    mill  my    occupy   thy  thee  if    off   pity  see    talk 

6  weak  assign  right  Deity  miss  size;  (ar)  fear  fire. 

7  Third  position:     Allow    at    out    atom  back    cap    catch 

8  aloud    allowed    view    abuse     eulogy    fool    lack    laugh 

9  loose  purity  sat  suit;  (ar)  power  poor  room  our  hour; 
10  thou  use  due  few  issue  outside  await  advice. 

(84—2:30—1:30). 

98.  PHRASES.    By-his  by-it  by-many  by-our  by-that  by- 
you  by-your  by-which  by-which-many  by-which-you  for-if 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  53 

if-they  in-anything  many-times  my-love  shall-give  she-says 
she- was  with-each  some-may  take-the-case  think-this 
whh'h-is  which-the-times  as-that  for-fear  for-his-advantage 
he-has-never  I-beg  I-feel  I-know  I-know-nothing  I-know- 
that  I-like  in-effect  in-his  by-many  in-that-day  is-it  is-it-a 
is-it-as  is-it-so  is-it-you  long-way  many-have  may-also 
no-knowledge  say-so  so-be-it  so-would  was-right  all-is. 
EXERCISE  8. 

99.  1.    You-may-write-a  review  of  all  our  many  sayings. 
2.    On-the  fourth  Sunday  of  February  we-were  at-the  smok- 
ing  ruins    of-that  large  hotel.    3.    We  all   know-that   tire 
ruins  many  mills.    4.    You-may-write  off  the-eulogy  on-the 
life,   laws  anil-power  of-the  Jewish  king.     5.     I-will  carry 
that  small  watch  this  week  and-if-it  keeps  the-right  time  I- 
will  give-you  $25  for-it.     6.     The  huge  earth  moves  along  its 
path  many  miles  an  hour.  (83 — 2:15 — 1). 

100.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  To-study  the-lives  and -laws  of-the 
Jewish  kings  is-a  common  thing  in  our  day  and-age.      (4 — 1) 


L 


To  THE  TEACHER: — The  following  items  form  an  impor- 
tant and  indispensable  part  of  the  program  of  every  reci- 
tation. Each  member  should  be  required  to  bring  to  the 
class  for  the  teacher's  inspection  a  carefully  prepared  copy 
of  the  list  words,  exercise,  and  speed  sentence.  It  is  also 
well  to  require  a  long-hand,  or  type-written,  copy  of  the 
Translation.  No  conscientious  teacher  will  neglect  to  give 
at  least  a  little  time  to  the  correction  of  each  pupil's  work  at 
every  recitation.  If  the  class  is  large  it  will  be  necessary  to 
correct  such  papers  out  of  class  hours.  The  different  mem- 
bers maybe  called  on  miscellaneously  to  read  each  a  sentence 
from  the  translation,  also  from  the  exercise,  also  a  number  of 
the  list  words.  This  must  be  done  promptly  and  without 
hesitation.  Hence  thorough  preparation  before-hand  in  the 
way  of  writing  and  reading  the  lesson  over  many  times,  is1 
absolutely  necessary. 


LESSON  IX. 
8-CIBCLE  JUNCTIONS. 

101.  KEY.    1.    Desk  deposit  maxim  kasteu  lesson  pen- 
cil facility  vessel.     2.     It-is-of-advantage    submissive    and- 
his-life  atheism  exhibit  Mexico  bask. 

WORD-SIGNS.  3.  Us  whose  hope  happy  though  whole 
wholly  young  to-be.  4.  Etc.  (et  cetera)  disadvantage  ex- 
change post-office  expect  domestic  salvation  holy  own. 

PHRASES.  5.  At-the-time  by-such  for-the-same-reason 
it-is-ready  it-is-to-be  long-since  it-is-so.  6.  Such-has-never 
which-is-no  who-has-this  with-the-same  would-receive  this- 
period  which-some.  7,  8  and  9.  For  key  see  list- words,' 
sec.  116. 

SENTENCES.  1.  It-is  our  custom  to-sell  for  cash.  2. 
Tou-will  however  be  allowed  to  exchange  your  map  for-a 
hat  or  cap  or  anything-else  that-you-may  lac-k.  3.  The 
rustic  takes  counsel  with-the  judge  for  half-an-hour  but 
says  nothing.  4.  For-some  purpose  he  dispatches  his  son 
to  Cincinnati. 

102.  The  rule  laid  down  in  Lesson  VI.  for  joining  the  cir- 
cle, applies  only  when  s  begins  or  ends  a  word.    When  the 
circle  occurs  at  the  angle  formed  by  the  juncture  of  two 
Btems,  however,  it  should  be  written  according  to  the  follow- 
ing directions: 

103.  When  the  circle  is  to  be  written,     1.    At  the  junction 
of  two  straight  letters,  it  should  be  placed  outside  the  angle, 
as  in  desk  or  deposit.    But  when  the  two  straight  letters  are  in 
a  direct  line  forming  no  angle,  s  is  written  on  the  upper,  or 
right  side  of  the  stem,  as  in  Mexico.    2.    At  the  junction  of  a 
straight  letter  and  a  curve,  it  should  be  written  within,  or 
following  the  direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  maxim,  hasten.    3. 
At  the  junction  of  two  curves,  if  it  cannot  follow  the  direc- 
tion of  both,  as  in  lesson,  pencil,  vessel,  it  should  almost  al- 
ways be  written  within  the  first  curve,  as  in  submissive,  athe- 
ism.   Sometimes  it  is  more  convenient  to  attach  it  to  the 
second  curve,  as  in  facility.    See  Ls  1  and  2. 

-54— 


Plate  9, 


x>  —  x 


V  - 


WOKD-SIGKS. 


->-       ~ 


-v 


_ 

WORD-  FORMS 


-7 


SENTENCES. 


> 


66  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

104.  These  rules  have  precisely  the  same  application  to 
all  phrases  of  which  s  forms  a  part,  as  in  it-is-of-advantage, 
and-his-life.    L  2. 

105.  la  bask  (L  2),  it  will  be  observed  that  the  vowel  is 

placed  at  the  angle  between  \  b  and k,  which,  it  would 

appear,  is  contrary  to  the  rule  laid  down  in  Lesson  VII.    But 
if  the  dot  were  placed  at  the  end  of k,  the  order  of  pro- 
nunciation would   necessarily   be,    b-s-a-k.    Evidently   the 
rule  in  Lesson  VII  does  not  apply  when  a  circle  occurs  be- 
tween the  two  stems.    In  bask,  and  a  few  similar  words,  the 
vowel  must  be  placed  in  the  angle,  that  is  by  the  first  stem, 
so  that  it  will  be  read  before  s.     But  the  occasion  for  vowels 
so  situated  is  rare. 

106.  Beginners  almost  without  exception  write  the  vow- 
el word-signs  too  large.    They  should  be  only  one-fourth  the 
size  of   standard  letters;   e.  g.  i  before,  one-fourth  of  |  d, 

^  to,  one-fourth  of  \  p,  n  you  one-fourth  of  /— v  ra,  etc. 

107.  Placing  the  circle  between  two  straight  letters,  write: 

1  Custody  dispatch  discuss    dispose  exhibit    dispel  gazet 

2  gospel  justice   succeed    capacity    Tuesday    bestow    dis- 
8  guise    dusk   gossip    hostile    receipt     restless     upset  re- 
4  store  custom  task  rustic  risk. 

6    Between  a  straight  and  curved  letter:    Citizen  desire 

6  desirous   disarm  dislike  excel  Harrison  message  music 

7  resolve  instil    musical    pacific    society   specify   answer 

8  dismiss   visitor   visit    reason    receive   vivacity   honesty 

9  Massachusetts   Minnesota  Erastus  (ar)  Missouri  officer 
10  sarcasm  (ar). 

Between  two  curves:  Innocence  insanity  mason  scarce- 
ly Cincinnati  refusal  (el)  license  (el)  offensive;  also  write 
sophomore  sorrow  genius  science  sublime  Minneapolis. 

(69—2:15—1:15). 

108.  PHRASES.    Any-business  at-such  at-that   at-this  at- 
your   he-said    it-is-a    of-some    since-that    some-such  take- 
such    that-is-never    that-is-it  this-bill   this-day   this-reason 
this-time  to-receive    to-your  was-some   which-is-this    who- 
is-the  who-is-it. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  57 

EXERCISE    9. 

109.  1.    The-citizeu  deposits  his  salary  in-the  bank  of- 
Massachusetts  with  scarcely  any  risk.    2.    The  gazette  says 
that  Harrison's  army  will  leave  Mexico  on  Saturday  of-this 
week.    3.    It- will  march  all-the-way  to  Minneapolis,  Minne- 
soto,  by-way  of  Missouri.    4.    The-justice  informs  counsel 
that-they-may  if-they  wish  discuss  the-case  before-the-jury 
for  two  hours.    5.    Do-you-think  that-the  jury  will  say  that- 
the  youth  is  insane?    6.    Yes,  they-have  already  said-so.    7. 
He-receives  the-message  in  despair.    8.    Many  also  hear  it 
with  sorrow  and-dismay.    9.    The  young  sophomore,  they 
say,  has-a  rare  genius  for  poetry  and-music.    10.    I-hope 
the-saying    has  no    sarcasm  in-it.    11.    I-know,    however, 
that-he  excels  in  science.    12.    He  never  fails  to  exhibit  vi- 
vacity in  society.    13.     Instil  right  maxims  into-the  souls  of 
our  youth.    14.    You-will  see  that-they  will-be  the  happier 
for-it.  (151—3:15—1:30). 

110.  SPEED   SENTENCE.    I-hope,  however,   that-you-will 
give-the  youth  whom-you  teach  the  whole  story  of  young 
Absolom  g          (4 — 1). 

111.  TRANSLATE. 


>  V 


LESSON  X. 
PHRASEOGRAPHT. 

112.  RET.    1.    I-die    I-do    I-had  give-me   pay-him  alto- 
gether I-think-that  I-know-you. 

WORD-SIGNS.  2.  Lawyer  similar  similarity  influence 
Catholic  speak  speech  spoke.  8.  Because  significant  in- 
significant why  Justice-of-the-Peace  continue  falsehood 
company.  4.  Hence  witness  testimony  mostly  may-as- 
well  December  thus  those.  5.  Happiness  holiness  enlarge 
postmark  mistake  if-you-wish  Savior. 

PHRASES.  6.  Because-of  because-nothing  because-we- 
have  cause-and-effect  for-as-much  public-service.  7.  Those- 
days  to-expect  continue-it  to-whom  too-much  was-seen 
what-say-you  which-represent.  8.  For-as-many  who-sup- 
pose-that  as-if  as- well-as-usual  as-long-as-it-is  for-the-same- 
reason.  9.  Have-seen  have-to-be  that-is-the  they-said-so 
they-speak  this-notice  this-purpose  which-seems.  10  and 
11  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  117. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Paul,  going  before-the  Justice-of-the- 
peace,  says  that  Miles  carried  off  some  of -his  live-stock. 
2.  The-justice  sits  and  hears  the-testimony  of-each  witness 
in-the-case.  8.  The-lawyer  thinks  it-would-be  of  no  use 
to-make-a  speech  to-the  jury.  4.  The-testimony  shows  him 
to-be  the-thief .  5.  He-is  now  in  jail. 

113.  Every  stenographer  must  decennine  for  himself  the 
precise  extent  to  which  he  can  apply  phraseography  to  ad- 
vantage.   Many  do  not  phrase  enough;  while  possibly  some 
do  too  much.    Students,  accustomed  in  long-hand  to  disjoin 
words,  invariably  find  phraseography  a  hindrance  at  first; 
but  the  practice,  once  acquired,  lessens  the  labor  of  report- 
ing, and  also  adds  to  speed  and  legibility.    Three  words  can 
be  phrased  while  two  of  them  are  being  written  separately; 
hence  the  gain  in  speed.    But  words  separated  by  the  slight- 
est rhetorical  pause,  or  mark  of  punctuation,  should  not  be 
joined  together.    This  adaptation  of  phraseography  to  syntax 
renders  short-hand  notes  far  more  legible  than  they  would 
otherwise  be. 


Plate  10. 


' 1~.  1 , 


_      Y-, 

WORD-SIGNS. 


\       1 


\ 


K^ 


— ^ 


O      ^ 


10 

11 

(T 


^N        V<1 


SENTENCES. 


-J      -       \      ^_x® 


I 


60  REPORTING  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HAND. 

114.  The  first  word  of  a  phrase,  which  for  convenience  we 
will  call  the  leader,  should  be  written  in  its  proper  position; 
the  words  which  follow  may  then  be  allowed  to  occupy  what- 
ever position  with  reference  to  the  line  that  the  phrasi ,  in 
due  course,  may  give  them.    For  example,  /  is  the  leader  in 
I-think-that,  and  I-know-you;  give,  the  leader  in  give-me.    In 
these  sentences,  that,  know,  and  you,  are  thrown  out  of  posi- 
tion, but  the  writing  is  none  the  less  legible  on  this  account. 
The  real  value  and  beauty  of  phrasing,  and  its  philosophy 
also,  will  be  better  understood  after  the  learner  has  had 
some  experience  as  a  practical  short-hand  writer.    The  sub- 
ject is  more  fully  treated  in  lesson  XLII. 

115.  By  reference  to  I-die,  and  I-had  (L  1),  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  first  word  can  sometimes  be  so  written  that  the 
second,  also,  shall  occupy  its  proper  position.    Generally, 
however,  the  reader  does  not  regard  the  position  of  words 
after  the  first  or  second,  but  relies  upon  the  context,  which 
is  a  sure  guide.    The  necessity  imposed  on  the  writer  of 
locating  words  out  of  their  proper  position,  occasions  no 
drawback  upon  legibility. 

116.  The  phrase  should  be  discontinued  when  an  unusual 
word  occurs,  or  one  that  must  be  written  in  its  proper  posi- 
tion in  order  to  be  unambiguous.    E.  g.,  give-him,  and  pay- 
me,  should  not  be  joined,  for  fear  of  conflict  with  give-me 
and  pay-him.    L  1. 

117.  1  Vocalize:    Male    female   dismay    parody    Caleb; 

2  1  pos.:    sky    cog    knock   mock   nick.    Without  vowels. 

3  1  pos.:    oppose    rise    scheme    arise  (ar).    3  pos.:    amuse 

4  accuse  pass  passage  passive  sad  induce  absence  south. 
6  2  pos.:    reach    assume    form    (ar)    evade    series   speed 

6  speedy   sphere    beauty  dominate   alleviate   cavity  cool 

7  Jewish     academy     academic    factory     ensue     disobey 

8  anxious     audacity     besiege     caustic     chastise     luxury 

9  depository    despair  (ar)    expire   (ar)    extinguish*   gasp 

10  Augustus    Justus    disengage    dismal    dissolve    egotism 

11  immensity   maximum  cohesive   solicit  vestige   veracity 

12  decimal    clastic    exile  felicity   garrison   pacify   parasol 


EEPORT1NG  STYLE  OF  SHORT-IIASrD.  61 

13  spasm    tenacity    velocity    Joseph    assassin    incendiary 

14  muscle  exterior  cancel  (el)  chancellor  (ar)   counsel  (el) 

15  counsellor  (ar)     damsel     domicile     fasten     gymnasium 

16  salary    search    solitary    scarce    (ar)     malicious     select 

17  resume    besides    disease    deceit    deceive  decide   design 

18  despise     decease    excite    exceed    false    insight     incite 

19  inside    likewise   business    mix  offence   paradox   Scotch 
—  1   go  sleep    sweep    epistle    alike  (el)    misery    reside    resign 

21  revise  righteous  sincere  recite  rejoice  anxiety*  excuse 

22  animosity  casual  casualty   apostle*  subdue  tax  absorb 

23  rescue  reduce  affair  botany  deviate  dialogue    efficacy 

24  embody   indemnify   ingenuity   intimacy   involve  nomi- 

25  nate     bachelor     beneath     demagogue     dialect     dogma 
"*^6~  enigma     epidemic     aesthetic     gypsy*     infect     pathetic 

27  ramify   topic    Anthony    Timothy    Tennessee    Louisiana 

28  apology    obviate    eminence    apologize     assets     avarice 

29  debase     delicious     depose     diffuse     factious     fictitious 

30  obvious*     paradise     survive     various    vex    severe  (ar) 

31  enforce  (ar)   ethics  poetic.  (187—6-2:30.) 

118.  PHRASES.    Because-of     had-the     do-you    have-seen 
those-that     those-which     to-such-a     to-suppose     was-said 
which-is-now  which-is-the    which-shall  who-are-you     who- 
come '  be-seen  that-day    that-is-it  that-we    that-time  they- 
that  they-think-that  to-take  was-it-so  was-it-said      was-so 
which-many     which-may     which-you     will-it-be     you-may 
you-make    at-those-times   by-as-many   by-reason-of  in-the- 
same-way     it-is-to-be     it-is-long     many-such     many-things 
never-said   of-as-many  of-his-own  of-several. 

EXERCISE  10. 

119.  1.  Your  son  is-a  wise  youth,  because  he  seeks  to-do 
right.    2.  In  our  city  we-have  much  snow  in-the-month  of 
December.    8.  Joseph  Jackson  the-lawyer   has-a-large   in- 
fluence, and-he-may  resign  his  office.    4.  We-think  of  going 
into-a  business  scheme  together.    5.  Our  affairs  are  now  in- 
such  shape  that-we  may  do-so  if-we  wish.    6.  Your  absence 
in  Alabama  may  restore  your  health,  and-thus  be-the  cause 


62  REPORTING  3TYLJ*  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

of-rauch  happiness.  7.  How-long-do-you  think  you-will  re- 
side in-the  South?  8.  I- will  leave  for  Dakota  in-the-month 
of  May.  (99—3—1.) 

120.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    As-to-his  design    in  seeking  the 
house  of-the  justice-of-the-peaee,  the-witness  spoke  a-fal-c- 
hood  in-giving  his  testimony  to-the  jury  (3 — 1.) 

121.  TRANSLATE. 


SUGGESTION. — Most  pupils  press  the  pen  too  hard  upon 
the  paper,  making  both  the  light  and  heavy  lines  heavier 
than  they  should  be.  This  extra  pressure  means,  more  fric- 
tion, more  labor,  more  time,  less  speed.  The  rapid  sten- 
ographer always  touches  the  paper  lightly.  It  is  an  excellent 
plan  to  cultivate  lightness  of  touch  by  frequent  practice  in 
writing  the  thin  stems  as  fine  as  possible,  ^executing  them 
rapidly,  barely  touching  the  paper  with  the  pen. 

The  learner  who  also  cultivates  a  compact  style  of  writing, 
will  in  the  end  be  both  more  rapid  and  accurate.  By  com- 
pactness of  style  is  meant  that  the  characters  be  written  not 
only  small,  but  closely  together.  The  hand-writing  of  most 
all  beginners  is  too  large  and  sprawling. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  63 

QUESTIONS  FOB  REVIEW. 

How  many  letters  in  the  consonant  alphabet? — Name 
them  consecutively. — Name  the  light  stems; — shaded  stems. — 
What  is  the  rule  for  writing  words  with  reference  to  the 
base  line? — What  is  the  proper  length  for  a  stem  (consonant 
letter)?  (See  Sec.  5.) — May  one  outline  represent  more  than 
one  word?  (Sec.  9.) — How  may  ambiguity  be  avoided  in 
such  cases? — What  is  the  value  of  shading?  (Sec.  10.) — Is  it 
strictly  necessary  in  all  cases? — Is  this  system  orthographic 
(following  the  common  spelling),  or  phonetic?  (12.) — Give 
examples  of  the  difference  between  these  two  methods  of 
writing. — What  are  the  equivalents  of  x,  g,  and  wh?  (Note, 
p.  21.) — What  is  a  word-sign? — A  sign-word?  (16.) — How  are 
proper  names  indicated?  (18.) — Why  is  el  sometimes  used 
instead  of  lay?  (21) — Which  is  the  more  used,  ar  or  ray? 
(26.) — What  are  some  of  the  advantages  of  ray  over  ar? — 
What  is  phrasing?  (27.) — Define  a  phraseograph; — a  phraseo- 
gram. — How  in  phrasing  is /expressed?  (27.) — He?  (28.) — 
You?  (29.) — What  is  the  difference  between  chay  and  ray? 
(31.) — How  are  they  distinguished* — Give  specific  cases 
where  ar  is  to  be  used; — also  ray.  (32.) — What  is  the  number 
of  long  vowels?  (38.) — Give  them  in  order. — How  many 
vowel  places?  (39.) — Repeat  the  rhyme  in  Sec.  40. — Explain 
the  nominal  consonant  and  its  use.  (41.) — How  are  vowels 
placed  with  reference  to  consonants,  in  order  to  be  read  first? 
(44.) — In  phrasing,  how  are  the,  and,  a  and  an  expressed? 
(50-51.) — Name  the  diphthongs.  (59.) — On  which  side  of 
straight  stems  is  iss  written?  (62.) — Curved  stems?  (61.) — 
How  many  short  vowels?  (78.)— Give  them  in  order. — State, 
in  your  own  words,  the  rule  given  in  Sec.  81. — When  should 
s  be  expressed  by  the  circle,  and  when  by  the  stem?  (85.) — 
How  many  consonant  positions?  (92-94.) — Describe  each. — 
What  is  the  purpose  of  the  scheme  of  position?— How  is  the 
circle  written  when  it  occurs  between  two  straight  stems? — 
A  straight  stem  and  a  curve? — Two  curves?  (103.) — What 
is  the  first  word  of  a  phrase  called?  (114.) — What  are  some 
of  the  restrictions  placed  on  phrasing?  (115-116.) 


LESSON  XI. 
SEZ-CIRCLE,   BMP  AND  COALESCENTS. 

122.  KEY.    1.  Races  chases  pauses  noises  gazes  reposes 
system  necessary.    2.    Enthusiast   success    successes    suc- 
cessor    exercises    subsist    Mississippi.      8.      Camp    ample 
temple  thump    sympathize  ambitious    embark  ambiguous. 

4.  Wet    wed    muse    mule    quack    wood    squeeze    Delia 

5.  Web  fuse  yam  nephew   Utah   now  (or  knew)  Yankee. 

6.  Walk  wit  weep  York  ague  weed  cue  war.    7.    Sweet 
switch  weave   wing  Quebec  liquid  Idaho  Julia. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  8.  Important  importance 
improve  improvement  may-be  simple  simply  impossible. 
9.  Temperate  temperance  square  acquit  acute  senior 
Junior  nevertheless.  10.  Failure  uniform  unite  unity 
Europe  quick  howsoever  idea.  11.  Height  higher  white 
eye  yet  ye  year  beyond.  12.  Iowa  highway  highly 
United-States  is-seen  is-said  it-is-simply  this-is.  13.  This- 
syatera  gives-us  takes-us  loves-us  is-such  as-soon-as  in- 
this-city.  14.  Is-his  (or  his-is,  is-as);  as-has  (or  as-is,  as-his, 
has-his);  because-such  it-is-something  it-is-sufficient  this- 
has-never.  15.  For  key  see  list-words,  sec.  132. 

123.  The  syllables  sis,  sys,  sez,  ces,  sus,  and  other  j  similar, 
are  denoted-  by  a  circle  fonned  some  five  times  lai  ger  than 
the  small  one  representing  s.    See  races,  chases,  system,  and 
all  words  in  Ls  1  and  2. 

124.  The  two  labials  \  p  and  \  6,  when  occurring  after 
>• —  m,  are  sometimes  indicated  by  shading  this  curve,  as  in 
camp,  ample,  embark.    See  L  3.    This  thickened  m  is  called 

*-**  emp,  and  has  the  force  of  mp  or  mb. 

125.  The  principles  of  abbreviation  explained  in  this  les- 
son are  also  made  use  of  in  phraseography.    In  may-be,  for 
example,  ^—^  m,  the  sign  for  may,  is  shaded  to  denote  the 
following  \  be.    Emp  in  this  case  is  in  reality  an  abbrevi- 
ated phraseograph,  and  is  called  a  phrase-sign.    The  words 
"is-said"  are  expressed  by  the  phrase-sign  sezde,  which  is 
obtained  by  enlarging  the  circle  in  f  said. 

-64— 


»late  II. 


1     x?         f 


n      O  0 0 


4    c 


./-•IN 

7.  1     /      V 


U      U 


12 
13 

14 
15 


P 


O 


06  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HANi*. 

KEY  TO  PLATE   11 — B. 

126.  Ls  1,  2,  I.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  /!«&. 
Ls  4,  5,  6.    For  key  see  phrases,  sec.  133. 

SENTENCES.  7.  You-may-write  this  and-au  succeeding 
exercises  with  red  ink  if-you-wish.  8.  We  would  much 
rather  that-you  would  use  simply  the-common  ink  however. 

9.  A-large  lamp  was  sitting  by-the  door  in-the  white  temple. 

10.  That-is   what-the    Yankee's    Irish  wife  said   she  saw. 

11.  Our  temperance-speaker  's  quick  in  wit,  with-which  he 
unites  much  irony. 

127.  The  time  has  now  come  for  us  to  inquire  into  the 
small  half-circle  word-signs,  some  of  which  are  w  yet,    *  we, 
5    what,  >    would,  and  „  you.    How  are  they      obtained? 
Let  us  see.    First,  if  to  the  stem  |  t  we  prefix  ye,  the  word 
yet  is  the  result.    Now,  instead  of  using  f  yay  to  express 
the  y,  the  light  dot  vowel  is  modified,  or  rather  transformed, 
into  a  semi-circle.     This  little    half-circle  represents    the 
double  sound  of  ye  in  the  word  yet,  which  maybe  written 
thus,  w    yet.    The  pupil  will  take  notice  that  the  semi-circle 
is  similar  to  the  dot  in  two  respects.     ^Lrst,  it  is  light,  and 
again,  it  occupies  the  second  vowel-place.    They  differ  only 
in  form,  one  being  a  dot,  and  the  other  a  semi-circle.    The 
word-sign  ^  yet  is  derived  by  simply  dropping  the  |  t.    Then 
further, the   sign  ~  beyond  is  derived  by  dropping  all  except 

the  half-circle  in  ^C  beyond.  Here,  the  half-circle  ex- 
presses the  double  s*~-1  sound  yo,  and  differs  in  form  only 

from  the  first-place  light  dash  (which  signifies  the  short 
sound  of  o),  being  like  it  in  respect  to  vowel-place,  and  the 
absence  of  shading.  The  two  semi-circles,  above  described, 
differ  in  this  respect:  That  the  first  bows  downward,  the 
other  upward.  All  semi-circles  in  fact  which  express  the 
union  of  y  with  a  dot-vowel,  bow  downwards,  while  the  y 
dash-vowels  bow  upwards.  W  dot-vowels  bow  to  the  left,  as 
in  wet,  wed;  and  w  dash-vowels  to  the  right,  as  in  wood.  See 
L4. 


- 

2       V. O 

sj 


8  >  ..  / 

9  -/~  r 

6  * 
10  ... 


U...^.... 

X^L  « 

'C 


L 


SENTENCES. 


"t 


)    r 


TRANSLATE. 

1    U   ' 


J   ) 


b 


— S 

S 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

The  Boys  and  the  Horse  shoes. 

A  MEMO  It  Y   KELP. 


C    ^ 


EXPLANATION.  The  w-coalescents  are  horizontal,  as 
distinguished  from  the  y-coalescents,  which  are  vertical,  as 
shown  by  the  arms  of  the  first  and  second  boys  respectively. 
The  Ws  dot  to  the  left,  and  dash  to  the  right;  the  Ys  dot  down- 
wards, and  dash  upwards. 

129.  The  learner  will  distinctly  bear  in  mind  that  the  pre- 
fixing of  w  or  y  to  any  vowel  simply  transforms  the  dot  or 
dash  into  a  semi-circle;  and  this  semi-circle  is  light  or  shaded 
according  as  the  vowel  is  long  or  thort,  and  invariably  occu- 
pies the  same  vowel  position. 

180.  The  coalesce nt  signs  should  be  formed  as  small  as 
possible,  and  should  be  complete  half-circles,  neither  angular 
or  flattened  out. 

131.  In  the  following  table  the  signs  have  a  force  equiva- 
lent to  that  of  the  FULL-FACED  and  italic  type  in  the  corre- 
sponding words. 

TABLE  OF  COALESCENTS. 


W-SERIES. 


we 

wa-ve 

wa-s 


wa-lk 
wo-ke 
woo 


ttn'-th          P  wo-t 
we-t  s  t0o-rst 

t-wa-ng      ^  woo-\ 


Y-SERIES. 


132. 


ye 
yea 
ya-rn 
1    Sez-circle: 


yaw-n 
yo-ke 

you 
Cases 


^  yt-m 
u  ye-t 
w  ya-m 
paces 


yo-n 
you-ug 


vices     fixes     census 


2  supposes  refuses    notices  decisive    desist  excess    exces- 

3  sive  exercise  exist  hypothesis  necessity  insist  emphasis 

4  emphasize    analysis*  (el)    Texas  Jesus  senses  surpasses 

5  molasses. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  69 

6  Using  Emp:     Pump    damp    encamp    example*  lamp 

7  lump  sample  sympathy  imbecile*  ambiguity*  embellish 

8  embezzle*  empire  limp  pomp  symbol  Sampson. 

9  Using  coalescents:     D«ke    hew  cube  cubic  duel  India 

10  witch     swing    wash     equip     ice     ^nf1"™1    Irish    (shay) 

11  irony  (ar)   item  dew  widow. 

12  (See    Vocabulary   for    outlines.)     Acquiesce     anguish 

13  annual     ave:iue     barrier     exquisite     genial     ingenious 

14  luxurious  requisite  tedious.  (70 — 2 — 1.) 
^133.    PHIIASES.    (The  first  twenty-one  of  these  phrases  are 
engraved  in  Ls  4,  5,  and  6  of  Plate  B,  the  order  of  arrange- 
ment   being   different.)      That-this-is-the     this-never     no- 
njicessity     was-necessary     this-is-new     this-is-never    jt-is- 
un  necessary  it-is-as  is-as-far-as  this-is-nothing  thafc-it-may- 
be  that-is-now  since-this-is-the-case:  that-is-necessary  many- 
cases  if-necessary  in-his-system  have-likewise  for-example 
as-soon-as-that  as-5t-may  as-soon-as-the  as-this-is  is-neces- 
sary  it-is-such  such-cases  that-if-necessary  that-this-is-now 
this-is-become  this-is-it  that-is-never  this-is-now  they-never. 


EXERCISE  11. 

134.  1.    Howsoever  much  you-may  wish  to  change  our 
money-system,  the  subject  of-importance  to  discuss  this  year 

1  is-that  of  temperance.  2.  This-is  our  regular  summer  uni- 
form. 3.  It-is-to-be  seen  in-the  United-States  camps  always 
at-this-time  of  year.  4.  It-is-never  to-be  seen  in  Europe 
however.  5.  He  loves-us  and-he  shows  his  love  in-all-that- 
he  does  for-us.  6.  This  city  lacks  some  necessary  improve- 
ments. 7.  This-system  has  already  come  into  use,  especial- 
ly in  many  of-the  large  cities.  8.  It  will  soon  be  in  common 
use  in-the  United-States.  (98—2—1.) 

135.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    Temperance  is-an  important  item 
in-the  improvement  of-the  health  of-the  United-States  army. 

(5-1.) 


LESSON  XII. 

DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. — THE  L-HOOK. 

136.  KEY.    1.    Pel  bel  tel  del    chel  jel   kel  gel  fel  vel 
thl  thel    shel.    2.    Blow    bowl    glass    black    settle    sickle 
playful   angle    bushel.    3.    Diploma  collegiate    total   deli- 
cacy    Mitchell     Angelica      coeval     mythological     postal. 
4.    Tell  till  blew  apply  able  awful  full  flew  call  clew. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  5.  It-will  until  at-all  com- 
ply people  belong  follow  angel  capable  challenge. 
6.  Each-will  which-will  children  much-will  equal  difficult 
difficulty  glory  glorious  deliver.  7.  Develop  develop- 
ment humble  neglect  negligent  they-will  as-it-will  such- 
will  tell-us.  8.  Most-likely  collect  recollect  respect  re- 
spectable respectability  collect-on-delivery  (C.  O.  D). 

PHRASES.  9.  As-long-as-possible  as-much-as-possible  in- 
its-place  is-it-likely  it-is-difficult  peculiar-people  till-his- 
own-time.  10  and  11.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  142. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Philosophy  will  clip  an  angel's  wings. 
2.  You  emphasized  the-wrong  syllable  in  class.  8.  This 
will -never  do  at-all.  4.  You-should  use  this-system  as- 
soon-as  you-are  able.  5.  Much-will-be  the-time  that-it-will 
save  you.  6.  The-reason  is  that-it-is-a«  speedy  as  any,  be- 
sides being  far  easier. 

137.  The  liquids  I  and  r,  by  reason  of  their  vowel  elements 
unite  intimately,  or  coalesce,  with  other  consonants  which 
immediately   precede   them.    For  example,  I   unites   very 
nearly  with  p  in  play,  and  with  fin  Jit/;  r  unites  closely  with 
p  in  pry  and  with/ in  offer.    These  double-sounds  are  of  very 
frequent  occurrence  in  our  language,  and  are  usually  ex- 
pressed by  a  modification,  or  "hooking,"  of  the  stem  of  the 
first  consonant. 

138.  To  express  an  added  I,  straight  stems  are  formed 
with  a  small  hook  at  the  beginning,  placed  on  the  right,  or 
s-circle  side.    To  illustrate,   \  called  pel,  has  the  force  of 
pi  in  playful,  diploma,  etc.    This  hook  is  written  on  the  con- 
cave side  of  curved  stems,  thus  v__  jl,  \    thl.    The  letters  of 

—70— 


\  -  v  r  f 
v  xr 


c  c  4 

.*_  V 


r  r  *  ......  *    \ 


WOI!I)-8I(JNS. 


v-v 


_..f      f  .__.__. ±1. 


1VORD-PORM8. 


A 

L 


11 


SENTENCES. 


.       f 

DC  r 


>-t ±  < 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


the  1-hook  series  are  named  pel,  bel,  tel,  etc.  See  Ls  1,  2,  and 
8.  These  hooked  or  double  letters  are  vocalized  like  other 
consonants,  as  blow,  glass,  total,  coeval.  But  the  double  let- 
ter is  not  used  if  a  vowel  occurs  between  the  two  consonant 
sounds  denoted  by  it;  thus,  in  bowl,  the  hook  cannot  be  em- 
ployed, because  the  vowel  o  occurs  between  b  and  I.  But  in 
blow,  in  which  the  sounds  of  6  and  I  blend,  the  double  conso- 
nant \  bel  is  used.  The  hook  may  and  should  be  employed  in 
all  places  where  no  vowel  intervenes  between  any  of  the  double 
consonants,  pel,  bel,  etc.,  given  in  Ll.  Sometimes  the  book  is 
used  in  cases  even  where  a  short  vowel  comes  between,  as  in 
tell,  till,  full,  etc.  This  is  common  in  words  of  more  than  one 
syllable,  as  delicacy,  collegiate,  L  3. 

139.  The  s-circle  is  prefixed  to  the  double  consonants  of 
the  1-hook  series  by  being  written  within  tlie  hook,  as  in  settle, 
sickle.    In  such  cases,  in  order  that  there  may  be  space  for 
it,  8  is    jrmed  quite  small  and  somewhat  flattened. 

140.  The  adjective  ending  ful  is  usually  expressed  by  the 
doubl    consonant./eJ,  as  in  playful. 

141  The  hooked  consonant  should  be  written  with  one 
strok^  of  the  pen.  By  so  doing,  not  only  is  speed  iacreased, 
but  the  liability  is  lessened  of  forming  the  hook  too  large  or 
too  cramped. 

142.    1    Write:    Assemble     assembly     available      battle 

2  blame  Jrianaeless   blank  blush  chapel  circle  claim  class 

3  eiergy  climax  close  club  clumsy  clothe  declaim  double 

4  emblem    employ  enclose  English  entTEIe    fable  faculty. 

5  festival  imply  implicit  globe   legal  Illegal   (el)   inflame 

6  level  local  mingle  ..admirable    novelty  noble  oblige  ob- 

7  stacle    parable    place    pledge    poetical    radical    reflect 

8  stable   staple  table    technical    initial*     tenable    dimple 

9  unable    syllable    uncle    variable     vital     vocal     ability 
10  Florida    display    disclaim     disclose     exclaim    invisible 

'71  possible  visible  academical  amicable  bashful  Bible 
12  blemish  bliss  block  blossom  cattle  chemical  classify 
18  closet  couple  likely  declivity  despicable  devil  displace 


^ 

V 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


14  dissemble     Episcopal    fatal    flesh    fling     flour    fluency 

15  foretell   (ar)   gable  glimpse  gloom  horrible  jingle   joy- 

16  ful  reply   label  miserable   nimble    placid   plague  plank 

17  plastic  plausible   pliable  pliant  plum  plump  plus  rival 

18  shelf  *   shingle  smuggle  stubble  survival  tackle  tangle 

19  terrible    click    tumble  typical    village    vehicle    wrinkle 

20  Clarence  HannibalJ^Olara  Flora;  (using  ar)  clear  clerk 

21  declare  implore  deplore  desirable    ramble  irresistable*; 

22  (vocalize)  applause    bleak  clay    clue  fleece  glue  clump 

23  ply  Abel   Mabel  blue;    1  pos.    clock   clog  gloss  clause 

24  climb  calling    evil    feeble    liable    official*    please    title 

25  idle;   3  pos.   allowable  clash  clasp  pupil  suitable;  phil- 

26  osophy*  philosopher*  kill.  (175—6—3). 
143.    PHRASES.    All-classes     all-places      all-respects     be- 
cause-possibly  I-call  in-any-possible  is-it-possible  it-is-clear- 
ly    take-place   tell-him    tell-such    tell-them    tell-you    that- 
difficulty   those-places    till-some  till-such  till-that   till-this 
till-you    which-has-possibly    which-possibly    with-equal-ad- 
vantage  with-equal-effect  would-possibly. 

EXERCISE  12. 

V  /  144.  1.  A  snake  declares  war  on-an  eagle.  2.  They  en- 
gage in  fearful  battle.  3.  They  display  no  delicacy. 
4.  They-make-the  air  vocal  with-the  clash  of  arms.  5.  The 
snake  has-the  advantage.  6.  He-will  likely  kill  the-poor 
eagle.  7.  A-rustic  looses  the-coil  of-the  snake.  8.  The 
eagle  flies  away  forthwith.  9.  The  escape  of-the  eagle  in- 
flames the  snake.  10.  His  poison  flies  into-the  rustic's 
milk  bottle.  11.  The-rustic  knows  nothing  of-the 
possible  evil.  12.  He  applies  the-bottle  to-his  lips. 
13.  But-the  eagle  flying  back  delivers  him.  14.  He  seizes 
the-bottle  with-his  claws  aud  carries  it  up  mto-the  sky. 

(103—2—1). 

145.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  They- will  continue  to-come  until- 
you  tell-him  that-it-will  most-likely  be  unnecessary  to-collect 
the  class  together  (4 — 1). 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


146. 


TRANSLATE. 


MNEMON1CAL  AIDS. 
Fig.  A.  Fitf.B. 

L-Hook  R-Hook 

L(eft)-Hand  R(ight)-Hand 

L (ess)  commonly  used    R(epeatedly)  used. 


SEMICIRCLES.  The  very  apt  little  stanza  of  Mr.  Benn  Pit- 
man will  greatly  aid  the  pupil  in  remembering  the  coal- 
escents: 

Floating  boats  are  ye,  yay,  yah; 

Capsized,  are  yaw,  yo,  you. 
Waning  moons  are  we,  way,  wah; 

And  waxing,  waw,  wo,  woo. 


QUESTIONS  FOB,  REVIEW. 

What  is  the  relative  size  of  the  sez-circle? — What  syllables 
does  it  represent? — Without  referring  to  the  book,  give  five 
words  in  which  this  circle  should  be  used. — How  may  it  be 
employed  in  phrasing? — What  is  the  name  applied  to  the 
shaded  m? — What  consonant  double  sounds  does  it  repre- 
sent?— How  is  it  used  in  phrasing? — How  many  w-coales- 
cents? — Y-coalescents? — Repeat  all  the  coalescents  in  or- 
der.— Name  those  which  bow  upwards; — downwards; — to 
the  right; — to  the  left. — What  is  the  form  of  character  which 
is  used  to  represent  coalescents? — How  do  they  compare 
with  the  vowel  signs  as  to  place  and  shading? — Name  five 
sign-words  which  are  represented  by  semi-circles. — Name 
the  1-hook  series. — Where  is  this  hook  located  with  reference 
to  straight  letters? — Curved  letters? — In  what  cases  must 
I  be  expressed  by  the  stem  instead  of  the  hook? — Name  five 
words  from  memory  in  which  the  1-hook  should  be  used. — 
Cite  cases  where  this  hook  is  used  in  phrasing. 

RrQUIREMENTS. 

Give  three  words  that  contain  the  sez-circle ; — the  1-hook; — 
emp; — 1-hook  and  iss; — iss  and  emp; — iss  and  sez; — 1-hook 
and  sez. — Render  the  following  skeleton  words:  Iss-k-sez, — 
iss-b-sez-t, — iss-k-emp, — m-l-sez, — pl-sez, — pl-emp, — gl-emp- 
iss,— fl-m-z, — kl-iss-r, — kl-iss-t, — kl-emp, — iss-m-gl. 

To  THE  TEACHER. — A  familiar  knowledge  of  the  word- 
signs  is  so  desirable  that  the  pupil  should  be  encouraged  to 
learn  them  as  well  as  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  itself.  Some 
students  commit  them  to  memory  in  the  order  in  which  they 
are  presented  in  this  book.  This  is  far  from  a  waste  of  time; 
indeed,  all  learners  would  find  it  time  saved  in  the  long  run 
to  do  likewise.  Every  teacher  who  intends  using  this  book 
to  some  extent  is  advised  to  commit  to  mind  the  title  of  each 
lesson  it  contains,  and  in  the  order  given. 

—75— 


LESSON  XTTT. 

B-HOOK  SERIES. — DIV.  1. 

148.  KEY.    1.    Per    ber    ter    der    cher    jer    ker    ger. 
2.    Pray  brow  gray  destroy   disturb  exaggerate  program 
crystal.    8.    Cross-eyed    cypress    quaker    trouble   diagram 
criticism  Nebraska   operator. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  4.  Appear  principal  prin- 
ciple practice  practical  liberty  member  remember 
number  brother  degree.  5.  Truth  true  doctor  dear 
during  dark  each-are  which-are  much-are  danger  larger. 
6.  Christian-ity  care  occur  cure  accurate  inaccurate 
accuracy  dear-sir  withdraw.  7.  Correct  character  liberty- 
of-the-people  liberty-of-the-press  Member-of-Congress 
Member-of-the-Legislature  practicable  proficiency. 

PHRASES.  8.  Any-person  I-am-truly  in-the-church  take- 
care  my-dear  Member-of-the-Bar  Christian-principles 
many-persons.  9.  All-churches  in-person  may-bring  such- 
appears  take-courage  was-truly  young-person.  10.  For 
key  see  list  words,  sec.  152. 

SENTENCES.  1.  The  eye  sees  what-it  brings  the-power  to 
see.  2.  Truth-and  ceremony  are  two  things.  3.  Characters 
never  change.  4.  Genius  is-the  faculty  of  growth.  5.  Life 
is-a  comedy  to-him  who  thinks,  and-a  tragedy  to-him  who 
feels.  6.  The-truth  of -truths  is  love.  7.  The-drama  is-the 
book  of-the  people.  8.  What  vigor  absence  adds  to-love. 

149.  Another  initial  hook,  written  on  the  left  of  the  stem, 
or  side  opposite  t/ie  l-kook,   indicates  the  added  r,  and  is 
attached  to  the  eight  straight  letters,  and  to  eight  of  the 
curves.    The  consonants  modified  by  the  attachment  of  this 
hook  are  called  per,  ber,  ter,  etc.    L  1.    The  r-hook  should 
always  be  employed  where  no  Arowel  occurs  between  the  two 
sounds  expressed  by  the  double  consonant,  as  in  pray,  brow, 
gray.    L.  2. 

150.  The  r-hook  occurs  mostly  at  the  beginning  of  words  ; 
but  sometimes  it  is  to  be  written  medially,  or  in  the  middle 
of  the  word,  as  in  destroy,  disturb.    Here  the  circle  is  located 
on  the  1  ft  side  of  the  stem — out  of  its  usual  position — in 

-76- 


t    A      \ 

»•  V'V 


}J!atr  13. 
1       /• 


X 


f. 


WORO-8IUN8. 


_  .....        \        A        .._9.._.5X_  ...........  -A        A    -( 


..._.(\  _ 

"    7 


^—^f)  /— 


7 

6 


WORD-FORMS. 


,»KVi)7 


SENTENCES. 


~"1    (VC~\T^~A. 

I         \\         ^o  V_p 

V-- 

MI  ru^ 

;s     c>. 


"T    xffi 


/  c, 


78  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

order  that  the  hook  may  be  prefixed  to  t.  Strictly,  however, 
it  is  not  a  hook,  but  an  offset,  which  serves  the  same  purpose. 
The  hook  is  sometimes  expressed  also  by  retracing  the  pre- 
ceding consonant,  as  in  program,  diagram.  Ls  2  and  3. 

151.  It  is  easy  for  the  learner  to  get  the  1  and  r  hooks 
mixed.  Figures  A  and  B  will  be  found  useful  as  memory 
helps.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  1-hook  is  obtained  by  bending 
the  index  finger  of  the  L-Hand  (L-eft  Hand).  On  the  con- 
trary, the  r-hook  is  produced  by  bending  the  first  finger  of 
the  R-Hand  (R-ight  Hand).  As  there  are  more  >  than  I 
sounds  in  our  language,  so  the  r-hook  occurs  more  frequently 
than  the  1;  and  the  r-hand,  also,  is  used  more  than  the  1-hand. 
"^152.  1  Write,  using  the  r-hook  and  \o\vels  :  Brace  breech 
2  bribe  broil  grow  brake  praise  tribe  utter  acre  brawl 
8  caprice  crape  crawl  crew  crow  dray  grape  grass 

4  growl  odor  pauper  powder  prize  prose  pry  slaughter 

5  taper  trace  trail  4oiiiuiuiLjtJtTTr  Beatrice  Bertha  Grace; 

6  1  pos.:     Greece    cry    creek    Greek.      Without    vowels: 

7  Abbreviate  approach  appropriate  -attoni&y__break  baker 

8  broke    breathe    brevity    breach    bring  _courags    crazy 

9  create  creator    critic  cruel    crusade  currency    deciv;i.-e 

10  democracy    depress    distress    drug    dress    drill    drink 

11  drop  drum    drunk  educator    embrace  encourage  extra 

12  extreme  proceed  trump    gradual  gfttsp  gravity  grocer 

13  impress    industry*    indusliiimu*    keeper    labor    ledger 

14  liberal     lucre     Ludicrous     major     maker     matrimony 
15~microscope  jnistress    neighbor    operate    paper  parallel 

16  precious  presence    press  pearl  prepare    pretty  precede} 

17  process  (sez)  progress  propose  prosper  provoke  redress 

18  reproach  soldier  treason  triumph  vapor  vigor  abridge 

19  April    arbitrary    ardor    ascribe    barber    beggar    betray 

20  produce  brass  broker   broom  brush    butcher  cathedral 

21  charter  chemistry  cherish  copper  courageous*  courtesy 

22  cracker    grub    crimson    criticise*    crook    crop    crucify 

23  crumb    crush    crutch    dexterous    digress    dipper    Peter 

24  garter  gracious  grumble  Hebrew  cream  fibre  manager* 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


79 


25  monogram     obtrusive  patrol  intrigue    personate  poker 

26  trustee  trap  track  trim  tropic  trunk  Ambrose  Andrew 

27  Edgar  Patrick;  1  pos.    Agree  crime  try  cross  daughter 

28  draw  dream  dry  across  eager  increase  preach. 

(187—6—8.) 

EXERCISE  13. 

153.  1.    He  that-takes  a  wife  takes  care.    2.    If-you  would 
create  something,  you-must-be  something.    3.    Prayer  is-the 
voice  of  faith.    4.    All  things  with-which  we  deal  preach  to 
usXo.  A-Member-of-the-Bar became  a-Member-of-Congress. 

l  He  spoke  in  praise  of-the  liberty-of-the-press.  7.  He  said 
^~that-it-should  publish  but-the  simple  truth.  8.  If  so,  the- 
liberty-of-the-people  would-be  in  no  danger.  9.  The-pupil 
who  wishes  to-become  a-quick  writer  should  practice  daily. 
10.  Dear-sir,  I-am  now  able,  and  I-will  write-you  in-these 
funny  characters  telling  you  the-news.  (104 — 2 — 1.) 

154.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    Your  brother  has-as-much  to-do 
as-a  New- York  ^aker  at  Christmas-time.  (6 — 1.) 


LESSON  XIV. 
K-HOOK  SERIES. — DIV.  2. 

156.  KEY.    1.    Fer    ver    thr    ther    sher   zhr   mer   ner. 
2.    Phrase   favor    throttle    bother    harsher   glazier   merge 
machinery.    8.    Virginia  either  Thursday  numerous  sugar 
farmer  tiger  generous. 

WORD-SIGNS.  4.  Every  very  Mr.  mere  remark  remark- 
able more  mercy  humor.  5.  There  their  they-are  other 
from  pleasure  measure  therefore  commercial.  6.  Hear 
nor  honor  honorable  manner  owner  universe  universal 
university. 

PHRASES.  7.  All-their  any-more  be-sure  each-other 
from-church  in-refereuce-to  in-respect-to  from-some-plarr. 
8.  From-the-plaee  in-the-same-manner  in-this-maniH-r 
many-more  more-likely  there-is-never  there-is-such  there- 
may-be.  9  and  10.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  160. 

SENTENCES.  1.  So  sad,  so  fresh,  the  days  that  are  no- 
more.  2.  You-arrive  at-truth  through  poetry,  and-I  ar- 
rive at  poetry  through  truth.  8,  Lay  a-bridge  of  silver  for- 
a  flying  enemy.  4.  What-is  becoming  is  honorable,  and 
what-is  honorable  is  becoming.  5.  The  eyes  of-other  peo- 
ple are-the  eyes  that  ruin  us.  6.  Wise  judges  are-we  of 
each-other. 

157.  In  writing  the  word  ^   oval,  the  1-hook  is,  accord- 
ing to  rule,  written  within,  or  on  the  concave  side,  of  the 
curve  v.    The  hook  cannot  be  written  conveniently  on  the 
opposite,  or  convex,  side  of  the  curve.    Then  how  shall  we 
write  over,  where  r  instead  of  I,  is  to  be  expressed  ?    This  is 

done     by    merely    reversing  v.  vl,    the     character  ^  vr 

resulting,  over  being  expressed  thus,  i.  The  reversing  of 
fel,  vel,  thl,  etc.,  brings  the  hook  upon  the  left  or  r-hook  side 
of  the  stems.  No  conflict  is  occasioned  thereby,  since  r  is 
not  attached  to  ~^  r  ~*\  w,  ;  s,  )  z.  LI. 

158.  To  express  the  added  r,  "-^  m  and  ^_^  n  are  modified 


;v    •> 


) 

*> 


WOHD-SION9. 


^\ 


WORD-FORMS. 


V- 


V 


V 


©  )  .f  ;  v 


83  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

by  both  prefixing  the  hook,  and  thickening  the  stem;  thus 
^"^  mr,  ^^  nr.  No  ambiguity  results  from  this  shading 

of  the  consonants  m  and  n,  since  no  hook  is  attached  to  either 
mp  or  ng.  See  merge,  machinery,  numerous,  generous.  Ls  2 
and  3. 

159.  In  some  word-forms  containing  mr,  where  it  is  in- 
convenient to  express  the  hook  it  is  entirely  omitted,  thick- 
ened x-v  m,  (mp),  being  employed  in  lieu  of  mr,  as  m  farm- 
er.   L  8. 

160.  Write:    1.    Rumor  tremor   Homer  energy*  dinner 
2  banner     exhonorate    lunar    over     tanner     Christopher 
8  Frauds   Frank  average*   offer    camphor    Denver  over- 
4  sight  Friday  silver  leisure   pressure  treasure  censure* 
6  exposure  inniivuiaaiy  diverge   livery  Luther  dishonor* 
6  perverse  throng  verb  verge  verse  Oliver  wager  Arthur 

^J  Roger    Victor     treacherous*     favorite   pffS^erb    prefer 

8  gather   &luiriff   three    umbrella   repress    slipper   spider 

\9  tragedy    -teag|c_  traitor     problem*     profess    professor* 

10  prolong  propriety  recur  prairie  preface  premise  proni- 

11  ium  primary  prior.      Vocalize,  throw;    1  pos.    auUw+P' 

12  authority  crisis  (sez),  decree  former  fever  froe  preside 
18  prime  minor  oppressive  prereTse   (sez)  price  Christmas; 

14  8  pos.    address    affirm   presume    scatter  -Bsmtw   troop 

15  through;  San  Francisco   apprehend.        (88-2:30 — 1:30). 

161.  PHRASES.    All -others     be-there     be-very     but-their 
do-their  from-a    from-among  from-this       from-him    from- 
many  from-our   from-you    from-your    had-their   it-1'"  their 
there-have  there-was  there-will     in-a-measure      they-are- 
so  through-many    ' 

EXERCISE   14. 

162.  1.    A-dog  crosses  a-bridge  with-a  piece  of  flesh  in-his 
mouth.    2.     He  sees  his-own   shadow  in-the    crook    bel'>w. 
8.    He  takes-it  to-be-that  of-sonoe^-other  dog  with-a  piece  of 
game  double  his-o\vn  in  size. C  4.    He  therefore  drops  his 
piece  and-vigorou&ly  attacks  the-other  dog.    5.    His  desire 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


is  to-take  the-larger  pitce  from-him.  6.  In-this-way  he 
loses  both  pieces.  7.  He  loses  that-which  he  grasps  for  in- 
thf-creok,  because-it-is-a  shadow.  8.  He  loses  his-own  be- 
cause-the-creek  washes  it  away.  (94 — 1  -.45 — :45). 

1G3.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  I-suppose  he-has  too-much  hon- 
or t  >-be-the  author  of-such-a  rumor  in-reference-to  Oliver 
tlif-philosopher.  (9—2). 


TRANSLATE. 


\ 


HINTS  TO  THE  STUDENT.    In  learning  the  list-words  a  good 

plan  is  to  write  the  proper  characters  in  a  column  at  the  left 

margin  of  a  sheet  of  practice  paper,  afterwards  filling  out 

each  line  by  writing  the  words  over  and  over,  gradually  in- 

;ng  the  speed. 

Always  carry  in  your  pocket  some  short-hand  book,  manu- 
scri  pt  or  exercise  to  read  at  leisure  moments,  while  traveling, 
waiting  for  cars  or  steamboats,  for  lazy  people  to  keep  ap- 
pointments, or  whenever  an  opportunity  for  a  few  minute's 
study  may  be  had.  The  sign-book  is  suitable  for  this  pur- 
pose. 


LESSON  XV. 

TRIPLE-CONSONANT  SERIES. 

165.  KEY.    1.    S-pr   s-br  s-tr   s-clr  s-chr   s-jr  s-kr   s-gr. 
2.    Spree   streak    soaker    cider    suffer    sooner    discourage 
subscribe.    8.    Secrecy   sister  prescribe    disgrace    sacrifice 
separate  disaster  supreme. 

WORD-SIGNS.  4.  Express  surprise  suppress  Scripture 
describe  secure  such-are  such- were  external  as-it-were. 
6.  Merciful  mortgage  neighborhood  overwhelm  probable 
probability  proper  property.  6.  New-Hampshire  West- 
Virginia  forgive  America  North-America  South-America 
disappear  disagree.  7.  Everlasting  more-or-less  perhaps 
messenger  apprehend  apprehensive  this-will. 
V__PHRASES.  8.  Very-much  was-as-much  here-and-there 
in-the-manner  I-assure-you  in-each-other  how-very  there- 
possibly.  9.  Nor-is-this  for-some-reason-or-other  nothing- 
more  there-are-some  there-is-as-much  there-is-probably 
Holy-Scriptures.  10 and  11.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  169. 

SENTENCES.  1.  March  grass  never  helps  the-farmer. 
2.  In  age  we  suffer  for-the  sins  of  our  youth.  8.  From  say- 
ing to  doing  is-a  long  stretch.  4.  The  stream  comes  to-the 
mill  from  afar.  5.  A  smooth  stream  washes  away  its  banks 
6.  Give  the-devil  his  due. 

166.  If  to  the  word  pray  the  s-circle  should  be  prefixed, 

the  word  ^f  spray  would  result.  If,  however,  the  hook 
should  be  omitted,  and  the  circle  written  in  its  place,  the 
character  °V  would  result.  This  character  is  used  to*  ex- 
press spr;  (it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  \  sp,  since  the  circles 
are  on  opposite  sides  of  the  stem.)  Hence  spray  is  properly 

written  \     Time  is  saved  and  nothing  lost  by  the  use  of 

the  triple  consonant.  See  L  1.  All  straight  stems  of  the 
r-hook  series  are  modified  in  this  same  manner  to  express  a 
preceding  s,  as  in  soaker,  cider,  L  2. 

167.  But  when  the  circle  is  to  be  prefixed  to      j  fr,  it 


15. 


1 


°\ 


^s, 
5 


8 
9 

10 
11 


WORD-FORMS. 


/     / 


VA 


\ 

* 


WORD-SIGNS. 


'N 


"T 


-ve 


( 

So 

' 


— t- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SffORT-BAXD. 


must  be  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  suffer ;   otherwise  it 

would  be  written  )  sr,  and  have  the  force  of  s-r  simply, 
instead  of  s-fr.  The  same  principle  holds  true  of  all  curved 
consonants,  vr,  thr,  shr,  etc.  See  suffer,  sooner,  L  2. 

168.  In  the  outlines  for  a  few  such  words  as  discourage 
and  subscribe,  where  it  is  inconvenient  to  write  the  r-hook, 
it  is  entirely  omitted,  r  being  readily  supplied  from  the  con- 
text. 

69.     1  Write :      String     spring     struck   -aetmrg*-    scribe 

2  -eeber~suffer  scrub  sltmuiih  strap  stress  eti'cLck  sumy- 

3  .cjwte-.uupusllrtUut*  -supper    stray    siijuaiiruu^L*;     1   {>«». 

4  strike    scream  ;    3  pos.    scrap    istrnttch.  strew.      Using 

5  both  the  1  and  r  hooks:    Agreeable  brutal  clamor  clatter 

6  flatter  flavor   proclaim    trsuel  triangle    trouble    verbal 

7  calibre  chronicle    clapper  clever   clover  ri'.ulle-  flutter 

8  girdle  glitter  grapple  fcudofiurc     perplex    propel  trifle 

9  triple  tropical  scruple  treble^struggle.    (52 — 1:30 — 1.) 

PHRASES. 

170.  Which-their  in-favor  nor-such  of-their  such-a- 
manner  that-there-are  their-reasons  there-are-now  there- 
are-persons  there-has-never  there-is-nothing  there-is-now 
there-is-possibly  through-as-many  till-their  very-drar  Y.TV- 
true  which-thcre  but-there  do-there  some-reason-or-otht-r 
very-many-of-them  very-rare  till-there  all-probability 
have-probably  may-probably  some-probability  will-perhaps 
will-probably  at-church. 

EXERCISE  15. 

171i  1.  Liars  should-have  quick  memories.  2.  Two 
eyes  see  much;  four  see  more.  3.  It  is  unwise  to  sing  triumph 
before  victory. '  4.  A-fox  with-a  straw  tail  is  afraid  that-it- 
will  catch  tire.  5.  The  shovel  makes  game  of-tlu;  poker. 
6.  To-a  person  baking  a-pie  you-may  give  a-piece  of-your 
cake2>  7.  Such-things  must-be  if-\vc  sell  ale.  8.  Too-many 
cooks  spoil  the-broth.  (67—1 : 15— :  30.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  87 

172.    SPEED  SENTENCE.    There-are-many  ways  to  kill  a-dog 
besides  hanging  him.  (8 — 1.) 

TRANSLATE. 

<i^ 


D  J.  _±L,  V 


DICTATION  PRACTICE. — When  two  or  more  per_^ns  meet 
together  for  dictation  practice  the  following  plan  may  be 
adopted:  Be  seated  all  atone  table.  Limit  your  attention 
to  the  lesson  upon  which  you  may  be  engaged.  Do  not  prac- 
tice for  speed  upon  any  exercise  until  you  have  first  learned 
to  phrase  and  outline  it  correctly.  Each  student  should  in 
turn  read  to  the  other  members  of  the  group,  the  exercise 
being  read,  not  from  the  print,  but  always  from  the  notes 
l;i<t  taken.  When  all  the  members  of  the  circle  have  read 
in  turn,  compare  the  last  draught  carefully  with  the  original, 
and  repeat  until  errors  cease  to  be  found.  Write  the  list- 
words  a  number  of  times,  reading  them  as  often.  Dictate 
slowly  at  first,  gradually  increasing  the  speed.  Afterwards 
ascertain  which  student  is  able  to  read  the  entire  list  in  the 
shortest  time.  In  dictating  an  exercise,  read  the  sentences 
in  the  natural  way,  not  as  a  clock  ticks,  but  as  they  would 
be  delivered  by  a  public  speaker,  allowing  the  intervals  to 
occur  between  clauses  rather  than  between  words.  When 
the  members  are  not  equally  advanced,  those  Who  can  do  so 
may  write  each  word  or  sentence  dictated  twice  or  three 
times,  or  oftener,  instead  of  once  only.  It  is  by  no  means 
necessary  that  all  the  members  of  such  circle  shall  have  made 
the  same  progress  in  order  to  derive  great  benefit  from  it. 


LESSON  XVI. 

KEL-HOOK,   ASPIRATE  TICK  AND  DOT. 

174.  KEY.    1.    Mel   nel  rel   ler   hw   hi  hr  hm  hk   hg. 
2.    Camel  tunnel  coral   color   Colorado  analyze    sentinel. 
8.    Temporal  globular  release  diagonal  original  millennial 
millennium.    4.    Hail  whisper  harm  hem  humbug  Hershcl 
horsewhip  hiccough.    6.    Abraham  mayhem  cahoot  hither 
hoax  hook     hecatomb  homologous.    6.    Likelihood  alcohol 
Hector  harbor  adhere  whiskey  Gaylord. 

WORD-SIGNS.  7.  Rely  reliable  real  reality  rail  roll 
rule  railroad.  8.  Railway  railway-car  railing  Jesus-Christ 
Lord-Jesus-Christ  only  unless  behalf. 

PHRASES.  9.  It-is-only  less-and-less  in-his-behalf  as- 
much-as-we  at-his-own-time  in-as-far-as  lower-and-lower 
in-this-respect.  10  and  11.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  178. 

SENTENCES.  1.  A-thing  of  beauty  is-a  joy  forever. 
2.  Custom  is-the  law  of  fools.  3.  Faith  is  necessary  to  vic- 
tory. 4.  Fear  has  many  eyes.  6.  Gayety  is-the  soul's 
health,  sadness  is  its  poison.  6.  Her  ample  page  is  rich 
with-the  spoils  of  time. 

175.  An  initial  hook,  written  quite  large  to  distinguish  it 
from  the  w-hook  (explained  in  the  next  lesson),  is  attached 
to  I,  r,  m,  and  n.    The  four  resulting  double-consonants,  sig- 
nifying Ir,  rl,  ml,  and  nl  (named  ler,  rel,  mel,  nel),  are  called 
the  Bel-hook  series.    Since  the   double-sound  lei  dc^js  not 
occur  frequently,  the  compound  stem  obtained  by  attaching 
the  large  hook  to  I,  is  employed  to  represent  the  commoner 
sound  ler,  as  in  color.    See  Ls  1  and  2. 

176.  A  short  tick,  signifying  the  aspirate  h,  is  prefixed  to 
I,  r,  m,  k,  and  g.    It  is  so  written  as  to  form  a  sharp  angle 
with  the  stem  to  which  it  is  attached.     It  is  placed  on  the 
outside  of  curves,  and  when  joined  to  other  letters  must  be 
perfectly  straight,  to  prevent  its  being  mistaken  for  a  hook. 
See  hail,  whisper,  harm,  etc.    L  4. 

177.  In  Abraham  (L  5)  h  could  not  well  be  used,  since  it 
would  make  an  insufficient  angle  at  its  junction  with  ^^  m. 
In  this  and  similar  cases  the  aspirate  is  denoted   by  a  small 

-88- 


; 


Plate  16. 


WORD-FORMS. 


10 


SKNTKNCBS. 


\  -^-i       -r\ 

V^^-      xTN^-^  i.1  / 


^  '  r> 


\k 

D-SIGNS.  \  ^ 


XL  .....  ,  ... 

<S  Q_X 


r 


r 


90  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHOBT HAND. 

dot  written  just  before  the  vowel,  as  in  mayhem,  hither. 
This  dot  is  written  by  the  side,  not  at  the  end,  of  the  dash 
vowels,  as  in  cahoot.  L  5. 

"^  178.  1  Using  the  large  hook,  write  :  Animal  signal  penal 
2  finally*  family  nominal  relish  paternal  relic  criminal 
8  colonel  scholar  abdominal  autumnal  barrel  canal 

4  chronology  gallery  polar   pi««tl  asalogy*  spinal  relate 

5  temporal*    tribunal    venal  ;     1    pos.    collar   folionee*. 

6  Using  the  tick  :    Holiday  harp  hell  hQmte-kle  wheel  j*4rip 
7-wbistle    hair    horse.    Vocalize,   hare  heal     hoax      hum 
8  hale  hall -hire  hollow  *ag.  (46— 1:15— :  45.) 

PHRASES. 

179.  Have-only  as-it-seems-to-me  as-much-as-it-is  as- 
much-as-they  as-much-as-was  at-these-times  in-his-own-case 
in-the-case-of  it-is-also  long-time-ago  of-something-to-his- 
advantage  on-such-a  since-it  sinee-nothing  since-which 
so-it-seems-to-me  such-as-may  such-is-the-case  that-has- 
never  that-is-nothing  that-is-so  that-is-to-be  to-his-advan- 
tage  to-his-knowledge  to-his-own-advantage  to-which-you- 


EXERCISE  16. 

180.  1.    Unto-the  pure  all  things  are  pure.     2.    For  hope 
is  but-the  dream  of-those-that  wake.    8.    Innocence  is  always 
unsuspicious.    4.     Kings    ought  to-be    kings  in-all    things. 
5.    Knowledge  is  power.    6.  Laugh  if-you-are  wise.    7.  Ami- 
he  that-livt's  to-live  forever  never  fears  dying.    8.    To-li\f- 
long  it-is-necessary  to-live  slowly.  (56 — 1 — :  20.) 

181.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    He  thinks  that-it-is-possible  for- 
the  colonel  to-ride  all-the-way  to  Colorado  on  horseback. 

(5-1.) 

CAUTION. — Be  careful  to  make  your  hooks  and  circles 
quite  small,  and  avoid  the  common  error  of  getting  them  on 
the  wronji  side  of  the  st«'in. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SffORT-HA.\D.  91     « 


182. 


To  THE  TEACHER. — The  zest  which  the  element  of  compe- 
tition lends  to  a  class  exercise,  may  be  utilized  in  the  matter 
of  reading  as  well  as  writing.  A  few  brief  directions  are 
submitted  for  the  instructor's  benefit.  First:  Read  an  exer- 
cise plainly  and  slowly  to  the  class.  Those  who  miss  any 
words  may  fill  them  in  afterwards.  The  first  object  is  to  see 
how  many  can  read  it  through,  without  error,  in  a  limited 
number  of  minutes.  Second:  How  many  can  read  it  through 
without  having  **  use  at  any  time  more  than  five  seconds? 
Third:  How  many  can  read  for  the  space  of  one  minute  with- 
out pausing  at  any  time  more  than  three  seconds?  Fourth: 
Who  can  read  the  entire  exercise  in  the  least  time?  Fifth: 
Who  can,  without  error,  cover  the  most  ground  in  thirty  or 
sixty  seconds?  Sixth:  Call  on  a  pupil  to  read  until  he  stops 
three  seconds.  The  person  who  first  sees  an  error  maybe 
allowed  to  continue  in  his  stead.  Seventh:  To  cultivate  an 
ability  of  daily  use  in.  reporting,  mention  some  prominent 
word,  which  occurs  but  once  in  the  exercise,  the  point  of 
competition  bring,  who  can  find  it  first  in  his  iiotcs? 

All  these  teats  should  be  frequently  repeated.  The  list- 
words  should  also  be  employed  as  an  exercise  for  these  pur- 
P-..-CS.  In  all  such  trials  the  learner  must  be  required  to  use 
only  his  own  notes  for  such  reading  and  reference. 


LESSON  XVII. 
W-HOOKS,   BRIEF  WAY  AND   YAY. 

183.  KEY.    1.  Tw  dw  kw  gw  wl  wr  wm  wn.    2.  Twig 
dwell  quiet  languish  quail  tweezers  twinkle  twill  twitter. 
3.    Wail  swear  swim   wilderness  quorum  welfare  Walter 
Wednesday  willing.    4.    William  choir  wine-glass  squawk 
squash   quoth    wharfage    whale.    5.    Wage    wedge    wave 
unweighed   wax   wag    wad  wot.    6.    Yore   Yates   yarrow 
Yeddo  yacht  yawl  woof  yule. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  7.  We-are  where  aware  we- 
will  while  well  awhile  when  whence.  8.  With-me  with- 
my  with-him  we-may  we-may-be  with-whom  whenever 
whensoever.  9.  As-well  very-well  where-ever  welcome 
with-reference-to  with-respect-to  commonwealth. 

PHRASES.  10.  Everywhere-else  is-it-worth-while  it-is- 
worth-while  on-oue-side  that-is-only  this-one-thing  when- 
they-were.  11.  Whereby -you-may  as- well-as  worse-and- 
worse  with-one  working-classes  works-of-God.  12  and  13. 
For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  187. 

SENTENCES.  1.  We-are  near  waking  when  we  dream 
that-wedream.  2.  When  you  give,  give  with  joy  and  smiling. 
8.  Necessity  does  everything  well. 

184.  A  large  hook,  signifying  an  added  w,  is  prefixed  to 
t,  d,  k  and  g.    It  is  struck  on  the  1-hook  side.    The  double 
consonants  thus  formed  have  the  force  of  x    "  w,  kw  and  gw, 
as  in  twig,  dwell,  quiet,  etc.    L  2. 

185.  For  two  or  three  reasons  "^  way  and  f  yay  are 
sometimes  expressed  by  shorter  signs  known  as  Brief  Way 
and  Yay.    Either  of  the  two  horizontal  semi-circles,    c  and 
3    ,  may  be  used  to   express  w,  and  either  of  the  two  vertical 
semi-circles,  «  or  />,  may  signify  y.    In  every  case,  choice 
must  be  made  of  that  sign  which  forms  a  good  angle  with  the 
stem  to  which  it  is  prefixed.    See  wage,  wedge,  wave,  yacht, 
etc.    See  Ls  5  and  6.    These  brief  signs  are  chiefly  used  in 
cases  where  "^  w  and  f  y  are  not  convenient,  or  when  their 
use  does  not  secure  angular  outlines. 

—98— 


94  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  snORT-HA^J). 

186.  But  whenever  w  occurs  before  f  I,  /  r,s~^  in,  or 
^_x  n,  the  first  of  the  two  half-circles    c  is  used  ;  and  it  is  so 
modified,  or  adaptc-l,  when  joined  to  these  letters,  as  to  form 
an  initial  hook,  as  in  w!,  wr,  win,  wn.    L  1.    It  is  important 
to  clearly  understand  that  this  hook,  which  is  derived  from 
the  brief  w,  is  itself  the  w,  and  after  the  analogy  of  the  s-cir- 
cle,  is  read  before  the  consonant  stem  to  which  it  is  prefixed. 
This  hook  differs  from  the  r-hook,  or  the  large  w-hook,  just 
explained,  for  instance,  in  this  respect,  that  in  c — acre,  r  is 

read  after  k,  whereas  in  c wine,  the  hook  w  is  read  before  n. 

See  wail,  swear,  swim,  etc.    Ls  3  and  4.    The  aspirate  tick 
may  be  prefixed  to  the  w-hook,  as  in  wharfage,  whale.    L  4. 

187.  Using  tw,  dw,  etc.,  write  :    1  QuiU   squeal   squirm 
2  squeak    squad    squaw    squirrel*    squash    quiz     Gaelph 
8  qnizical    equator*     quake    quietly  squabble  squiL    quip 

4  quiver  squall.     \V-hook:       Wealth    wall    ware    beware 

5  worm  wolf  swoon  Edwin  worker*  won  willingly*  work 

6  worth  worthless  worthlessly  wtrrthlrs-nt'ss  worthy  well 

7  willing   window  one    wear  warm    acquire    weary    wool 

8  Wales  wane  wean   willow  wire.  (50 — 1:15 — :45.) 

PHRASES. 

188.  Any-one   by-one  for-one   if-we-are  it-is-one  no-one 
of-one     one-way      one-of-these-days     nor-which      this-one 

"when-it      when-shall      when-that      when-they      while-they 
worth-notice  worth-while  as-well-as-possible. 

EXEUCISE   17. 

189.  1.    The-laborer  is  worthy  of-his  hire.    2.    In-lovo 
we-are  all  fools  alike.    3.    He  who  aspires  to  nothing,  who 
creates  nothing,  is  unworthy  of-living.    4.    Love  may  hope 
where  reason  would  despair.    5.     He-is  no  fox  that  hath  but- 
one,  hole.    6.    When-the  wine  is-in  the  wit  is  out.    7.    Stay 
but-a  while,  you  lose  a-mile.    8.    There-is  but-one  Paris. 
9.    We  place,  a  >IL>  nal  Hag  of  red  color  on-tho  railroad  near- 
the  tunnel  to  signify  danger.    10.    The-teacher  offers  a-pri/e 
for-an  exercise  t  hat-is  really  correct.     11.  It-N-a  family  h 

of  bay  color,  and-every  pupil  should  try  to  win  it  if-possihJe. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HAND. 


95 


12.  There-is-no  harm  in-having  a  holiday  once-in-a  while. 
18.  But  it-would-be  well  if-the  scholar  should  take-them 
only  rarely.  (136—2:15—:  45.) 

190.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    Beware  of  sitting  by-the  railway- 
car  window  while  we-are  crossing  over  the-dangerous  bridge. 

(6-1.) 

191.  TRANSLATE. 


... '  •-)  r    .  <s 


(  .  .     X      ® 


v> P....X®    j  ....I.....:,  f  v.f...i. 


To  THE  TEACHER.— Time  is  valuable,  and  too  much  of  it 
must  not  be  spent  in  waiting  on  Students  who,  for  any  rea- 
son, have  not  learned  the  lesson  well  enough  to  read  off  any 
portion  of  it  instantly  when  called  upon.  The  learner  who 
is  dull,  but  earnest,  deserves  the  teacher's  indulgence;  but 
the  idler  must  not  be  allowed  to  waste  time  which  belongs  to 
the  class. 


LESSON  xvm. 

F-HOOK. 

192.  KEY.    1.    P-f   b-f   t-f  d-f   ch-f  j-f  k-f  g-f   h-f   r  f 
2.    Cough    cave    puff    beef    tough    deaf    chaff  Jove    huff 
roughs.    3.    Hoofs    strives    relief   dwarf   prophesy   havoc 
rove  heave  provincial. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGHTS.  4.  Onght-to-have  whatever 
it-would-have  out-of  •  which-ought-to-have  whichever 
which-have  which-would-have  prove  approve.  5.  Such- 
ought-to-have  such-have  such-would-have  each-will-have 
which-will-have  much-will-have  careful  belief  believe. 
6.  Differ  different  difference  try-to-have  poverty  derive 
twelve  it-will-have  set-off  set-forth.  7.  Which-are-to-have 
whieh-were-to-have  such-are-to-have  such-were-to-have 
govern  government  said-to-have  whoever  who-have. 
8.  Just-had  laws-of-life  1  a ws-of- health  is-said-to-have  ever- 
lasting-life ever-and-ever  forever-and-ever. 

PHRASES.  9.  Must-come  must-have  so-much  I-am-sat- 
isfied  by-wire  by-rail  telegraphic-messages.  10.  To-which- 
you-refer  course-of-business  agreeable-to-you  how-many- 
passengers  by-express  those-who-have  we-always. 
11.  Right-away  right-of-way  this-property  House-of-Repn-- 
sentatives  by-United-States-express  Common-carrier  dur- 
ing-the-summer-season . 

SENTENCES.  1.  Poverty  and-love  are  difficult  to  hide. 
2.  True  love  never  grows  hoary.  3.  If  Jack  is  in  love  he- 
is  no  judge  of  Jill's  beauty.  4.  He  who-would  have  love 
must-give  love.  5.  He  that  hath  no  jealousy  hath  no  love. 

193.  The  hooks  that  have  been  learned  in  the  past  few 
lessons  are  termed  initial  hooks,  because  they  are  written  at 
the  beginning  of  letters.    Final  hooks  are  those  which  are 
placed  at  the  end  of  stems.    The  first  of  these,  called  the 
f-hook,  is  attached  to  straight  consonants  only,  and  lias  the 
force  of  for  v.    See  cough,  cave,  puff,  etc.    L  2.    This  hook 
is  invariably  written  on  the  right-hand,  or  circle  side,  of  the, 
stem,  and  is  used  only  in  connection  with  the  ten  straight 
letters  shown  in  L  1.    A  following  s  may  be  expressed  by 

-90— 


glate  18. 


WORD-SKINS. 


/ 


\ 


L    L_|__£_/      /       .../_ 


L    I     L 

2    ...z- 


1 


\, 


11 

SENTENCES.' 


9... 


C    C  _i 
C 


/ 


./x-v 

-/ 


^. 

f 


98  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAX-D. 

•writing  the  circle  within  the  hook,  as  in  hoofs,  strives.    L  3. 

194.  The  fact  that  either  oneof  any  pair  of  cognate  sounds 
may  be  represented  by  the  same  sign,  with  no  danger  of 
ambiguity,  has  been  fully  shown  in  the  case  of  the  circle, 
which  is  sometimes  used  for  ft  and  sometimes  for  z,  as  sen<e 
may  demand.    This  plan  is  safe  because  s  and  z  are  similar 
sounds.    So  al^so  are  f  and   v.    Hence  no  uncertainty  of 
meaning  results  from  using  a  single  hook  to  express  both,  as 
in  the  sentence,  "They  may  well  c    *,  considering  their  cause 
of  e — '."    It  is  easy  to  determine  here  when  the  short-hand 
character  c — "  should  be  read  grief,  and  when  grieve. 

195.  Since  this  hook  is  attached  to  straight  letters  only, 
the  stems  V_«/"  and  V_  v  must  be  used  whenever  forv  are 
to  be  added  to  any  curved  letter;  for  example,  ^r^  knave  is 

written  with  the  stem  V.  v,  f°r  the  reason  that,  according 
to  the  rule,  the  hook  cannot  be  attached  to  the  curve  —  n  to 
express  the  following  v.  F,  like  the  circle  .•»,  is  written  on 
the  left,  not  the  right-hand  side,  of  up-strokes.  See  rove, 
heave,  L  3. 

196.  Using  the  f-hook,  write:    1  Cuff  root  devout  crave 

2  hive  bereave  beverage    bluff  cuvalry  cavil  deaf   dwarf*  ! 

3  gave    glove    gruff    incentive    octave    primitive    province  j 

4  river  rough  scoff  sensitive  strife  strive   David    Stephen;  ^ 

5  1  pos.  drive  grieve  grief.  (30— :40 — :'JO.) 

PHRASES. 

197.  Be-satisfied     they-beiieve     think -perhaps     thi.«-difTi- 
culty  to-satisfy  you-refer  book-keeper  charge-(of-the)-  1ms-, 
iness     half-rate     of-importanee     by-telegram     for-the-mail 
how-many-cases  in-error  in-this-case  over-charges  saniple- 
cases    telegraphic-dispatches    this-claim     time-table    very- 
important    very-irregular    very-regular    very-many    your- 
reply  your-telegram. 

EXEKCISE   18. 

J98.    l.    Beauty  buys  no  beef.    2.    Love  £nows  no  meas- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


ure.  3.  Likely  lies  in-the  mire  while  unlikely  goes  over. 
4.  Ths-devil  was  sick,  the-devil  a-monk  would-be.  5.  The- 
devil  grew  well,  the-devil  a-monk  was  he.  6.  You-may 
safely  give-a  rope  to-one  who  talks  of  hanging.  7.  Fish  and 
visitors  smell  in  three  days.  8.  What  once  were  evils  are 
now  the-manners  of-the  day.  9.  Joys  are  our  wings;  sor- 
rows are  our  spurs.  (75 — 1:15 — -.25.) 

199.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  Yon-mnst-be  governed  by-the 
la  \vs-of -health  if -you  would  have  relief  from  sickness  and- 
distress.  (o — 1.) 


200. 


TRANSLATE 


%  '  <l    s~   L.     ( 


L 


\ 


flTV    _     ...I 


„  x 


LESSON  XIX. 
N-HOOK. 

201.  KEY.    1.    P-n   b-n   t-n   d-n  ch-n   j-n    n.-n    g-n  h-n 
r-n.    2.    Tone  roan  twine  queen    Eugene  adjourn  econo- 
my brain.    3.    Sustain  stricken  abstinence  cistern    strain 
chagrin  tangible  Unitarian.    4.    Henry  discipline  barbar- 
ian  tenacious  Conrad  Michigan  sudden  Spanish. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  5.  Happen  punishment 
spoken  begin  begun  began  religious  religion  general 
imagine.  6.  Denominate  denomination  denominational 
providential  doctrine  darken  eternal  benevolent  beiu-vo- 
lence.  7.  Question  questionable  western  northwestern 
European  such-a-one  at-length  determine.  8.  Circum- 
stance circumstances  beneficial  larger-than  rather-than 
again-and-again  over-and-over-again  Washington. 

PHRASES.  9.  As-far-as-can  as-far-as-you-can  as-much-as- 
can  a.s-much-as-can-be  as-soon-as-can-be  as-soon-a.s-it-can- 
be  been-done  been-taken.  10.  Can-you  have-spoken  who- 
lias-done  nor-can  it-is-plain  so-that-there-haf  -been  call- 
upon.  11  and  12.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  203. 

SENTENCES.  1.  If-you-wish  to-marry  suitably,  marry  your 
equal.  2.  There-is-no  fear  in  love.  3.  Hope,  alas,  it-is  our 
waking  dream.  4.  How  populous,  how  vital  is-the  grave. 
5.  Humor  is  wit  and-love. 

202.  The  next  final  hook,  signifying  n,  is  annexed  to  both 
straight  and  curved  stems.    When  joined  to  stiaight  letters 

I    it  is  written  on  the  side  opposite  the  f-hook,  as  m  ione,  roan, 
'   twine,  L  2.    The  n-hook,  when  attached  to  up-strokes,  is 
necessarily  placed  on  the  right-hand  side,  as  h-n,  r-n,  L  1. 

203.  Vocalize:    1  Cain  chain    dawn  dine  pain    rainbow 

2  stain  spine  tone  bane  bean  bone  dean  deign   pan    pin 

3  tin  pine  reign  Jane  Jean  join  keen   coin  dainty  can- 

4  opy    marine    acorn    spoon    beacon.     Without   vowels: 

5  Again  been  can  run  stone  ten  pen  gain  abstain   bunch 

6  burn  corn  cotton  deacon   surgeon   denounce*  abandon 

7  detain    pinch  disdain    kitchen   Latin    mechanic    mourn 

8  obtain    ton    candy    hen    upon    skin    done    open    y 

—  10.1—    . 


Pate  19, 


\ 


gj- 

P       S         \  P/7       °i          1 — ' 

3^  I— D      V  r  3          J  /]          ^1/° 

<-S>  </ 

4^^    I         VX/7         J     r-^     O 

^  OX  ^T) 

_    WORD-SIGNS.  /  / 

,                 \                  \ 
q.__.\_,,_ ^\-_,..       ^  „ —...™ ™^^^ . 

aj_l    ^L_, L 1 3 

8j>      ^  u, 

*"S^C^  ^^.-i- 

J  <      ^ 

WOBD-FOP.M9.  Ot 

/     CX*  XP     A 

o 

^O  '*    \  -^ 

SENTENCES.          ' 


102  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

9  cannon    sponge    ordain    origin    pagan    reckon    weapon 

10  retain    scorn*    taken    turn    obstinate     torn     vacancy* 

11  denote    wagon    ribbon    banish    waken    barn*    beckon 

12  tinge    bench     born     bounty    canton     canvass     captain 
18  chicken  chin  county  cunning  den  din  disjoin  expunge 

14  foreign*     hurricane     laconic     maiden     mitten      panic 

15  Austin    Dan    John    enjoin    gone    attain;    3  pos.    June 

16  brown  town  down;    (using  ar)  organ  Oregon;   (1-hook) 

17  chaplain*  planet   blown  glen    plunge  Blanch;    (r-hook) 

18  drone    branch    libertine    train    drench    stricken    groan 

19  grown  trench  retrench  virgin  chronic.    (135 — 3 — 1:30) 

PHRASES. 

204.  As-has-been    which-has-been    as-well-as-can-be    a>- 
well-as-it-can-be     be-done    be-so    but-can     can-be     can-do 
can-have    can-it    can-it-be    can-never    bad-been    has-been 
has-done  have-been    have-done  have-taken    how-can   sudi- 
a-plan    such-as-can    such-can    such-has-been    that-has-been 
that-plan    they-have-been  this-has-been    till-then  to-which- 
you-can  upon-which  was-done  which-can  you-may-then. 

EXERCISE  19. 

205.  1.  Pain  may-be  said  to  follow  pleasure  as-its  shadow. 
2.     Peace  is  rarely  denied  to-the  peaceful.    3.    Pity  is  akin 
to-love.    4.   Pity  is  love  when  grown  into  excess.    5.  Prayer 
is  to  religion  what  thinking  is  to  philosophy.    6.    To-pray  is 
to-make    religion.      7.    tie  that-has-no    cross    deserves    no 
crown.    8.    The-Bible  is-a  window  in-this  prison  of  hope, 
through  which  we  look  into  eternity.    9.    Nothing  speaks 
our  grief  so  well  as-to  speak  nothing.    10.    Speaking  much 
is-a  sign  of  vanity.     11.  The  soul  knows  no  persons.     12.  He 
who-is  in  evil  is  also  in-the  punishment  of-evil.     13.    The- 
rose  is  fair,  but  fairer  we  it  deem,  for- that  sweet  odor  which 
doth  in-it  live.     14.    Keep  true  to-the  dreams  of-th^  youth. 

(128— 2— :40.) 

206.  SPEED   SENTENCE.    It-has-been   spoken   again-aml- 
again  by-the    chaplain  that-the  doctrine  of-the  Christian- 
religion  is-that  life  is  eternal  rather-than  a-brief  span  only. 

(7—2.) 


To  THE  TEACHER. — A  pleasant  recreation,  and  valuable 
discipline,  are  both  combined  in  the  following  described  ex- 
ercise, designed  to  cultivate  verbal  memory.  Fens  should  be 
laid  aside  by  the  class,  and  dose  attention  given.  One  of  the 
exercises  in  this  book  may  be  selected  for  the  purpose.  Read 
off  distinctly  a  short  sentence.  Call  on  a  member  to  repeat 
it.  If  he  fails  in  the  slightest  particular,  pass  to  the  ntxt. 
Bear  in  mind  that  one  of  the  chief  purposes  is  to  impress 
upon  the  pupils  the  importance  of  precision  in  reporting. 
Not  only  must  the  pupil  return  the  identical  words,  but  repeat 
them  in  the  exact  order  in  which  they  were  pronounced  by 
the  instructor.  Gradually  proceed  to  longer  sentences. 
After  a  few  drills,  some  pupils  will  be  able  to  give  back  sen- 
tences containing  thirty  or  forty  \v  >rds.  Occasionally  read 
two  short  sentences,  requiring  the  learner  to  repeat  both, 
giving  the  last  one  first. 


LESSON 

N-HOOK,  CONTINUED. 

208.  KEY.    1.    V-n   th-n  z-n  zh-n    ng-n  mp-n  w-n  y-n. 
2.    Fawn  noun  varnish  menace    fringe  iron    financial    al- 
manac.    3.     Means    thence     mechanism     density    dense 
chance   transpire    resistance.     4.    Punctuate     punctuation 
June   than    examine    fancy    intrinsic    minstrel.    5.     Learn 
amanuensis  tavern  silence  ransom  Kansas    credence  ven- 
geance. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  6.  Men  man  human  audi- 
ence providence  opinion  union  heathen  within.  7.  Heaven 
organize  darkens  darkness  upon-his  opens  some-one  our- 
own  experience.  8.  Obedience  responsible  more-than  at- 
once  every-one  cross-examine  human-life  deliverance. 

PHRASES.  9.  For-instance  in-his-situation  all-your-own 
by-his-opinion  by-some-means  by-means-of  have-shown 
human-being.  10.  In-his-opinion  in-the-mean-time  no- 
more-than  this-instance  all-circumstances  working-man 
all-situations.  11  and  12.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  218. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Kings'  chaff  is  worth  other  men's  corn. 
2.  A-man  may  love  his  house  well  though  he  never  rides  on- 
its  roof.  8.  It-is  rare  to  see  a  rich  man  religious.  4.  No 
man's  religion  ever  survives  his  morals. 

209.  The  n-hook  is  also  attached  to  curves,  as  in  fawn, 
noun,  varnish,  etc.,  L  2.    Since  a  hook  can  conveniently  be 
written  only  within,  or  following  the  direction  of  a  curve, 
but  one  hook  can  be  attached  to  this  class  of  letters.    This 
hook  is  properly  chosen  to  express  n,  rather  than  f  and  v, 
for  the  reason  that  n  occurs  rruch  more  frequently  than  both 
the  other  two. 

210.  When  the  n-hook  is  joined  to  a  curve,  a  following  s 
may  be  expressed  by  placing  the  circle  within  the  hook,  as  in 
means,  thence,  mechanism,  L  8.    At  the  end  of  a  word,  how- 
ever, the  two  consonants  ns  are  expressed,   after  straight 
letters,  by  locating  the  circle  on  the  n-hook  side,  as  in  dense, 
chance,  resistance,  L  3.    But  when  ns  follows  a  curve,  the  cir- 

-104— 


$iate  20. 


V>  C  J 


2        Vi 
3 

4    V 


WORD-SIGHS. 


\ 

\ 

d 


10 I 

WOBD-rOBJiS. 

rv 

11 


rv   s-i     I 

V;  J  —  -> 

\ 


12 

(T 


0  £ 


J         / 


-V 


/  / 

C     I 


c-xfb         r 
__________________  J 

f 


V*^'^ 


J 


V 

—  ^N 

*j 

' 

J   C    1 

<-/  ^O 


106  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

cle  is  necessarily  written. within  the  hook,  as  in  ^^  vines;  If 

written  otherwise  it  would  express  v^,  vice  instead. 

211.  Btu  this  principle  does  not  apply  when  n  is  medial, 
that  is,  occurring  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  even  though  joined 
to  a  straight  stem.    See  mechanism,  density,  L  3.    To  illus- 
trate, the  character  — o —  is  ambiguous,  for  it  may  be  read 
either  k-skr  or  kns-k.    To  avoid  this,  k-skr  is  written  — s — 

and  kns-k  thus:  3 —  When,  on  account  of  the  peculiar 
formation  of  an  outline,  the  hook  cannot  well  be  written,  n 
is  often  entirely  omitted,  as  in  transpire,  L  3.  In  such  cases 
n  is  supplied  readily  from  the  context. 

212.  The  n-hook  is  frequently  made  use  of  in  phrasing  to 
express  than,  one,  and  own,  as  in  some-one,  our-own,  more- 
than,  Ls  7  and  8. 

213.  1  Using  the  n-hook:     Lean     loan     Ethan     Julian 

2  Adaline    Maine    main    known    none    coffin    campaign* 

3  cognomen     dominion*    earu   (ar)    finish*     infancy     ar- 

4  range*  (ar)    Italian  lengthen    machine    maintain*  man- 

5  age    minute     saloon    Monday     monarch*    monotonous 

6  Roman    season*    sermon  (ar)   situation    then   specimen 

7  villian   vain    anonymous    German    French    London  ad- 

8  monish    amen    arraign  (ar)    battalion    brilliancy*    cle- 

9  mency  diminish    diminutive  domain    feminine  finance* 

10  frown    fun     infringe    launch     lone    lunch     minimum* 

11  monopolize     monopoly     moon     muslin      ocean      omen 

12  orphan     outline     permanence     million*    phenomenon* 

13  Prussian  raven    refine  refrain  shun    summon   sunshine 

14  tavern*    thin    throne    tuition*    urn  (ar)    van      vanish 

15  venom    vine    violin     workman     Aaron     Allen     Alonso 

16  Benjamin    Franklin*  Jonathan    Napoleon    Nathan    Or- 

17  lando  Solomon    Helen  Josephine  Lillian   Susan;    1  p<>s. 

18  even    evening    often    line    mine    mean    meaning    line 

19  shine  thine;   3  pos.   noon.  Fence  lance    opulence    pesti- 

20  lence    ransom*  renounce*  patience    excellence*  thence 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


107 


!  21  violence    France  silence   lonesome    specimens    cadence 

f  22  decadence  glance  guidance  occurrence*  bronze   prince 

]  23  residence  resistance  semblance  tense  distance  pretence 

j  24  expense     trance    transitory    dense     instance    dispense 

{  25  extensive  eloquence*  disdains  detains  Lawrence  Penn- 

I  26  sylvania*     Wisconsin*;     8  pos.    chance     dance     towns 

}  27  appliance    trac^pose     transpire     organism     transverse 
28  transcribe.  (161—3—1:30.) 

PHKASES. 

214.  All-means  and-U;en  by-the-means  by-which-means 
do-you-mean  for-even  have-known  in-mine  in-vain  many- 
a-man  my-opinion  one-man  some-means  some-one-or-other 
sons-of-men  such-a-man  than-in-the  that-a-man  this-even- 
ing  this-opinion  what-man  what-means  working-man 
which-is-know*i  will-thence  within-a  that-is-necessary. 


215. 


TRANSLATE. 


108  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

EXERCISE  20. 

216.  1.    Men  are  April  when-they  woo,  December  when- 
they  wed.    2.    All  of-heaven  we- have  below.    3.    Nothing 
maintains  its  bloom  forever;  age  succeeds  to-age.    4.    To 
err  is  human,  to  forgive  divine.    5.    Many  men  know  how 
to  flatter,  few-men  know  how  to-praise.    6.    Learn  to-lal><>r 
and-to  wait.    7.    No  man  flatters  the-woman  he-truly  loves. 
8.    Love  is-a  reality  which-is  born  in-the  fairy  regions  of 
romance.    9.    Shallow  men  believe  in  luck;  strong  men  be- 
lieve in-cause-and-effect.  (83 — 1:15 — :25.) 

217.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    Every-one  who-begins  the  study 
of  human-life  will  believe  more-than  ever  before  in  Provi- 
dential guidance.  ;5 — 1 . ) 


LESSON  XXT. 

SHT7N-HOOK. 

218.  KEY.  1.  Caution  auction  passion  option  station 
separation  section  secretion  occupation.  2.  Ambition 
remuneration  translation  missionary  relations  associations 
veneration  abbreviation.  3.  Diction  election  portion  re- 
ception obligation  fraction  suspicion.  4.  Dictionary 
exhibition  restriction  plantation  dejection  ction  pro- 
jection. 5.  Transgression  assertion  exception.*!  additional 
prevention  discrimination  subscription.  6.  Injunction 
sanction  function  operation  oppression  temptation  pre- 
sumption. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  7.  Confession  generation  ob- 
jection expression  information  revelation  revolution  sus- 
pension perfection.  8.  Dissatisfaction  destruction  delib- 
eration examination  cross-examination  explanation 
inclination.  9.  Invention  reduction  reformation  repre- 
sentation signification  connection  determination. 

PHRASES.  10.  All-directions  all-stations  by-permission 
rising-generation  there-is-oocasion  for-collection  J-have-no- 


1.  I 


o 


$Iate  21* 

%    J 

3° 


~\> 


J 


I 


-3 


10 

11 

12 


j 


-  i 


WORD- FORMS. 

r 


SEKTKNCES. 


V 


^£J?    1 

'  (A 

^^ 
<<  V     > 


b    x    OJ 


V 


110  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHOXT-HAtfD. 

objection.  11.  Desire-to-say  by-special-train  answering- 
your-many-inquiries  please-acknowledge  wholesale-prices 
it-is-generally.  12.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  222. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Education  is-the  chief  defence  of  nations. 
2.  Love  is-the  piety  of-the  affections.  8.  All-is  holy  where 
devotion  kneels.  4.  We  ask  advice,  but  we-mean  approba- 
tion. 5.  Truth  makes  the-face  of-that  person  shine  who 
speaks  and-o\vns  it. 

219.  A  large  final  hook,  corresponding  with  the  rel-hook 
in  size,  is  used  to  denote  the  frequent  endings,  tion,  sion, 
don,  dan,  etc.    This  hook  is  written  within,  or  on  the  con- 
cave side,  of  curves,  as  in  ambition,  remuneration,  transla- 
tion, L  2. 

220.  In  caution,  auction, passion  and  option  (L  1),  the  shun- 
hook'is  attached  to  straight  stems,  and  is  written  on  the  side 
opposite   the  vowel   (except  in  cases  where  there  are  two 
vowels,  as  in  [j  addition,  when  the  hook  is  struck  on  the 
circle  side).    This  rule  applies  when  the  straight  stem  is  pre- 
ceded by  no  letter,  hook,  or  circle.    But  when  such  stem  is 
preceded  by  another  consonant  sign,  it  will  be  found  the 
more  convenient  to  strike  the  hook  on  the  side  opposite  what- 
ever sign  may  so  precede.    Referring  to  L  1,  it  is  seen  that 
the  hook  in  section  is  on  the  lower  side  of  k,  because  the  circle 
is  above  it,  while  the  reverse  is  true  in  secretion.    In  occupa- 
tion the  hook  is  at  the  right  of  p,  k  being  on  the  left.    See 
also  L  3.    By  observing  this  rule  the  writer  may  more  easily 
preserve  the  straightness  of  the  stem.    This  may  be  illus- 
trated by  writing  section  a  number  of  times,  placing  the  hook 
first  above  and  then  below  k.    In  dictionary,  L  4,  shun  may  be 
struck  on  the  upper  side  of  k,  so  that  r  may  be  more  easily 
written. 

221.  To  express  these  Carious  syllables,  this  hook  some- 
times represents  shn,  as  in  mission,  and  sometimes  zhn,  as  in 
vision.    K,  following  ng,  is  often  omitted,  as  in  injunction, 
sanction.    L  6. 

222.  1  Placing  shun  on  the  circle  side,  write:    Omission 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  Ill 


2  attention    animation    dissipation    definition*11  dissension 

3  designation    desolation    devotion    discussion    elevation 

4  evasion    expedition   intimation  rational   irrational  lim- 

5  itation    motion    locomotion    nation     notation     oration 

6  repetition  revision  selection  session  submission  ammu- 

7  nition      dictation      dimension      amputation     ascension 

8  assassination    assimilation    coalition    decapitation  delu- 

9  sion  division  emulation  expectation  exultation  invasion 

10  isolation     location     negotiation*     obsei-vwtion     pension 

11  petition     population    resolution    resurrection     solution 

12  violation    volition     mission     occasion    viwion     addition 

13  dissolution    reputation;.   (1-hook)    declamation   acclama- 

14  tion    exclamation     inflammation;     (r-uook)     depression 

15  emigration  impression  probation  prosecution  profession 

16  provision  aggregation  promotion  celebration  digression 

17  exportation    extermination   nutrition    penetration    per- 

18  petration   persecution    preservatioa   profusion  progres- 

19  sion     suppression     supervision     termination*     creation 

20  approbation. 

21  Placing S^MW  on  then-hook  side,  write:  Auction  passion 
23  exception    execution     education     induction    invocation 

23  restitution,    section    crucifixion     institution     aspiration 

24  restoration     adoration     abduction     adoption     affection 

25  benediction   benefaction    edification    expiration    faction 

26  infection     fiction     specification     substitution     vacation 

27  variation    visitation  diction    agitation  elocution  avoca- 

28  tion,  (1-hook)   exclusion  leflection*  recollection*  classi- 

29  fication     exploration     explosion     application;     (r-hook) 

30  inculcation  friction  attraction  prolongation. 

(133—3—1:30.) 

PHRASES. 

a23.  Every-directioa  in-the-direction  one-instance  to- 
mention  would-mention  would-occasion  because-that-can- 
be  railroad-man  by-the-train  early-train  for-the-mail-train 
mail -train  through-train  a-few-days-ago  at-your-expense 
at-the-same-price  wholesale-rates  I-know-there-has-been 


118  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

no-instance  in-the-morning  in-many-instances  that-is-a- 
question  that-it-must-be-done  there-has-been  would-happen 
would-instance. 

EXERCISE  21. 

234.  1.  Whatever  is  popular  deserves  attention.  2.  I- 
know  no-manner  of  speaking  so  offensive  as-that  of  giving 
praise  and-closing  it  with-an-exception.  3.  The-only-things 
in-which  we-can-be-said  to-have  any-property  are  our-actions. 
4.  We  begin  life  with  high  expectations.  5.  Affectation  dis- 
covers sooner  what  one  is  than  it-makes-known  what  one 
would  fain  appear  to-be.  6.  No  decking  sets  forth  anything 
as-much-as  affection.  7.  We-are-never  like  angels  till  our 
passion  dies.  8.  Charity  is-a  wish  for-a  perfect  education. 
9.  Take  away  ambition  and-vanity  and-where  will-be  your 
heroes  and-patriots?  (101— 1:30— :40.) 

225.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  The-lawyer  makes  objections  to- 
the  cross-examination  for-the-reason-that-it-has-no  relation 
to-the  examination-in-chief.  (4 — 1.) 


To  THE  TEACHER. — The  short-hand  reporter  must  be  able 
to  write  many  thousands  of  different  words,  but  nine-tenths 
of  all  the  writing  he  does  consists  in  taking  down  over  and 
over  many  times  only  a  few  hundred  very  common  words. 
Evidently  the  first  requisite  to  skill  in  stenography  is  a  high 
degree  of  familiarity  with  just  this  class  of  words  and  phrases. 
The  reporter  writes  is,  may,  will-be,  I-can,  do-not,  hundreds 
of  times  to  ocean,  extracting,  calibre,  indigo,  delve,  etc.,  once. 
He  may  take  time  occasionally  to  write  a  hard  word  in  long- 
hand, but  he  will  fail  almost  certainly  if  he  is  obliged  to  hes- 
itate for  an  instant  before  writing  one  of  these  frequent 
words  or  phrases.  Hence  the  Teacher  will  drill  his  classes 
daily,  and  require  the  pupil's  practice  to  be  devoted  mainly 
to  this  class  of  words. 


To  THE  TEACHER.  A'Phe.  "dical  differenc-.  ;n  principle  be- 
tween iiiili^l  and  firia^'hooks  may  be  illut^ratsd  by  showing 
that  vowels  do  not  occur'between  the  two  consonants  repre- 
s  :'ted  by  initially  hooked  stems;  whereas  a  vowel  always 
<  and  always  must  occur  between  every  stem  and  any 
fin  ill  hook  («,/,  or  v,)  which  may  be  attached  to  it. 

A  USEFUL  READING  TEST.  —  Dictate  a  few  sentences  back- 
wards. Phrasing  is  nc*.  to  be  employed  in  writing  them. 
Call  on  the  pupil*  to  read  their  notes  backwards.  This  will 
cause  the  meaning  to  appear.  For  occasional  practice  this 
is  excellent.  The  dictation  should  of  course  be  slow. 


\ 


LESSON  XXTT. 

8-SHDN  AND  IN-HOOKS. 

227.  KEY.    1.    Imposition   physician  decision   precision 
civilization  dispensation  transitions  cessation.    2.    Enslave 
unsalable   inscribe    inspiration    inseparable    insecurity   in- 
solence.   3.    Unscrupulous    unsociable    insomnia    uncere- 
monious insoluble  insurrection  insatiable. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  4.  Unseasonable  unscriptural 
unselfish  in-sorae  in-as-many  in-consideration  in-his-usual. 
5.  In-his-expression  in-his-experience  in-seeming  in-his- 
description  in-his-life  in-expressing  in-describing. 

PHRASES.  6.  In-any-position  in-successiou  that-supposi- 
tion  in-some-cases  give-possession  judges-decision  my-own- 
supposition.  7.  All-expenses  all-sums-of -money  fee-simple 
notary-public  any-thing-else-that  can-you-remember  knowl- 
edge-and-belief.  8.  Personal-knowledge  cause-of-action 
legal-representative  from-your  own-knowledge  I-will-ask- 
you  for-trial.  9  and  10.  For  ke>  see  list  words,  sec.  230. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Bvery-man  at  forty  is  either  a-fool  or-a- 
physician.  2.  He  that  knows  nothing  knows  enough  if-he 
knows  how  to  keep  his  tongue.  8.  When  a-fool  has  spoken 
he-has-done  all.  4.  The  unlucky  man  breaks  his  neck  upon- 
a  straw.  5.  An  Englishman's  house  is-his  castle.  6.  There- 
is-never  enough  where-nothing  remains. 

228.  Any  one  of  the  syllables  denoted  by  the  shun-hook, 
when  it  occurs  after  an  s-circle,  may  be  expressed  by  con- 
tinuing the  stroke  until  a  small  hook  is  formed  on  the  side 
opposite,   as  in  imposition,  physician,   decision,   L  1.    The 
learner  is  cautioned  to  write,  not  merely  a  straight  tick,  but 
a  well  bent  hook,  or  oval,  as  if  about  to  form  another  circle. 
See  L  1.    The  plural  is  formed  by  writing  the  circle  within 
the  hook,  as  in  transitions. 

229.  A  small  hook-sign,  called  the  in-hook,  employed  at 
the  beginning  of  certain  words-forms,  denotes  in,  en  or  un. 
See  enslave,  unsalable,  L  2.    This  hook  is  used  instead  of 
^— '  n  when  followed  by  a  circle  and  curve,  with  which  the 
stem  would  not  join  conveniently.    The  n-hook  is  also  used 

—114— 


Pate  22. 


J  rv^ 

)-SIGNS.\ 


SENTENCES. 


s 


% 


V- 


i 


\j  -S 


—  v 

V 


v 

\l 


^  V- 


CV 

\  _  o 


.\... 


o 


116  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HA.VD. 

in  connection  with  the  triple-consonant  series,  as  in  inscribe, 
inspiration,  inseparable,  L  2.  This  hook  should  be  written 
small,  and  well  curved. 

230.  1  Write:  Deposition  dispositions  accession  position 

2  positions    propositions    sensation*    supposition    civiliza- 

3  tion   exposition  procession    requisition   succession  v»-x- 

4  ation  dispensation;  1  pos.  opposition  acquisition;  3  pos. 

5  accusation  possession  powessions. 

6  Also  write,  using  the  nr/roer  hooks:    Curtain    drain 

7  drove   engrave    explain    cram    graphic    grave    matron 

8  patron    plain    plenty    prmnunce*    prudence    utterance 

9  restrain     train     venerabi*    -worn     decline     economical 

10  tribune   incline   woman*  criterion    demonstration*  fur- 

11  niture*  paragraph*  reference"  transgress  transmission; 

12  1  pos.  qualification*  women-  clean  cleave  clime  green; 

13  3  pos.  crown  drown  plan  traffic  plantation. 

(62— 1:30— :45.) 

PHRASES. 

231.  Wouiu-expect    you-expect    ail-claims     at-my-office 
give-notice    original-owner   at-what-time    can-you-recollect 
tell-the-jury    know-all-men    law-journal    personal-property 
take-notice  legal-profession  how-long-have-you. 

EXERCISE   22. 

232.  1.    As-the  fool  thinks,  so  the-bell  tinks.    2.    Custom 
will  make  a-man  live  in-a  lion's  mouth.    3.    Three  persons, 
if-they  unite  against*a-town,  will  ruin  it.    4.    Liberty  and- 
Union,  now  and-forever,  one-and  inseparable.     5.    Keep  a- 
thing  seven  years  and-then  in-some-way  it-will-be  of  use  t<>- 
you.    6.    Innocence  and-mystery*never  dwell  long  together. 
7.    It-is-a  poor  wit  that-lives  by  borrowing  the-inventions 
and-decisions  of-others.    8.    Never-make  business  an-excuse 
to  decline  the-offices  of-humaniry.  9.  As  we-are  born  to-work, 
so  others  are  born  to  watch  over  us  while  wo-.-uv  working. 
10.    Love  lessens  woman's  delicacy  and-im-riMs.'-;  man's      11. 
In  law  nothing  is  sure  bnt-the  expense.        (121— 1 :45 — :50.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


117    , 

I 


233.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  The-physician  says  that  in-his- 
experience  he-has-had  occasion  many-times  to-prescribe  to- 
men-and-women  of  all  nationalities.  (4 — 1.) 


234. 


TRANSLATE. 


To  THE  STUDENT. — Do  net  neglect  your  orthography 
English  spelling  is  a  horrible  atjage,  but  one  which  the  sten- 
ographer is  obliged  to  face.  Many  good  writers  fail  to  hold 
a  situation  on  account  of  deficiency  in  this  branch.  It  is 
only  a  matter  of  prudence  to  saaDrove  yourself,  if  lacking  in 
this  respect.  Learn  to  spell  to*  writing;  with  the  pen,  rather 
than  the  tongue.  Written  anm  wal  spelling  are  two  different 
things. 


118  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SIIORT-I1AXD. 

LESSON  XXIII. 
8T  AND  STR  LOOPS. 

235.  KEY.  1.  List  must  stump  stage  disposed  justify 
against  gestation.  2.  Boaster  obstruction  distribution 
stranger  illustration  spinster  strong  strength.  8.  Gesture 
manifest  enlist  stubborn  statistics  digestion  honestly  dis- 
traction. 

WORD.  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  4.  First  at-first  by-the-tirst 
at-the-first  almost  next  next-time  just-what  post-pone. 
5.  Must-like  must-make  we-must  north-west  Baptist  one 
of-the-most  one-of-the-best.  6.  For-the-first-time  Ccmstitu- 
tion-of-the-U.-S.  circumstances-of-the-case  suggestion  sten- 
ography stenographer  stenographic.  7.  One-or-two  two- 
or-three  three-or-four  four-or-five  five-or-six  six-or-seven 
seven-or-eight.  8.  As-fast-as  by-way-ol-illustration  from- 
first-to-last  just-been  almost-always  he-supposed  most- 
important.  9.  Ohio  mystery  extraordinary  in-reply-to 
in-response-to  everlasting  must-expect. 

PHRASES.  10.  We-love  as-well-as-most  before-Christ 
just-now  just-as  must-necessarily  must-also.  11.  Must- 
never  to-the-best-advantage  one-must  such-as-must-be  be- 
supposed  must-generally  it-is-generally.  12.  For  key  see 
list  words,  sec.  238. 

SENTENCES.  1.  The-first  blow  is  half  the-battle.  2.  When 
it  rains  in  August  it  rains  honey  and  wine.  8.  The  hen 
which  cackles  most  lays  least.  4.  Life  is  real,  life  is  earnest. 
5.  No  fool  can  keep  silence  at-a  feast. 

23i>  (S  is  very  often  followed  by  t,  forming  the  consonant 
double-sound  sf,  of  very  frequent  occurrence  in  our  language. 
To  express  this  added  t,  the  s-circle  Is  elongated,  as  in  lt*t. 
must,  stump.  This  loop,  called  ist,  is  made  quite  narrow,  and 
extends  to  the  middle  of  the  stem.  Zd,  which  is  a  cognate  ! 
of  at,  is  also  denoted  by  this  loop,  as  in  disposed.  Like-  in» 
circle,  ist  may  be  followed  by  the  s-shun  hook,  as  in  gestation; 
and  implies  n  by  being  located  on  the  n-hook  side  cf  straight 
letters,  as  in  against.  L  1. 


$Iate  23. 

'<   <. 


\>      V3 


/ 

Qixf 


a 


WORD-8HJNB.       v 

4        <?    i  £. 

\  *^  "A 

o    S*       LK^     O~°      <r~^  ' 

7  ^^N         Vv          J/^        V      ,  V        n      o    ^1^    ^1 

9       ^ 

10      rV 

11  X-^S.     >,  'S  r-        ^-c-^  CT^X  Vv X 

-Vs3     'V^    ^ 

SENTENCES. 

i\.4;-z7\x     °    i     A.vf^! 


ISO  REPORTING  STYLK  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

237.  1st,  when  written  somewhat  longer  and  considerably 
broader,  denotes    the  added  r,   as  in   boaster,  obstruction, 
stranger,  L  2.    This  large  loop  we  call  ister.     It  also  may  be 
followed  by  the  s  shun  hook,  as  in  illustration,  and  implies  n 
when  struck  on  the  left  side  of  the  stem,  as  in  spinster.    The 
learner  is  cautioued  to  write  ister  with  attention  to  length 
rather  than  breadth,  to  prevent  its  being  mistaken  for  sez. 
To  secure  facile  outlines,  the  s-circle,  instead  of  the  loop,  is 
often  used  in  phrasing,  as  in  must-like,  must-make,  L  5. 

238.  1  Vocalize:    Beast    boast    coast    feast    ghost    host 
2  post  toast  taste  steal  waste  steel;  1  pos.  moist  steam 
8  steep  accost.    Without  vowels:    Placed  cast  chest  dust 
4  fast    guest    haste    just    list  arrest  (ar)    detest    disgust 
*  dishonest    earnest    harvest    disposed    infest    invest   in- 

6  wstigation*  molest  must  most  pretext  stage  star  state 

7  stead  stole  stop  stomach  store  test  testify  text  utmost 

8  vast  west  stump    destiny*  adjust  bequest*  twist*  best 

9  bust  digest  fist  forest  inquest*  jest  nest  request  robust 

10  rust   statesman*   statute   stem   stern    stiff  sting    stitch 

11  storm  stubborn  stuff  stumble*  vest  worst.  1  pos.  August 

12  cost    least    still    stock    style    honest   honestly*;   8  pos. 

13  last    past    stamp    attest;    (r-hook)    breakfast     distrust 

14  trust    intrust  breast    abreast  crest   frost   grist    incrust 
13  protest  priest;  (1-hook)   blest;  (n-hook)  dentist  fantastic 

16  manifest. 

17  Also  write:    Cluster    lustre   master    monster    plaster 

18  Sylvester    minister*    register    bluster    strange;    8  pos. 

19  administer  abstraction.  (123 — 3—1:30.) 

PHRASES. 

239.  All-the-rest     at-most     be-pleased     have-just     I-am- 
pleased  I-must  it-is-just  it-is-most  must-mean  must-receive 
their-most  they-must  must-take  so-must  so-you-must  \iry- 
best  what-most  which-must-be. 

EXERCISE  23. 

240      .      The-presence    of-those    \vhom    wo-lovc    is-as    ft- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


double  life;  absence  in-its  anxious  longing  and-sense  of  ^a- 
cancy  is-as  a-foretaste  of  death.  2.  We-that-live  to-please 
must  please  to-live.  3.  It-is-best  to-be  with-those  in-time 
that-  we  hope  to-be  with  in  eternity.  4.  They-  that  govern 
must-make  least  noise.  5.  Grace  was  in-all  her  steps,  heaven 
in  her  eye.  6.  By  gaming  we  lose  both  our  time  and-treas- 
ure,  two  things  most  precious  to-the  lifeof-man.  7.  Genius 
always  gives  its-best  at-first,  prudence  at-last.  3.  Haste 
is  of-the  devil.  9.  Though  I-am-always  in-haste,  I-am-never 
in-a  hurry.  10.  Men  love  in-haste,  but-they  detest  at-leisure. 
11.  Hope  is-a  lover's  staff.  12.  That-man  lives  twice  thatr 
lives  the-first  life  well.  13.  The-grave  is-a  common  treasury 
to-which  we-must  all  be-taken.  14.  Choose  always  the-way 
that  seems  the-best,  however  rough  it-may-be. 

(165—2:15—1:15.) 

241.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  One-of-the-best  and-most  earnest 
of-the  ministers  in-the  North-west  has-just-been  advanced 
to  a  higher  post.  (5—  1.) 


THE  TYPE-WRITER. — Type-writing  is  much  more  rapid, 
and  ir.  various  ways  far  superior  to  pen  work.  A  knowledge 
of  this  art  itself  is  very  valuable,  and  has  become  entirely 
indispensable  to  the  professional  Stenographer.  The  Private 
Secretary  is  almost  invariably  required  to  make  use  of  a 
writing  machine  in  preparing  transcripts  and  copies.  He  is, 
moreover,  expected  to  be  familiar  with  its  operation  before 
he  accepts  a  situation,  and  skill  in  manipulating  it  should,  if 

Eracticable,  be  gained  while  the  course  in  Stenography  is 
eing  taken. 

There  are  a  dozen  or  more  different  kinds  of  writing  ma- 
chines. Some  of  the  cheaper  instruments  do  good  work, 
but  lack  in  speed,  a  requisite  entirely  indispensable  when 
used  in  connection  with  short-hand.  The  Remington  is  used 
most.  There  are,  in  fact,  so  many  offices  supplied  with  this 
excellent  type-writer,  that  it  would  be  policy  for  every 
stenographer  to  learn  to  operate  it,  even  though  he  should 
own  or  use  some  other  style  of  machine.  If  you  have  no 
machine  to  practice  on,  send  for  a  draught  of  the  key-board 
and  thoroughly  learn  the  location  of  each  letter. 


TBANBLATB. 


Mi 


/  C*    .   I   V* 


I  X      © 

v^ 


^    \ 


/' 


r-  x®  \ 

ex 

A   c 


"U 


r   i/'   \ 


LESSON  XXIV. 
LENGTHENING  PRINCIPLE 

843  The  writing  of  a  curve  double  its  usual  length  signifies 
the  addition,  first,  of  thr  (see  L  1),  second,  tr  (see  L  2),  ami 
third,  dr  (see  L  3).  The  writer's  aim  should  be  to  write  the 
lengthened  curve  more  than  twice  its  usual  length,  rather 
than  less,  in  order  to  obviate  any  liability  there  may  be  to 
confound  it  with  standard  letters.  For  convenience  long 
curves  are  named  fetter,  vetter,  thetter,  metier,  etc.  These  in 
proportion  to  their  length  are  bent  much  less  than  standard 
stems.  To  illustrate,  metier  extends  but  a  trifle  further  above 

the  line  than  m,  as  the  figure  ^- ^ -^  shows.  The  occa- 
sions for  lengthening  y  and  zh  are  very  rare.  Lengthened  / 
adds  tr  only;  for  if  the  numerous  words  containing  l-thr  and 
l-dr  also,  were  expressed  by  lengthening  I,  it  would  be  too 
much  burdened  with  values. 

244.  The  lengthened  mp  adds  r  only,  signifying  mpr  or 
mbr,  as  shown  in  L  4.    Lengthened  ng  adds  kr  or  gr  only. 
See  L  5. 

245.  The  three    consonant    positions    are  the  same  for 
lengthened  as  for  standard  length  horizonal  stems.    Down 
strokes  are  written  in  the  following  manner:    1  pos.,  on  the 
line;  2  pos.,  one-half  below  the  line;  3  pos.,  two-thirds  below 
the  line.    See  whither,    water,  fatter,   L  6.    For  upstrokes, 
1  pos.,  beginning  half  a  space  above  the  line;  2  pos.,  begin- 
ning on  the  line;  3  pos.,  beginning  half  a  space  below  the 
line.    See  lighter,  later,  latter,  L  6. 

246.  A  suffix  may  be  expressed  by  adding  a  consonant 
sign  to  a  lengthened  letter,  as  in   L  7.    When  a  stem  is 
lengthened,  the  vowels  are  always  read  before  the  added  thr, 
tr,  etc.;  but  the  final  hook  or  circle  is  not  pronounced  until 
afterwards.    L  8.    For  example,  in  eastern,  the  final  n  is  not 
pronounced  until  after  tr;  in  furtherance,  ns  is  not  read  until 
after  thr. 

247.  This  principle  is  utilized  to  quite  an  extent  in  phras- 
ing.   (See  Ls  10  to  13.)    Lengthening  a  curve  adds  there,  their, 

-123- 


124  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

or  other.    Final  ng  is  sometimes  lengthened  to  add  there  or   j 
their.    See  L  12. 

248.  KEY.    1.    Father  mother  weather  further  farther- 
more     another.     2.      Letter     reporter     material    entirely 
legislator    oyster.    3.    Order    surrender   calender    murder 
wander    shudder.    4.    Timber    chamber    cumber    pamper 
lumber   damper.     5.    Conquer    anger   banker    finger  hun- 
ger longer.    6.    Whither  water  fatter  lighter  later  latter. 
7.    Rendered  orderly  loitering  tenderness  waterfall   with- 
ers.   8.    Entrance  furtherance  eastern  northern  southern 
lantern  obliteration.    9.    Flatter  stronger  whether  swifter 
central  diameter  immaterial. 

PHRASES.  10.  For-their  toave-their  may-there  from-there 
in-tbeir  some-other.  11.  Stronger-than  have-their-own 
some-other-one  further-than  live-there  was-there.  12.  Liv- 
ing-there making-their  think-there-is  if-there-were  in-their- 
case  no-longer-than.  13.  At-one-another  for-their-satisfac- 
tion  in-their-possession  neither-of-them  such-matters 
through-their  whether-or-no. 

SENTENCES.  1.  It-is-a  well-known  saying  that  murder 
will  out.  2.  Hunger  makes  raw  beans  sweet.  3.  One  bar- 
ber shaves  another. 

249.  1  Write:    Centre  eccentric  enter  hinder  hindrance 
2  material  maternal  matter  literal  render  senator  tender 
8  thunder    thermometer    wonder    yonder    entire    neither 
4  neutral  caster  eastern  thither  voter  nitre  mitre  mutter 
6  sifter    smatter    laughter    Anderson    Alexander  re-enter 

6  hunter     sunder     slender     winter     bewilder     smother 

7  swifter    literary    alter     chronometer     temper    slumber 

8  limber    amber    cucumber   hamper    distemper    scamper 

9  cumber   sombre    angry   anchor   tinker   clinker   hanker 
10  rancor  drinker  handkerchief.  (60 — 1-20 — 1.) 

PHRASES. 

250.  All-the-matter      another-instance      anothcr-opinion 
another-question     another-time     enter-into     for-their-sake 
for-there-has-been   for-there-U  for-there-were    in-siich-mat- 


Pate  24* 


126  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

ters  in-their-opinion  in-their-place  no-further  of-the-matter 
one-another  that-is-another  there-is-another  to-have-their 
what-matter  what-was-the-matter  whenever-there-has-been 
whenever-there-occurs  think-there-has-never  think-there- 
h  as-been. 

EXERCISE  24.    . 

251.  1.    To  step  aside  is  human.    2.    Music  washes  away 
from-the  soul  the-dust  of-every  day  life.    8.    Obstinacy  is 
ever  most  positive  when-it-is-most  in-the-wrong.    4.    They- 
who  forgive  most  shall-be-most  forgiven.    5.    Passion  costs 
me  too-much  to  bestow  it  upon  every  trifle.    6.    To  climb 
steep  hills  requires  slow  pace  at-first.     7.    Every  noble  work 
is-at-first  impossible.    8.    Time  is  generally  the-best  doctor. 

9.  In-poetry,  which-is  all  fable,  truth  is  still  the-perfection. 

10.  Poetry  is  truth  dwelling  in-beauty.     11.    Ye  stars,  that 
are-the  poetry  of-heaven.     12.    Praise  is  only  praise  when 
well  addressed.     13.     Solid   pudding  against  empty  praise. 
14.    Live  this-day  as-if-the  last.    15     Who-makes  the-fairest 
show  means  the-most  deceit.     16.    Small  service  is  true  ser- 
vice while  it-lasts.  (131—1:45—1.) 

252.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    The-senator  calls  a-swifter   re- 
porter into  another  chamber  to-fu'ther  the-taking  of  testi- 
mony in-the  murder-trial.  (5 — 1.) 


NOMEN  JLATUKE. — It  is  a  matter  of  considerable  importance 
in  teaching,  that  the  more  common  elements  of  the  system 
be  provided  with  suitable  names.  These  names,  if  charac- 
teristic, will  be  easily  remembered  by  the  learner,  and 
abridge  and  give  precision  to  the  teacher's  work. 

The  1-hook  series  may  be  designated,  pel,  bel,  tel,  chel,  vel, 
etc.,  the  r-hooks,  per,  der,  jer,  ther;  n-hooks,  pen,  ben,  fen, 
shen;  f-hooks,  pef,  tef,  jef,  hef .  Stems  doubly  hooked,  plen, 
dref,  flen,  mern,  delf,  twen,  kwef,  wern;  also,  kayshun, 
beeshun.  vcoshun,  velshun,  pershun,  nershun,  relshun,  etc. 


REPORTING  8Ttt.lt  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


127 


The  circles  are  called  iss  anJ  sez.    The  loops,  ist  and  ister. 

Lengthened  curves  may  be  signified  by  adding  ter  to  the 
letter  to  be  doubled;  thus,  emter,  enter,  efter,  ithter,  wayter, 
veeter,  etc. 

The  teacher  will  not,  however,  overlook  the  fact  that  when 
the  pupil  hears  splen,  or  any  other  mere  name,  he  does  not 
picture  this  character  in  his  mind  as  clearly  as  when  he  sees 
it  plainly  written  on  the  blackboard.  His  mental  grasp  of 
the  system  is  yet  too  imperfect.  Hence,  use  names  sparingly, 
and  chalk  liberally.  Blackboard  illustrations  impress  the 
learner's  imagination  most  forcibly,  and  he  gets  a  clearer 
idea  of  the  teacher's  meaning,  and  remembers  it  longer. 


253. 


TRANSLATE. 


LESSON  XXV. 

HALVING   PRINCIPLE. 

254.  KEY.      .    Bit   bed  cut   code   gait   art  quote   slate 
start    about    act.      2.      Bolt    giant    violet    twilight    exert 
merit    uncertain    suspect.     3.      Adjacent    debtor    inhabit 
circuit  educate  precept  prerogative  nutshell.    4.  Captivate 
legitimate    strict  reciprocate    transmit   discredit   pre-emi- 
nent. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  T.  Without  almighty  em- 
phatic nature  natural  posterity  after  afternoon  somewhat 
is-it  as-it  use-it.  6.  Yesterday  intellect  heart  associate 
sometime  intelligence  intelligible  interchange  territory 
or-not.  7.  Heretofore  manuscript  postscript  hesitate  for- 
it  better-than  in-the-second-place  human-nature. 

PHRASES.  8.  After-which  at-the-present-time  it-is-better- 
than  at-times  quite-certa!"  though t-we-were  almost-certain 
after-we-have  quite-as-well.  »  &U.**.  10.  For  key  see  list 
words,  sec.  260. 

SENTENCES.  1.  I-love  sometimes  to-doubt  as-well-as  know. 
2.  Habit  is-the  deepest  law  of  human-nature.  3.  If  fame 
is  only  to-come  after-death  I-am  in-no  hurry  for-it.  4.  Every- 
man is-the  architect  of-his-own  fortune.  5.  Where  no  hope 
is  left  is  felt  no  fear.  6.  Let  them  obey  who  know  how  to 
rule. 

255.  One  of  the  most  useful  contrivances  in  the  entire 
system  is  that  by  which  a  letter,  when  shortened  to  half  its 
usual  length,  is  made  to  express  an  added  t  or  d.    Thus, 
\  6,  when  shortened  in  this  manner,  is  read   N   bt,  as  in  bit, 
or   \  bd,  as  in  bed;  —  k,  when  halved,  has  the  force  of  kt, 
as  it  cut,  or  kd,  as  in  code.     Tand  d  are  the  most  frequently 
recurring  consonants,  and  being  cognates,  or  similar  sounds, 
no  ambiguity  results  from  the  expression  of  both  by  the 
same  contrivance. 

256.  Learners  are  cautioned  not  to  write  the  shortened 
letters  more  than  half  the  usual,  or  standard  length,  else  the 
two  will  become  confounded.    The  practice  of  the  writer 

should  be  rather  to  form  these  brief  signs  a  trifle  less  than  the 
-IK- 


Plate  23. 


V  C. 


4   TV 

WORD-SIONS. 

6     (     .™. 


"V     L 


\- 


10    X 

© 


H 


-V 

r1  , 


\  , 


J 


vA^XV 


r 


V 


ISO  REPOET1NQ  STYLB  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

standard  length.  To  avoid  confusion  not  only  must  the 
halved  letters  not  be  too  long,  but  those  of  standard  length 
also  should  not  be  too  short. 

257.  Shortened  curves  are,  in  proportion  to  their  length, 
bent  somewhat  more     than  full  lengths;  as  an  illustration, 

it  will  be  seen  that  ^  mt  extends  almost  as  far  Above  the 
line  as  /— -  m.  This  practice  adds  to  the  angularity  of  many 
word-forms. 

258.  First  position  words  composed  entirely  of  shortened 
stems,  or  of  a  mixture  of  half-length  and  horizontal  letters, 
are  written  one  full  space  above  the  line,  as  in  bit;  third  posi- 
tion words  are  written  almost  entirely  below  the  line,  as  in 
about,  act. 

259.  In  gait,  L  1,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  added  t  is  pro- 
nounced after  g,  but  not,  however,  until  the  vowel  a  has 
been  sounded.    The  rule  is,  read  all  vowels  before  pronounc- 
ing the  t  or  d  expressed  by  the  shortening  principle. 

260.  In  the   following   list   t  is    indicated    by    halving: 

1  Vocalize:    Boat   boot    coat    cat  vault   sect   mate   dolt 

2  nut  saint  dote;   1  pos.  cheat.    Without  vowels:    Date 

3  get    bet   debt   hate   late   net    met  let    fate  note   vote 

4  sent    left   lift    accent   enact  exact    tact    adopt    better 

5  insect    accept    acceptable    insert    little    result    smart 

6  limit   motive  native  rabbit  recent  arithmetic  alphabet 

7  instigate  assent  artifice  agent  intimate  repeat  promote 

8  capital*    locomotive    certify*    certificate*    mathematics 

9  ratify    petrify    rusticate     support    reject    auditor   (ar) 

10  remit  (ar)     imitate     report     magnetic    resolute    resort 

11  adjunct   agitate  cognate   cottage    dogmatic  export   ex- 

12  tinct  inject  intact  peasant  submit  musket  theft  upstart 

13  captive  certain*  circuit*  debate  decent  deject  designate 

14  desolate  eject   elect  (el)    except  execute  habit  habitual 

15  eminent    emulate    erect  (ar)    estate*    innocent    irritate 

16  legislate   originate    sentence*   abject    Hamlet;    (1-hook) 

17  implicate    pleasant    vegetable    duplicate  fluent;    1  pos. 

18  client  climate;    (r-hook)  intricate    present   private  pro- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  131 

19  duct    promote  prospect   protract  subtract   tract  trans- 

20  late  attribute  bracelet    precinct  project    restrict  thrift 

21  tribute     decrepit     affirmative*     aggravate     appreciate* 

22  October   credit   deprecate    detract    extract    transcript* 

23  approximate.  (145—3—2.) 

PHRASES. 

261.  After-a    after-that    after-the    at-present    be-certain 
be-thought    better-than    better-way    does-not     recent-time 
has-not  have-no-doubt  have-sent   have-thought  I-am-quite- 
sure  I-thought-that  is-not  no-doubt  not-a-man  not-enough 
not-possibly    not-much    not-that     not-every-one      present- 
instance  present-time  so-little  think-there-is-not  that-such 
that-which  which-must-not. 

EXERCISE  25. 

262.  1.    Always  rise  from  table  with-at  appetite  and-you- 
will-never  sit  down  without-one.    2.    When-we  feel  a  strong 
desire  to  thrust  our  advice  upon  others,  it-is  usually  because 
we  suspect  their  weakness;  but-we  ought  rather  to  suspect 
oar-own.     3.    To-be  happy  we-must-be  true  to  nature  and 
carry  our  age  along  with  us.    4.    Beauty  is-a  possession  not 
our-own.    5.    The-beautiful  are-never  desolate,  but  some-one 
always  loves  them.    6.    It-is-better  for-a  young-man  to  blush 
than  to  turn  pale.    7.    Every  Christian  is  born  great,  be- 
cause-he-is  born  for-heaven.    8.    That-which-is-so  universal 
as  death  must-be-a  benefit.    9.    We  speak  of  educating  our 
children.    Do-we  know  that  our  children  also  educate  us? 

10.  Fortune  is-the  rod  of-the  weak  and-the  staff  of-the  brave. 

11.  The-chains  of  habit  are  generally  too-small  to-be  felt 
until-they-are  too  strong  to-be  broken.     12.    Keep  thy  heart 
with  all  diligence,  for  out-of-it  are- the  issues  of- life. 

(174—2:15—1:30.) 

263.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    We-will-certainly  be-able  very 
soon  to-make  verbatim-reports  of-the  eminent  speakers  in- 
the  debate  by-means  of-the  stenographic  art.  (4 — 1.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SlIORT-HAXD. 


TRANSLATE. 


r  ^  r  \ 


CORRESPONDENCE. — Letter-writing  in  short-hand  is  no 
more  interesting  than  it  is  helpful  to  the  learner.  You  will 
naturally  write  more  carefully  when  you  expect  that  your 
letter  will  be  read  by  some  one  at  a  distance;  and  this  prac- 
tice will  in  time  give  you  a  habit  of  accuracy.  The  perusal 
of  the  letters  you  receive  will  prove  a  most  valuable  drill  in 
reading.  You  will  be  compelled  to  rely  entirely  upon  the 
short-hand  notes;  whereas,  in  reading  what  you  have  previ- 
ously written  yourself,  you  are  aided  in  a  measure  by  mem- 
ory. It  is  a  mistake  to  suppose  that  you  must  complete  your 
course  before  undertaking  such  a  correspondence.  The 
better  plan  is  to  begin  early,  writing  a  mixed  hand,  that  is, 
all  the  words  stenographically  that  you  are  able,  and  the 
balance  in  long-hand.  Two  points  are  to  be  guarded: 
1st.  Do  nqt  put  words  that  you  have  not  learned  into  short- 
hand. 2nd.  Do  not  fail  to  employ  characters  for  all  words 
that  you  have  learned.  Your  instructor  will  be  able  to  fur- 
nish you  letters  of  introduction,  particularly  if  you  are 
taught  by  mail. 


LESSON  XXVI. 

ADDED   D. 

265.  When  t  or  d  is  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  it  cannot 
properly  be  expressed  by  the  halving  principle;  for  if  it  were 
so  indicated,  it  would  be  impossible  so  to  place  the  final 
vowel  that  it  would  be  read  last.    To  illustrate,  t  in  might 
may  be  expressed  by  shortened  m;  but  the  employment  of 
the  stem  t  in  mighty  indicates  the  fact  of  a  following  vowel. 

266.  Shortened    consonants,   when    standing    alone,   are 
usually  employed  to  denote  words  that  contain  but  one 
vowel;  for  example,  half-length  d  is  used  for  date,  while  in 
edit  full-length  dt  must  be  written.    This  rule  applies  also  in 
writing  void,  avoid,  bate,  abate,  etc.     L  1.    Increased  legibil- 
ity is  thus  secured,  since  the  reader  is  expected  to  supply  but 
one    vowel    when    a     shortened   consonant   stands  alone. 

267.  The  plural  of  -j-.coat  is  expressed  by  affixing  the  cir- 
cle s,  thus  -y°  coats.    This  is  simple  so  far  as  the  writer  is 
concerned.    But  the  reader  is  liable  to  miscall  it  coast,  sup- 
posing that  the  circle  s  is  to  be  sounded  before  the  added  t. 
The  invariable  rule,  however,  is  to  read  t  first  and  s  last.    If 
s  actually  occurs  before  t,  the  loop  should  be  employed,  as  in 

— ^=>  coast. 

268.  Outlines  composed  entirely  of  horizontal  shortened 
letters  are  usually  writen  in  the  first  position  when  the 
accented  vowel  is  first-place,  as  in  void,  esteem,  swift.    The 
halving  principle  is  used  to  express  the  past  tense  of  regular 
verbs,  as  obliged,  avoided,  stopped. 

PHRASES. 

269.  Future-time  if-it-were-only  of-its-own  could-have-it 
this-world's-goods     good-time     many-facts     an-actual-fact 
ceilain-causes   bad-example  good-many-times  could-not-be- 
sent  would-not-have-been. 


184  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

270.  KEY.    1.    Might  mighty  date  edit  void  avoid  bate 
abate    gate    agate.     2.     Obliged    avoided    stopped    stood 
covered  comrade  infidel  betide  esteem  immature.    3.  Evi- 
dence fortune  per-cent  swift  rhetoric  susceptible  judicial 
integrity   catalogue.    4.    Estimate    ultimate    evident   Con- 
necticut   adjudicate    captivate     multiply     went    acquired 
between.    5.     Intentional  perpetual  apart  abstract  hermit 
antagonism    Presbyterian     prominent     return.      6.      H«  at 
taught  sort  assimilate  athlete  dissipate  exult  ostentatious 
added.     7.    Schedule    seldom    despite  mutual   necessitate 
beautiful  delicate  district  integral.    8.    Prejudice  transact 
promulgate    federal     intolerable     acquaintance    wayward 
photograph    intention.     9.     Advocate    defective    splendid 
distinct  distribute  stimulate  instruct  invested. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  10.  Feature  future  fact  as- 
tonish astonishment  establish  establishment  onward  wis- 
dom quite  history  world.  11.  If-it  it-ought  it-would 
it-had  at-it  do-it  had-it  of-it  have-it  have-had  people-of- 
God.  12.  Historian  Act-of-Congress  at-all-events  east- 
and-west  fear-of-God  good-and-bad  in-the-world  all-the- 
world. 

PHRASES.  13.  As-good-as  as-good-as-possible  could-never 
could-not  God's-love  church-of-God  in-which-you-are-en- 
gaged  what-did.  14.  Was-received  which-is-intended 
which-made  could-nevertheless  as-good-as-it  if-it-did  it-is- 
admitted  that-is-intended.  15.  For  key  see  list  words, 
sec.  271. 

271.  1  Added  d:    Bed  could  good  shade  stood  decided 

2  comrade    method*  instead    evidence*   educated    invade 

3  infidel. 

4  In  the  following  list  both  t  and  d  are  expressed  by 

5  halving:    1  pos.    east    bottom    got    did  light    bid    God 

6  meet   invite  might   indeed  fit   knot  lightning    lot  soft 

7  spot.    Vocalize:    feat    beat    naught    caught  fought    dot 

8  tight    deed    shot    night    slight  naught  sift  ieed    knight 

9  neat  salt  sheet  spite  steed  tide;  2  pos.  accelerate  per- 


S 


8 
9 

10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 


Pate  26. 

< 


X 


-1 


.A 


v 


T" 


-^  L  b 
b-    <~-    I 


"XL" 


v 


i     ^L 

e_ 


13«  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

10  centage    rapid    notify    dispute    active    actual*    admit 

11  cupidity   melt  dissect   dissent    expedite  extort   heredi- 

12  tary  phonetic   stupid  fault    appetite-,    3  pos.    act  adapt 

13  apt   doubt  foot  footstep    bad    adult    adept    absent    fat 

14  mute;  (sez-circle)  systematic*;  (1-hook)  article*  doubtful 

15  emblematic      hospitable      notable;      (r-hook)      Godfrey 

16  crabbed   crescent   proximate   lubricate   dramatic    ener- 

17  vate  promote  integrity;  1  pos.  prominent;  8  pos.  attract 

18  attractive;    (rel-hook)    relent    multiplication;    (\\-hook) 

19  upward*   went   warrant   quantity*    reward    acquainted 

20  Edward;    1  pos.    wind    inward    awkward    wild    ward 

21  wield;   3  pos.    backward   outward;    (f-hook)    indefinite* 

22  defective;    (n-hook)    manipulate  pattern    tenant   candid 

23  longitude  mandate  opponent  benefit;  (shun-hook)  dedi- 

24  cation    litigation    intentional    estimation*;    (loops)    ob- 

25  struct     investigate*      stipulate;     (past    tense)     packed 

26  molested     trusted     manifested     transcribed     displayed 

27  employed      adopted      dispatched     solicited      specified 

28  searched  risked  kept;  (halving  principle  applied  twice) 

29  capitulate   recapitulate  estimate  illegitimate  (el)  detect 

30  mutilate  fortunate*  protect*  deduct   latitude  rectitude 
81  cataract;  1  pos.  intent*  mitigate;  3  pos.  aptitude. 

(150—3—2.) 

EXERCISE   26. 

272.  1.  The-good  is  always  beautiful,  the-beautiful  is 
good.  2.  Goodness  is  beauty  in-its-best  estate.  3.  Men 
often  make  up  in  wrath  what  they  want  in  reason.  4.  Let 
not  the-sun  go  down  upon  thy.  wrath.  5.  All  things  are 
artificial,  for  nature  is-the-art  of-God.  6.  Biography  is-the 
home  aspect  of  history.  7.  The-desire  of  knowledge,  like 
thirst  of-riches,  increases  ever  with-the  acquisition  of-it. 
8.  Life  is  like  wine;  he  who-would  drink  it  pure  must  drain 
it  to-the  dregs.  9.  Literature  is-the  thought  of-thinking 
souls.  10.  Doing  good  is-the-only  certainly  happy  action 
of-a  man's  life.  11.  A-life  that-is-worth  living  at-all  is  worth 
writing  minutely.  12.  The  universe  would-not-be  rich 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  137 

enough  to  buy  the-vote  of-an  honest  man.  13.  Character 
is-a  perfectly  educated  will.  14.  It- were  joy  to  die  if-there- 
be  gods,  and-sad  to-live  if-there-be  none.  15.  It-is-better 
to  desire  than  to  enjoy;  to-love  than  to-be  loved. 

(168—2—1:15.) 

273.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    True  wisdom  is  to  know  what-is- 
best  worth  knowing,  and  to-do  what-is-best  worth  doing. 

(6-1.) 

274.  TRANSLAl  V. 


KEY-BOOK. — Every  student  should  make  a  key-book  for  his 
own  use.  For  this  purpose  take  a  well  bound  blank  book,  of 
a  good  quality  of  ruled  paper. 

After  your  work  has  been  corrected,  copy  the  exercises, 
list-words,  and  translations,  all  in  proper  order,  with  an 
Index  showing  the  page  upon  which  the  key  for  each  partic- 
ular lesson  appears.  A  book  of  this  character,  if  carefully 
made,  and  diligently  used  for  the  purpose  of  reference,  will 
greatly  facilitate  the  progress  of  its  author,  and  make  of  him 
a  more  accurate  reporter. 

An  occasional  discrepancy  will  be  discovered  between  the 
outlines  here  taught,  and  those  given  in  the  Pitman  Diction- 
ary. Our  rule,  however,  has  been  not  to  depart  from  this 
generally  accepted  standard,  only  in  those  few  instances 
where  we  believed  there  was  good  ground  for  it. 


LESSON  xxvn. 

SHORTENED  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 

275.  KEY.    1.    Glad   brought   spread    gratitude    degen- 
erate overtake  remonstrate  discreet  secret.    2.    Enameled 
cultivate  British  secretary  overture  multiform  predomin- 
ate   virtual    seclude.     8.     Cloud    suffered    shrewd    effort 
predicate    threat     sacred     verdict    vertical.      4.     Deplete 
exclude   migrate  destroyed   graduate   demonstrate   fertile 
pervert     penetrate.      5.     Illustrated     cupboard     virtuous 
freedom  frustrate  scrutiny  chartered  glide  scattered. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  6.  Particular  opportunity 
part  party  creature  according  according-to  virtue  child 
spirit  delight  guilt  guilty.  7.  Partake  majority  minority 
calculate  political  prosperity  circulate  co-operate  hundred. 

8.  In-his-secret   as-great-as  from-it  able-to   Great-Britain 
for-the-most-part     in -order-that     in -order-to     in-regard-to. 

9.  Till-it   tell-it    told    until-it    at-any-rate    able-to-give-it 
with-regard-to  at-all-its  at-all-times  toward  towards. 

PHRASES.  10.  Able-to-think  be-able-to  British-America 
be-told-that  for-my-part  Court-of-Justice  holy-spirit  I-am- 
able-to  with-regard-to-it. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Angels  are  bright  still,  though-the  bright- 
est fell.  2.  Many  delight  more  in  giving  of-presents  than-in 
paying  debts.  3.  A-book  may-be  as-great-as  a-battle. 
13,  14  and  15.  For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  277. 

276.  Letters  of  the  double  and  triple  consonant  series  are 
also  shortened  to  denote  the  addition  of  t  and  d,  as  in  glad, 
brought,  spread,  enameled,  etc.    Ls  1  to  5  inclusive.    The 
learner  will  observe  in  the  examples  given  that  both  sounds 
expressed  by  the  double  consonant  are  pronounced  before 
the  added  I. 

277.  1  Using  the  1-hook  and  vowels:    Plate    blade  plat; 

2  1  pos.    fleet  flight   bleed  clod;   (without  vowels)    inflate 

3  blood  glad  flood  cultivation*  include  preclude  replied 

4  tumbled  coupled   displayed  tangled   entitled  employed 

5  smuggled  doubled  assembled  rambled  pamphlet;  1  pos. 

— las— 


Plate  27. 


1      c_ 


-7 

" 


WOKD-SU4X6. 


^ 

C  _ 


9  .1.  r  r  ._  ........  i 

Pli-itAat,».  *•" 


10 


SENTENCES. 


13 

14 
15 


WOKU-FORMS. 


140  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

6  plead   blot  plot;    (r-hook)  vocalize:    trait  brute  prayed 

7  crowed     cried;     1  pos.    creed    trite;     (without  vowels) 

8  gathered     labored     prospered     papered    uttered     shirt 

9  tempered    altered   betrayed   muttered    offered   silvered 

10  measured  treasured  record*  clamored  flattered  traveled 

11  troubled   fluttered   glittered  hammered    scrupled    arbi- 

12  trate    aristocrat*   culprit   perpetrate   vibrate   great  re- 

13  treat  regret  grade  grateful  celebrate  democrat  credible 

14  degrade    defraud   hatred    emigrate    third   trade    hypo- 

15  crite  gratify  bread  dread  intrude  tread  spread  straight 

16  Elbert    Frederick    Richard     Robert     Gertrude     Albert 

17  Alfred.  (94-^2—1:30.) 

PHRASES. 

278.  Able-to-agree  able-to-do  according-to-a  all-particu- 
lars   be-called-upon       be-told-so        be-greatly   called-upon 
for-great   great-affairs   great-applause   great-danger  great- 
deal    great-difference     great-difficulty     great-favor     great- 
many    great-men    great-nation    great-opportunities    great- 
pleasure  great-principles   great-respect  great-truths  great- 
value   have-greatly   have-told   I-am-afraid   I-am-told   in-a- 
great-measure   in-the-street   in-this-world   may-greatly   to- 
be-able-tb  freedom-(of- the) -press   gather-together  great-ad- 
vantage. 

EXERCISE  27. 

279.  1.    Tc-do  an  evil  action  is  base;  to-do  a  good  action, 
without  incurring  danger,  is  common  enough;  but  it-is-the 
part  of-a  good-man  to-do  great  and-noble  deeds,  though-he 
risks  everything.    2.    Men  resemble  the-gods  in-nothing  so- 
much  as-in  doing  good  to-their  fellow-creatures.    3.     Hcavt'ii 
from  all-creatures  hides  the-book  of  fate.    4.    A-good  heart 
will  at-all-times  betray  the-best  head  in-the-world.    5.    The- 
greatest  trust  between  man-and-man  is-the-trust  of  giving 
counsel.    6.    The-next  dreadful  thing  to-a  battle  lost  is-a 
battle  won.    7.    It-is  seldom  the-case  that  beautiful  persons 
are  otherwise  of-great  virtue.    8.    When  clouds  are  seen 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  141 

wise-men  put  on  their  cloaks.    9.    There-can-be  no  Chris- 
tianity where  there-is-no  charity.  (134 — 1:30 — 1.) 

280.  SPEED   SENTENCE.     You-shonld    cultivate    a-good- 
memory  in-order-that  at-all-times  you-may-be-able-to-report 
the-exact  evidence  which  in  courts-of -justice  is  sometimes 
given  at-the  rate  of  two  hundred  a-minute.  (3 — 1.) 

281.  TRANSLATE. 

©V 


®  "X, 


)  rv 


ITEMS  OF  INTEREST. — It  has  been  observed  that  the  pen  of 
the  long  experienced  stenographer  follows  the  speaker  al- 
most automatically.  It  is  indeed  true  that  the  reporter  can, 
to  a  certain  extent,  take  notes  while  thinking  of  something 
else.  Stories  are  told  of  brilliant  young  writers  taking  a  nap 
in  the  middle  of  a  speech,  without  losing  a  single  word  that 
fell  from  the  orator's  lips.  Some  stenographers  interest  them- 
selves with  experiments  as  to  how  extensive  arithmetical  cal- 
culations can  be  made  while  writing  one  hundred  words  a 
minute.  Many  reports  have  been  taken  entirely  in  the  dark; 
also,  by  reporters  who  were  obliged  to  stand,  holding  their 
note-books  against  the  wall. 


LESSON  xxvm. 

HALF-LENGTH   FINAL  HOOKED   STEMS. 

282.  KEY.      1.    Blind     lend     paved     petitioned     meant 
mitten    funds    drafts    bends    grand.      2.    Rou  d    around 
drift    dental    talent     superintendent     stimulant     suspend 
counter    random.     3.     Equivalent    strengthened    Ireland 
relevant    supplicant    frequent    insolvent.      4.      Landscape 
dependent   craft    hint    fountain    surround    silent    candor 
event.    5.    Phantom  country  mankind  expedient  Atlantic 
identity    suspend     announcement.     6.     Gentle     authentic 
plunder  blend  bland  frantic  ornament. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  7.  Prophet  profit  infinite 
derivative  temperament  testament  intelligent  island  gen- 
tlemen gentleman  imagined.  8.  Cannot  can-it  may-nt 
behind  be-nt  which-ought-nt  which-nt  whioh-hd-nt 
whieh-wd-nt  whieh-ought-to-hv-hd  which-hv-hd  which-wd- 
hv-hd.  9.  It-ought-nt  it-nt  it-wd-nt  it-hd-nt  did-nt  do- 
nt  had-nt  it-ought-to-hv-hd  it-wd-hv-hd  sueh-ought-to- 
hv-hd  such-hv-hd  such-wd-hv-hd.  10.  Will-nt  which-are-nt 
which-were-nt  dare-nt  upon-it  on-the-one-hand  it- 
will-not  gave-it  give-it  we-are-nt  were-nt.  11.  It-will- 
hv-hd  which-will-not  have-not  such-are-not  such-were-nt 
on-either-hand  on-the-other-hand  they-are-nt  there-would- 
nt  why-nt  in-point-of-fact. 

PHRASES.  12.  According-to-agreement  at-the-same-mo- 
ment  cunnot-expect  did-not-entirely  do-not-say  human- 
kind if-it-did-not  such-may-not-be. 

SENTENCES.  1.  We-must-al\vays  be  doing  or  suffering. 
2.  The-entire  ocean  is  affected  by-a  pebble.  3.  Beauty 
lives  with  kindness.  4.  You  do-not  believe;  you  on'y  believe 
that-you  believe.  L  15.  For  key  see  list  words,  see.  284. 

283.  Stems  to  which  a  final  hook  is  joined  are  also  halved, 
both  stem  and  hook  being  read  before  the  added  t  or  d,  as  in 
blind,  lend,  paved,  petitioned.    Meant,  for  instance,  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  shortened  -— ^  mn,  which  is  equivalent  to  mn-t. 
Here  the  character  mn  is  regarded  as  indivisable,  and  is  pro- 

—142— 


Pate  28. 


"   ^  \ 

^        1 


-a 


V@N1 

10  lr-3        —5      / 


^ 


~^_? 


^  L 


144  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

nounced  first.  In  such  case  it  is  not  allowable  to  sound  t 
immediately  after  m,  as  in  met,  and  before  the  reading  of  n 
expressed  by  the  final  hook.  Hence,  in  mitten  (L  1),  and 
similar  words  in  which  t  occurs  before  the  sound  indicated 
by  the  final  hook,  the  halving  principle  cannot  be  applied. 

284.    1  Write:    1  pos.    gift    mind    appoint*    kind    drift; 

2  (n-hook)  count  tent  faint    fund  lent  mend  paint  vent 

3  dent  tend    rent  lend    bound  bend    round  spend  stand 

4  repent    amend    extent    fount     indent     mound     refund 

5  vacant    violent    moment    accident    disappoint    disband 

6  husband    ancient  potent   infant  lament   mount  moun- 

7  tain  patent   patient  payment   ardent  enchant  demand 

8  extend   tendency*  depend   movement   valient   resident 

9  serpent   servant   argument  excellent*  basement   attrn- 

10  tive   coincident   detriment   urgent   encounter   discount 

11  impotent  delinquent*  distant  document  cogent  instant 

12  elephant  enactment  repugnant  opulent  incident  amaze- 

13  ment  romantic*  solvent  subsequent*  observant  abscond 

14  memorandum*  Maryland  Richmond  Edmund  Omnipo- 

15  tent;     (using  el)    elegant    element    aliment     boundless 

16  incidental    bundle    candle;    (using  ar)    indenture    sur- 

17  mount  venture  remnant  remainder  slander*  Raymond 

18  Roland;    1  pos.    bond   fond    augment   joined   occupant 

19  joint    point    b.nd    find    kind    appoint    diamond;    3  pos. 

20  amusement    apparent   rudiment   expand    land    account 

21  pound  band  cant;  (n  and  1  hooks)  plant  blunt  applicant 

22  supplicant    gland    plunder*  (ar)    blunder  (ar);    (n  and  r 

23  hooks)  grand  brand  front  vagrant  grand-jury  president 

24  encouragement   frequent*  predicament   precedent   pre- 
25  vent     reprimand     superintend*     transparent     flagrant 

26  profound  divergent  fragrant  pretend  fragment  brilliant 

27  ingredient;     1   pos.     grind     immigrant     print;     3  pos. 

28  ground;    (n  and  f  hooks)    pavement    extravagant    cove- 

29  nant    achievement    reverend;    (n-hook  twice)     counte- 

80  )  ance*  tangent  penitent  liniment  monument  mendicant 

81  abundant*;    (initial  n-hook)   insolent  insolvent;   (prinji- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  145 

32  pie  applied  twice)    respondent    redundant    dependent* 

33  candidate    resentment*    sentiment    amendment*   vindi- 

34  cate;  1  pos.   treatment  appointment*  predominant*. 

(181— 4^-3.) 

PHKASES 

28o.  According-to-agreement  all-mankind  by-his-own- 
statement  cannot-be  cannot-become  cannot-do  cannot-go 
cannot-make  cannot-receive  cannot-take  do-not-doubt  do- 
not-admit  do-not-be  do-not-know  do-not-necessarily  for-a- 
moment  had-not-known  have-found  I-dare-not  in-a-mo- 
ment  in-an-instant  in-judgment  my-mind  on-account-of- 
many  on-this-point  some-cannot  they-will-not  this-depart- 
ment  this-did-not  this-point  tc-the-account-of  vei-y-fre- 
qut'iitjy  we-do-not  what-cannot  to-which-it-may-not  this- 
country  depend-upon-it  great-extent  which-is-believed 
you-are-determined. 

EXERCISE  28. 

286.  1.  Idlers  cannot  find  time  to-be  idle,  or-the  indus- 
trious to-be  at-leisure.  2.  How  slow  the-time  to-the  warm 
soul  that  in-the-very  instant  it  forms  would-execute  a-great 
design.  3.  Nature  has  inclined  us  to-love-men.  4.  In  life 
we-shall  find  many  men  that  are  great  and-some-men  that 
are  good,  but  very  few-men  that  are  both  great  and-good. 
5.  A-man  is  sure  to  dream  enough  before  he  dies  without- 
making  arrangements  for-the-purpose.  6.  Good  counsels 
observed  are  claims  to-grace.  7.  If-there-is-anything  that 
keeps  the-mind  open  to  angel  visits,  and  repels  the-ministry 
of  ill,  it-is  human-love.  8.  Age,  that-lessens  the-enjoyment 
of-life,  increases  our  desire  of-living.  9.  We-do-not  count 
a-man's years  until  he-has-nothing  else  to-count.  10.  There- 
is-no-such-thing  as  chance;  and  what  seems  to  us  merest 
accident  springs  from-the  deepest  source  of  destiny.  11.  Do- 
not-ask  if-a-man  has-been  through  college;  ask  if-a  college 
has-been  through  him,  if-he-is-a  walking  university. 

(182—2—1:15.) 


146 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 


28*.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  The-greatest  events  of-an  age 
are-its  best  thoughts.  It-is-the  nature  of-thought  to-find  its- 
way  into-action.  (5 — 1.) 

TRANSLATE. 

*    V       VP       x    °\  ° 

\>  A  ^ 


\ 


\ 


X 


T 


\ 


....... .  ^    V 


'K  _../_ 

u 


To  THE  TEACHER. — Dictate  the  following  sentence  to  the 
class,  requiring  the  pupils  afterwards  to  read  it  backwards  : 
Receive  than  give  to  blessed  more  is  it  that  believes  world 
the  tribe  that  all  and  envy  hatred  jokes  practical  sarcasm  of 
matter  the  in.  Noel  Random. 


LESSON  XXIX. 

HALF-LENGTH  L,    R,    M,    N. 

289.  f~  L,  ~^\  r,  -—  ^  m,  ^—  ^  n,  are  thickened  when  halved 
to  express  d,  as  in  read,  failed,  made,  need,  L  1.    This  prac- 
tice adds  to  the  legibility  of  short-hand.    The  characters 
thus  produced,  rid,  ^     rd,    /"s  md,  ^  nd,  will  not  be  mis- 

taken for  shortened  f  y,  ~*^  w,  -—  *  mp,  and  -  —  "ng,  for  the 
reason  that  these  four  letters  are  not  halved,  except  in  a  few 
specified  cases,  as  attempt,  wheat,  longed,  L  2.  The  down- 
ward I  is  always  used  when  shaded  to  express  d,  as  in  failed. 
These  letters,  however,  are  not  shaded  to  indicate  d  when 
either  the  w  or  n  hook  is  attached,  as  in  wild,  arraigned, 
mind,  wend.  Also,  I  is  struck  upwards  after  ms,  and  hence 
cannot  be  shaded  to  express  d,  as  in  ^-  tf  mislaid. 

290.  A  final  half-length  j  t,  denoting  tiite,  tude,  or  ted,  is 
disjoined  in  some  cases  in  order  to  render  it  distinguishable, 
as  in  institute,  treated,  multitude,  L  1. 

When  reading  half-length  stems,  not  only  the  s-circle,  but 
the  st-loop,  is  pronounced  after  t  or  d  has  been  sounded,  as 
in  midst,  didst,  greatest,  L  3. 

291.  When  one  or  several  hooks,  circles  and  vowels  are 
appended  to  a  shortened  stem,  the  order  of  pronunciation  is 
a  source  of  some  little  embarrassment  to  most  beginners. 
Just  where  or  when  to   sound  the  t  is  the   question.    To 
further  clear  away  this  difficulty,  let  us  analyze  the  outline 

restraints.     Directing    our   attention  to  the   second 


syllable,  we  find  in  addition  to  a,  six  consonants  all  expressed 
by  one  movement  of  the  pen.  The  consonants  of  this  syllable, 
s-t-r-n-t-s,  are  expressed  in  this  manner:  s-t-r  by  the  triple 

consonant  |  str,  n  by  the  final  hook  (implied),  t  by  the 
shortening  principle,  s  by  the  circle.  Hei'e,  t,  as  in  all  such 
cases,  is  sounded  before,  immediately  before,  the  final 
s-circle.  It  may  seem  a  little  extraordinary  that  t  (which  is 

—147— 


148  BEPOBT1NO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

expressed  by  halving)  should  occur  between  nand  s,  although 
these  two  sounds,  ns,  are  both  indicated  by  a  single  sign, 
namely,  the  s-circle,  strucK  on  the  left  side  of  the  stem.  This 
may  appear  complicated,  but  it  is  not  really  so;  the  observant 
learner  will  not  be  embarrassed  by  it.  Bear  distinctly  in 
mind  that  the  final  circle  is  always  read  last,  and  that  t  is 
sounded  just  before  it.  When  no  final  circle  occurs,  then  t 
is  pronounced  last,  that  is,  after  the  stem  and  all  appended 
hooks,  circles  and  vowels  have  been  sounded. 

292.  KEY.    1.    Institute    treated   multitude   read  failed 
made    need    laid    yield.     2.     Wild    around    mind    wend 
attempt    wheat    longed    herald  standard    coward   defend . 
8.    Midst    didst    greatest    Indiana    afford    ordinance    re- 
demption modern  index  undoubtedly  prompt. 

WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS.  4.  Immediately  under  hand 
hold  held  lord  word  heard  hard  individual.  5.  Down- 
ward forward  undergo  afterward  behold  short-hand 
hand-in-hand  before-hand  great-extent  Word-of-God. 
6.  Hazard  hand-writing  landlord  understand  greater-than 
ladies-and-gentlemen  advancement  hardware  handsome. 

PHRASES.  7.  May-not-be  Mr. -President  words-of-my- 
text  words-of-our-text  this-will-not  been-understood  for- 
the-Word-of-God  what-in-the-world.  8.  Need-not  through- 
the-world  under-such  world-of-nature  world-to-come  of- 
whieh-it-may-not-be  you-will-not  if-it-do-not.  9  and  10.  For 
key  see  list  words,  sec.  294. 

SENTENCES..  1.  The-path  of  glory  leads  but  to-the  grave. 
2.  He-makes  no  friend  who-never  had-a  foe.  8.  Every-man 
desires  to-live  long,  but  no  man  would-be  old.  4.  By  steps 
we-may  ascend  to  God.  5.  They  say  women  and-mnsic 
should-never  be  dated.  6.  Where  there-is-no  hope  tln-n-- 
can-be  no  endeavor.  7.  Few  people  know  how  to-be  old. 

293.  It  is  often  inexpedient  to  use  a  half-length  letter  when 
the  angle  formed  by  its  juncture  with  another  consonant 
is  not  sufficient  to  render  it  read:'y  distinguishable;  e.  g.,  in 

(       looked,  the  shortened  k  shoulu  _:>t  be  used,  since  the 


u 


u 


WOBD-BIONS. 


r       r 


> 


8  --------------  9 

WORD-FORMS.  I/ 

9  U, 


jC_J_V 

| 

\ 


10 


r 

b 

V 

SEKTENCE8. 


\£>  (  * 

V^+i  •^j     s~+, -\      -^^ — 

^ 


\ 


\ 


150  EEPOBTINO  STYLE  OF  SlfORT-IIAXD. 

combination  l-kt,  when  written  quickly,  would  have  the  ap- 
pearance of  lengthened  1.  For  similar  reasons  the  halved  sh 
should  not  be  used  after  I;  n,  f,  or  v  after  t  or  d;  t  after  t  or 
d,  or  k  after /or  v. 

294.  1  Using  Id,  write :    Load   scold  lead   fold  manifold 

2  mould  Springfield  uniold  old    led   sold  crawled  drilled; 

3  1  pos.    lead  leader   mild  field;    3  pos.    loud    lad    mood; 

4  (rd)    absurd    deplored     beard    yard    Leonard     sword; 

5  1  pos.    kindred  read  (verb)    redeem;    (md)  mud  modify 

6  meditate*  blamed  inflamed  claimed  blossomed  drummed 

7  toiled   meddle;    1  pos.   medium*  modulation    mid    mid- 

8  night     middle     midst    model    moderate;    3  pos.     mad; 

9  (nd)    defend     end    endless*    send    defendant*    ascend 

10  ascendant    descend    descendant    endeavor*    indolence* 

11  indolent    indigent   indivisible    indulge*  reasoned    inde- 

12  pendent*  errand    transcend;    1  pos.    need    needless  (el) 

13  needle  (el)    Indian    indicate*   indication    intend;   3  pos. 

14  sanr1.;    (disjoined  ted)    dated    destitute    dreaded;   3  pos. 

15  attitude.  (79—1:45—1.) 

PHRASES. 

295.  Have-believed  in-the-country  in-the-land  my-good- 
friend    some-account     they-did-not     we-had-not     be-made 
do-not-understand    have-understood    I-am-informed    I-un- 
derstood    my-own-understanding    should-understand    this- 
understanding  under-which  under-this  which-is-understood 
under-the-present-circumstances       absolutely-indispensable 
do-not-have-time      world-(of)-fashion  world-(of)-spirits. 

EXERCISE  29. 

296.  1.    Adversity  is-the  trial  of-principle.    2.    Whhout- 
it  a-man  hardly  knows  whether  he-is-honest  or-not.    8.    Act 
well  at-the  moment  and-you-have  performed  a-good  action 
to  all-eternity.    4.    For-my-own  part    I-had-rather  be  old 
only  a-short-time  than-be  old  before  I  really  am  so.    5.    A- 
merry  heart  doeth  good  like-a  medicine,  but-a  broken  spirit 
drieth  the-bones.    6.    Heaven's  eternal  wisdom  has  decreed 


BEPOBTINO  STYLE  OP  SHORT-RAND. 


161 


that  man  of  man  should  ever  stand  in-need.  7.  Hatred  is 
always  honest,  rarely,  if -ever,  assumed.  8.  So-much  can- 
not-be-said  for-love.  9.  O,  how-much  more  doth  beauty 
beauteous  seem  by-that  sweet  ornament  which-truth  doth 
give.  10.  There's-a  divinity  that  shapes  our  ends,  rough 
hew  them  how  we- will.  11.  Genius  makes-its  observations 
in  short-hand;  talent  writes-them  out  at-length. 

(141—1:30—1.) 

297.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  The-great  man  is-he  who  in-the- 
midst  of-the  crowd  keeps  with  perfect  sweetness  the-inde- 
pendence  of  solitude.  (5 — 1.) 


298. 


TRANSLATE. 


O          V      (      x 


LESSON  XXX. 

INTEKVOCALIZATION. 

299.  KEY.  1.  Cheer  Abigail  Margrave  gill  fill  Palgrave 
chart  chill.  2.  Cork  gold  ruliug  tolerable  purchase 
arraful  sport  accord.  8.  Child  signature  require  foil 
fowl  lecture  qualify  picture.  4.  Core  gall  shoal  epicure 
prevail  jealous  school  corporal.  6.  Persevere  correspon- 
dent preliminary  fur  gal  carve  nurse  encore.  6.  En- 
gineer pilgrim  utility  volume  balcony  partial  Delaware 
guilt.  7.  Miracle  skill  delicate  derange  falter  Virginia 
secure  security.  8.  Legislature  derogatory  mortal  ordin- 
ary voluntary  moral  insurance  Baltimore.  9  to  13  inclu- 
sive. For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  303. 

SENTENCES.  1.  In  a-better  world  we- will-find  our  young 
years  and-our  old  friends.  2.  The  child  is  lather  of-the 
man.  8.  Admiration  is-the  daughter  of  ignorance. 

800.  Any  letter  of  the  double  or  triple  consonant  series 
may  be  intervocalized,  by  which  is  meant  the  vowel  may  be 
placed  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  read  between  the  two  con- 
sonants. E.  g.,  c —  &r»  with  the  dash  vowel  I  o  struck 
through  it,  is  read  <~H-  core.  Here  the  vowel  is  read  after  k 
and  before  r.  Second  and  third  place  vowels  are  struck 
through  the  stem,  but  first-place  dashes  are  written  just  before, 
as  in  gall,  L  4.  When  a  dot  vowel  is  to  be  written,  a  small 
circle  is  used  instead,  and  placed  before  the  stem  if  long,  as  in 
cheer,  Abigail,  Margrave;  and  after  it  if  short,  as  in  gill,  L  1. 

301.  This  principle  is  not  of  frequent  application;  it  is, 
however,  essential  thoroughly  to  learn  the  signs  here  ex- 
plained. One  advantage  secured  by  the  principle  of  inter- 
vocalization  is  the  use  of  briefer  outlines  than  would  other- 
wise be  admissible.  Since  it  is  the  rule  not  to  form  any 
outline  too  brief  for  vocalization,  the  sounds  expressed  by 
the  double  consonant  stems,  pr,  tr,  pi,  tl,  etc.,  would  have 
to  be  written  with  the  long  ~^\  r  or  f~  I  in  many  cases  where 
the  hooks  may  now  be  used  instead.  In  moral  (L  8),  for  ex- 
ample, the  outline  mr-l  is  proper,  since  it  will  admit  of  vocal- 

—168— 


i  7 


X 


7     o 


WOBD-rOHMS. 

9 


10  J. 


SENTENCES. 


30* 

§-      <£.  V     s    /c 

<x  lc~ 


V 


f 


<\   i 

V 


<?• 


\     \  /^^v         Q  ? 

*     V    >       M     / 

I  / 


\ 


.TV...  r 

<^ 


\. 


154  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAyD. 

izalion;  otherwise  the  r-hook  could  not  be  employed. 

302.    The  double-length  curves  may  be  intervocalized  by 

striking  the  vowel-sign  through  the  stem,  as  in^v^— -^  entire. 

803.     1  Intervocalize:    Cur    cull    gull    fort    board    port 

2  chart    dirt    purse    spur    terse    course   college    impulse 

8  infer  infirm  invalid  curb  North*  morality  shirk  pursue 

4  corner  ridicule  darling  sharp    thirst  till  term  agricul- 

6  ture*    capture    cargo    culture    decorum    calico    distil 

6  parlor*   porter   portray   purple    turkey    valid    George. 

7  Without  vowels:  elaborate*  enormity  demoralize*  jour- 

8  ney    nerve    nervous    nourish    perceive    perjure    person 

9  endorse   pursued    recall    regulate*  telegram*  Thursday 

10  vulgar  corporate  incorporate  director  divulge  farthing 

11  marble     marshal*     nursery     nurture     obscure     parcel 

12  shark   singular*   torpedo    valedictory   vinegar    volcano 

13  Charles;    (sez)    persist    paralysis    parenthesis;    (f-hook) 

14  gulf  turf  telegraph  imperative  narrative;  (n-hook)  bur- 

15  den    margin    pardon    pertain    diligence    jurisprudence 

16  terminate     German     bargain     cosmopolitan     galvanic 

17  Mormon  northeastern*  Morgan;  (shun-hook)  perception 

18  circulation*    partition    jurisdiction    corruption    regula- 

19  tion*;  (rel-hook)  journal*  normal  personal*  phrenology; 

20  (halving)     carpenter     garment     departure   (ar)     invert 

21  market  merchant  merchandise  mercantile  (el)  particle 

22  partner   regard    record    transport    Vermont    Pittsburg 

23  deliberate*  correspond*  correspondence   default  forbid 

24  parliament  persecute  portrait  purport  recorder  scarlet 

25  told  velvet    Arnold.  (139—2:45—1:30.) 

PHEA8ES. 

304.  In-course-of  it-is-calculated  political-agitation  po- 
litical-power so-sure  that-is-where  towards-it  towards-such 
towards-another  towards-that  towards-the  towards-this 
very-short  very-sure  which-surely  as-it-certainly  as-little- 
as-possible  between-the  between -which  by-which-it-seems 
by-which-it-\vas  East-Indies  for-the-present  very-certain 
future-time  if-it-be  if-it-does  if-it-is-not  if-it-is-possible  if- 


EEPOETINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  155 

it-were  in-fact  it-is-better-than  it-is-no-doubt  seems-to-me 
more-certain  must-not  no-better-than  not-absolutely  not- 
generally  ought-to-be. 

EXERCISE  30. 

305.  1.    Action  is  eloquence,  and- the  eyes  of-the  ignorant 
more  learned  than  their  ears.    2.    It-is  often  better  to-have 
a-great-deal  of  harm  happen  to-one  than-a-little;  a-great-deal 
may  arouse  you  to  remove  what-a-little  will  only  accustom  - 
you    to    endure.     3.     There-is-nothing   that-makes-its-way 
more-directly  to-the  soul  than  beauty.    4.     We-make  way 
for-the-man  who  boldly  pushes  past  us.    5.    Your-little  child 
is-your  only  true  democrat.    6.    Childhood  shows  the-man 
as-the  morning  shows  the-day.     7.    Defeat  is-a  school  in- 
which  truth  always  grows  strong.  (101 — 1:10 — :45.) 

306.  SPEED  SENTENCE.    Rich-men   without   wisdom  and 
learning  are  called  sheep  with  golden  fleeces.  (9 — 1.) 

307.  i  •  BUSINESS  LETTERS. 

(To  be  phrased  by  the  student.) 

CINCINNATI,  March  18,  1886. 
MESSRS.  W.  FROTHINGHAM  &  Co.,  Louisville,  Ky. 
Dear  Sirs: — We  shall  offer  to-morrow,  March  19,   at   4i 
net,  by  case  only,  our  entire  stock  of  Dunnell  fancy  prints, 
embracing  all  the  seersuckers,  satines,  and  special  styles. 
We  shall  be  pleased  to  have  your  house  represented. 
Very  truly  yours, 

DONALDSON,  BOGARDTJS  &  Co. 

308.  NEWARK,  N.  J.,  June  22,  1886. 

E.  D.  GlLDERSLEEVE,  ESQ. 

Dear  Sir: — Orders  received  and  shall  have  prompt  atten- 
tion. We  did  not  expect  to  stop  at  all,  but  owing  to  removal 
will  have  to  suspend  about  one  week  after  July  4th.  Any 
orders  up  to  that  time  we  can  fill  as  usual.  Owing  to  in- 
creased trade,  and  not  having  room  enough,  we  have  built  a 
factory  which  we  will  occupy  about  July  10th. 
Yours  very  truly, 

MCNEIL,  ANDERSON  &  Co. 


156 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


\ 


THE  ' '  FIVE  RULES  "  OF  THE  AMERICAN  SPELLING  REFORM 
ASSOCIATION:  1.  Use  f  for  ph  sounded  as  f,  as  in  alfabet, 
fantom,  filosofy,  telegrqf,  etc.  2.  Use  t  for  d  or  ed  final 
sounded  as  t,  as  in  stop£,  puft,  lockt,  crost,  pusht,  pilcht,  fixt, 
etc.  8.  Drop  a  from  digraf  ea  sounded  as  short  e,  as  in 
breth,  hed,  helth,  sted,  etc.  4.  Drop  silent  e  final  in  a  short 
syllabi,  as  in  hav,  giv,  liv,  forbad,  hoslil,  infinit,  activ,  etc. 
5.  When  a  word  ends  with  a  dubl  letter,  omit  the  last,  as  in 
eb,  ad,  stqf,  eg,  shal,  toil,  tel,  etc. 


THE  "TEN  WORDS: 
hav,  giv,  liv,  gard,  ar. 


Tho,  thru,  wisht,  catalog,  definit, 


LESSON 

PREFIXES. 

310.  The  commonest  prefixes  and  affixes  are  provided 
with  brief  signs,  the  greater  number  of  which  are  joined  to 
the  main  outline. 

List  of  prefixes:  Con  com  cog  counter  contra  contri  con- 
tro  circum  self  inter  intro  anti  magna  magni  super  mat 
post. 

Con,  com  and  cog  are  indicated  by  a  dot,  as  in  compress, 
conduce,  cognition.  LI.  In  most  cases,  however,  this  dot  is 
entirely  omitted  with  no  loss  of  legibility.  In  such  cases  the 
safest  practice  is  to  refrain  from  ^hrasing  with  preceding 

words.     To    illustrate,    (^>    they-complain   should    not   be 

phrased,  whereas  k     they-plan  should  be.     The  fact  that 

complain  is  not  joined  to  they  is  indicative  of  the  prefix  con, 
and  the  dot  sign  need  not  be  written. 

Con,  com,  cog,  when  medial  are  expressed  by  separating 
the  preceding  from  the  following  portion  of  the  word,  as  in 
accommodation,  accompany,  etc.,  L  4. 

Counter,  contra-i-o,  are  indicated  by  a  slant' ng  tick,  as  in 
countermarch,  contradiction,  contribution,  L  1. 

Circum,  self,  are  denoted  by  the  s-circle,  as  in  self-con- 
sciousness, circumvent,  L  2. 

Inter,  intro,  anti,  ante,  are  denoted  by  the  shortened  n, 
joined  to  the  remaining  part  of  the  word,  as  in  interview,  in- 
troduce, antiseptic,  L  2. 

Magni,  magna,  may  be  indicated  by  the  disjoined  m,  as  in 
magnify,  L  2. 

Mai,  post,  super,  are  commonly  expressed  by  the  characters, 

C^   nil,  \3  ps,  ^\  spr,  as  in  malcontent,  postman,  supervene, 

L2. 

Prefix-signs  should  always  be  written  previously  to  forming 
the  remaining  portion  of  the  word.  Speed  is  interfered  with 

—157— 


1 58  R  EPOR  77.VC  STYLE  OF  SHOR  T II A  XD. 

when  the  reporter  must  go  back  and  place  these  marks  after 
the  body  of  the  word  has  been  written. 

311.  KEY.     1.    Compress    conduce    cognition    accommo- 
date recommend  countermarch  contradiction  contribution. 

2.  Interview   introduce   antiseptic   self-consciousness   cir- 
cumvent     magnify      mal-content      postman       supervene. 

3.  Commit  commodity  contemporary  conquest  communi- 
ty commentary  confess    compensate.    4.    Accommodation 
accompany    reconstruct    recognition    excommunicate    in- 
comprehensible    conjunction     inconsistent.      5.     Counter- 
balance counterpart    interpose  interrogation    internal    in- 
terrupt    antiquary    discontent    interest.      6.     Commission 
compensation  contempt  command  confidence  composition 
constitute    commencement    conductor.      7  to  10  inclusive. 
For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  312. 

WORD-SIGNS.  11.  Circumstantial  malpractice  construc- 
tion constructive  incompetent  consequence  consequent 
consequential.  12.  Unconcern  comprehend  comprehensive 
antiquity  antiquarian  consider  consideration  reconsider 
confidential. 

PHRASES.  13.  For-a-consideration  I-am-content  in-his- 
opinion  in-his-own-interest  it-is-interesting  under-any-cir- 
cumstances  every-circumstance  that-conclusion. 

SENTENCES.  1.  Active  natures  are  rarely  melancholy. 
2.  Our  actions  are  our-own,  their  consequences  belong  to 
Heaven.  3.  Love  is  incompatible  with  fear. 

312.  In  the  following  list,  the  prefixes,  printed  in  italics, 
are  to  be  represented  by  the  signs  just  explained.    The  sylla- 
bles enclosed  in  brackets  may  also  be  written,  but  as  these 
are  common  words,  the  prefix  signs  are  usually  omitted 
altogether. 

1  Cow-pass    cow-pose     (con)vict     (con)tinual  (el)    (con)- 

2  temporary  (emp)  tnter-pose  con-sole   twter-fere*  circum- 
8  navigate  con-ceit  cora-ciliate  cow-demn  de-com-pose  dis- 

4  oom-pose  dis(con)tinue   inter-na\*  re-cog-nize  re-fiw-cile 

5  self-nsh*    un(con)scious    anli'-thesis    comm-ittee    cow-pile 


Plate  31* 


\> 


«     J 

6    \      ^     ~\     ' 

6  ^~3        V        U 

WORD-FORJIS. 

7  X 


10 

w 

11 


is 


} 


\    f 


L/ 
k 


j 


13 


v-A-^oP 


SENTENCES. 


i 


160  REPORTING  STYLE  0V  SHORT-HAND. 

6  con-cede    mis-cow-ceive    (eom)pare    cownter-check    post- 

7  paid     con-spire     (con)veyance     con-voke     (com)panson 

8  con-ceive   (con) form    (con)scientious*   (con)scious  (con)- 

9  sist;    1  pos.    con-sign    con-ceal  counter-sign;   3  pos.    con- 

10  duce    (con)sume   tracer-view;   (1-hook)  con-stable  in-com- 

11  parable    in-con-ceivable    (accom)plish*    (com)pel    (con)- 

12  flict*  tnter-val;   (r-hook)   con-cur   con-fer  etrcwrn-ference 

13  in-cow-prehensible    pre-con-ceive    self-control    (con) firm 

14  (con)gress     (con)trary     (con)verse     enter-prise*;     3  pos. 

15  (con)strue    mis  con-strue;   (f-hook)  (con)servative    (cun)- 

16  trive    (con)trivance;    (n-hook)    (con)tain    (con)tains  con- 

17  fine   cottnter-balance*    con£ra-vene    in(con)venience    re- 

18  eom-pense    (com)panion .  (com)plain    (con)cern*     (con)- 

19  science  (con)stancy  (con)strain  (con)venience*  (con)vince 

20  enter-tain   inter- vene;    1  pos.   counter-mine;    (shun-hook) 

21  (com)mission    (com)petition    (con)fession    counter-action 

22  re-comm-endation*  anii-cipation    (com)plexion    (con)ces- 

23  sion  (con)clusion  (con)demnation  (con)solklation    (con)- 

24  viction  (con)templation  (emp)  tnter-pretation  (com)bina- 

25  tion  (con)dition   (con)ception    conirt-bution    eon-version 

26  inter-jection  (con)gregation ;    1  pos.   (com)pletion;  3  pos. 

27  con-fusion    (com)passion;     (s-shun-hook)     (com)position; 

28  (st-loop)  con-test  con-trast   corn-posed  con-gestion*  con- 

29  text     (con)stitution*;     (halving)     ctrc?/m-spect     corn-bat 
80  (con)template   (emp)      (com)ment     (eon)duct     (con)sent 

31  con-cert   (con)descend    (con)sult  tnter-dict   dis(con)nect* 

32  com-patible       tncom-plete*       tnter-sect        mis(con)duct 

33  recornni-end*   self-esteem*    anft-cipate    a»<t-dote    (con)- 

84  duct  non-con-ductor*  (com)parative*  (coni)plioate  (com)- 

85  pliment  (con)sonant*  (con)struct*  (con)tact  (con)tribute 

86  con<ra-dict;    1  pos.    cownter-feit   co?n-plete    (con)venient 

87  interr-ogation*;      3   pos.       (con)clude       (comm)unicate; 

38  (r-hook)    (com)fort   con-vert  (con)gratulate*    (con)gratu- 

39  lation     t?iter-pret;      (n-hook)      corn-pound     (con)tingent 

40  (dis)con-tent   (con)tent   (con)straint    (com)plained    (con)- 

41  fident  (con)sistent*  (con)stant  (con)stantlj-*  co»-tend. 

(167—3—1:30.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  161 

PHRASES. 

813.    Every-consideration  great-interest   ^-am-considered 
in-circumstances    in-his-interest    into-consideration    some- 
consideration      take-into-consideration      that-circumstance 
this-circumstance  this-conclusion. 
EXERCISE  31. 

314.  1.  No  man  should-be  so  taken-up  in-the  search  of- 
truth  as  thereby  to  neglect  the-more  necessary  duties  of 
active-life ;  for  after-all  is-done  it-is  action  only  which-gives 
a-true  value  and-commendationto-virtue.  2.  No-one  knows 
what  he-is  doing  while  he-is  acting  rightly,  but  of  what-is 
wrong  we-are  always  conscious.  8.  Prosperity  is  too  apt 
to-prevent  us  from  examining  our  conduct,  but-as  adversity 
leads  us  to-think  properly  of-our  state,  it-is-most  beneficial 
to  us.  4.  Our  dependence  upon  God  ought-to-be  so  entire 
and-absolote  that-we  should-never  think-it  necessary  in-any- 
kind  of  distress  to-have  recourse  to-human  consolations. 
5.  He  who-would  pass  the-declining  years  of-his-life  with 
peace  and-comfort  should  when  young  consider  that-he-may 
one-day  be  old,  and-remember  when-he-is  old  that-he-has 
once  beeii  young.  6.  The  integrity  of-men  is-to-be  meas- 
ured by- their  conduct,  not  by-their  profession.  7.  He  who- 
has  lost  confidence  can  lose  nothing  more.  8.  Confidence 
in-conversation  has-a  greater  share  than  wit.  9.  The  con- 
science is  more  wise  than  science.  10.  He-is  richest  who-is 
content  with-the  least,  for  content  is-the  wealth  of  nature. 

11.  Reasonable  men  are-the-best  dictionaries  of-conversation. 

12.  Silence  is  one  great  art  of-conversation.     13.    Fear  God 
ami-keep  his  commandments,  for-this-is  the  whole  duty  of 
man.     14.    Gain  may-be  temporary  and-uncertain;  but  ever 
while  you-live  expense  is    constant   and-certain;  and-it-is 
easier  to  build  two  chimneys  than  to  keep  one  in  fuel.    15.  If- 
a-good  face  is-a  letter  of  recommendation,  a-good  heart  is-a 
letter  of-credit.     16.    The-worth  of-a  state  in-the-long  run 
is-the-worth  of-the  individuals  composing  it.     17.    Liberality 
consists  less  in  giving  much  than-in  giving  with-discretion. 


162 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 


18.  The-human-race  is-in-the-best  condition  wben-it-has-the 
greatest  degree  of-liberty.  19.  While  we-are  reasoning  con- 
cerning life,  life  is  gone.  20.  Prudence  and-love  are  incon- 
sistent; in  proportion  as-the  last  increases  the-other  decreases. 
21.  The-mo0t  manifest  sign  of  wisdom  is  continued  cheer- 
fulness. (364—4:30—8.) 

815.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  He-is  happy  whose  circumstances 
suit  his  temper;  but  he-is  more-excellent  who-can  suit  his 
temper  to  any-circumstances.  (5 — 1.) 


TRANSLATE. 


PHRASING. — It  sometimes  transpires  in  reporting  that  a 
phrase,  which  extends  below  the  line,  will  be  intersected  by 
another  phrase  in  the  line  beneath.  Of  this,  however,  there 
are  no  bad  consequences. 


LESSON  XXXII. 
AFFIXES. 

317.  List  of  affixes:  Ing  ings  ship  ble  bly  ility  ality 
arity  self  selves  ful  hood  soever  ture  ly. 

The  dot,  circle  and  tick,  are  used  to  denote  ing,  ings  and 
ing-the  respectively,  in'cases  where  the  letter  >-^  ng  cannot 
conveniently  be  joined,  as  in  preserving,  castings,  doing-the, 
L  1. 

The  s  and  sez  circles  denote  self  and  selves,  as  in  himself, 
ourselves. 

Ship  is  expressed  by  sh,  as  in  friendship.  But  in  order  to 
avoid  unsuitable  outlines,  sh  is  sometimes  disjoined,  as  in 
lordship,  courtship. 

The  endings,  ility,  ality,  arity,  are  signified  by  the  detach- 
ment of  any  letter  from  the  preceding  part  of  the  word,  as 
in  barbarity,  fidelity,  instrumentality,  L  2. 

The  terminations,  ble,  bly,  ful,  are  often  indicated 
by  b  and./"  simply,  as  in  admissible,  disgraceful,  Ls  3  and  4. 

Mnt,  when  written  separately  from  the  preceding  part  of 
the  word,  indicates  mental,  as  well  as  mentality,  as  in  instru- 
mental, L  2. 

Hood  is  denoted  by  d,  usually  joined,  as  in  womanhood. 

The  ending,  soever,  is  written  sv,  as  in  whensoever,  L  4. 

Ture  is  expressed  by  tr,  as  in  structure,  L  1. 

When  rendered  desirable  by  convenience  or  angularity, 
final  I  is  disjoined  to  express  ly,  as  in  vastly,  beastly,  L  3. 

The  prefix  and  affix  signs  cannot  of  course  be  employed 
when  the  syllables  they  represent  are  independent  words,  as 
ship,  con,  self,  counter,  etc. 

318.     1  Write:    Debil-ity  vit-ality  stab-ility*  instrument- 

2  (ility  legib-tVtty  reliab-tVtYy  famili-artYy  c&st-ing  observ- 

3  in-j  huxt-ings  disgrace-/ui  sensi-6£e  advisa-6/e  your-se{/* 

4  it-self  priest-food  who-soever*  host-ility;  1  pos.   my-self* 

5  thy-self  divisi-ble;    8  pos.    our-selves*  admissi-We  town- 

6  ship;     (halving)     hospit-ality     individu-«/tYy*     hard-sAtp 

7  lord-ship  court-ship  partner-sAtp  accounta-ftfe  admitt-tngr 

—163— 


Ift4  RBPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

8  bleed-tngr  trea.t-ing  putt-ing  plead-tnys  debat-tngr  dread- 

9  ing     fundamental*     orn&-mental*     supple-mental    regi- 

10  mental   detri-mental   ele-mental   horseman-ship  scholar- 

11  ship    workman-stop    fellow-stop    where-soeuer*    which- 

12  soever  whom-soever.  (49 — 1 — :SO.) 

319.  KEY.     1.    Preserving    castings    doing-the    himself 
ourselves  accountable    lordship  friendship  graceful  struc- 
ture.   2.    Fidelity    individuality    barbarity   credulity   hos- 
pitality    formality     instrumental     legibility.      8.      Vastly 
beastly   regularity   illegibility   intellectuality    womanhood 
disgraceful   township   courtship.    4.    Whensoever  ostensi- 
ble   citizenship    engravings    fixture    manhood    childhood 
admissible  yourselves. 

PHRASES.  5.  Political-principles  short-space-of-time  as- 
little-as  by-which-it-may-be  by-which-it-would-be  for-some- 
time  if -it-is  it-is-absolutely-necessary.  6.  Let-us-be  most- 
natural  must-not-be  present-question  such-is-not-the-case 
this-is-not-the-case  thought-we-were  to-state. 

SENTENCES.    1.   No  sensible-person  ever  made-an  apology. 

2.  To-love-one  that-is  great  is  almost  to-be  great  one's-self . 

3.  No  man  was  ever  so-much  deceived  by  another  *s  by 
himself.    4.    Self-trust  is-the  essence  of  heroism. 

PHKASES. 

320.  Take-some-time   that-does-not    that-thought   there- 
certainly  there-is-absolutely   there-is-no-doubt   there-might 
they-are-certain-that  they-are-sometimes  they-thought  this- 
has-not  this-is-intended  this-is-no-doubt  this-is-not  this-no- 
doubt    thought-this    to-certain    to-prevent    to-which-it-can 
to-which-it-is    to-which-it-may     very-certain    was-no-doubt 
we-thought  what-might   which-is-no-doubt  which-must-not 
who-had-not  without-doubt  without-his-knowledge  without- 
it  without-such    without-thai    without-their   without-them 
without-this. 

EXERCISE  32. 
821.    1.    The- more  a-man  denies  himself  the-more  he-shall 


Pau  32. 

i   V'-=.   i  -T,  72,        ^ 
.   ^|    ^\/\     "I 

3   V  V  ^'  ^    <H   7 


Vr u 
J 
6 
, 

x    b-^\ 


<C     „ 


8KNTKNCE8. 


L 

V. 


v 


C_9      X 
\ 


TRAN8LATR. 


±/"  C 

C  V— 

-     6 


I  r  X 


\ 

X     V^ 

1 

T!.  /x^^rz: 
i ,  ~*  '  /  ( 


H 


^ 


^  x 


ON 

J 

/ 


6         ,        •* 


r 


166  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

obtain  from-God.  2.  He  that-has-never  known  adversity  is 
but  half  acquainted  with  others  or-with  himself.  3.  Beauty, 
like  truth  and-justice,  lives  within  us;  like  virtue  and -like 
moral  law,  it-is-a  companion  of-the  soul.  4.  Man  believes 
himself  always  greater-than  he-is,  and-is  esteemed  less-t ha n 
he-is  worth.  5.  Without  content  we-shall  find  it  almost  as 
difficult  to-please  others  as  ourselves.  6.  Dignity  consists 
not  in-possessing  honors,  but  in-deserving  them.  7.  Econ- 
omy is  of-itself  a-great  revenue.  8.  The-best  and-highest 
part  of-a  man's  education  is-that-which  he-gives  himself. 
tt.  The-more  you  speak  of-yourself  the-more  you-are  likely 
to-lie.  10.  All-men  would-be  master  of-others,  but  no  man 
is  lord  of-himself.  11.  No  man  is  happy  who  does-not- 
think  himself  so.  12.  Think  wrongly  if-you  please,  but 
in-all-cases  think  for-yourself.  13.  Do-not  speak  of-your 
happiness  to-a-man  less  fortunate  than  yourself. 

(172—2—1:30.) 

322.  SPEED  SENTENCE.  Every-person  has  two  educations, 
one-of-which  he-receives  from-others,  and-one  more-impor- 
tant whi^h  he-gives  himself.  (5 — 1.) 


QUESTIONS  FOR  REVIEW. 

Name  the  initial  hooks.  Name  the  final  hooks.  Give  a 
word  in  which  the  f-hook  should  be  used  ;  the  shun-hook; 
the  w-hook  ;  the  r-hook ;  the  n-hook  ;  the  1-hook.  In  what 
cases  is  the  s-circle  written  within  the  hook,  and  when  is 
the  hook  changed  to  a  circle  to  indicate  that  s  is  to  be  added  ? 
What  is  a  triple  consonant?  Give  three  words  containing 
one  of  these.  Give  three  words  in  which  the  st-loop  is  used ; 
the  str-loop."  Three  words  in  which  the  lengthened  curve  is 
used  to  express  the  added  tr  ;  dr ;  thr.  What  is  the  halving 
principle?  What  does  it  express?  In  what  manner  is  this 
applied  to  /,  r,  m  and  nf  Which  is  pronounced  first,  the 
added  t,  or  a  hook  which  is  attached  to  a  shortened  stein? 
When  intervocalizing  a  word,  how  is  a  dash-vowel  written? 
— a  dot-vowel*  Give  three  words  containing  prefixes; 
three  containing  affixes. 


LESSON 

VARIABLE  LETTERS. 

324.  L,  R,  and  Sh  are  called  variable  letters,  because  they 
are  struck  both  upward  and  downward.    The  choice  is  in  the 
main  governed  by  a  few  simple  rules.    The  up-strokes  are 
known  as  lay,  ray,  and  shay;  the  down-strokes,  el,  ar,  and  ish. 
The  first  two  of  the  upward  (lay  and  ray),  and  the  third  of 
the  downward  strokes  (ish),  are  employed  so  much  more 
commonly  than  the  others,  that  the  learner's  best  plan  is 
simply  to  commit  to  mind  the  exceptional  cases  in  which  these 
remaining  three  (el,  ar,  and  shay)  are  used.    Right  at  the 
outset  it  should  be  observed  that  the  selection  of  any  one  of 
these  letters,  instead  of  its  mate,  is  in  order,  first,  to  secure 
angularity;  second,  to  indicate  the  location  of  certain  vowels, 
thus  increasing  legibility;  third,  to  give  greater  ease  of  exe- 
cution.   It  is  not  deemed  expedient  to  point  out  the  various 
rules,  with  the  numerous  exceptions  thereto,  by  which  each 
individual  outline  is  governed.    By  such  the  student  would 
be  not  so  much  aided  as  bewildered. 

325.  It  is  a  principle  of  short-hand  to  write  syllables, 
rather  than  words  or  letters.    This  in  a  large  measure  deter- 
mines the  choice  of  r  and  I.    When  these  occur  in  the  middle 
of  a  syllable,  they  are  usually  expressed  by  hooks,  as  in 


com-pJi-cation,  ^     L     re-tri-bution;  if,  at  the  begin- 

o 
ning  of  a  syllable,  the  up-strokes  ray  and  lay  are  commonly 

used,  as  in  \/         pro-rogue,  ^_J\f~  un-tove-ly;  if,  at  the 
end   of    a   syllable,    the   down-strokes    ar   and  el,    as   in 


T 

,  ^y    in-e/-igible. 


dis-arr-ange 

Note  will  be  taken  that  in  the  names  of  these  letters,  lay, 
ray,  el,  ar,  the  consonant  begins  or  ends  the  word  in  con- 
formity with  this  rule. 


-167— 


168  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

826.  1.  KEY.  Ledge  Lehigh  repeal  rage  Rome  alkali 
alike  elect  early  ark.  2.  Alight  elbow  arch  arrive 
cherry  faro  chair  fair  pompadour.  3.  Curl  scroll  score 
declare  choir  mire  cohere  roar.  4.  Rowley  scaly  folly 
Conley  kingly  wrongly  bile  assail.  5.  Fill  veal  rill  cool 
scowl  Ariosto  Mozart  closer  miser.  6.  Spinner  joiner 
Stanley  blandly  spindle  meaner  chaffer  jovial.  7.  Re- 
cover, engraver  gruffly  scorn  turn  burn  bereave  observe. 

8.  National  Congregational  rational  tush  dish  fish   fishy. 

9.  Mulish  shell-fish    finish  vanish  shaker  sugar    babyish. 
PHRASES.    10.    You-are  are-you  are-they   are-many  are- 
such  as-many-as-are  this-will  this-will-not.    11.    Will-there 
as-many-as-will    I-shall-have    you-shall-have    shall-there-be 
there-shall-be  shall-greatly  it-shall-never. 

12.  Lucy  Elsie  lack  alack  long  along  ledgy  elegy. 
13.  Lame  alum  logical  illogical  lament  element  artis- 
tically artistical.  14.  Race  erase  rest  arrest  auditory 
auditor  resolute  irresolute.  15.  Sorrows  source  rock 
arc  tarry  tear  chary  chore. 

RULES. 

327.  i.  When  I  or  r  begins  a  word,  strike  it  upward,  as  in 
ledge,  Lehigh,  repeal,  rage. 

Exception.  To  secure  angularity,  use  ar  if  it  is  followed 
by^— >  m,  as  in  Rome.  L  1. 

2.  When  either  of  these  letters  is  preceded  by  an  initial 
vowel,  use  the  downward  stroke,  as  in  alkali,  alike,  elect, 
early,  ark.    L  1. 

Exception.  When  either  is  immediately  followed  by  a 
downward  letter,  use  lay  or  ray,  even  though  it  is  preceded 
by  an  initial  vowel,  as  in  alight,  elbow,  arch,  arrive.  L  2 

3.  When  r  is  the  last  consonant,  but  followed  by  a  vowel, 
use  ray,  as  in  cherry,  faro.    When  r  is  the  last  consonant, 
and  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  use  ar,  as  in  chair,  fair.    L  2. 

Exceptions,  (a)  Final  r,  however,  should  be  struck  up- 
ward, even  though  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  in  cases  where 


Slate  33. 


vr 


6 


170  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

the  use  of  ar  would  carry  the  word  two  spaces  below  the  line, 
as  in  pompadour. 

(b)  At  the  end  of  words  always  use  lay  after  c —  kr  and 
a —  skr,  as  in  curl,  scroll. 

(c)  At  the  end  of  words  use  ar  after  Q —  sk,  c —  kl,  « ski, 

and  c kw,  as  in  score,  declare,  choir. 

(d)  Ray  is  always  used  after  ^-^  m,  S  hay  and  /  ray, 
as  in  mire,  cohere,  roar,  L  8. 

4.  When  I  is  the  last  consonant  and  followed  by  a  vowel, 
lay  should  be  used,  as  in  Rowley,  scaly,  folly. 

Exception.  After  ^_^  n  and  >— -  ng  always  use  el,  whether 
followed  by  a  vowel  or  not,  as  in  Conley,  kingly,  wrongly,  L  4. 

5.  Final  I  is,  indeed,  most  commonly  struck  upward,  even 
though  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  bile,  assail;  but  when  not 
followed  by  a  final  vowel,  is  always  struck  downward  after 
^_  /,  ^  v,  /  ray,  —  k,  and  Q —  sk,  as  it.  fill,  veal,  nil, 
cool,  scowl,  L  5. 

HOOK  AND  CIBCLB  MODIFICATIONS. 

828.  These  rules  are  affected  to  some  extent  by  the  inter- 
vention of  the  s-circle  and  final  hooks  between  /  and  r  and 
the  stems  which  immediately  precede  them. 

1.  The  occurrence  of  a  circle  between  two  letters  does 
away  the  need  of  an  angle  otherwise  necessary.    For  exam- 
ple, ars  may  safely  be  written  before  t,  as  in  Ariosto,  though 
t  cannot  follow  ar  standing  alone.    In  Mozart  and  miser,  the 
occurrence  of  the  circle  renders  it  practicable  to  use  ar, 
which  is  desirable  in  these  cases.    Instead  of  using  ar  after 
c —  kl,  the  intervention  of  o'tss  makes  it  desirable  to  write 
ray,  as  in  closer.    Hence  the  occurrence  of  the  s-circle  in  such 
connection  does  away  the  necessity  of  keeping  angularity  in 
view  when  choosing  between  upward  and  downward  I  and  r. 
L6. 

2.  The  occurrence  of  a  final  hook  (n,f,  or  shn)  in  connec- 
tion with  the  stem  which  precedes  I  or  r,  has  much  to  do 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  171 

with  determining  the  direction,  upward  or  downward,  of 
these  letters.  In  most  such  cases  it  is  convenient  to  strike 
them  in  one  direction  only,  as  will  be  apparent  to  the  writer. 
For  example,  the  n-hook  occurring  after  \  p,  \  t,  /  ch 
and  their  cognates,  must  necessarily  be  followed  by  ar  or  el, 
as  in  spinner,  joiner,  Stanley,  blandly,  L  6.  After  ^~^>  ran, 
also,  ar  should  be  used,  as  in  meaner.  After  </  chf,  ^  jf, 
ar  or  el,  as  in  chaffer,  jovial.  After  — 3  kf,  — ^gf,  /?  hf,  and 
/  rf,  always  use  lay  or  ray,  as  in  recover,  engraver,  gruffly, 
L7. 

3.  When  r  is  the  last  stem,  *»^d  followed  by  an  n-hook, 
ray  should  have  the  preference,  as  in  scorn,  turn,  burn,  L  7. 

4.  When  r  is  followed  by  final  /or  v,  the  upward  stroke 
should  invariably  be  employed,  in  order  that  the  hook  may 
be  used,  as  in  bereave,  observe,  L  7. 

5.  The  shn,  similarly  to  the  n  and  f  hooks,  in  some  cases 
determines  the  choice  of  I  or  r,  as  in  national,  Congregational, 
rational,  L  8.    Here  the  final  stems  would  be  struck  in  a 
direction  just  opposite  were  it  not  for  the  fact  of  the  shn- 
hook.    L  8. 

329.  ISH  AND  SHAY. 

(a)  After  |  t  and  j  d  write  shay,  as  in  tush,  dish.  There 
are  but  few  exceptions  to  this  rule  which  angularity  renders 
necessary. 

(6)  Write  shay  after  V^_  f,  as  in  fish,  unless  it  is  followed 
by  a  vowel,  when  ish  should  be  used,  as  in  fishy,  L  8. 

(c)  Use  shay  both  before  and  after  lay,  as  in  mulish,  shell- 
fish, L  9. 

(d)  Use  shay  after  V>  fncT\±  vn,  as  in  finish,  vanish. 

(e)  Use  shay  always  before  c —  kr  or  <r—  gr,  as  in  shaker, 
sugar,  L  9. 

(J)  Also  use  shay  when  necessary  to  prevent  word-forms 
from  extending  too  far  below  the  line,  as  in  babyish,  L  9. 


178  EXPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

PHRASING. 

330.  The  rules  here  given  as  to  upward  and  downward 
strokes  govern  also  in  phrasing.    Angularity  and  ease  of 
execution  are  the  two  important  points  to  be  kept  in  view. 
The  phrases  given  in  Ls  10  and  11  will  illustrate  sufficiently. 

PHRASES. 

331.  By-which-it-can  by-which-it-is  present-interest  very- 
little  there-are-certainly   there-certainly    too-little    please- 
acknowledge-receipt     heavenly-Father     I-am-in -favor     in- 
answer  to-yours  owners-risk  there-sometimes  that-is-thought 
adjust-the-matter     give-the-matter     in-answer-to     to-your- 
credit    fill-your-order    we-have-placed     we-shall-be-pleased 
call-your  attention    you-will-please    at-some-other-time    by- 
reason-of   can-be-raised   did-you-make    does-not-take-place 
do-you-remember   for-that-reason    for-their-services    great- 
number  how-is-it  I-am-inclined  I-am-informed  I-am-going. 

332.  EXERCISE  33. 

NEW  YORK,  March  16,  1886. 
MESSRS.  ROUSSEL  &  HICKS,  71  Broadway,  City. 
Gentlemen: — The  S.  S.  "Enchantress"  now  in  Baltimore, 
reports  ready  for  coal  to-morrow,  Saturday,  8  A.  M. 

My  agent  telegraphs  me  that  Meredith  cannot-give  "  En* 
chantress  "  berth  bef ore-Monday.  Bad  outlook  for  coal. 

This-delay  means  demurrage  for  me  to  pay  to-the  steamer. 
Please  do-your  utmost  to-malce-the  loss  as  light  as  possible. 
Yours  truly,  etc. 

(To  be  phrased  by  the  student.) 

PITTSBURGH,  July  10, 1886. 

MR.  ROBERT  SIMPSON,  Box  2,725,  New  York  City. 

Dear  Sir: — In  reply  to  your  letter  of  the  17th  inst.  we  have 
wired  you  quoting  angles  at  3i  ets.  per  lb.;  bars,  2  cts.,  card 
rates;  all  net,  delivered  at  Columbus.  If  immediately  re- 
ceived, the  order  can  be  filled  with  promptness.  The  other 
articles  called  for  we  do  not  make.  The  above  price  includes 
cutting  to  length. 

We  have  yours  of  the  17th  inst.,  enclosing  draft  for  $70,000. 
This  amount  has  bee  a  placed  to  your  credit  on  account,  with 
thanks.  Very  truly  yours, 

(190-2—1:30.) 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHOPT-HAND.  173    | 

— — J 

333.  TRANSLATE. 


v  i 

-| t    S   ?  l-i-Xl  '  *~V"V 

±l_rr_^.  p.  /»  ^  SA- 


LESSON  XXXIV. 
THEORY  OF  CONSONANT  POSITION. 

334.  Much  misapprehension  in  regard  to  the  true  use  of 
consonant  position  prevails  amongst  students,  teachers  and 
reporters.  The  real  importance  of  position  is  not  over-esti- 
mated, but  the  extent  to  which  this  contrivance  should  be 
applied  is  misunderstood.  The  short-hand  writer  ought,  of 
course,  to  make  use  of  position  only  so  far  as  it  is  found 
practical,  necessary,  and  safe,  and  not,  for  the  sake  of  a  theory, 
write  a  vast  number  of  words  in  a  difficult  position  when  no 
positive  advantage  is  to  be  gained  by  it.  Let  it  be  distinctly 
understood  right  at  the  outset  that  if  the  vowel  in  the  ac- 
cented syllable  of  a  word  happens  to  be  a  first  or  third  place 
vowel,  the  word  is  not  simply  on  this  account  to  be  written  in  / 
I 


174  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

the  first  or  third  position.  Only  a  few  words  comparatively 
are  in  fact  written  in  the  first  and  third  positions,  the  very 
great  majority  being  placed  in  the  second  position,  that  is,  on 
the  line.  To  illustrate  the  relative  importance  of  the  second 
position,  it  may  be  compared  to  the  main  line  of  a  railway, 
the  remaining  positions  being  little  more  than  mere  side- 
tracks. 

335.  The  plan  of  placing  words  above,  through  or  below 
the  line  was  devised  as  a  means  of  indicating  certain  vowels, 
in  order  to  save  the  time  otherwise  necessary  to  write  in  the 
dots  and  dashes.    But  it  is  only  a  small  number  of  words, 
however,  that  need  vocalizing;  and  it  is  only  a  portion  of  this 
small  number  that  are  capable  of  being  vocalized  in  this  way. 

KEY. 

336.  SENTENCES.    1.    Books,  like  our  friends,  should-be 
few  and  well  chosen.    2.    Every  great  book  is-aii  action, 
and-every  great  action  is-a-book.    8.    Judges  and-senates 
have-been  bought  for  gold.    4.    Genius  finds  its-own  road 
and-carries  its-own  lamp.    6.    The-scenes  of  childhood  are- 
the  memories  of  future  years.    Ls  5  to  9  inclusive  to  be 
translated. 

PHRASES.  10.  Generation-after-generation  in-the-nature- 
of-things  if-it-is-not  for-it-is-not  for-it-is-no  in-fact  east- 
and-west  east-to-west.  11.  I-trust-not  between-us  ought- 
not  of-its  of-itself  at-the-same-time  let-us  let-us-try  all- 
states.  12.  As-a-matter-of-fact  ordinary-circumstances  in- 
his-circumstances  it-is-certain-that  in-comparison-\vith-that 
let-us-consider  I-am-convinced.  13.  For-their-own-interest 
in-conclusion  I-am-concerned  with-one-consent  these-cir- 
cumstances  this-is-certain  who-shall-not.  14.  By-itself 
advertisement  Gulf-of-Mexico  against-it  registered-bonds 
gold-bearing-bonds  eye-sight.  15.  Anywhere-else  nowhere- 
else  in-the-country  it-is-no-longer  for-their-purpose  abie- 
to-make  if-I-am-not. 

837.  In  order  to  set  forth  in  a  concrete  manner  the  appli- 
cation of  the  principle  of  position,  a  list  of  characteristic 


Iplate  34. 


BKNTKNCE8. 


V 


V 


'  r  -v 


®y  >-S| 

—  c  -\ 


TRANSLATE. 


J76  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

words  will  be  taken  up  and  the  best  means  of  expressing 
them  discussed.    These  words  are: 

Victim  torch  risk  clash;  big  beg  bag;  dignity  dig  dog; 
sell  cell  silly;  sketch  scotch  leave  love;  cite  set  suit;  do 
day  Dow;  see  saw  say  so  sue  us;  fie  boo  gee  thaw  ice 
shy  soup  sack  coon;  in  any  no  know;  men  man  human; 
ever  her  home  though  thus  much  hope  young;  knock 
mist  mimic  meek  gnaw  key;  Michael  Nichols  Oilman; 
presumably  phraseology  ingenuity  lawlessness  purification. 

338.  Beginning  with  the  first  four  words,  victim,  torch, 
risk,  clash,  it  is  plain  that  the  unvocalized  outlines  are  amply 
legible.  Nothing  would  be  gained,  and  it  is  entirely  unnec- 
essary to  write  the  first  three  words  in  the  first  position,  or 
the  last  one  in  the  third  position.  These  outlines  cannot  be 

read   any   other    way   than      -  1        victim,      [/?    torch, 


>*  —    risk,       J  clash.    This  is  why  vowels  are  unneces- 

sary, and  the  very  reason,  too,  why  there  is  no  need  whatever 
of  placing  them  elsewhere  than  on  the  line. 

839.    Taking    next    the    words,    \          big,    \          beg, 


bag,  it  will  be  found  that  although  all  have  the  same 
outline,  there  is  no  need  of  vowels,  since  no  two  are  the  same 
part  of  speech,  the  first  being  an  adjective,  the  second  a 
verb,  and  the  third  a  noun.  In  such  cases  no  ambiguity  can 

possibly  arise;  to  illustrate,  \__     — =  could  not  be  read 

beg  gun,  or  bag  gun,'  ^-~~^^  \_  would  not  be  read 
money  beg,  etc.  Hence,  if  vowels  are  unnecessary,  observing 
position,  that  is,  writing  big  above,  and  bag  through  the  line, 
is  equally  useless.  It  takes  time,  and  to  that  extent  impedes 
the  writer;  it  is  unnecessary,  and  hence  bad  practice.  (The 
words  bug  and  buggy  should  be  vocalized,  to  avoid  a  possible 

conflict.)    I Dignity,   \ dig,  \_  _  dog,   have  a  uniform 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD.  177 

outline,  but  these  words  differ  so  much  in  meaning  that  they 
fall  under  the  rule  just  stated.  Under  this  rule  also  come 

°      sell,  6      cell,  C    silly,    /^  sketch,   /  scotch,  etc. 
340.    The  next  three,  touch,  teach,  attach,  we  find  are  all 

verbs,  and  of  the  same  kind  (transitive).    Hence,  if       I  t-ch, 

the  outline  common  to  all,  were  written  in  the  second  posi- 
tion for  each,  and  without  vowels,  serious  conflict  would 
frequently  arise.  To  avoid  this  teach  (containing  a.  first-place 
vowel)  is  written  in  the  first  position,  and  attach  (containing 
a  third-place  vowel)  in  the  third  position.  The  writer  is  de- 
layed much  less  by  the  writing  of  a  word  in  position,  than 
by  putting  in  a  vowel  afterwards.  Upon  this  fact  depends 
chiefly  the  value  of  the  scheme  of  three  positions.  Under 


. 
this   "tile  come    also  the   verbs,  .......  leave  (1  pos.)   and 

(\    love  (2  pos.);  .J*.  cite  (1  pos.),  I    set  (2  pos.),—  fL***** 
(3  pos). 

341.  In  I  do,  I  day,  and  l\   Dow,  the  last  is  vocalized  for 
the  reason  that  the  principle  of  position  is  not  employed  in 
expressing  proper  names.    The  simple  stem   )  s  is  employed 
in  see,  saw,   say,  so,  use,  us,  the  first  two  being  written  in 
the  first,  and  the  last  two  in  the  third  position.    Say  and  so 
are  so  frequent  that  it  is  found  expedient  to  strike  us  through 
the  line,  although  the  vowel  is  second  place. 

342.  Position  cannot  safely  be  used  to  indicate  vowels  in 
words  that  are  short,  or  but  little  used;  particularly  those 

IV 

containing  but  a  single  consonant  letter,  such  as   V_  fie, 
\x    600,    /"    gee,    (     thaw,     )   ice,    J     shy,    \    soup, 

o  _  .  sack,  —  ^  coon.    It  is  here  necessary  to  express  the  vowels, 
and  to  do  so  the  dots  and  dashes  must  be  written. 

343.  In  the  next  group,   ....in,  ......  uny,v^/no,  —  know, 


178  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

the  second  word,  any,  containing  a  second-place  accented 
vowel,  is  nevertheless  written  in  the  first  position  to  avoid 
conflict  with  no,  a  word  of  opposite  meaning,  but  the  same 
part  of  speech.    Here  no,  a  more  frequent  word  than  any,  is 
given  the  easier  position,  namely,  on  Ihe  line,  where  nearly 
all  words  of  frequent  occurrence  are  written. 
844.    A  further  illustration  of  this  principle  may  be  found 
^~a 

in  men,   — ^  man,  >-^'  human,  occupying  respectively 

the  first,  second,  and  third  positions.  In  all  such  cases  the 
commonest  word  is  placed  on  tlie  line,  the  less  frequent  in  the 
first,  and  the  least  frequent  in  the  third  position.  It  is  in  ac- 
cordance with  this  principle  that  ever  and  her  (second-place 
vowels),  are  assigned  to  the  first  position;  and  home,  though, 
thus,  much,  hope,  young  (also  second-place  vowels),  are 
assigned  to  the  third  position. 

345.  Outlines  containing  only  horizontal  or  half-length 
stems  are  almost  invariably  wi'itten  above  the  line  if  the  ac- 

/""^^ 

cented  vowel  is  first-place,  as  in  ^  knock,  mist, 
mimic.  This  rule  applies  although  the  vowels  are 

actually  written,  as  in  ." meek,  '. gnaw,  ."...    key. 

Proper  names   also  come  under  this   rule;   for   example, 

Michael,   Nichols,  Oilman.     This 

practice  is  accounted  for  largely  by  the  fact  that  it  is  a  very 
easy  matter  to  write  horizontal  letters  in  the  first  position, 
which  requires  the  pen  to  be  carried  no  higher  than  when 
executing  second-place  upward  or  downward  stems.  Vocal- 
ized words  are  then  read  much  easier  in  cases  where  the 
vowel  signs  are  not  written  accurately  in  place,  as,  for  ex- 
ample, ..* would  easily  be  read  meek,  for  "make  would 

in  no  case  be  put  above  the  line. 

346.  Lengthy  word-forms,  with  scarcely  any  exceptions, 
are  written  on  the  line,  no  matter  what  the  accented  vowel 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  179 

be,    as    in       *  /     phraseology,       °~^     presumably, 

*~^\  ingenuity.    Legibility  would  not  be  increased  in  any 

decree  by  writing  such  words  in  any  other  position. 

347.  Position  is  indicative  of  but  one  vowel  only  in  any 
particular  word,  and  for  this  reason  it  need  not  be  observed 
except  in  writing  monosyllables  and  dissyllables.  A  few  long 
derivatives  are  located  off  the  line,  in  order  to  preserve  the  po- 


sition of  their  primitive;  illustration,   lawlessness; 

purification. 


348.    From  these  observations  are  deduced  the  following 
rules: 

1 .  Words  that  are  plainly  legible  in  the  second  portion,  without 
vowels,  are  written  uniformly  on  the  line.    Illustrative  words: 
Dislike    dismiss  picnic    deceive   legal   Bible   reveal   blank 
district  design  decide  cloth  batch  clear  vital  desire  deny 
chatter  deliver  define  distrust  battle. 

2.  Several  words,  different  parts  of  speech,  but  having  the  same 
outline,  are  all  written  usually  in  the  same  position.    Illustrative 
words:    Inch    notch;    several    savior;    deal    daily;    small 
smell;  field   failed;   bath  both. 

3.  Words  that  are  both  short  and  of  frequent  occurrence  may  be 
written  out  of  the  second  position  to  indicate  a  first  or  third  place 
accented  vowel.    Illustrative  words:    These  sight  office  offset 
easily  least  abuse  issue  outside  plan  past. 

4.  Lengthy  outlines  and  infrequent  words  are  written  in  the 
second  posilion,and  the  vowels  inserted  when  necessary.    Illustra- 
tive words:    Vast   star    cast   stitch    plaster    elegant    slay 
disband  voice  seige  soil   entice. 

5.  An  exception  is  made  in  favor  of  horizontal  word-forms, 
which  are  placed  in  the  first  position  whenever  the  accented  vowel  it 
first-^'    e,  whether  written  or  not.    T1uistrative  words:    Sick 


180  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAlfD. 

nigh  sneak  seem  honest  mist   cost  midst  mind  syndicate 
sink  medium. 

6.  The  principle  of  position  is  not  applied  in  writing  proper 
names.    Miles  Clyde  Hotter  McCluru  Root  Hugel. 

7.  In  a  number  of  cases  an  outline,  especially  a  word-sign, 
whose  principal  vowel  is  second  place,  is  written  nevertheless  in  the 
first  or  third  position,  to  oroid  conflict  with  a  more  frequent  second- 
position  word  having  the  same  outline.    E.  g.    Ago  apply  issue 
own  away  awake  July. 

8.  Position  is  used  quite  extensively  jor  the  reason  that  the  com- 
paratively small  number  of  words  falling  under  the  above  rules  are 
all  of  very  frequent  occurrence,  and  it  is  essential  always  to  give 
them  their  proper  place.    E.  g.    The    is    I    me    of    at    about. 

9.  Half-length  words,  derived  from  full-length  outlines,  retain 
the  same  consonant  position  as  their  primitives.    E.  g.    *     Com- 

1 

plained,  ^    played,  *\   remembered,        numbei .      ...  tried. 

10.  Half-length  outline*  are  written        one  full  space  above 
the  line  if  first-position,  and  entirely  below  the  line  ij  third  position. 

E.  g.  Meet,  "*  did-not,      doubt,         found 

PHRASES. 

349.  All-that-has-been-done  does-not-come  does-not-exist 
has-not-yet-been  have-been-taken  has-not-only  how-little 
I-am-disposed  in-the-course-of-my  in-their-report  in-this- 
instance  in-this-shape  in-this-way  into-the-country  it-can- 
not-be  it-has-been-found  it-has-not-only-been  I-think-that- 
it-is  it-is-not-true  it-may-be-true  it-is-not-done  it-may-be- 
made  it-may-be-maiutained  shall-be-received  it-should-be- 
come-neces«ary. 

EXERCISE  34. 

850.  NEW- YORK,  June  26,  1886. 

MESSRS.  S.  T.  HORNE  &  Co.,  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

Dear- Sirs: — Your-favor  of-the  24th  inst.  received  and-con- 
tents  noted.  The-box  of  residuum  has  come  to  hand.  This- 
is-certainly  not-the-result  of-the  use  of-our  oil;  but-is-no- 


REPORTIXQ  STYL^  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 


181 


doubt  caused  by-the  impurities  in-the-water  you  speak  of, 
which  gradually  collect  in-the  cylinder  and-which-would-be- 
present,  no  matter  what  grade  of  oil  were  used.  We-shall- 
turn  it  over  at-once  to-our  chemist  for  close  analysis,  and- 
will  report  to-you  as-soon -as  we  ascertain  the-result.  Of- 
one-thing  you-may-be-sure,  it-is-not-caused  by-the  oil.  We 
await  reply  to-our  respects  of-the  2*2nd  inst. 

(To  be  phrased  by  the  student.) 

Dear  Sir: — Inclosed  please  find  invoice  and  B.  L.  of  goods 
shipped  Mr.  James  11.  Canfield  on  the  8th  inst.  Also  find 
directions  for  applying,  which  please  forward  Mr.  Canfield, 
as  we  have  not  his  P.  O.  address.  Not  being  acquainted 
with  Mr.  Canfield,  or  his  commercial  standing,  we  have 
charged  the  shipment  to  you,  in  pursuance  of  instructions 
given  us  by  your  representative. 

(196—2:30—1:30.) 


351. 


\ 


TRANSLATE. 


Y  ^f 14/86. 


.....I 


\> 


L 


\ 


LESSON  XXXV. 
VOCALIZATION. 

852.  KEY.  1.  Being  bayonet  Daugherty  poern  dual 
boa  clayey  laity  stoic.  2.  Powell  Howell  Rowell  tower 
bias  Hyatt  piety  joyous.  3.  Inaugural  error  glue-factory 
fire-eater  mill-owner  > headache  inane.  4.  Cube  tube 
view  mew  dew  Jew  few  lieu.  5.  Idiot  Sulliote  carrion 
sermon  meteor  tare  chair  ask  task.  6.  Goest  fealty 
,  coagulate  pean  vowel  towel  dower  variety.  7.  Oyster 
isle  awning  Ed.,  etc.,  (vowels  to  be  written  previously  to 
the  stems). 

SENTENCES.  1.  Heaven  lies  about  us  in  our  infancy. 
2.  Conscience  warns  us  as-a-friend  before  it  punishes  us  :i-- 
a-judge.  8.  Hope  is  like  a-bad  clock,  forever  striking  the- 
hour  of  happiness  whether  it-has  come  or-not.  4.  The-first- 
and-last  thing  which  is  required  oi  genius  is-the-love  of-truth. 

5.  Christ  saw-much  in-the-world  to  weep  over  and-much  to 
pray  over,  but  he-saw  nothing  in-it  to-look  on  with  contempt. 

6.  Advice  is  seldom  welcome. 

PHRASES.  14.  In-their-own  in-any-event  in-such-a-vvay 
a-just-answer  as-a-matter-of-course  capital-stock  charge- 
of-the-matter.  15.  Charge-of-the-business  condition-of- 
affairs  just-about-as-good-as  first-class-rate  just-taken 
knowledge-of-the-matter  second-hand. 

353.  Very  few  vowels  are  written.    Whole  pages  of  short- 
hand notes  are  taken  without  one  dot  or  dash  appearing. 
The  vowels  are  there,  nevertheless.    The  reader  does  not  see 
them,  but  observes  the  effect  which  these  same  vowels,  acting 
as  invisible  forces,  have  in  giving  shape  to  the  consonant 
outlines.   These  consonant  outlines  are  so  pliant,  that  within 
certain  limits  they  readily  assume  whatever  form  the  vowel 
element  of  the  words  would  indicate-,  just  as  a  large  piece  of 
bark  would  inform  us  of  both  the  size  and  kind  of  the  unseen 
tree  upon  which  it  had  grown.    A  knowledge  of  vowels  is 
important,  because  word-forms  to  a  great  extent  depend 
upon  the  number,  order,  and  character  of  these  elements. 

354.  The  student's  chief  concern  is  to  know  when  to  write, 

—182- 


Slate  35. 


184  REPORTING  STYLE  OF 


and  when  not  to  write,  the  vowel  sounds.  He  can,  however, 
be  supplied  with  no  specific  rule.  He  m>i«t  exercise  his  own 
judgment  in  applying  this  general  rule,  viz.:  In  reporting, 
insert  as  many  vowels  as  may  be  strictly  necewary  to  render  the 
notes  easily  decipherable  when  the  transcript  it  afterwards  made. 
More  vowels  than  these  are  superfluous,  and  ought  not  to  be 
written.  Just  what,  however,  is  meant  by  "  easily  decipher- 
able?" Some  persons  require  the  notes  to  be  pretty  fully 
vocalized,  or  they  find  themselves  at  sea  when  the  report  is 
to  be  rewritten.  There  are  some  few  writers  who  dispense 
with  vowels  almost  entirely.  They  form  their  characters 
well,  choose  accurate  outlines,  and  bring  to  bear  au  excep- 
tional judgment  and  memory  in  writing  out  their  reports 
afterwards.  Those  who  use  vowels  to  quite  an  extent  learn 
to  depend  on  them,  and  the  practice  becomes  necessary 
mainly  through  force  of  habit. 

355.  There  are  a  few  general  principles,  however,  which 
should  govern  all  writers.  To  illustrate,  we  will,  for  con- 
venience, divide  all  words  into  three  classes: 

1st  class.  This  comprises  those  words  whose  consonant 
outlines  are  fortunately  so  full  and  characteristic,  as  to  ren- 
der the  word  plainly  legible  without  the  aid  of  a  vowel. 

The  following  words  will  illustrate:  \ —  Traffic,  \^~s  Driv- 
en, 4  charter,  V*^  sermon,  J —  desk.  Ordinarily,  to  write 

a  single  vowel  here  would  be  bad  practice.  The  consonants 
tell  plainly  what  the  words  are.  When  this  is  the  case  vowel 
signs  are  only  in  the  way.  To  be  more  specific,  let  us  exam- 
ine a  few  of  the  principal  means  by  which  vowels  are  indi- 
cated,  by  the  manner  of  combining  consonants.  First,  itwould 
be  utterly  needless  to  write  a  final  vowel  in  ^- — --  money, 

/•)  racy,  )  mazy,  ^^  coffee,  c\^  heavy,  for  the 
long  n,  3,  z,  f,  and  v,  clearly  signify  a  following  vowel. 
Otherwise  hooks  and  circles  would  be  used.  Likewise  in 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  185 

escape  and  ^)     espy,  the  initial  vowel  is  plainly  indi- 

K 

cated  by  the  use  of  )  s  instead  of  the  circle.  The  employment 
of  stems  for  I  and  r,  where  the  hooks  could  be  written,  indi- 

\'  sf  \.  V 

cates  that  a  vowel  precedes,  as  in  Vv   porch,  \f  bulk. 

This  is  also  true  of  the  loops,  lengthening,  shortening,  and 
other  abbreviating  principles.  The  writer's  rule  should  be 
to  compel  consonant  signs,  so  far  as  possible,  to  express 
vowel  sounds  also;  vowels  so  expressed  need  not,  of  course, 
be  written. 

856.  2nd  class.    This  includes  a  much  smaller  number  of 
words,  which  are  always  to  be  vocalized.    To  this  class  be- 
long such  words  as  l~    dope,    /  coach,  \^1     foul,  ~T~  echo. 

These  words  require  vowel*.,  oecause  their  outlines  are  so 
meagre.  When  standing  alone  they  would  be  either  ambig- 
uous, or  indefinite.  This  class  is  composed  of  words  having 
only  one  or  two  consonants,  containing  usually  a  long  vowel. 
They  are  not  words  that  recur  frequently.  When  one  of 
these,  however,  is  repeated  a  number  of  times  in  a  single 
report,  the  vowels  may  be  omitted  after  the  second  writing, 
particularly  if  the  writer  is  pressed  for  time. 

857.  8rd  class.    This  embraces  quite  a  numerous  list  of 
words  which  sometimes  are,  and  sometimes  are  not  to  be 
vocalized,  depending  upon  the  connection  in  which  they 
occur.    Take  the  word  box,  for  example,  in  the  sentence, 
' '  He  brought  home  a  box  of  candy."    Here  no  vowel  is  neces- 

*\       A 

sary.    But  in  the  sentence,  "<r/  ' — °    .^^     c~\     x" 


the  character  \ 0  b-ks  could  also  be  read  books.    Hence, 

in  these  circumstances,  a  vowel  is  necessary  to  render  the  out- 
line unambiguous.  Illustrative  words:  Tomb  mope  jog 
croak  outch  moth  moist  quake  coke  cloy  plow  glue 
moan  soak  rout  sofa  chyle  chyme.  In  general  it  may  be 


186  REPORTING  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HAND. 

observ  ^J.  that  when  the  vowels  in  a  word  are  nearly  equal  in 
number  to  the  consonants,  a  few  of  them  should  be  expressed; 
not  so,  however,  if  the  consonants  greatly  predominate. 

858.    Perhaps  there  is  no  word  whatever  but  that  in  rare 
contingencies  may  need  a  vowel  for  some  purpose  or  other. 

The  character  V  as  here,  standing  entirely  alone,  could 
be  read  either  never,  or  envy.  Both  may  and  him  require 
vowels  in  the  sentence,  "  I  wish  you  to  write  may,  not  him." 
So  common  a  word  as  out  demands  a  rowel  in  certain  con- 
nections, as  in  the  sentence,  "  4  ^,  ,  ^v  " 

^          A!      *'* 

Without  a  vowel  it  may  be  read  at. 
In  a  few  rare  cases  a  vowel  is  written  within  the  large 


circle,  as,  for  example,  I  exhaust,  XJ)  precise.  When 
unruled  paper  is  used,  whiv,h  is  seldom  necessary,  however,  a 
number  of  first  and  third  position  words  will  require  vocal- 
ization. 

Nothing  short  of  experience  and  observation  will  teach  the 
young  reporter  just  to  what  extent  he  ought  to  insert  vowels 
to  render  his  reports  intelligible  to  himself.  The  difficulty  he 
finds  in  reading  certain  outlines  will  cause  him  to  vocalize 
them  when  next  they  occur.  Gradually  also  he  learns  to 
drop  vowels  which  he  does  not  find  helpful  in  transcribing. 
Stenographers  in  time  acquire  an  intuitive  faculty  telling 
them  as  they  write,  no  matter  how  swiftly,  that  this  word  or 
that  requires  a  vowel,  or  else,  in  the  peculiar  connection  in 
which  it  occurs,  its  meaning  will  be  doubtful  afterwards 
when  the  tracks  of  his  flying  pencil  are  being  translated 
into  "English." 

859.  Considering  the  form  and  function  of  the  vowel 
signs,  it  may  be  observed  that  the  dots  and  dashes,  like  the 
sounds  they  represent,  are  simple.  Whereas,  the  more  com- 
plex sounds,  known  as  compound  vowels,  are  symbolized  by 
compound  characters,  namely,  small  angular  marks  and  semi- 
circles. There  is  an  actual  contact  of  the  vocal  organs  when 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  117 

the  consonants  are  produced.  For  this  reason  they  are  more 
definite  in  character  than  the  vowel  sounds,  which  are  pro- 
duced without  such  contact.  It  is  possible,  by  means  of  the 
vocal  organs,  to  produce  au  almost  infinite  variety  of  shades 
of  vowel  sound.  It  is  probable  that  as  language  improves, 
additional  vowels  will  be  brought  into  use.  The  tendency 
toward  an  increase  has  already  given  rise  to  a  number  of 
distinctions,  out  of  which  much  unprofitable  discussion  has 
grown,  as  to  the  precise  number  of  vowel  sounds  comprised 
iu  the  English  language. 

860.  There  are  a  few  shades  of  vowel  sound  for  which  the 
Pitman  vowel  scale  does  not  provide  symbols.  Nor  is  this 
necessary.  E  in  certain  is  clearly  enough  indicated  by  the 
light  dot  which  represents  e  in  wet;  a  in  air,  by  the  large  dot 
representing  long  a  in  mate;  a  in  ask,  by  the  sign  for  a  in  cap. 

361.  A  few  additional  signs  are  here  presented  for  the  ex- 
pression of  concurrent  vowels,  as  oo-i  in  gluey,  written  *•—%, 
or  a-e  in  gayety,  written  <  |  instead  of  *  •]  This  sign,  <, 
when  pointing  to  the  left,  expresses  a  long  dot-vowel,  followed 
by  any  short  vowel;  when  pointing  to  the  right  it  indicates  a 
long  dash-vowel,  followed  by  any  short  vowel.  L  1. 

If  both  the  concurrent  vowels  are  long,  which  rarely  occurs, 


each  must  be  written  separately,  as  in  "I  inchoate,  or 


coeval.    If  one  is  a  diphthong,  a  following  short-vowel 
may  be  indicated  by  a  slight  tick  attached  to  the  dighthongal 

•   sign,  as  in  ^/Y      Rial,  *~    ]'  moiety. 

362.    A  few  exceptions  are  to  be  noted  to  the  rule  for  plac- 
I    ing  vowels  between  two  consecutive  consonants: 

(a)    When  the  rule  would  throw  the  vowel-sign  into  an 

angle,  rendering  it  ambiguous,  as  in  "— > — £.     Maxley,  not 

written  - — •> — & 
(6)     If  the  word  is  compound,  each  part  should  be  vocalized 


183  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-fJAXD. 

separately,  as  ^  plough-share,         \  cowboy. 


(c)    The  separate  parts,  when  they  are  quite  distinct,  or 
the  components  of  a  derivative  word,  are  vocalized  separate- 


ly,  as  in  Q,  uninstanced,  f*        Lulu-land,       |    excit- 


able.    The  assignment  is  also  governed  to  some  e  ctent  by 
syllabication;  to  illustrate,  canonade  is  written     ^""^  not 

^^]  The  advanced  writer  may  safely  use  his  «wn  best 
judgment  in  this  matter. 

363.  Means  have  been  provided  for  expressing  a  vowel 
which  occurs  between  circle-s  and  the  eshun-hook.  as  a  in 
compensation;  but  in  no  case  whatever  is  this  necessary.    It 
will  aid  the  reader  if  he  will  remember  that  there  is  always 
a  vowel  to  be  supplied  between  a  circle  and  this  hook,  and 
that  without  a  single  exception,  this  vowel  is  either  long  a, 
as  in  compensation,  short  i,  as  in  supposition,  or  short  e,  as  in 
possession. 

364.  A  few  remarks  concerning  diphthongs  and  coales- 
cents  are  in  place  here.    A  diphthong,  literally  double-sound, 
is  supposed  by  most  persons  to  be  two  sounds  in  one.  whereas 
it  is  in  reality  a  glide,  or  sort  of  leap,  from  one  sound  to  an- 
other.   In  producing  it  the  vocal  organs  undergo  a  constant 
and  rapid  change  of  position.    Hence  a  diphthong  might 
properly  be  called  a  curved  sound.    But  the  vocal  organs  re- 
main in  &  fixed  position  while  producing  what  may  be  termed 
elementary  vowels,  and  on  this  account  the  dots  and  dashes 
might  be  considered  as  representing  straight  sounds.    They 
are  capable  of  prolongation,  while  the  diphthongs  are  not. 

The  aspirate  dot  may  precede  diphthongs  and  coales- 
cents,  also,  as  in  •<[  whet,  v|  height.  Since  no  other  char- 
acter is  similar  to  v  I,  it  may  be  written  in  the  1st,  2nd 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  188 

or  3rd  place,  according  to  convenience,  as  in  N> — '  nigh, 

\j  v  belie. 

865.  The  consonants,  w  and  y,  known  as  coalescents,  are 
not  strictly  independent  sounds,  but  are  rather  a  kind  of 
accent,  or  sharpening  impulse,  by  which  any  vowel  may  be 
modified.    It  may  be  said  that  w  gives  a  stress,  or  accentua- 
tion, to  the  vowel  by  means  of  the  lips;  whereas  y  sharpens 
the  vowel  by  means  of  the  palate  and  tongue.    The  character 
„  u  is  employed  to  express  both  the  coalescent  «,  as  in  youth, 
and  the  diphthong  ew,  as  in  view.    There  is  a  real,  though 
but  slight  difference  between  these  two  sounds.    To  f  ende>, 
this  distinction  more  apparent,  add  th  to  view,  thus,  viewth. 
From  this  subtract  v,  and  the  remaining  letters  spell  iewth, 
which  in  pronunciation  plainly  differs  from  youth. 

866.  Observe  the  following  rules  as  to  the  manner  of 
placing  the  vowels: 

(a)  First  and  second  place  initial  vowels  can  best  be 
written  previously  to  the  remaining  part  of  the  word. 

(6)  The  dash  in  such  words  as  x_  foe,  \  bow,  should  be 
struck  downwards. 

367.  UNACCENTED  AND  OBSCURE  VOWELS.  An  instructor 
of  short-hand  is  not  so  much  concerned  in  pointing  out  what 
are  the  precise  sounds  in  any  word,  as  in  teaching  how  best 
to  express  them.  Nevertheless,  a  few  observations  relative 
to  what  are  called  obscure  vowels  are  in  place.  Every  writer 
is  occasionally  required  to  represent  words  with  exactness, 
the  vowel  as  well  as  the  consonant  elements.  But  vowel 
sound  is  so  intangible  that  the  keenest  ear  is  sometimes  un- 
able to  determine  the  precise  quantity  and  quality  of  the 
minor  shades.  When  written  at  all,  these  are  usually  ex- 
pressed by  proximate  signs.  For  example,  the  following 
words,  fully  vocalized,  would  ordinarily  be  .  written, 

Denied,  X^\  polar,  rf  later,  f      refer,  |/\  Urri- 


190  REPORTING  STYLE  OF 


conforrr^ty,       t          conformation.    Put  good 


speakers  do  not  pronounce  them  so.  Vented  is  pronounced 
ventd;  polar,  polr;  later,  latr.  Also,  Bibl,  collr,  contenld, 
stratm,  deacn.  In.  conformation^  the  second  vowel  is  not 
broad  o,  as  in  wrong,  but  short,  as  o  in  lot.  Hereo  receives 
neither  the  primary  nor  secondary  accent,  and  as  a  rule  un- 
accented vowels,  like  those  italicised  in  the  derivative  words 
given  below,  though  marked  long  in  dictionaries,  are  in  real- 
ity short. 

In  refer,  e  is  short.  In  the  following  list  the  italicised 
letters  are,  in  correct  speech,  given  the  short  sound:  .Avail, 
defend,  reduction,  await,  conformation,  progression,  exposi- 
tion. In  terrible,  »  does  not  represent  either  the  long  or 
short  sound  of  »'.  It  is  a  slight,  indefinable  sound,  classed  by 
lexicographers  as  obscure.  Terrible  would  be  pronounced 
the  same  though  spelt  terrable,  terreble,  terroble,  or  terrwble. 
Likewise  stratum  could  be  spelt  strati'm,  stratem,  stratom, 
stratam.  The  italicised  letters  in  the  following  list  are  also 
more  or  less  obscure:  Conformity,  presentable,  radical, 
chaplain,  intangible. 

Notwithstanding  these  statements,  the  most  convenient, 
and  perhaps  the  most  sensible  rule,  in  vocalizing,  is  to  follow 
the  guidance  of  a  standard  dictionary.  Exceptions  need  be 
made  only  when  exactness  is  required. 

PHRASES. 

368.  I-have-also  I-may-have-seen  in-all-its-bearings  in- 
all-other-respects  in-all-probability  in-any-degree  in-~.ny- 
other-country  in-any-other-manner  in-any-other-way  in- 
every-case  in-every-respect  in-favor  in-so-many-words  in- 
substance  in-its-nature  in-its-own-way  in-that-matter  in- 
that-respect  in-that-shape  in-that-way  about-as-much-as 
better-kind  better-way  condition-of-our  condition-of-their 
just-about. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  191 

369.  EXERCISE  85. 

Dear-Sir: — We-have-a  car  of  hominy  chop  en  route,  which- 
will-arrive  in-two-or-three  days  and-will  sell  you  several 
tons  of-same  at  $16.75,  sight  draft.  Will  send  sample  in  day 
or  two;  have-none  on-hand  at-present.  We  credit  your  acct. 
with  $1.00  on  last  100  bu.  of  oats  as  requested,  and-hope 
same  will-be-satisfactory.  Yours-truly,  etc. 

Dear-Sir: — Replying-to-your-favor  of-the  6th,  we  beg  to 
say  that  if-the  S.  S.  S.  is-in-good  condition  we-have-no-ob- 
jection  to-receiving  it  back,  provided,  of-course,  that-it-is 
returned  without  expense  to  us.  We  regret  to  say  that-we- 
have-no  demand  for-the  Hamilton  troches. 

Your  account  has-now  been  credited  $15  on  Winslow's 
syrup,  as-per  your-card  of-the  2d. 

Yours-very-truly,  etc. 

(150— 1:45— :45.) 

370.  TRANSLATE. 


\ 


LESSON  XXXVI. 

PRIMITIVE  AND   DERIVATIVE. 

371.  KEY.  1.  Mean  meaning  meaningly  meaningless 
meaner  meanest  meanness  meanly  demean  meant. 
2.  Care  caring  uncaring  careless  carelessly  carelessness 
careful  carefulness.  8.  Plain  plains  complain  complainant 
complaining  plainer  plainest  plainness  plainly.  4.  Do 
does  doing  done  undo  undoing  undid  undone  doest  doer 
did  didst.  5.  Settle  settles  settled  settling  settler  settle- 
ment unsettle  unsettled.  6.  Sale  sales  salable  unsalable 
seller  selling  undersell  sold.  7.  Knife-grinder  planing- 
mill  cutting-box  street-car  market-basket  hen-roost  coast- 
survey.  8.  Shooting-star  short-winded  dog-collar  flower- 
pot hail-storm  sheep-pen.  9.  Express-car  button-hole 
wild-cat  chess-board  cuff-holder  mail-carrier.  10.  Drug- 
store hay-stack  drum-stick  live-stock  rain-cloud  chairman 
easy-chair. 

PHRASES.  11.  It-will-be-maintained  it-would-not-take  I- 
will-not-undertake  if-it-be  so-as-to-be-able-to  under-circum- 
stances  we-are-satisfied  we-do-not-undertake. 

SENTENCES.  1.  It-has-been  well  observed  that  few  are 
better  qualified  to  give  others  advice  than  those-who-have 
taken  the-least  of-it  themselves.  2.  Our  happiness  in-this- 
world  depends-upon  the-affections  we-are  able-to  inspire. 
8.  He  who  purposes  to-be  an-author  should-first-be-a  student. 
4.  No-man-can-be  brave  who-considers  pain  to-be  the-great 
evil  of-life,  nor  temperate,  who  considers  pleasure  to-be-the 
highest  good. 

872.  It  can  be  demonstrated  that  the  outline  '"~\_^  m-nst 
(for  meanest)  can  be  written  a  trifle  quicker  than  the  outline 
mn-st.  A  one-minute  test  of  each  will  show  that  the 


first  can  be  written  the  greater  number  of  times.  The  latter 
form,  ^~j>  mnsi,  however,  is  the  accepted  outline  for  mean- 

esf.  There  are  two  reasons  for  this.  First,  it  is  easier  read. 
This  is  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  mind  is  already  familiar 
with  ^—^  inn  as  the  outline  for  the  primitive  word  mean, 

—192- 


36. 


2c 


x-T> 


\  s 

!    J    ' 

E      r 


V    \ 


C 


\o< 


10 


L, 


t 

<r  v  s 


SENTENCES. 


\ 


•-s 


D  L  C 


V 

o 


X, 


194  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

from  which  is  obtained  the  derivative  word  meanest.  The 
outline  for  any  derivative  /ord  mau  be  quickly  deciphered, 
as  soon  as  that  part  of  tlit  outline  .inch  expresses  the  prim- 
itive is  recognized. 

In  the  second  place,  it  is  more  quickly  written.  This  may 
appear  unreasonable,  since  it  has  been  admitted  that 
^~\^?  m-nst  is  the  more  facile  outline.  But  in  •-"""*>  meanest, 

the  reporter's  first  and  instantaneous  thought  is,  how  to 
write  "~^  mean,  and  next  est;  and  he  has  the  word  entirely 
written  in  the  time  it  would  take  to  determine,  mentally, 
that  m-nst  would  be  the  easier  to  execute.  For  tho  same 
reason  it  is  better  to  write  meaner  and  meanly  by  the  outlines, 
mn-r  and  mn-l,  rather  than  by  m-nr  and  m-nl.  In  this  list 
(L  1)  it  will  be  observed  that  the  forms  are  determined  partly 
by  the  sound,  partly  by  the  sense,  or  meaning;  that  is,  when 
there  is  nothing  to  prevent,  words  of  similar  meaning  are 
expressed  by  similar  outlines.  This  is  called  writing  by  an- 
alogy, which  experience  proves  to  have  several  advantages. 
In  general,  derivative  words  are  written  in  analogy  with  their 
primitives,  the  derivative  being  expressed  by  simply  prefixing 
or  affixing  certain  signs  to  the  primitive  word-form.  See 
Ls  2 — 6.  It  is  important  to  preserve  intact  the  primitive 
word-forms;  hence,  the  parts  of  derivative  words  are  some- 
times separated,  as  in  ft  unsettle,  **— £  uncivil,  in 

I  CN 

preference  to  ^~-$/~  and    — P 

373.  Write:  Great  greatly  greater  gicatness;  nice 
nicer  niceness  nicely  nicety;  free  freely  freer  frees  free- 
ing freed  freedom;  joy  joys  enjoy  enjoyed  enjoyer 
enjoying  joyous  joyously  joyousness  joyful  joyfully  joy- 
fulness;  gain  gains  gainer  gaining  gainful  ungainly 
regain  regaining  gained  \ingaining;  grow  grows  grower 
grown  grew  ungrown  ungrowing;  slave  slaves  slaved 
slaving  slaver  enslaving  enslaved  enslavement  enslaver; 
make  makes  maker  making  makest  remake  unmake 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  196 

m.ule  u:ini;ule;  keep  keeps  kept  keeping  keeper  keepest 
unkept;  stone  stoner  stonest  stones  stoned  unstoned 
restone  restoned  stony  stonier  stoniest. 

37  i.  For  precisely  the  same  reason,  compound  words  are 
to  he  writ:  I")  by  simply  joining  the  two  word-forms  together, 
neither  outline  being  impaired.  The  characters  thus  pro- 
duced are  easily  read,  because  each  outline  is  as  easily 
recognized  as  when  standing  alone.  This  practice,  also,  is 
favorable  to  speed,  since  not  the  least  premeditation  is  re- 
quired. The  consonants  in  the  word  °\  overdrawn,  are 

vrttrn,  and  these  could  be  expressed  by  the  character, 
7\^>  vrd-rn;  but  this  would  be  a  very  improper  outline  for 

overdrawn;  it  is  neither  analagous  or  suggestive.  For  the 
same  reason  V^^  foretell  should  not  be  written  <y"~  J'rt-l, 

f 
nor  ^^  wash-tub,   S  wa-sht-b. 

Write:  Battle-flag  wax-work  eating-house  saloon-keeper 
house-dog  house-top  quick-sand  pen- wiper  sea-coast  ship- 
load mail-car  band-wagon  pencil-case  drag-tooth  horse- 
racing  horsemanship  Sunday-school  class-room  church- 
choir  basket-picnic  vinegar-barrel  mouse-trap  jug-handle 
giant-powder  spell-bound  horror-stri  ken  curb-stone. 

Compound  words,  however,  should  not  be  phrased  when 
unangular  joinings  result.  See  Ls  8  and  9. 

Write  House-fly  hay-rac^  time-piece  watch-chain 
horse-fly. 

375.  In  a  few  exceptional  cases  the  form  of  one  of  the 
component  words  is  modified  in  order  to  render  a  suitable 
joining  possible.  In  L  10  the  form  of  the  outlines  for  store, 
stack,  stock,  chair,  etc.,  are  changed  for  this  reason. 

There  are  two  important  exceptions  to  this  rule  governing 
derivitive  word-forms.  The  first  is  the  requirement  of  an- 


198  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HASD. 

gularity,  which  is  the  chief  pre-requisite  in  all  good  short- 
hand  writing.      To    illustrate,    in    moderator,   the    <>\\ 

\  md-rt-r  must  be  discarded  for  the  more  angular  form 
,-v^-^l  md-r-tr.  On  the  same  principle  we  write  | .  edu- 
cator, \-  voter,  /\  artist,  etc. 

The  second  exception  is  the  reqoirementot facility.  Many 
times  a  derivitive  may  he  as  clearly  and  more  quickly  ex- 
pressed by  a  simple  modification  of  the  primitive  word-form. 

For  illustration,  editor  is  written   U  d-tr,  not        d-t-r;  teacher 
is  written     L  t-chr,  instead  of      J   t-ch-r;  walker      \ —    not 


w-ic-r;  sadder  is  written  1    not  sd-r. 
In  the  Solemn  Style,  the  consonants  are  fully  expressed; 

~^7  — V  '/-^ 

e.  g.,        k  goeth,          \i  .^epest,  (  lookest,   —^    goest, 

prayelh. 


876.    SIGN- WORD  DERIVATIVES.    A  (?ood  nuraoer  of  wordi 

whose  primitives  are  expressed  by  abbreviations,  are  funned 

irregularly;  for  example,   ...  here,   primitive,   /\        hereto- 


fore,   derivative;    ^     hand,   ~^-^}    handy;    ....  collect, 


I  collector.  Also  see  Vocabulary  for:  Descriptive 
emphatically  fewest  improved  changed  largest  inajr-tir 
dismember  methodically  ministered  objective  particulari/.e 
particularity  peculiarity  performed  regi  iarity  specially 
specialty  subjective  wilt  younges-  «ixpf<-;-  «1. 


liEPORTINQ  STYLt?  OF  SUQRT-HAXD.  197    j 


The  past  tense  is  expressed  by  the  loop,  the  disjoined  ted, 

;    and  by  tialving;  e.g.,     \>  express,    \  expressed;  \   oft/ecJ, 

\|  objected;    ^^    enlarge,    ......    enlarged;   \    -    member, 


^   remembered. 

Write:  Appeared  applied  belonged  happened  unheard 
unnumbered  owned  unpeopled  disqualified  valued  ac- 
knowledged allowed  (l-d)  considered  described  developed 
governed  measured. 

The    words    dated,  gifted,   delighted,   are    better    written 

PI  ****       r 

,  than  by  the  characters    |>  j,  although 

in  each  ease  an  extra  t  is  expressed.  Not  only  are  the  out- 
lines briefer,  but  the  exact  primitive  word-forms  are  pre- 
served. This  rule  may  be  applied  in  expressing  the  past 
tense  of  verbs  generally,  whether  they  are  sign-words  or  not; 

e.  g.,  \  appointed,  \.  subjected,  ^  ]  dis-spirited,  ^~^  culti- 

vated. By  far  the  greater  number  of  sign-word  derivatives 
are  formed  in  the  usual  way,  by  simply  attaching  the  proper 
affix  or  prefix. 

>-T\  v.  <L 

Example,        )  endeavor,  \J\  endeavored;  .....  follow,  _____  fol- 


lowed; \  principle,  -  —  A  unprincipled;  y/7  angel, 


archangel;     '    appoint,   °   appoints;         comply, 
ance. 

'677.  Write:  Non-appearance  brotherly  characterize 
ch:ira(.'t«M'i/es  christianize*  collects  collecting  constitu- 
tional dearest  delighting  deliverer  denioi-alization*  de- 
scription* unesstMitial  familiarity  fewer  ungentlemanly 
gDviT'.ioi  -^  Jiaiulsome  hanlness  highest*  unimaginable 
largeness  ministerial*  numberless  impractical  unpracticed* 


19*  REPORTI.VG  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

improper  profitable  unquestionable*  dissatisfy*  shalt* 
unspeakable  speechless  spiritual*  unspoken  insufficient 
valuable  virtuous  whilst*  hesitation*. 

PHRASES. 

878.  It-shouut-not-exteml  it-is-plain  it-will-be-seen  it- 
will-^be-worth  it-will-receive  it-will-require  it-would-be- 
likely  I-uuderstand-it  I-will-ask  I-will-make  1- will-therefore 
I-wish-to-make  I-shall-enter  in-his-own-  lame. 

379.  EXERCISE  3o. 

NEW-YORK,  December  22,  1882. 

To  OCEAN  STEAMSHIP  COMPANIES: 

Refering  to-the  accompanying  notice  co-Emigrant  Book 
Agents  (Miscellaneous  Circular  No.  269),  aiid-in-order-that- 
we-may-have  similarly  a-complete  list  of-the  outstanding 
orders  issued  by  Steamship  Lines,  wo-have  to-requot  tliat-a 
statement  be-prepared  by-your  company  ami-furnished  to 
us,  early  in-January,  of  outstanding  orders,  both  prepaid 
and-European,  issued  previous  to  January  1st,  1883. 

The-following  information  should-be  embraced  in-your 
statement:  The-date  an.'-number  of-each  order;  in  whose 
lavor  drawn;  destination;  number  of  passengers;  rate  and- 
amount  of  fare. 

In-this-connection  will-you  please  advise  us  whether  it- 
will-be  possible  for-you  to  furnish  similar  statements  month]}' 
thereafter?  Such-statements  would  greatly  facilitate  tlie- 
transaction  of  business  in-case-of  change  of  fares  or  rate 
of  commission,  and-enable  us  to  deal  with  questions  arising 
from  such  changes  more  intelligently,  and-it-is-believc-d, 
more  advantageously  to  all-parties. 

Please-answer  this-communication,  and-send  statements 
to  Mr.  Al^rt  Fink,  Commissioner. 

Respectfully-yours, 

GENERAL  PASSENGER  AGENTS. 
(190—2:30—1:15.) 


TRANSLATE. 


...<\.  624 


\\ 


L 


/-" 
V  C 


$  r 

L 


XI  -~ 

£  /»  X. 

r  ^  V  \  VLp .  ^ 
•^     •    *)  t    ' 

°>  r      /     /• 

1 •/  ^t/ 

....  «-> 


T 
/ 


LESSON  XXXVU. 
SYLLABICATION. 

381.  KEY.    1.    Plen-ty  chos-en    re-frain   pro-found    can- 
did   ser-mon    vix-en    splen-did    stru-ggle.    2.    Ter-min-ute 
will-ing-ly    re-cov-er    cann-on-ade    re-du-pli-cate    ca-li-bre 
Bra-ttle-bo-ro.    8.    Ex-ter-min-ate  trou-ble-some  ex-ca-vate 
des-ig-nate  ty-po-graph-er  oc-ta-gon  fan-tast-ic.  4.  Freed-om 
ret-urn  det-ach  dus-ty  chea-pen  ve-ri-fy  dee-per  bran-ches 
man-if-old.     5.     Ex-trav-a-gant    occ-u-pant    def-i-nite    ex- 
per-i-ment     mon-stros-i-ty     pLot-o-graph-er    chro-nol-o-gy. 

6.  Bulk     fork    march  forge     milk     forth     birth     roared. 

7.  Stu-dy    stead     stayed     ous-ted     bread     bored     bir-die 
bo-rrow-ed.    8.   Wor-ker  pur-chas-er  di-gest-ive  dis-tur-lier 
re-fus-al  sol-dier  la-bor-er. 

PHRASES.  9.  Somewhere-else  which-would-be  which- 
would-make  which-had-been  which-has-just-been  all-you- 
wish  no-more-than-you-can  did-you-wish. 

SENTENCES.  1.  A-man's  character  is-the  reality  of  him- 
self; his  reputation  the-opinion  others  have-formed  about- 
him;  character  resides  in  him,  reputation  in  other  people; 
that-is-the-substance,  this-the  shadow.  2.  A-small  leak  will 
sink  a-great  ship.  3.  A-fool  may-make  money,  but  it  needs 
a  wise-man  to-spend  it.  4.  All  is-not  gained  that-is  put 
into-the  purse.  5.  Tell-your  secret  to-your-servant  and- 
you  make-him  your-master.  6.  If-you-would  have  a-thiug 
well  done,  do-it  yourself. 

382.  Referring  to  the  words  found  in  Ls  1  and  2,  it  will  IH> 
found  that  there  are  as  many  stems  exactly  as  there  are  syl- 
lables, that  is  to  say,  a  consonant  letter,  or  stroke,  lor  eurli 
syllable  of  each  word.    This  is  not  a  mere  coincidence,     It 
holds  true  with  the  greater  number  of  words.     What  is  the 
explanation?    In  the  first  place,  only  one-third  of  all  the 
consonant  sounds  are  indicated  by  stems;  the  remaining  two- 
thirds  are  expressed  by  adjunctive  signs  so  called,  that  is, 
hooks,  circles,  loops,  etc.     A  certain  number  of  stems  must 

be  used,  however,  not  simply  as  objects  to  which  these  :ul- 

—aoo— 


208  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

junctive  signs  may  be  attached,  but  as  affording  a  means 
also  of  vowel  representation.  A  vowel  can  be  appended  to 
a  consonant  stem, — but  to  nothing  else.  Hence,  since  tlie 
number  of  vowels  and  the  number  of  syllables  are  of  necessity 
always  equal,  the  number  of  syllables  and  the  number  of 
steins  are,  logically,  equal  also. 

883.  An  additional  feature  of  importance  is  to  be  ob- 
served; all  the  elements  of  sound  which  are  grouped  into  one 
syllable,  are  usually  expressed  by  a  single  stem  with  its  ap- 
pendages, that  is,  vowel  signs,  hooks  and  circles.  To  illustrate, 

in  L_^  striven  the  first  syllable  striv  is  expressed  by  |  t  and 
its  appendages,  while  the  syllable  en  is  represented  by  the 
stem  ^— 'n,  which  is  entirely  distinct  from  the  first  stem. 
Also  in  plen-ty,  and  ter-min-ate,  the  different  parts  of  the 
consonant  outlines  are  as  distinct  from  one  another  as  are 

the  syllables  themselves.    Thus,  \  plen   \   ty,    p  plenty,  or 
I  ter  -"~i   min  *|  ate,    \^~^  terminate.     It  would   be  im- 


proper  to  write  these  words  otherwise,  as,  for  example, 
stri-ven,  or  K~x^  ter-mi-nate.    The  point  of  practical 

value  to  be  observed  by  the  writer  is  this:  So  far  as  possible 
choose  outlines  which  are  adapted,  in  the  manner  just  indicated, 
to  the  syllabication  of  the  words  tftey  represent;  that  is  to  s:iy, 
make  a  single  stem,  and  its  appendages,  express  all  the 
sounds,  and  those  only,  which  occur  in  the  particular  syllable 
you  are  writing.  For  example,  see  ex-ca-vate,  des-ig-nate, 
ty-po-graph-er,ete.,L3.  Illustrative  words :  Cir-cle  pro-pose 
sca-tter  wor-thy  te-rri-ble  bliss-ful  ser-vice  cov-er  ma-ker 
brace-let  .Broad-way  re-cord.  See  also  ~L  8. 

884.  To  this  rule  there  are  two  exceptions.  The  first  is 
occasioned  by  a  requirement  of  brevity.  Return,  for  in- 
stance, is  not  written  ''"I/*  re-turn,  but  ~\/}  rct-urn, 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAtfD.  208 

which  is  the  more  desirable  outline.  So  freedom  is  written, 
freed-om  (frd-m,  see  L  4),  instead  of  free-dom  (i.  e.,  fr-d-m). 
The  illustrative  words  in  L  4  show  the  number  of  syllables 
and  stems  to  be  equal,  a  result  obtained  by  the  manner  of 
syllabising  each  word;  thus,  chea-pen,  ve-ri-fy,  instead  of 
cheap-en,  ver-i-fyf 

885.  The  consonant  stem  and  its  appendages  is  sometimes, 
for  convenience,  called  a  stenographic  syllable.  When  prac- 
ticable, the  stenographic  and  orthographic  syllables  should 
correspond  with  each  other.  Otherwise  a  re-syllabication  of 
the  word  miHt  take  place.  A  syllable  is  defined  as  a  number 
of  sounds,  all  of  which  are  uttered  with  one  articulation. 
An  important  fact  in  this  connection  must  not,  however,  be 
overlooked.  When  a  word  of  several  syllables  is  pronounced, 
it  is  impossible  to  say  to  what  particular  syllable  some  of  the 
consonant  sounds  belong.  For  instance,  in  strip-ling,  or 
stri-pling,  or  stripl-ing.  In  pronouncing  pendant,  there  is 
nothing  Avhatever  in  the  spoken  word  to  indicate  that  d  be- 
longs to  the  first  syllable,  or  to  the  last.  In  dictionaries, 
words  are  divided  into  syllables  on  a  basis  of  sense,  or  mean- 
ing; while  short-hand  syllabication  is  more  a  matter  of  sound; 
or,  it  may  be  said,  still  more  a  matter  of  form  in  the  construc- 
tion of  outlines. 

386.  It  often  happens  that  vowels  must  be  placed  on  each 
side  of  a  stem,  since  many  syllables  contain  a  vowel  only, 
and  no  consonant,  as  in  ex-trav-a-gnnt,  occ-u-pant.  (See  L  5.) 
Here  there  are  fewer  stems  than  syllables.  On  the  other 
hand,  many  word-forms  cannot  be  abbreviated  sufficiently  to 
reduce  the  separate  strokes  to  the  number  of  vowels,  as  in 
bulk,  fork,  etc.,  L  6.  In  L  6  the  words  are  all  monosyllables, 
each  requiring,  however,  three  stems  for  its  expression. 
Still  again,  there  are  a  few  words  containing  one  consonant 
only,  but  with  three  vowels,  as  I-o-wa,  i-de-a,  a-re-a,  i-o-ta. 
On  the  whole,  a  careful  examination  will  show  that  there 
are  nearly  as  many  stems,  or  stenographic  syllables,  as  there 
are  vowels,  or  orthographic  syllables.  The  result  of  a  com- 


804  HEPORT7XO  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HAXD. 

parison  would  be  affected  materially  by  the  various  devices 
for  expressing  two  syllables  with  one  stroke,  as  in  mat-ter, 
fash-ion,  go-est,  mas-ter. 

387.  Short-hand  writing  51*  suggestive,  and  hence  the  more 
legible — in  this  regard,  that  us  the  sounds  are  grouped  tn  />.-  <>- 
nunciation,  so  the  signs  are  grouped  in  writing.  The  con- 
sonants may  be  said  to  cluster  around  the  vowel,  which  is 
the  heart,  or  centre,  of  the  syllable;  and  in  a  similar  manner 
the  brief  signs  cluster  about  the  stem  to  which  they  are  ap- 
pended. 

PHRASES. 

-  .    So-long-a-time  such-as-are  such-as-cau  riuch-as-was- 

u..:  iy  take-place  takes-up  take-possession  there-is-no-siu-h 

thcie-will-never  there-would-not-now  they-can-make  they- 

can-receive    they-can-uow    to-believe    to-its    to-niak-'-inen- 

tioa  to-that-extent  that-is-all  that-it-is-claimed  that-Ls-the- 

very-clear  very-long-time   we-have-reccived   wc-shall- 

l>.'-al)le-to-make     liquor-dealers     liq.ior-sellera     long-before 

-profession     may-have-seen     m;ly-not-have     morning- 

b:i>iness     more-than-that     national-bank     national-defence 

native-land  not-very-long-ago  nor-is-it-necessary  purchase- 

inoney   relied-upon    shall-be-liable   should-have-had    so-as- 

t:>-make  so-as-uot-to-make  so-long-as-it-is. 

389  EXERCISE  37. 

(To  be  phruxcd  by  tlic  student.) 

INDIANAPOLIS,  IND.,  April  4,  1886. 
To  WHOM  IT  MAY  CONCERN: 

The  bearer  hereof,  Air.  Henry  Hopkins,  has  been  in  our 
employ  for  five  years  past  as  confidential  clerk  and  book- 
keeper. We  have  always  found  him  faithful  in  the  discharge 
of  his  duties,  courteous  and  obliging,  and  alive  to  the  inter- 
est of  his  employers.  Mr.  Hopkins  is  a  superior  accountant, 
and  well  qualified  to  discharge  any  of  the  duties  he  may 
undertake.  It  gives  us  pleasure  to  recommend  him  to  any 
who  may  require  such  services,  knowing  that  he  will  he- 
found  reliable  in  whatever  capacity  he  may  be  engaged. 

Your-,  i-tr. 

(100— 1:10—  :40.) 


TRANSLATE. 


\   ( 


/=>   v       — -f 
~2-  '    .   ^~      /      '     a"-- 

/'     I  ' 

V     --J- 


™\ 

•v^ 


r 


A-  1' 


Y 


A 


S\ 


A 


k 


-3     X 


/\  p   i     \ 

>  ....... 

<0 


\    c—rv 

\  o^ 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 
GENERAL   PRINCIPLES. 

891.  KEY.     1.    Editor   debtor   auditory,  spinney   aspen 
spin;  stop    estop    steep.     2.     State    estate    situate;    pearly 
peril  poorly;  Clara  clear  color.    8.    Crown  cranny  corn; 
Saturday  sturdy    stride;    straight  start  strata.     4.     Crowd 
carried  Corday;    briar  brewery  barrier;   prate   pretty  up- 
right.    5.     Great  gritty  garrote;  manilla  manual   meanly; 
meant    minuet    minute.    6.     Cant    county   aconite;    policy 
place    police;    Stella    settle    still.     7.    Easter    story    star; 
wrecked  Orcutt    rocket;    around  round  ruined.    8.    Tent 
tenet  attenuate;  sent  senate  ascent;  Scott  socket   asked. 
9-13.    For  key  see  list  words,  sec.  404. 

PHRASES.  14.  How-long  during-the-winter-season  satis- 
factory-manner last-mail  first-class  first-class-goods  joint- 
committee  Board-of-Trade.  15.  On-the-west-side  Articles- 
of-Association  bill-of-sale  court-of -justice  articles-of-agi  < •»•- 
ment  according-to-your  we-may-be-able-to  relating-to-the- 
subject. 

892.  A  SCIENTIFIC  SYSTEM.    To  be  broadly  capable,  read- 
ily acquired,  and  easily  remembered,  a  short-hand  system 
must  be  scientific,  not  merely  expeditious.    A  collection  of 
arbitrary  expedients,  if  sufficiently  large,  may  serve  for  re- 
producing ordinary  discourse;  but  the  inventiveness  of  the 
reporter,  or  the  old  cumbersome  long-hand,  must  be  resorted 
to  when  newly  coined  words,  unusual  proper  names,  tech- 
nical terms  or  provincialisms  are  encountered.    A  system,  to 
be  scientific,  must  have  a  basis  of  principle;  be  so  related  to 
known  sciences  as  to  be  quickly  apprehended;  so  facile  as  to 
be  eq'ial  to  any  emergency  of  speed,  dialect,  hoi  rowed  words, 
or  f  >reign  name  or  accent.    The  Pitman  Phonography  meets 
the<e  requirements.     No  matter  what  changes  the  language 
may  undergo,  it  will  be  impossible  for  it  to  extend  heyoiul 
the  capabilities  of  this  far-reaching  system.     It  is  adapted, 
first  of  all,  to  the  human  voice  in  general,  and,  incidentally, 
to  the  English  language  in  particular.    The  scientific  thur- 

-i06- 


) 

8  J 

9  *- 

10  L 

11  ^ 

12  V 
13 

14 

15 


Plate  38, 


V 


C 


V 


VI 


) 


V 


* 


h 


2, 


b         X5      /— 

•h    i 


WORD- FORMS. 


l/v 


L^f-r 

.         v^ 


I  > 


T 


W8  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  8BOBT-HAND, 

acter  of  the  system  will  appear  more  clearly  from  the  fol- 
lowing considerations: 

393.  CORRELATION.    The  twenty -iour  consonants  are  di- 
vided into  several  classes,  according  to  their  nature  and 
quality.    The  tirst  eight  are  termed  explodents,  sometimes 
called  abrupts.    The  sounds  which  these  letters  express  are 
blunt,  not  capable  of  being  prolonged.    All  remaining  letters, 
except  w,  y  and  h,  are  designated  as  continuants,  by  which 
is  meant  that  the  sounds  they  express  are  capable  of  being 
prolonged,  or  continued.    They  are  properly  represented  by 
curved,  or  yielding,  stems. 

The  second  classification,  which  affects  most  consonants, 
is  into  subvocals,  as  6,  d,  v;  and  surds,  as  p,  J\  t.  The  first 
class,  or  heavy  sounds,  are  represented  by  shaded  letters; 
whereas  the  surds,  or  light,  breath  sounds,  are  appropriately 
expressed  by  thin  stems.  Looking  further,  it  will  be  observed 
also  that  p  and  b,  t  and  d,  f  and  v,  s  and  ?,  etc.,  are  similar 
sounds,  both  letters  of  each  pair  being  articulated  with  the 
same  vocal  organs,  the  only  difference  being  that  in  each 
case  the  first  is  light,  and  the  second,  heavy.  P  and  b  are 
similar  sounds  in  these  respects,  that  both  are  labials,  or 
lip-sounds,  and  both  explodents;  and  the  two  characters  by 
which  they  are  represented  are  alike  in  respect  to  slant  and 
straightness.  They  differ  in  this  respect  only,  that  the  first 
is  light,  and  the  second,  heavy;  whereas  their  stems  differ  in  a 
similar  manner,  the  first  being  thin,  and  the  second,  thick. 
The  same  observations  apply  to  t  and  d,  ch  and  j,  f  and  v, 
and  the  other  pairs  of  consonants. 

The  long  vowels,  also,  are  properly  expressed  by  shadf?, 
and  the  short  by  light  signs.  Diphthongs  are  compound 
sounds,  and  their  symbols  likewise  are  double,  two  in  one. 

394.  ECONOMY.    Certain  sounds,  it  is  well  known,  are 
much  more  frequent  than  others.     Tands  occur  the  often* •-( . 

R  and  »  are  far  more  common  than  /,  ^or  j.  The  si^us 
which  represent  the  frequent  sounds  are,  as  a  rule,  easier  to 
execute  than  those  which  express  sounds  lesr  Common.  For 


REPORTING  STYLK  OF  SHOR7-HAND.  209 


example,  t  is  written  more  quickly  than  r  or  sh,  anf1  s  than/, 
etc.  But  in  order  to  provide  a  still  more  expeditious  way  of 
writing  the  most  frequent  sounds,  a  series  of  adjunctive 
signs,  sometimes  called  the  short  alphabet,  has  been  devised. 
<S  consequently  may  be  written  in  four  different  way;  by  the 
t\vo  circles,  s  and  sez,  and  the  two  loops,  st  and  str;  t  likewise 
by  four  methods;  viz.,  the  two  loops,  the  lengthening  and 
the  halving  principles;  n  by  the  n,  shun,  eshun  and  in  hooks; 
r  by  the  r-hook,  str-loop,  and  lengthening  principle.  Another 
fact  which  still  better  illustrates  the  economy  of  the  system 
is  the  ingenious  method  of  vowel  indication,  which  consists 
in  skillfully  combining,  or  mixing,  the  signs  of  the  long  and 
short  consonant  alphabets,  for  the  purpose  of  expressing, 
without  having  to  write,  many  of  the  vowel  sounds.  The 
adaptability  of  the  system  as  a  means  to  an  end,  is  evidenced 
by  the  list  of  abbreviations  which  have  been  fitly  chosen  to 
express  those  common  words  and  phr?01"1  of  which  the  bulk 
of  colloquial  speech  is  composed. 

895.  ADAPTABILITY.  The  fact  that  no  two  persons  write 
long-hand  alike,  that  the  different  stvles  of  long-hand  are  as 
.various  as  the  writers  are  multitudinous,  plainly  points  to 
the  truth  that  a  short-hand  system  may  be  well  adapted  to 
one,  or  a  few,  and  still  not  suited  to  all,  or  many.  For  con- 
venience, we  will  roughly  divide  short-hand  writers  into 
three  classes:  The  artistic,  the  swift,  and  the  medium.  The 
writer  belonging  to  the  first  of  these  classes  has  a  good  eye, 
steady  nerve,  and  if  he  possesses  a  retentive  memory,  can 
attain  a  high  speed.  By  writing  a  small  hand,  and  making 
use  of  many  contractions  and  phrases,  he  makes  good  what 
he  lacks  in  natural  quickness. 

The  second  writes  a  large  hand,  but  is  so  exceedingly 
quick,  mentally  and  manually,  that  he  can  report  easily, 
forming  the  characters  quite  large,  phrasing  but  little,  and 
employing  a  limited  number  of  word-signs.  Abbreviating 
devices  do  not  interest  him,  because  he  does  not  need  them. 

The  third  combines  in  a  certain  measure  the  qualities  of 


810  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

the  other  two.  Til  _xeat  majority  of  writers  are  compri sed 
in  this  class.  Many  of  the  best  stenographers  come  uiuli-r 
the  first  or  second.  The  pliability,  so  to  speak,  of  the  Pitman 
system  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  persons  thus  variously  en- 
dowed may  readily  adapt  it  to  their  own  peculiar  faculty  or 
use.  It  is  worthy  of  mention  that  the  success  of  a  writer 
depends  in  a  measure  noon  the  particular  author  he  chooses 
to  follow.  Only  persons  who  belong  to  the  class  first  men- 
tioned should  attempt  Graham.  A  person  of  the  class  next 
described  is  able  to  report  with  a  connective  vowel  system 
even,  such  as  Lindsley's  or  Pernin's.  In  a  few  cases  such 
persons  have  attained  verbatim  speed  wi^h  the  tedious  Cor- 
responding Style.  The  first  named  usually  prefers  a  pen, 
while  a  pencil  is  often  used  by  the  class  next  mentioned. 

396.  MENTALITY.  It  is  an  instructive  fact  that  the  pen 
produces,  in  the  aggregate,  a  longer  line  each  minute  when 
writing  long-hand,  than  when  writing  short -luuul.  A  com- 
parison of  the  two  methods  shows  that  writing  long-hand 
requires  more  labor  and  less  thought,  and  short-hand  more 
thought  and  less  labor.  The  first  operation  is  the  more  phy- 
sical, the  latter  is  more  -mental.  Reporting  in  short-hand  is 
not  so  much  a  question  of  swift  muscular  action,  as  one  of 
how  to  keep  the  p«Mi  moving.  Short-hand  differs  radii-ally 
from  long-hand  in  this  important  regard,  that  in  the  former, 
every  tick,  dot  or  stroke,  means  something;  hence,  thought 
is  required.  To  render  the  system  more  speedy,  it  is  not 
needful  to  curtail  the  length  of  line,  but  to  remove  whatever 
impedes  the  facility  with  which  it  may  be  executed.  It  is  a 
serious  mistake  to  adopt  numerous  small  and  delicate  char- 
acters for  the  sake  of  mere  lineal  brevity.  That  kind  are 
commonly  more  difficult  to  form,  and  hence  occasion  a  loss, 
instead  of  gain,  in  time  and  speed.  They  must  be  formed 
slowly  to  be  legible;  hence,  their  employment  either  retards 
speed,  or  endangers  accuracy.  No  outline  is  good,  if  writing 
it  swiftly  is  pretty  sure  to  mar  its  form.  For  .this  reason  a 
long  outline  is  often  preferable  to  a  short  one. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  211 

3C^.  CONTEXT^  Some  persons  not  versed  in  short-hand 
object  to  the  method  as  unsafe,  since  context  must  be  relied 
upon  as  an  aid  to  legibility.  It  is  well  known,  however,  that 
law  proceedings,  public  speeches,  etc.,  are  reported  every 
day,  and  reproduced  with  absolute  precision.  It  is  interest- 
ing to  note  a  fact  not  commonly  observed,  that  context  is 
employed  to  fully  as  great  an  extent,  also,  in  reading  long- 
hand. Take  an  ordinary  hastily  written  manuscript,  and 
conceal  all  but  a  single  letter.  The  reader  cannot  in  half  the 
cases  determine  what  it  is.  In  very  many  instances  an  en- 
tire word  could  not  even  be  guessed  at,  if  it  were  removed 
from  its  place  in  the  sentence.  What  is  context?  A  word 
mispronounced  in  conversation,  or  indistinctly  heard,  is 
readily  understood  by  the  hearer.  It  may  usually  be  supplied 
even  if  entirely  omitted.  This  is  an  hourly  occurrence.  The 
connection  is  a  reliable  guida  To  illustrate  the  same  princi- 
ple, you  would  be  safe  in  assuming  that  a  man  were  an 
Irishman,  though  you  met  him  at  night,  providing  the 
occurrence  was  on  a  street  in  Dublin,  and  you  heard  his 
voice.  .Vhe  nationality  of  a  man,  the  family  of  an  animal, 
the  species  of  a  plant,  the  kind  of  a  liquid,  the  distance  of  an 
object,  are,  for  all  ordinary  purposes,  mentally  determined 
by  this  kind  of  indirect  or  circumstantial  evidence.  All 
things  within  our  knowledge  are  pervaded  by  the  idea  of 
relation,  consistency,  sequence.  This  principle,  when  ap- 
plied to  language,  is  called  context.  When,  in  reading  print, 
the  mind  grasps  completely  the  meaning  of  the  words,  a 
conscious  expectancy  precedes  the  eye,  and  a  new  phrase  or 
sentence  is  half  read  before  it  is  seen.  In  the  affairs  of  life, 
and  in  the  work  of  a  student  in  particular,  this  perception 
gives  an  immense  advantage.  It  is  not  a  matter  of  accident, 
but  of  culture,  mental  training.  The  short-hand  writer  who 
attends  strictly  to  the  meaning  of  what  he  writes  when  his 
notes  are  taken,  and  keeps  his  mind  rigidly  fixed  on  the  im- 
port of  the  language  when  he  transcribes,  will  accomplish 
infinitely  more  than  the  merely  mechanical  reporter.  This 


812  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

qualification  is,  indeed,  one  of  the  rare  secrets  of  success  in 
the  stenographic  profession. 

398.  RE  A.  DING  BY  CONSONANTS  is  only  one  of  the  many 
applications  of  this  principle.  It  is  surprising  the  extent  to 
which  the  trained  writer  is  able  to  indicate  the  vowel  ele- 
ments by  means  of  a  proper  choice,  and  apt  combination,  of 
the  long  and  short  signs.  Let  us  take  a  more  concise  view  of 

this  subject.    Long  -— >  n  must  be  employed  in  V_,^  funny, 

to  give  place  for  the  final  vowel;  while  in  \£>  fun  the  hook 
should  be  used,  because  no  vowel  follows  n.  The  first  word- 
form  V-,,  may  be  said  to  be  open,  i.  e.,  open  to  vocalization; 

while  xs  fun,  so  far  as  a  final  vowel  is  concerned,  is  con- 
sidered closed.  Now,  all  consonant  outlines  are  open  more 
or  less,  and  the  extent  to  which  they  should  be  left  open  de- 
pends almost  entirely  upon  the  number  and  location  of  the 
vowels  which  any  given  word  contains.  An  outline  is  the 
more  open,  when  it  contains  a  greater  number  of  stems;  and 
the  more  closed,  depending  on  the  number  of  short  or  ad- 
junctive  signs  used  in  it.  The  rule  is  to  write  the  word-form 
the  more  open,  the  greater  the  number  of  vowels  to  be  ex- 
pressed. This  is,  moreover,  as  much  a  matter  of  manner  as 

of  extent.    To  illustrate,  in    j  Austin  (stn)  we  have  the  long 


s  and  the  short  n;  while  in  \^  stony  (also  stn)  we  have  the 
short  s  and  the  long  n.  Hence,  the  outline  must  be  lelt  open 
at  those  particular  points  where  the  vowels  occur.  Where  no 
vowels  occur,  the  outline  should,  if  possible,  be  closed. 
Then  the  reader,  the  moment  his  eye  meets  an  outline,  knows 
precisely  where  vowels  are,  and  where  they  are  not  to  be, 
supplied.  A  short-hand  sentence  may  be  compared  to  a 
string  of  different  colored  beads,  in  reading  which  a  vowel 
is  to  be  supplied  for  each  white  (or  blank)  bead.  So  far  as 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  213 

consonant  outlining  is  concerned,  the  principle  is  the  same 
whether  the  vowels  are  actually  written  or  not.  Thus 
/""^_^  many  must  be  written  with  long  n;  otherwise  it 
would  be  mistaken  for  men.  Ordinarily  it  is  bad  practice  to 
write  a  word-form  too  brief  for  vocalization,  or  more  open 
than  is  required. 

The  vowel  element,  although  invisible,  is  in  reality  the 
mould  which  gives  shape  to  the  characters,  and  at  the  same 
time  the  key  by  which  to  unlock  the  translation. 

Keeping  in  view  this  guiding  principle,  the  student  will 
understand  the  application  of  the  following 

399.  RULES 

governing  the  choice  between  long  and  short    consonant 
signs. 
1.    CIRCLES.    If  s  is  the  first  consonant,  but  preceded  by  a 


vowel,  as  in   2 escape,  or  the  last  consonant,  followed  by 

a  vowel,  as  in  ' )  glossy;  or  if  in  any  case  it  is  preceded 

-*?\  , 

by  two  concurrent  vowels,  as  in        /  chaos,  the  long   J  s  is 

always  employed.    In  all  other  circumstances  use  the  circle. 

The  large  circle  is  nearly  always  used  for  ss,  sz,  etc.,  when 

the  intervening  vowel  is  short;  unless  there  are  no  other 

consonants  in  the  word,  as  J'  says,  or  J  sis. 

2.  It  AND  R  HOOKS,    (a)    When  I  or  r  immediately  follows 
any  consonant  to  which  a  hook  may  be  attached,  use  the 
hook,  unless  the  r  may  be  better  expressed  by  the  str-loop. 
(6)    When  a  long  vowel  intervenes,  use  the  stem,     (c)    When 
a  short  vowel  intervenes,  use  the  hook,  except  in  words  of 
one  syllable,  when  the  stem  is  usually  employed. 

3.  F  AND  N  HOOKS,    (a)  The/  hook  is  attached  to  straight 
letters  only,    (b)  F  and  v  when  final,  not  followed  by  a  vowel, 
are  expressed  by  hooks;  if  a  vowel  follows,  use  the  stem. 


814  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HA.VD. 

(c)    When  occurring  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  use  the  hook, 
unless  angularity  requires  a  stem. 

4.  LOOPS,  (a)  The  consonants  st  or  zd,  when  consecutive, 
are  usually  expressed  by  the  loop.  (6)  When  occurring 
medially,  the  loop  is  also  used  whenever  angularity  will  ad- 
mit; e.  g.,  'f~*  suggestion;  but  V^>  vested,  not  K>  (c)  If  si 

is  preceded  by  an  initial,  or  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  the 

1 1 

loop  cannot  be  used;  e.  g.,  u  testy,  not      fi       (d)    The  str 


loop  is  almost  invariably  employed  at  the  end  of  words, 
rarely  ever  initially  or  medially. 

5.  LENGTHENED  CURVES.  Some  restrictions  are  placed 
upon  the  use  of  lengthened  letters,  (a)  If  a  word-form  con- 
taining a  lengthened  curve  will  admit  of  two  leadings,  with 

the  liability  of  conflict,  as  V        father,  fetter,  the  less  com- 

mon word  must  be  written  otherwise,  (b)  It  is  customary 
in  cases  of  conflict  to  give  the  preference  to  words  which 
contain,  1st,  tr,  2nd,  dr,  3rd,  thr.  Examples,  ^  --^  matter, 


\ 
() 


madder,  order,    <J    Arthur,  Istter, 


leather,  etc.  (c)  The  safest  plan  is  to  employ  this  prin- 
ciple in  connection  with  those  words  only  which  are  quite 
common,  (d)  This  principle  is  used  very  sparingly  in  out- 
lining proper  names. 

6.  HALVING,  (a)  All  letters  are  commonly  halved  except 
"^  w,  f  y,  x—v  mp  and  ^—  '  ng.  Of  these  the  last  two  are 
shortened  in  a  number  of  words;  the  first  in  three  or  four 
cases  only,  (b)  f~  I,  ~~*\  r,  ^—  m  and  •  —  ^  n,  are  shaded 
when  shortened  to  add  d.  (c)  When  a  stem  to  which  a  cir- 
cle is  suffixed  is  halved,  t  is  invariably  read  before  s.  (d)  Any 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD  215 

hooked  stem  may  be  halved,  t  being  sounded  after  all  the 
hooks  have  been  read,  (e)  Shortened  /  ray  is  never  used 
standing  alone.  (/)  When  t  is  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  it 
can  not  b«  expressed  by  the  shortening  principle,  (g)  When 
a  word  of  two  syllables  contains  only  one  consonant  besides 
t,  the  halving  principle  is  not  employed,  (h)  The  principle 
is  not  applied  in  cases  where  the  stem,  by  being  shortened, 

is  thus  rendered  indefinite,  as  shortened  k  in  > —  effect. 
In  this  case  the  resulting  word-form  has  the  appearance  of 
lengthened/1.  .,)  Ordinarily,  a  consonant  in  one  syllable  is 
not  halved  to  express  a  t  which  belongs  to  a  folio  wing  syllable. 
400.  Fig.  1  Fig.  2. 


Right  curve.  Left  curve. 

Referring  to  Fig.  1,  it  will  be  seen  that  in  executing  it  the 
first  stroke  is  the  downward  ~^\  r;  following  this  we  have 
_J  sh;  afterwards  f~  I,  ^-^  m,  )  s,  etc.  These  are  right 
curves,  that  is,  arcs  which  are  the  components  of  a  circle 
written  to  the  right.  A  full  list  of  right  curves  is  as  follows: 
s,  ish,  lay,  ar,  m,  z,  zh,  w,  and  mp.  List  of  left  curves:  /,  ith, 
n,  el,  shay,  v,  the,  ng,  and  y. 

401.  Those  words  whose  stems  are  all  curves  of  one  kind, 
that  is,  either  left  or  right,  are  more  easily  written  than 
mixed  words,  whose  stems  are  partly  right  and  partly  left. 
The  only  exception  is  what  is  called  the  compound  curve; 

e.  g.,   ^^-~~-    name,  \^  far,    J      sh~ll,    - — v_^.  many,  etc. 

Illustrative    words     having   -left     outlines:        ^   faith, 
enough,  \^  ,.       venison,  \e>  vessel.    Right  outlines: 


tlO  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


mail,  f  lame,    J  share,    4—  s  resume,  f~  also. 


The  words  given  are  more  facile  than  the  mixed  outlines, 
\^-^  famous,  ^/\^s  unloving,  V^l  facility, 

\*>-^  thump. 

It  is  according  to  a  dynamical  law  that  when  the  pen  has 
struck  a  curve  in  a  certain  direction,  either  right  or  left,  the 
impetus  given  it  will  carry  it  forward  more  easily  in  the 
same  direction,  while  a  change  of  direction  incurs  a  slight 
loss  of  energy,  and  hence  of  time  and  speed.  This  principle 
is  general  in  its  application,  and  is  employed  quite  exten- 
sively in  the  construction  of  word-forms.  The  choice  be- 
tween el  and  lay,  tsfi  and  shay,  and  the  location  of  the  shun- 
hooh,  are  usually  decided  by  it. 

402.  The  principle  of  right  and  left  applies,  in  fact,  to  all 
short-hand  characters  which  are  not  simple,  unmodified 
straight  stems,  as^xjo,  \  I,  /  j.  To  illustrate,  the  stem 
I  si  may  be  classed  as  left,  because  the  circle  is  struck  in 
that  way;  whereas  ]  str  is  right,  the  circle  being  written  in 
the  reverse  direction.  Figs.  3,  4,  5  and  6  show  movements 
of  which  the  right  and  left  circles  are  parts. 

Fig.  3.  Fig.  4.  Fig.  5.  Fig. 


Right.  Lefl.  Eight.  Left. 

Hence,  naturally,  in  swift  writing  there  is  a  tendency  to 

bend  the  t  in  str  slightly  to  the  right,  making  it  appear  like 

)  8.    This  effect  is  quite  unavoidable  in  very  rapid  execution. 

But  an  opposite  circle  added  to  either  curve  counteracts 

JQ 
stns,  or   |j  sirs,  t  maintains  its 

straightness,  no  matter   how  quickly   the  characters    are 
written. 
The  stems   |  tr  and  |    tl  are  also  right  and  left,  for  the 


REPORTING  STYLF  OF  SHORT-HAND.  217 

reason  that  the  r  and  I  hooks  are  parts  of  right  and  left  cir- 
cles.   All  r-hook  stems  are  right,  and  all  1-hook  stems  left. 
Also,  all  n-honk  straight  stems  are  right,  and  f-hook  stems 
left.    The  principle  applies  to  all  hooks,  loops  and  cii-cles. 
Examples  of  right  stems: 


Examples  of  left  stems: 

/  ^        _-> 

Examples  of  compound  stems: 

V    -,    r  N> 

Difficult  to  execute: 

o  n 

^-°  \i        J          c-^ 

Easy  to  execute: 


Difficult  to  execute: 

L  o_T        7   U  V. 


Easy  to  execute: 

V  L  "X    \    *7 

40o.  APPLICATIONS. 

(a)  El,  a,  left  curve,  should  be  used  after  the  left  curves 
/  and  n;  while  lay,  a  right  curve,  should  be  used  after  the 
right  curves  rt  m,  and  s.  (b)  Ar,  a  right  curve,  should  be 
used  after  the  right  curves  lay,  w,  and  ish.  (c)  Shay,  a  left 
curve,  is  more  easily  written  after/  than  the  right  curve  ish. 

404.  Write:  Fadge  dovetail  in  loco  homologous  paucity 
quid  pro  quo  mediocre  nullification  confoundedly  pro 
tanlo  ne  plus  ultra  subaltern  dequantitate  supernumerary 
residual  subtrahend  rive  craunch  amalgamate  in  toto 
cap-a-pie  discumbency  flagelliform  hatchet  faced  baluster 
terra  firma  epigastric  hypochondriac  cornea  oesophagus 
pylorus  pulmonary  venture  tricuspid  larynx  clavicle 


218  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

phalanges  subclavian  molar  cerebellum  intercostal  Li 
cuspid  philoprogenitiveness  bronchial  pericordium  thorax 
vertebrw  spinal-column  pettifogger  eureka  cyclopedia 
ignoramus  antiquarian  ex-officio  clodhopper  screwdriver 
pliarmacopoliat  helter-skelter  pilaster  cuspidate  navicular 
pentapetalous  sycamore. 

'  405.  EXERCISE  38. 

(To  be  phrased  by  the  student., 

THE   "IMMORTAL  NINE." 

Owing  to  serious  illness,  resulting  from  the  excitement  and 
overwork  of  the  canvass,  1  did  not  reach  Washington  till  the 
19th  of  December — just  in  time  to  cast  my  vote  lor  speaker 
on  the  fifty-sixth  ballot  in  this  first  important  "  dead-lock  " 
in  the  organization  of  the  House.  With  the  exception  of  t\s  o 
Indiana  members,  1  had  no  personal  acquaintance  in  either 
branch  of  Congress,  and,  on  entering  the  old  Hall  of  Repre- 
sentatives, my  first  thought  was  to  find  the  Free  Soil  Mem- 
bers, whose  political  fortunes  and  experience  had  been  so 
similar  to  my  own.  The  seat  of  Mr.  Giddings  was  pointed 
out  to  me  in  the  north-west  corner  of  the  Hall,  where  1  found 
the  stalwart  champion  of  free  speech  busy  with  his  pen.  He 
received  me  with  evident  cordiality,  and  at  once  sent  a  pa^e 
for  the  other  free  soil  members.  Soon  the  "Immortal  Nine," 
as  we  were  often  sportively  styled,  were  all  together:  David 
Wilmot,  of  Pennsylvania,  then  famous  as  the  author  of  the 
"proviso,"  short  and  corpulent  in  person,  and  emphatic  in 
speech;  Preston  Kin^,  of  New  York,  with  his  still  more  re- 
markable rotundity  of  belt,  and  a  face  beaming  with  pood 
humor;  the  eccentric  and  witty  "Jo  Root,"  of  Ohio,  always 
ready  to  break  a  lance  with  the  slave-holders;  Charles  Allen, 
of  Massachusetts,  the  quiet,  dignified,  clear-headed  and 
genial  gentleman,  but  a  good  fighter  and  the  unflinching 
enemy  of  slavery ;  Charles  Durkee,  of  Wisconsin,  the  tine- 
looking  and  large-hearted  philanthropist,  whose  enthusiasm 
never  cooled;  Amos  Tuck,  of  New  Hampshire,  amiable  and 
somewhat  feminine  in  appearance,  but  firm  in  purpose;  John 
W.  Howe,  of  Pennsylvania,  with  a  face  radiant  with  smiles 
and  good  will,  and  full  of  anti-slavery  fervor;  and  Joshua  R. 
Giddings,  of  Ohio,  with  his  broad  shoulders,  giant  frame, 
unquenchable  love  of  freedom,  and  almost  as  familiar  with 
the  slavery  question  in  all  its  aspects  as  he  was  with  the 
alphabet.  These,  all  gone  now  to  their  reckoning,  were  the 


REPORTISQ  STYLE  Of  SHORT -HA^D.  219    i 


elect  of  freeuom  in  the  lower  branch  of  this  memoraole  Con- 
gress. They  all  greeted  me  warmly,  and  the  more  so,  per- 
haps, because  my  reported  illness  and  doubtful  recovery  bad 
awakened  a  peculiar  interest  in  my  fortune  at  that  time,  on 
account  of  the  political  situation,  and  the  possible  signifi- 
cance of  a  singL  vote.  John  P.  Hale  happened  to  enter  the 
hall  during  these  congratulations,  and  still  further  lighted 
up  the  scene  by  his  jolly  presence;  while  Dr.  Bailey,  of  the 
"National  Era,"  also  joined  in  the  general  welcome,  and  at 
once  confirmed  all  the  good  opinions  I  had  formed  of  this 
courageous  and  single-minded  friend  of  the  slave.  I  was 
delighted  with  all  my  brethren,  and  at  o-u-e  entered  fully 
into  their  plans  and  counsels. — Selected  from  the  "  Political 
Recollections"  of  George  W.  Julian. 

(466—5:30—3:30.) 


406.  TRANSLATE. 

18/86. 


V 


"=       <\  n  </  I  >         ^\ 

Vr-  —  k        1 


LESSON 


NAMES  AND   NEGATIVES. 

407.  KEY.    1.    ABCDEFGHIJKLM. 
2.    NOPQRSTUVWXYZ.    3.     Burns  Barnes 
Morse    Morris    Paul    Peel    Boyle    Bailey    Greely    Gurley. 
4.    Beecher  Holmes  Carlyle  Cicero  Gough  Hughes  Kaincs 
Moore.    5.    Steele    Smiles    Clay   Jones    Mirabeau    Guizot 
Byron   Hume.    6.    Benjamin    Brewster  Alexander   Arnold 
Bancroft  Chesterfield  Mitchell  Sherman.    7.    Shakespeare 
Webster  Emerson  Jefferson  Hawthorne  Napoleon  Demos- 
thenes.   8.    Oakland    Omaha   Boulder   Cedar-Rapids   Des- 
Moines  Wheeling  Topeka.    9.    Kansas-City  Chambersburg 
Boston     Clinton     Waterburg     San-Francisco     Cleveland. 
Translate  Ls  10-13.     14.    Mortal  immortal  moral  immoral 
legal   illegal   regular    irregular.    15.     Immovable    illiberal 
irredeemable   immutable   unnecessary   else-than  less-than. 

PBOPEB  NAMES. 

408.  The  following  sentence  will  be  found  slightly  ambig- 
uous:  "    J        J 


f~)  ^  _  \_  -3  x          t   may  be    translated, 

"The  Monthly's  Table  of  Contents  contains  another  of  the 
dozen  poems,  also  an  article  on  bacon."  For  "  dozen  "  the 
reader  may  insert  "Addison,"  and  write  "Bacon"  with  a 
capital.  The  correct  meaning  will  then  appear.  Here  the 
writer  should  have  vocalized  Bacon,  and  underscored  Addi- 
son, as  well  as  Monthly's.  Also,  if  time  permitted,  Addison 
should  have  been  interlined  in  long-hand.  Proper  names 
are  arbitrary,  as  to  the  manner  both  of  spelling  and  pronun- 
ciation. The  reporter  hears  new  ones  every  day,  and  they 
are  likely  to  give  him  some  trouble.  This  is  partly  on  ac- 
count of  the  fact  that  names,  considered  merely  as  words, 
have  a  meaning,  as  Brown,  Bacon,  Rice,  etc.  This  meaning 
has  no  connection,  however,  with  the  subject  matter;  but  the 
reader  is  apt  at  times  to  confound  common  and  proper 

—220— 


39. 


.\  )  I  -  v.  _ 


/_  r 


r 


15 


282  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SfTORT-HAXD. 

nouns,  if  the  outlines  for  the  latter  are  not  characterized  in 
some  way.  The  underscore,  which  signifies  primarily  that  a 
capital  is  to  be  used,  serves  this  purpose.  There  are  many 
proper  names,  however,  which,  on  account  of  their  meagre 
outlines,  require  vocalization;  for  example,  Steele,  Clay, 
Hume,  etc.  (L  5.)  The  underscore,  however,  is  not  neces- 
sary when  the  name  is  vocalized.  (Ls  4  and  5.)  Vowels  are 
always  to  be  used  if  the  outline  is  in  the  least  ambiguous;  as, 
for  example,  k-pr,  which  would  signify  either  Cowper,  or 
Cooper.  L  3. 

409.  If  a  proper  name  occurs  a  number  of  times  in  a  single 
report,  the  writer,  particularly  if  pressed  for  time,  may  omit 
these  features,  writing  the  consonant  outline  merely.    Every 
name  that  is  in  any  way  peculiar  should,  when  practicable, 
be  written  in  both  long-hand  and  short-hand  the  first  time  it 
occurs  in  any  report.    The  long-hand  gives  the  spelling, 
which  the  short-hand  does  not  do.    The  short-hand,  however, 
gives  the  pronunciation,  to  which  it  is  well  known  the  long- 
hand often  gives  hardly  a  clue.    If  in  Court,  for  instance, 

Miss  K     (~    /  should  be  caJ'ed  as  a  witness,  and  her 

name  written  in  short-hand  only,  the  proper  spelling,  Coralie 
Roth,  would  not  be  known  when  the  notes  came  to  be  tran- 
scribed. In  proper  names  both  the  spelling  and  pronunciation 
are  important,  and  the  name  is  not  expressed  entirely  unless 
it  is  written  by  both  methods.  When  the  spelling  cannot  be 
had,  the  vowels  should  be  written  very  carefully. 

410.  Initial  letters  are  written  in  the  manner  indicated 
in  Ls  1  and  2.    It  is  entirely  unnecessary,  and  hence  im- 
proper, in  writing  names,  to  place  a  period,  that  is,  the  small 
cross,  after  each  initial  letter.    Names  that  are  so  common 
as  to  be  familiar  to  every  one,  as  New  York  City,  Smith, 
Chicago,  London,  etc.,  need  not  be  either  vocalized  or  under- 
scored. 

411.  Names  are  so  numerous  that  a  vocabulary  of  them 
could  not  well  be  memorized;  and  this  would  be  unnecessary, 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  223 

since  the  practical  writer  may  readily  invent  sufficiently  in- 
telligible outlines  for  the  most  difficult  of  them.  The  halving 
principle,  circles,  loops,  and  other  adjunctive  signs,  should 
be  employed  more  sparingly  than  when  writing  common 
words. 

POSITIVE  AND   NEGATIVE. 

412.    The  positive  words,  sane,  temperate,  piety,  useful, 

vV 


proper,  are  expressed  by  the  characters  q^_/  [~^ 


Mt\ 


The  negatives  are  written  v — *ix  insane,        [*~^  intemperate, 
~~Y    impiety,     \^o   useless,      '~N\      improper.    In    most 


eases,  as  here,  the  negative  is  expressed  by  a  prefix  or  affix 
attached  to  the  positive  word -form.  To  this  rule  some  ex- 
ceptions are  made  in  favor  of  positives  which  begin  with 
/,  r,  m  or  n,  negatives  of  which  are  formed  by  prefixing  ilt 
ir,  im  and  un,  as  in  legal,  illegal,  regular,  irregular,  moral, 
immoral,  necessary,  unnecessary.  See  Ls  14  and  15.  It  will 
be  observed  that  while  a  distinct  syllable  is  prefixed  in  each 
case,  the  consonant  elements  are  not  increased;  for  example, 
immoral  is  simply  moral  with  the  short  t  sounded  before  it. 
There  are  three  different  methods  of  distinguishing  between 
positives  and  negatives  of  this  class  of  words: 

413.  1.    By  writing  the  negative  in  the  first  position,  and 
the  positive  in  the  second,  as  in  mortal,  immortal,  L  14. 
Illustrative  words:    Material  immaterial  morality  immor- 
ality materialism  immaterialism   moderate  immoderate. 

414.  2.    By  using  up-strokes  for  the  positive,  and  down- 
strokes  for  the  negative,  as  in  legal,  illegal.    Write:    Legiti- 
mate illegitimate  logical  illogical  repressible  irrepressible 
resistible  irresistible  retrievable  irretrievable. 

415.  3.    By  reduplicating  the  initial  consonant,  as  in  im- 
movable, illiberal.    L  16. 


824  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

416.  4.    Vowels  also  are  sometimes  employed  for   this 
purpose  in  phrases,  as  in  else-than,  less-lhan.    L  J5. 

417.  Write:    Measurable    immeasurable    memorial    im- 
memorial   nerve     unnerve    natural     unnatural     refutable 
irrefutable     reverent     irreverent     revocable     ir-evocable 
ne'ghborly   unneighborly. 

PHRASES. 

418.  What-do-you-mean   \ve-shall-do  whai-extent   wh^t- 
I-ara  what-I-desire   what-I-find    what-I-meant   what-I-said 
what-shall-be  what- was-necessary  what- would-be-said  what- 
would-be-the    which-h as-been    who-would-know     why-is-it 
will-be-satistied    will-not-be-taken     will-not-get-it    would- 
accept    would-not-be-respectable    would-not-be-responsible 
a-great-many-of-his  ahead-of-you  ahead-of-your  all-we-wish 
another-advantage   another-day   any-more-than-I-can  any- 
way-you-can  any-way-at-all   because-you-have  because-we- 
have  because-we-do   because-it-can-be   consider-their   con- 
sider-your  consider-the-matter  consider-that-matter  entire- 
business  entire-control  entire-season   entire-year  entirely- 
different  entirely-in-their-hands  entirely- (a)-matter  entire- 
ly-in-their-possession  for-a-long-time    long-while  look-into- 
the-matter  satisfactory-way   several-months-ago   see-what- 
can-be-done  shall-be-pleased  several-years-ago  short-period 
take-advantage   take-this-occasion    take-this-matter    when- 
ever-it-is-convenlent. 

419.  EXERCISE  39. 

Vocalize:  Beaumont  Blair  Colton  Congreve  Dryden 
Erasmus  Hale  Hazlitt  Knox  Martineau  Pope  Rousseau 
Seneca  Shelley  Taylor;  (without  vowels)  Andrews  Aris- 
totle Bentham  Bentley  Berkeley  Blackstone  Bolingbroke 
Burgess  Burton  Carleton  Cervantes  Chalmers  Channing 
Clarendon  Cobden  Coleridge  Cromwell  Descartes  Diogenes 
Douglas  Drummond  Erskine  Evans  Fenelon  Francis 
Fuller  Gibbon  Goldsmith  Harrington  Herbert  Hogarth 
Hopkins  Hudson  Huxley  Irving  Johnson  Juvenal  Kings- 


REPORTING  STYLF  OF  SHORT-HAND.  £28 

ley  Lambert  Lessing  Longfellow  Macaulay  Mackenzie 
Mason  Meredith  Miller  Morgan  Nelson  Parker  Pascal 
Petrarch  Plutai'ch  Porter  Robertson  Robinson  Rogers 
Ruskin  Russell  Sheridan  Spurgeon  Sterling  Strickland 
Tennyson  Turner  Voltaire  Warburton  Warren  Wesley 
W  h  i  p  pie  Words  worth . 

VOCALIZE:  Albany  Ann  Arbor  Augusta  Austin  Beloit 
Dayton  Detroit  Dover  Elmira  Hobokeu  Houston  Kala- 
inaxoo  La  Crosse  Mobile  Peoria  Racine  Salem  Savannah 
Syracuse  Toledo  Troy;  (without vowels)  Ashland  Atchison 
Athens  Atlanta  Baltimore  Battle  Creek  Belfast  Belleville 
Bethlehem  Bowling  Green  Bridgeport  Brooklyn  Buffalo 
Cambridge  Camden  Canton  Carbondale  Central  City 
Chattanooga  Chillicothe  Columbia  Columbus  Concord 
Council  Bluffs  Crawfordsville  Dallas  Danville  Davenport 
Dubuque  Easton  East  Saginaw  Elgin  Evanston  Fall-River 
Fitchburg  Foiul-du-Lac  Fort  Wayne  Galesburgh  Galveston 
Georgetown  Grand  Rapids  Hannibal  Hartford  Haverhill 
Holyoke  Hyde  Park  Indianapolis  Jackson  Jersey  City 
Keokuk  Lafayette  Lancaster  Lawrence  Leavenworth 
Leuiston  Lexington  Little  Rock  Lockport  Memphis  Mer- 
iden  Milwaukee  Minneapolis  Montgomery  Muskegon 
Muscatine  Nashville  Newark  New  Bedford  New  Haven 
New  Orleans  Norwich  Patterson  Pawtucket  Petersburgh 
Philadelphia  Pittsburg  Portsmouth  Poughkeepsie  Provi- 
dence Quincy  Richmond  Rochester  Rock  Island  Sacra- 
mento Salt  Lake  City  San  Antonio  Scranton  Shenandoah 
Springfield  St.  Joseph  St.  Louis  St.  Paul  Terre  Haute 
Trenton  Utica  Vicksburg  Waltham  Washington  Wil- 
mington Worcester.  (211—3:30—2:30.) 

4-20.  NEW- YORK,  Dec.  5th,  1886. 

Mu.  CHAS.  C.  FRENCH, 

Dear-Sir:— With  cordial  acknowledgments  for-past  favors, 
the-undersigned  respectfully  solicits  contributions  of-private- 
ly  received  marine  and-commercial  news. 

Our  members,  representing  as  they-do  most  of-the  ocean 
commerce  of-the  country,  are  daily  receiving  from-their  cor- 


826  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SnORT-HAXD. 

respondents  a-large  mass  of  advanced  marine  information — 
arrivals,  sailings,  charters,  clearances,  disasters,  vessels  in 
port,  etc. 

The  Maritime  Exchange,  as  the-chief  bureau  of-marine 
news  in-the  United-States,  is  naturally  the-central  point 
where-such  early  intelligence  should-be  collected  and-clu^-i- 
fied.  Its  daily  accumulation  there  will-not  only  benefit  the- 
members  at  large,  but  strengthen  the-resources  of-the  a--<>- 
ciation,  in- which  each  member  is  interested.  Its  subsequent 
publication  will,  moreover,  prove  a-boon  to-the  families  of- 
the  crews. 

Blanks  to  facilitate  reports  will-be  gladly  sent  on  applica- 
tion. 

By-order  of-the  board-(of)-directors. 

F.  W.  HOTJGHTON, 
Superintendent. 
(150—1:45—1.) 

421.  TRANSLAifc. 


y°        "T 

\_          ^     V-  ' 


,C<r 


NOTE. — As  a  matter  of  convenience,  and  for  the  purpose 
of  equalizing  the  speed  in  dictating,  the  remaining  Exercises 
are  marked  in  the  following  manner:  Full-faced  figures, 
(1),  (2),  (3),  etc.,  are  used  to  set  off  portions  of  the  Exercise 
which  are  to  be  read  in  the  same  number  of  minutes.  The 
work  of  a  minute,  also,  is  subdivided  into  quarters  by  accent- 
thus,  first  quarter7;  second  quarter";  third  quarter"7. 

_  -  -_        _     _ .     -  ~~~* 


LESSON  XL. 

EXPEDIENTS  AND  PUNCTUATION. 

422.  What  is  termed  an  expedient  belongs  properly  to 
phraseography.    It  is  a  very  special,  and  somewhat  arbitrary, 
mode  of  phrasing.    The  utility  of  the  expedients  here  pre- 
sented is  confined  mainly  to  a  few  particular  branches  of 
reporting,  but  may  occasionally  be  employed  by  every  writer. 

423.  1.  OF-THE.  These  words  may  be  expressed  by  placing 
two  word-forms  in  close  proximity  to  each  other.    This  ex- 
pedient, however,  should  be  used  only  for  the  expression  of 
very  common  phrases,  or  groups  of  words,  such  as,  wealth- 
of-the-nalion,importance-of-the-subject,  etc.    SeeLl.    Write: 
Season-of-the-year   day-of-the-week  speech-of-the-president 
day-of-the-month  question-of-the-day  subject-of-the-debate. 

424.  2.    FROM-TO.    The  prepositions  from  and  to,  when 
they  occur  in  the  class  of  phrases  exemplified  in  L  2,  are  ex- 
pressed by  the  fact  of  proximity,  similar  to  L  1.    The  essen- 
tial difference  between  these  two  expedients  is  that  in  L  1  the 
two  words  are  different  from  each  other,  while  in  L  2  it  is  al- 
ways the  same  word  repeated.    Write:    From-street-to-street 
from-State-to-State  from-sea-to-sea  from-door-to-door. 

425.  3.    AFTER.    Writing  one  character  near  and  some- 
what below  the  preceding  signifies  that  after  is  to  be  supplied, 
as  in  day-after-day,  L  3. 

426.  4.    BY.    Writing  a  word  somewhat  above,  but  near 
the  preceding,  indicates  that  by  is  to  be  supplied,  as  in  L  4. 
In  Ls  3  and  4  it  will  be  observed  that  the  second  word  of  each 
phrase  is  always  a  repetition  of  the  first. 

427.  5.    SCRIPTURAL  AND  OTHER  REFERENCES.    The^oojfc 
or  Volume  is  indicated  by  a  figure  in  the  first  position,  the 
Chapter  by  a  figure  in  the  second  position,  and  the  Verse  or 
Section  by  a  figure  in  the  third  position.    See  L  5.    This  ex- 
pedient is  quite  essential  in  some  branches  of  reporting. 
Write:    Exodus,  13  chap.,  8  verse;  2  Kings,  3  chap.,  16  verse; 
Matthew,  6  chap.,  6  verse;  Carlyle's  French  Revolution,  vol. 
3,  chap.  9,  sec.  12;  (referring  to  law  report^  60  New  York, 
page  160,  paragraph  3. 

—227- 


228  REPORTING  STYLE  Of  SHORT  HAXD. 

428.  6.     SOCIETY.    The  letter  )  s,  struck  through  the  pre- 
ceding stem,  signifies  Society.    SeeLG.    Write:    Geo)ogic;il- 
Society    Philological-Society    Sewing-Society    Literary-*" 
ciety  American-Bible-Society   American-Tract-Society   As- 
tronomical-Society   Geographical-Society    Foreign-Mission- 
ary-Society. 

429.  7.    COMPANY.    In  a  similar  manner  an  intersecting 
—  k  indicates  Company.    L  7.    Write:    American-Oil-Com- 
pany  Rolling-Mill-Company  Manufacturing-Company  Amer- 
ican-Express-Company British- American-Fur-Compan.y 
Mexican-Central-Railroad-Company. 

430.  8.    ASSOCIATION.    An  intersecting  ^J  sh  is  employed 
to  express  Association.    See  L  8.    Write:    Ticket-Brokers'- 
Association  State-Editorial-Association  Bankers'-Association 
Firemen's  Association  County-Fair-Association. 

431.  KEY.    1.    Hour-of-the-day  wealth-of-the-riation  im- 
portance-of-the-subject   solemnity-of-the-occasion    death-of- 
the-king  merits-of-the-case.    2.    From-house-to-house  from- 
town-to-town    from-place-to-place    from-day-to-day     from- 
time-to-time  from-hand-to-hand  from-year-to-year.    3.  Day- 
after-day   week-after-week   month-after-month  State-after- 
State  year-after-year  volume-after-volume  hour-after-hour. 
4.    Day-by-day    page-by-page    word-by-word    sentence-by- 
sentence    step-by-step    inch-by-inch.    5.    1   Corinthians,  3 
chap.,  16  v.;  2  Peter,  1  chap.,  7  v. ;  Gibbon's  History,  vol.  3, 
chap.  40,  sec.  4.     6.     Phonetic-Society    Historical-Society 
Medical-Society  Stenographic-Society  Philosophical-Society 
Short-Hand-Society.    7.    Railroad-Company    Lumber-Com- 
pany Coal-Company  Mining-Company  Publishing-Company 
Canal-Company.      8.      Iron-Dealer's-Association      Liquor- 
Dealer's- Association          Young-Men's-Christian-Association 
American-Ball-Club-Association  Teachers'-Association. 
Translate  Ls  9-18. 

PHRASES.  14.  First-instant  for-some-time-past  official- 
correspondence  sent-by-last-mail  telegraphic-communica- 
tions. 15.  Your-last-letter  because-you-can-be  monthly- 


Plate  40* 


via 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 


statement    much-as-we-can    much-larger    much-worse-than 
real-estate. 

MARKS  OF   PUNCTUATION. 


Periods. 


i    Semi-colon. 

7 


! 


Interrogation. 
Exclamation. 


Parenthesis. 


X    Underscore. 
~    Hyphen. 
i    Quotation. 


I      Accent. 


Asterisk.  Q__^    Parenthetical  Ellipse. 

433.  The  dot,  or  long-hand  period,  cannot  be  employed  in 
short-hand  on  account  of  contiict  with  the  dot-sign  for  a  and 
and.  Partly  to  avoid  such  conflict,  and  partly  to  secure 
more  facile  signs,  punctuation  marks  differing  somewhat 
from  those  in  common  use  are  employed  in  short-hand.  As 
to  the  period,  the  reporter  may  choose  for  himself.  The  first 
is  the  most  artistic,  but  the  second  and  third  are  quicker 
written.  The  sign  for  laughter  is  made  use  of  in  reporting 
speeches  and  conventions.  To  avoid  conflict  with  the  hori- 
zontal marks  used  in  long-hand,  two  and  tliree  lines  (instead 
of  one  and  two),  are  employed  in  reporting  to  signify  italics 
and  capitals.  The  accent  mark,  written  just  below  any  part 
of  an  outline,  signifies  that  the  syllable  so  marked  is  to  be 
accented,  or  italicised,  as  in  the  sentences: 

"r 

"  I  said  wn-necessary,  not  necessary.' 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  231 

"She  softly  exclaimed,  Good-ness!"    The  parenthetical  ellipse 
is  employed  when  a  few  words  only  are  to  be  enclosed. 

434.  These  marks  are  used  mostly  in  correspondence  and 
composition;  only  to  a  limited  extent  in  actual  reporting. 
In  rapidly  taken  notes  tie  semi-colon  is  indicated  by  a  space 
of  an  inch  or  more.    When  notes  are  taken  at  verbatim 
speed,  little  opportunity  is  allowed  for  punctuating,  the  only 
practical  method  being  to  leave  spaces  to  correspond  with 
the  speaker's  pauses,  and  insert  the  proper  marks  afterwai'ds 
when  transcribing. 

PHRASES. 

435.  After-train-time    be-good-enough    by-wire    cannot- 
account  cannot-answer   cannot-do-so   first-intimation   fur- 
ther-particulars   further- reply    great-delay    I-am-in-corre- 
pondence  I-have-sent-it  I-have-telegraphed  in-certain -cases 
in-my-letter     little-danger     many-circumstances     money- 
market  my-letter  send-a-telegram  no-account  no-intention 
official-statement  other-circumstances  referring-to-my-letter 
sample-cases  short-notice   since-received   state-reasons  to- 
have-that-sent   uuder-the-circumstances    under-the-circum- 
stances-(of-the)-case      under-peculiar-circumstances     very- 
correct  very-good-character   very-important-letter  we-are- 
in-correspondence   we-are-in-communication    we-have-sent 
your-letter  your-reply  your-telegram. 

436.  EXERCISE  40. 

NEW-YORK,  August  1,  1888. 

W.  H.  POWERS,  ESQ.,  Prsgr.  Agt.  W.,  St.  L.  &  P.  R.  R., 
Toledo,  O. 

Dear-  Sir/ — The-efforts  of -this  committee  looking  to -reform 
in-the-methods  of  conducting  passenger  business  have-been 
to-a-certain-extent  unfavorably  affected,"  and  in-some-cases 
neutralized  by-the  action  of-roads  beyond-the  territory 
traversed  by-their-lines,  who  continue  to  pay  large  sums'77 
in  commissions  to-agents  and-ticket  brokers  in-the-east, 
whereby  the-proper  distribution  of-the  business  between  our- 
own  companies  is  threatened  (1). 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-IJAXD. 


The-time  has  arrived  when,  on-account  of-the  peculiar 
geographical  aspects  of-the  territory  traversed  by-these 
lines,  it-is-impossible'  for- them  to  carry  out  the-reform  they- 
have  attempted,  with-justice  to-each-other,  so-long  as-tlic 
lines  in-the-west  and-south"  beyond-the  territory  referred 
to  continue  to-pursue  their-present  methods. 

The-committee  believe  that  connecting  lines  are  anxious 
to-be  relieved7"  of-the-expense  attaching  to-a  condition  of 
war,  whether  carried  on  under-the  forms  of  war  or  peace. 
They  have-made-a  strong  (2)  effort  to  stop  the-payment  of 
commissions  at  differential  fare  points  in-the-t-a-t :  they  ob- 
ject decidedly  to-other  lines  continuing  a-practice'  which 
tends  to-render  their  efforts  abortive,  and-they  urgently  re- 
quest that-you  refrain  from-the  payment  of  commissions  at 
those  points/'  They-will  highly  appreciate  your  support 
and-co-operation. 

Enclosed  herewith  please-find  copy  of  resolutions  and  rules 
of-the  committee.    Will-you  kindly"7  acknowledge  receipt, 
ami-advise  the-committee  whether  your  company  will  coin- 
ply  with  their  wishes  in-this-regard? 
Yours-truly, 

S.  F.  PIERSON,  Vice-Chairman.  (3) 
(277—3—2.) 


LESSON  XLI. 

NUMBERS,   SPECIAL  RULES,   AND  SUGGESTIONS. 
EXPRESSION  OF  NUMBERS. 

437.  Numbers  are  expressed  in  the  usual  manner  mainly, 
that  is,  by  the  Arabic  numerals,  1,  2,  3,  4,  etc.  In  the  num- 
ber 671,  the  figure  6,  by  virtue  of  its  position  .(in  the  hun- 
dred's place),  expresses  six-hundred.  This  arrangement 
gives  figures  an  immense  advantage,  in  the  way  of  brevity, 
over  written  numbers;  thus,  671— six-hundred  and  seventy-- 
one There  is  no  pressing  need  for  any  different  method  of 
expressing  numbers,  since  the  present  method  is  already  as 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


short  as  short  -hand  itself.  This  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  a 
column  of  figures  can  be  written  as  fast  as  the  numbers  are 
distinctly  called  off.  The  form  of  some  of  the  figures  could 
be  simplified;  but  it  is  hardly  necessary.  A  few  of  them 
when  standing  alone  should  be  expressed  in  short-hand 
characters,  as  1,  2,  3,  10,  etc.  L  1.  Round  numbers  also  can 
be  expressed  more  briefly  by  short-hand  symbols,  as  2,000, 
12,000.  See  Ls  1-6. 


SI  ^CIAL    RULES. 

438.  Signs  of  unimportant  or  obscure  consonant  sounds 
are  often  omitted,  as  g  from  longest,  k  from  distinction.    L  7. 
Such  omissions  are  only  the  more  safe  when  several  conso- 
nants still  remain  in  the  word-form. 

The  exigency  of  joining  stems  together  not  infrequently 
renders  it  impossible  to  form  -the  hooks  in  a  perfect  manner, 
as,  for  example,  shn  in  sectional,  n  in  panic,  I  in  cable.  (See 
L  8.)  Sometimes  the  hook  is  not  written  at  all,  only  indi- 
cated (by  an  offset  or  otherwise),  as  r  in  destroy,  I  in  explain, 
etc.  L  9.  At  certain  junctures  the  circle  necessarily  be- 
comes a  loop,  as  in  counsel.  In  jail,  j  is  written  more  up- 
rigid,  and  I  with  less  curvature;  otherwise  j-l,  if  written 

strictly  according  to  rule,  would  appear  thus,  ff  The  same 
observation  applies  also  to  assail,  and  many  similar  com- 
binations. Angularity  and  facility  require  that  certain 
stems,  when  joined,  must  undergo  some  slight  change  in 
their  formation  in  oi-der  to  be  adjusted  to  each  other.  To 
illustrate,  n  and  m  are  curved  less  when  combined  with  t  or 
d,  either  preceding  or  following;  and  more,  when  attached 
to  k  or  g.  See  knotty,  tiny,  nick,  etc.  L  11. 

439.  In  a  few  instances  )  cst  is  struck  upwards,  as  in 
gravest.    L  12.    Iss-hay,  though  rarely  occurring,  may  be 
expressed  by  changing  the  hook  to  a  circle,  as  in  soho.    L  12. 
The  st-loop  is  rarely  written  with  half-length  letters.     When 
so  applied  it  should  be  written  fully  two-thirds  the  length 
oi  the  stem.    The  large  loop  is  never  so  applied.     rh«r-hook 


834  REPORTING  STYLE  OF"  SriOItT-HAXD. 

is  sometimes  expressed  in  phrases  by  a  back-stroke,  as  in 
triple  consonants.  For  example,  Ihis-property,  tliis-courtf, 
L  12. 

440.  KEY.     1.    One   two   thru  six  ten   twelve  hundred 
thousand    million    billion.    2.    First   second    third    fourth 
sixth    tenth     twelfth     hundredth     thousandth     millionth. 
3.     100,000  2,000  G.JJO  1/200  ten-hundred  one-million  three- 
billion.     4.    Tnree-tenth.s    one-hundredth    two-thoussndthfl 
a-thousand-millions      one-tenth      the-second-hundred      tlie- 
millionth-part.      5.      Ton -or- twelve      three-or-four     twenty 
sixtieth  thirty  forty  fifty  sixty-five  hundredths.     6.  210, UK) 
75,030,000    3,000,000,000    500     13,187,000.     7.     Longest    dis- 
tinction sanction  function  suggestion  Northampton   trans- 
pose.    8.     Sectional   panic    ungainly  defer  cable  manager 
engraving.     9.     Destroy    pistol     explain    explicit    density 
counsel    rapaciously    jail    assail.     10.     Set    sick    safe    t;i<k 
excessive  settle  suffer    mechanism  chronicle.     11.     Knotty 
tiny  nick  canny  Mattie  Tommy  mock  calm.     12.  Gra\  <  <t 
nicest  insurrectionist  best-table   best-time  nice-scene  soho 
tins-property    this-course.     13.     Strive    strife     prize    price 
lays  hu-e  prizes  prices  fashion  fusion   raised. 

PIIKASES.  14.  Nevertheless-you-can  great-majority-of- 
cascs  nuaierous-letters  number-of-claims  what-have-you- 
to-say  fellow-citizens.  15.  Just-taken  attorney-general 
examination-in-chief  honorable-court  law-office  Circuit- 
Court  under-all-the-circumstances-of-the-case. 

441.  A  fact  in  pronunciation,  which  is  buj,  rarely  observed, 
is  this:    An   initial  consonant  ordinarily  is  not  sounded, 
when  the  preceding  word  ends  with  the  same  element;  a-  /, 
for  example,  in  best-lime,  best-table,  or  &  in  book-keeper,  pro- 
nounced bestime,   bestable,  bookeeper.    The  chief  difference 
between  fine-night,  -And  finite,  is  that  the  first  syllable  infinite 
is  accented,  while  in  fine-night,  each  word  has  its  separate 
accent.    To  some  extent  this  fact  may  safely  be  taken  advan- 
tage of  in  phrasing,  as  in  best-time,  L  12. 

442.  The  sub-vocals  v,  z  and  d,  in  rare  cases,  and  when 
really  necessary,  may  be  distinguished  from  their  cognates 


9  t 

/       c^^— xl 

c       ( 


0   Jj 

10  f 


J         C  ^ 

( 


13 


I         y^      X\ 

T  )- 


6-\ 


V 


12 


14 


\ 


Y 


236  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

f,  s,  and  t,  by  the  shading  of  a  hook,  loop,  or  circle,  as  in 
strive,  prize,  lays,  prizes,  L  13. 

443.  The  so  called  circles  iss  and  sez  are,  in  fact,  never 
entirely  round,  for  the  reason  that  the  stems  to  which  they 
are  joined  form  a  part  of  them.  See  set,  sick,  etc.  L  10. 
The  circle  always  becomes  a  small  loop  when  written  wilhin 
a  hook,  as  in  settle,  suffer,  etc.  In  rare  cases  two  hooks  may 
be  written  together,  as  in  chronicle,  L  10. 

4*44.  The  professional  reporter  is  allowed  certain  licence* 
which  should  not,  however,  be  taken  by  the  student.  In 
rapid  writing  he  may  give  the  letters  a  less  degree  of  slant 
or  curvature,  omit  shading  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  and 
occasionally  write  words  out  of  position.  Every  writer  in 
time  becomes  familiar  with  those  inaccuracies  which  are 
peculiar  to  himself;  but  it  should  be  his  constant  aim  to  keep 
as  near  the  standard  as  possible,  in  order  that  the  legibility  of 
difficult  passages  may  not  be  endangered,  and  that  others 
also  may  be  able  to  read  his  notes. 

LIMIT  OP  INACCURACY.  Even  in  fast  reporting  the  sten- 
ographer should  avoid  writing  any  word  so  far  wrong  as 
that  it  may  appear  to  be  an  entirely  different  word. 

445.  LARGE  OR  SMALL  "HAND."     The  reporter,  when 
pressed,  writes  larger  than  at  other  times.    Some  persons 
take  this  to  be  an  evidence  that  a  large  hand  is  the  most 
rapid.    It  proves  just  the  contrary.    The  really  skilful  sten- 
ographer, when  writing  at  high  speed,  is  not  flurried,  and 
writes  about  as  small  a  hand  as  usual.    There  can  be  no 
question  but  that  the  greatest  speed  will  be  attained  ultimate!;/ 
only  by  writing  the  characters  near  each  other,  cultivating  a 
neat  style,  and  writing  as  small  a  hand  as  practicable. 

446.  Professional    reporters    commonly    use    note-books 
manufactured  expressly  for  the  purpose.    Not  only  are  these 
better  suited  to  this  work,  but  greater  ease  in  writing  is  at- 
tained by  using  books  which  are  uniform  as  to  size  of  page, 
width  of  ruling,  and  quality  of  paper. 

.47.    All  stenographic  notes,  no  matter  for  what  purpose 
taken,  should  be  tiled,  indexed,  and  carefully  preserved  for 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  237 

several  years.    The  contingencies  are  many  which  may  ren- 
der a  transcript  of  a  portion  of  these  very  valuable. 

448.  No  stenographer  can  afford  to  disregard  certain  gen- 
eral directions  which  relate  to  the  mechanical  part  of  his 
profession.    He  should  use  paper  distinctly  ruled,  and  the 
best  quality  only.    A  good  fine  pointed,  short-nibbed  gold 
pen,  of  medium  size,  is  the  best  for  reporting  purposes-. 
This  should  be  more  or  less  elastic,  dependent  on  the  writer's 
lightness  of  touch.    Good  writing  fluid  is  preferable  to  ink. 

449.  When  the  reporter  writes  with  a  pencil,  he  shou.d 
obtain  one  of  medium  hardness  only,  keep  it  sharpened, 
and  use  it  with  soft  or  uncalendered  paper.    For  general 
purposes  it  is  better  to  use  a  pen;  the  pencil  in  exceptional 
cases  only.    In  every  respect  it  will  be  observed  that  the 
pen  and  pencil  differ  from  each  other.    The  question  as  to 
the  relative  merits  of  each  for  reporting  purposes  has  been 
discussed  to  a  considerable  extent  by  members  of  the  pro- 
fession.   Those    reporters    who  employed  a    pencil   while 
learning,  never  afterwards  giving  the  pen  a  fair  trial,  of 
course  regard  the  pencil  with  the  greater  favor.    Of  those 
who  have  fairly  tested  both,  the  majority  prefer  the  pen. 
The  advantages  of  each  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
comparison  of 

450.  PEN  AND  PENCIL. 

1.  The  pen  must  be  dipped,  the  pencil  sharpened. 

2.  For  the  pen  an  inkstand  must  be  provided,   or  the 
"fountain"  tilled;  a  number  ot  pencils  must  be  sharpened 
beforehand. 

3.  The  pen  is  elastic,  and  is  used  on  a  hard  surface;  the 
pencil  is  inelastic,  and  should  be  used  on  a  soft  surface,  or 
springy  tablet. 

4.  A  pen-drawn  line  is  uniform;  the  pencil's  point  is  con- 
tinually grinding  off,  and  hence  does  not  serve  so  well  to 
indicate  light  and  shade. 

5     More  skill  or  training  is  required  to  handle  the  pen; 
most  people  already  know  the  use  of  a  pencil,  which  is  simple. 


238  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

6.  Pen-work  is  permanent;  pencil-writing  fades  out  in  a 
few  years. 

7.  Notes  '  ^ken  with  a  pen  are  black  and  easy  to  read; 
pencil-writing  is  hard  on  the  eyes,  and  for  this  one  important 
reason  a  pencil  should  be  used  as  little  as  possible. 

8.  Writing  with  a  gold  pen,  which  is  a  yielding,  sensitive 
instrument,  is  much  less  fatiguing  than  manipulating  a  pen- 
cil, which  is  stiff  and  inflexible. 

451.       BOOKS  AND  MATERIAL  RECOMMENDED. 

Our  Short-Hand  Pocket  Dictionary  contains  over  six 
thousand  words  beautifully  engraved,  and  every  writer  of 
this  system  ought  to  possess  a  copy.  Pitman's  Phrase  Book 
is  also  very  useful,  and  ought  to  be  copied  through  by  the 
learner  several  times.  Humphrey's  Manual  of  Type-writing, 
from  which  a  number  of  the  business  letters  used  as  exen 
in  this  present  book  were  taken,  with  the  kind  consent  of 
the  author,  is  the  foremost  work  on  the  subject,  and  it  ought 
to  be  used  by  every  operator  of  a  writing  machine.  "  One 
Hundred  Valuable  Suggestions  to  Short-hand  Students"  con- 
tains many  practical  hints,  and  is  adapted,  also,  to  dictation 
purposes.  The  "Reporting  Style"  Practice  Books,  designed 
to  accompany  this  work,  are  manufactured  from  a  good 
quality  of  paper,  properly  ruled,  and  of  a  suitable  size. 
An  inferior  quality  of  writing  material  should  not  be 
made  use  of  in  any  case.  The  best  quality  of  fools-cap  is 
recommended  to  those  who  do  not  use  specially  prepared 
paper.  Fountain  pens  are  coming  into  use.  These  have 
been  much  improved  of  late,  and  several  brands  will  be 
found  sufficiently  reliable  for  short-hand  purposes.  While  a 
good  fountain  pen  may  be  a  convenience,  it  will  not,  consid- 
ered as  an  aid  to  speed,  be  found  of  any  special  value,  since 
an  ordinary  dip  of  ink  will  easily  write  three  hundred  words. 
These  pens  were  originally  made  for  the  convenience  of  per- 
sons who  wished  to  carry  ink  in  their  pocket.  For  easy  and 
rapid  work,  the  pen  should  be  of  gold,  short  nibbed  and 
shai  >  pointed.  For  reporting  purposes,  and  advanced  prac- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  230 

tice  also,  a  writing  fluid,  as  Arnold's  or  Carter's,  is  better 
than  ink,  which  is  apt  to  be  too  thick  or  heavy. 

Professor  Morris'  books  on  phrasing  well  merit  the  atten- 
tion of  students  of  all  systems.  Stenographers  who  wish  to 
know  their  business  well,  and  keep  abreast  the  times,  will 
subscribe  for  two  or  three  of  the  best  periodicals  devoted  to 
their  profession.  It  is  suggested  that  students  in  want  of 
material  apply  to  the  dealer,  from  whon  this  book  was 
obtained  for  information  and  prices. 

PHRASES. 

452.  After-many-inquiries  after-you-have-been  after-the- 
matter  after-the-question    bad-account   can-you-make   dif- 
ferent-varieties   during-the-year     ever-since-you-have-been 
express-purpose  for-another-purpose  for-my-part  may-their 
much-as-I-desire  much-as-we-desire  much-pleased  no-hurry- 
about    promissory-note    quite -probable    quite-sure    quite- 
sure-there-are    real-estate-broker   remember-that-we   took- 
possession     very-certain    very-certain-about-it    very-good- 
man    very-good-quality    very-necessary    we-have-no-objec- 
tions  we-hope-that-you-can  -we-will-name-you. 

453.  EXERCISE  41. 

DO  SOME  PRACTICAL  WORK  FOR  SOME  BUSINESS  MAN. 
From  "One  Hundred   Valuable  Suggestions  to  Short-Hand 

Students." — To  be  phrased.    ~" 

The  best  kind  of  practice  the  student  can  have,  after  he 
has  learned  the  principles,  is  that  which  approaches  most 
nearly'  to  the  kind  of  work  he  will  be  obliged  to  do  in  actual 
reporting.  Business  men,  in  fact,  prefer  those  who"  have 
had  some  practical  experience,  and  in  order  to  be  able  to 
satisfy  them  that  you  are  not  a  mere  beginner/"  you  should 
secure  some  actual  practice  just  for  the  experience  it  will 
give.  Go  to  some  business  man  who  has  more  (1)  or  less 
correspondence,  and  offer  to  take  all  his  letters  for  awhile 
without  wages.  You  can  well  afford  to  do  this.'  In  the  first 
place,  you  would  be  fitting  yourself  for  the  actual  work  in 


240  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SlfORT-HAXD. 


the  most  thorough  and  practical  manner  possible/'  If  your 
work  is  satisfactory,  and  you  ought  not  to  expect  a  paying 
position  until  it  is,  it  would  be  much'"  easier  to  secure  a 
situation,  and  to  fill  it  acceptably,  than  you  might  otherwise 
hope  to  do.  Another  advantage  that  often  arises  (2)  from 
such  a  course  is  in  causing  the  man  for  whom  you  work  to 
learn  to  appreciate  the  advantages  of  short-hand/  and  in 
this  way,  cause  a  demand  for  your  own  employment,  or  for 
that  of  some  other  short-hand  writer/'  (215^-'>-30— 1:30.) 


LESSON  XLII. 
RULES  FOR  PHRASING. 

454.  KEY.  1.  (Simple  phrases.)  Shall-have  have-been 
saves-time  good-men  many-good-men  men-of-action  some- 
men-of-nerve  begin-immediately.  2.  (Simple  sentence.) 
The-old-gentleman,  who-was-president  (of-the)  First-Nation- 
al-Bank,  immediately  gave-the-money  to-the  manager  (of -the) 
Pennsylvania-Railroad-Company,  who-was-standing  in-tlie 
bank-parlor  at-the-time.  8.  (Omitted  consonants.)  Most- 
likv'ly  fishing-tackle  general-breakdown  Trans-continental* 
Railway-Co.  4.  (Omitted  words.)  Promise-to-pay  by-the- 
law-ol-the-survival-of-the-fittest  day-of-the-month  change- 
of-the-weather  what-is-your-business  where-do-you-reside. 
5.  (Lengthened  outlines.)  They-still  men's-strength  short- 
stop served-his-time  per-minute  serve-their-purpose  jury- 
man gentlemen-of-the-jury  per-annum.  6.  (Lengthened 
phrases.)  Shall-not-have  some-one-that  was-not-keeping 
for-there-came  may-there-be  their-own-safety  may-it-be. 
7  (Variable  letters;  Coin  and  Con.)  This-will-make  shall- 
merely  store-door  do-you-wish  such-as-will-not  you-should- 
not-condemn  you-will-contrive  they-may-well-complain. 
8.  (Position  words.)  For-no-time  in-every-part  the-samc- 
raan  I-shall-sue-him  many-things  love-him.  9.  (Position 
j  words  vocalized.)  In-any-even t  in-no-event  it-is-for-me 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  S41 

it-is-my-own-copy  rather-than-hope  for-some-men.  10.  (Con- 
tracted phrases.)  In-reply-to  takes-us  will-there-be  at-first 
it-\\  ill-not  at-all  which-are  in-regard-to. 

PHRASES.  11.  Trust-that-you-will  venture-to-say  we-may- 
have  we-tbink-there-is  we-will-order  day-of- the- week  rnust- 
at-knowledge.  12.  Must-also  must-always  obliged-to-give 
subject-to-my-order  two-or-three-times  we-have-no-knowl- 
edge-of-the-matter.  13.  Able-to-collect  able-to-realize  ac- 
cording-to-the-letter  according-to-the-instruction  any-kind- 
of-business  at-the-same-rate.  14.  We-want-to-know  cer- 
tain-class-of -goods  I-am-a\vare-of-the-fact  just-received- 
your-letter-of-recommendation  as-per-my-order.  15.  Ac- 
cording-to-agreerueut  according-to-his-agreement  accord- 
ing-to-contract  receive-their-letter  by-some-other-nrm 
within-a-day-or-so. 

455.  The  student  has  already,  by  the  faculty  of  imitation, 
learned  in  a  general  way  how  to  connect  words  together  into 
phrases.  Specific  rules  are  needed,  however,  as  a  safe  guide 
to  good  practice.  The  learner,  who  is  now  advanced,  will 
apprehend  the  meaning,  and  understand  the  application  of 
such  rules.  But  it  cannot  be  said  that  the  student  has  mas- 
tered this  or  any  other  subject  until  the  underlying  principle 
has  been  grasped.  This,  in  an  incidental  way,  we  shall  aim 
to  state.  An  elaborate  treatise  will  not,  of  course,  be  looked 
for  within  the  limits  of  a  single  lesson.  Phrasing  is  a  science 
of  itself.  It  has  been  characterized  as  an  "Art  within  an 
art."  It  bears  a  similar  relation  to  the  broad  subject  of 
Short-hand,  that  Algebra  does  to  the  general  subject  of 
Mathematics,  for  instance,  or  that  State  government  in  our 
country  sustains  to  the  National.  .To  short-hand  it  is  the 
linishing  touch,  a  kind  of  internal  perfection.  By  it  speed  is 
increased,  and  legibility  added  to. 

That  there  is  a  gain  in  joining  words  to  some  extent  is  ad- 
mitted on  all  sides.  It  is  true,  however,  that  there  exists  a 
diversity  of  opinion  amongst  the  best  writers  and  teachers 
touching  the  extent  to  which  phrase-writing  can  profitably 
be  carried.  The  objectors  point  to  the  example  of  many  old 


243  REPORT 7.\O  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

stenographers,  experience-i  and  successful  in  their  profes- 
sion, who  phrase  but  little.  These  facts  carry  a  certain 
force;  they  are  valuable  evidence  of  at  least  one  of  the  possi- 
bilities of  the  art,  showing  what  can  be  done  with  simple 
short-hand,  unstrenglhcned  by  the  phrase.  When  short-hand 
was  learned  by  our  earlier  reporters,  phrasing  was  a  new 
thing,  and  its  correct  use  unknown.  Most  of  the  successful 
stenographers  of  to-day  employ  phrasing  habl.^ally,  and 
connect  words  according  to  certain  well  settled  rutes. 

The  statement  needs  no  proof  that  words  can  be  phrased 
in  less  time  than  they  can  be  written  separately.  Every 
pen-lifting  costs  nearly  half  a  second,  or  the  loss  of  a  word. 
The  obvious  advantage  of  joining  is  proved  by  the  universal 
custom  of  connecting  together  all  letters  of  each  word  when 
writing  long-hand.  Copy  this  sentence,  writing  each  letter 
separately:  "  T-h-i-s  i-s  a  s-l-o-w  w-a-y  o-f  w-r-i-t-i-n-g  " 

Why,  then,  ought  not  an  entire  discourse  to  be  reported 
without  a  single  break,  or  lifting  of  the  pen?  As  a  means  of 
getting  hold  of  our  subject,  we  will  assume  that  all  words  are 
to  bz  joined  together  when  short-hand  notes  are  taken.  The 
exceptions  to  this  broad  rule  we  sum  up  as  follows: 

436.  1.  SENTENCES.  Phrasing  is  designed  partly  as  an 
aid  to  legibility,  which  is  a  matter  of  no  less  importance  than 
speed  itself.  But  joining  words  together  would  be  a  draw- 
back to  legibility,  unless  some  kind  of  correspondence  be- 
tween the  manner  of  phrasing  and  the  structure  of  language 
were  expressed  by  the  short-hand  notes  themselves.  To 
illustrate,  at  the  close  of  a  sentence  the  speaker  comes  to  a 
full  stop.  He  has  expressed  a  complete  thought.  There  is 
here,  as  there  should  be,  a  corresponding  break  in  the  phrase. 
In  short-hand  the  words  of  two  separate  sentences  should 
never  be  written  connectedly.  Hence  it  would  be  improper  to 
express  the  two  sentences,  "They-make-money.-They-love-it," 

by  the  connected  phrase,  (s-^—^-\_*    .*          Likewise  the 


expression,     Jl  "He-is-done.-He-may-go,"    is    wrong. 


944  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

457.  SUBJECT  AND  PRFDICATE.     It  is  well  established 
that  the  subject  of  a  sentence  and  its  verb  should  not  be 
joined.    The  subject  and  its  modifiers  form  a  complete  part, 
or  member  of  the  sentence,  as  do  also  the  verb  and  its  modi- 
fiers.   For  this  reason  they  should  be  kept  separate.    The 
two  words,  for  example,  composing  the  sentence,  "Dogs 
bark,"  should  under  no  circumstances  be  connected.    A  pro- 
noun, on  the  contrary,  is  always  joined  to  its  verb,  as  I-do, 
they-make,  we-have.    Ambiguity  would  result  not  infrequent- 
ly from  the  practice  of  joining  nouns  and  their  verbs,  as,  for 

example,  the  character,  I       clocks-tick,  could  also  be 

read,  clock-stick. 

458.  COMPOUND  SUBJECT.    In  the  sentence  "Corn,  beans 
and  potatoes  are  raised  in  abundance,"  the  three  words  corn, 
beans  and  potatoes,  of  which  the  subject  is  composed,  should 
not  be  connected.  The  same  rule  applies  to  the  compound  pre- 
dicate, as  in  the  sentence,"  The  patriot  soldier  fought,  bled, 
and  died  for  his  country,"  the  verbs  fought,  bled,  and  died, 
are  written  separately. 

459.  RELATED  WORDS.    Take  the  sentence  "Having  raised 
another  army,  the  general  hastened  to  relieve. the  city";  here  the 
words  "army  the  general",  should  not  be  connected,  for  the 
important  reason  that  there  is  no  gramatical  relation  be- 
tween army  and  t he.    For  the  same  reason,  chairs,  baskets,  and 
knives,  should  not  be  phrased  in  the  sentence,  "He  keeps 
chairs,  baskets,  and  knives  for  sale."    The  rule  is  that  two  or 
more  words,  not  sustaining  some  relation  of  government 
or  modification,  should  not  be  connected  together. 

460.  LENGTH.'  Experience  shows  that  writing  long  phrases 
occasions  loss  instead  of  gain  in  time.    The  reason  is  that 
when  the  pen  is  applied  to  the  paper  the  hand,  wrist  and 
forearm  are  so  fixed,  or  stationed,  that  it  is  very  inconven- 
ient to  move  the  pen  along  more  than  one  or  two  inches  of 
space  without  re-stationing  the  hand  and  arm.      Indeed,  for 
most  persons  it  is  inconvenient  to  write  a  character  much 
more  than  half  an  inch  in  length.    An  attempt  to  copy  the 


BEPORTiyG  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


245 


following  joined  letters  without  pausing,  will  serve   more   J 
forcibly  to  impress  this  truth: 

veuience  would  suggest  that  this  combination  be  broken  in- 
to three  equal  parts,  of  which  one  would  be  ^_^  —  tf^^  —  \__p 
Most  persons  have  experienced  this  inconvience  when  writ- 
ing lengthy  words  in  long-hand.  Long  phrases  are  a  pos- 
itive drawback. 
The  difficulty  in  executing  them  may  be  illustrated  by  the 

phrase  ~"  v~'  ^  —  ^  —  ^     ^_^—^_^  —  v^x^  He-kept- 

coming-and-going-and-going-and-coming-many  -many-years. 

Young  reporters  sometimes  go  to  the  absurd  extreme  of 
writing  as  many  words  in  a  single  phrase  as  can  be  made 
hang  together.  An  illustration  is  found  in  the  following  scn- 
tance  of  thirty-nine  words,  which  it  is  possible  to  write 
connectedly:  I-think-it-is-quite-likely-that-we-will-leave-for- 
America  -  before  -  very  -  many  -  more-months-and-you-will-then- 
havc-no-difficulty-whatever-in-getting-all  -  the  -  knowledge  •  you  - 
may-want-in-regard-to-that-wonderful-land. 

461.  ANGULARITY.     Inconvenient  joinings,  also  those  pro- 
ducing obtuse  or  insufficient  angles,  are  not  permissible.  On 
this  account  the  following  expressions  cannot  be  phrased: 
Do-not  tell,  pay  up,  than  they,  one  people,  construction  train, 
great  expense,  do-not  go,  capital  gossip,  upon-his  honor,  find 
it,  have-not  found. 

462.  CONSONANT  POSITION.     To  some  extent  phrasing  is 
limited  by  the  requirements  of  consonant  position.    Illustra- 

tior   :      ^  __  •          Have-no-ttme  should  be  phrased    always 


while  ^_      l^-x   Have  any-time  sometimes  cannot  be; 
in-every-part,         }        in-every  particular;   lrv^~^  the-same- 

*•* 


man,    5~N 


the-same  men;   ^  I-shall-sue-him, 


246  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

s— P 

I-shall  see-him;  ^-\_^  many  things,  ^~^_xs^p  many- 
languages.  The  point  here  is  that  the  phrase  must  some- 
times be  broken  in  order  that  first  and  third  position  worus 
may  be  in  their  place,  thus  relieving  the  notes  from  ambi- 
guity. Whether  a  given  word  may,  for  the  sake  of  a  phi 
be  written  out  of  position,  is  a  question  purely  of  context  and 
circumstances.  The  reporter  who  pays  attention  to  what  he 
is  writing,  can  tell  in  a  moment  whether  legibility  demands 
the  phrase  to  be  broken  on  account  of  a  position  word.  He 
must  exercise  common  sense  and  judgment.  Since  phra.ses 
are  broken  on  account  of  first  and  third  position  words,  it  is 
for  that  very  reason  never  necessary  to  do  so  on  account  of 
any  second  position  word.  All  connected  words  are  pre- 
sumed to  belong  on  the  line,  unless  the  requirements  of  sense 
plainly  indicate  otherwise.  In  L  8  it  would,  under  some 
circumstances,  become  necessary  to  break  the  connection,  if 
in  the  first  phrase  any  occurred  in  the  place  of  no,  or  partic- 
ular in  the  place  of  part;  man  in  place  of  men;  see  in  place 
of  sue;  language  in  place  of  things;  or  me  in  place  of  him. 

463.  UNUSUAL    WORDS.     Words    not    frequently    used 
are  written  disconnectedly.    For  example,  the  expressions, 
mucilage  bottle,  cylindrical  column,  habitual  drunkard,  mtrry 
girls,  should  not  be  phrased.    A  very  few  common  short 
words,  such  as  pronouns,  prepositions,  and  conjunctions,  may 
be  attached  to  unusual  words,  as  in  the-middling,  the-indubit- 
able,  or-California,  was-revised. 

ADVANTAGES. 

464.  SPEED.    The  gain  in  speed, Resulting  from  the  dimin- 
ished number  of  pen-liftings,  is  obvious.    Write  the  phnt>«; 
"save-time"  rapidly  for  thirty  seconds;  then  write  the  two 
words  separately  as  often  as  you  can  in  the  same  length  of 
time.    The  experiment  will  show  the  phrase  written  six  or 
eight  more  times  in  the  first  trial,  which  is  equivalent  to  a 
gain  of  twenty-five  or  thirty  words  in  one  minute. 

465.  LEGIBILITY.    Since  the  grammatical  structure  of  the 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD.  247 

sentence  is  shown  in  large  part  by  the  phraseological  group- 
ing of  the  words,  ease  in  reading  the  notes  is  thereby  in- 
creased to  no  small  extent.  Referring  to  L  2,  the  first  three 
words,  the-old-gentleman,  are  phrased,  because  the  and  old 
are  both  modifiers  of  gentleman.  All  the  words  of  the  clause, 
who-was-president  of-the  First- National-Bank,  would  natur- 
ally be  connected  together,  but  it  is  broken  into  two  on  ac- 
count of  length,  and  broken  in  such  a  manner  that  of-lhe 
is  expressed  by  the  juxtaposition  of  the  two  phrases.  On 
account  of  angle  immediately  cannot  be  joined  to  gave. 
Gave-the-money  is  a  good  phrase,  and  it  is  customary,  where 
convenient,  to  connect  a  transitive  verb  and  its  object.  The 
propriety  of  joining  words  and  their  modifiers  is  illustrated 
by  the  phrases  good-men,  men-of-aclion,  etc.,  L  1.  Phrasing 
enables  the  reader  to  see  at  a  glance  which  words  are 
mutually  dependent,  and  which  are  not. 

466.  ACCURACY.  Phrasing  makes  time  by  saving  time. 
By  means  of  it  the  writer  gains  more  leisure  in  which  to  form 
the  characters  with  greater  precision  and  skill,  thus  adding 
both  to  the  beauty  and  legibility  of  his  notes. 

•167.  ABBREVIATION.  In  phrasing,  many  single  letters 
and  even  words  are  omitted.  See  most-likely,  promise-to-pay, 
etc.,  Ls  3  and  4.  These  phrases  are  perfectly  legible;  but  it 
is  evident  that  this  legibility  would  be  impaired  by  such 
abbreviation,  if  the  words  composing  such  phrases  were  writ- 
ten disconnectedly.  A  phrase  may  be  abbreviated  safely, 
for  the  same  reason  that  a  long  word,  containing  a  good 
number  of  consonants,  may  be  abbreviated;  in  each  case  an 
abundance  of  material  remains  to  enable  the  reader  to  get 
at  the  meaning  easily.  This  is  an  important  point;  it  is 
giving  to  short-hand,  by  means  of  phrasing,  the  advantage 
of  the  universal  habit,  in  coloqual  discourse,  of  clipping 
some  words  and  merging  others,  when  they  occur  in  ex- 
pressions that  are  worn  and  familiar.  Ls  11-15. 

468.  COMPACTNESS.  The  fact  that  in  the  phrase  the 
words  are  drawn  into  the  briefest  compass,  renders  it  possible 
for  the  eye  to  take  them  all  in  at  a  glance;  notes  can  then  be 


I 

C4S  R  EPOR  TING  STYLE  OF  SHOE  T-ffA  .V7). 

read  more  quickly  than  when  strung  out  over  two  or  three 
times  the  space.  Illustrations:  We-have-long-been: 

V*_      (^*~/        ^  better,  \J        \  ;  that-it-m:iy-not-U>- 
as- well-as:         |      X_N  \        0      f~      0  or, 

469.  EXPEDIENTS.    Many  v-ord-fcrms  are  lengthened,  in 
order  that  they  may  be  joined  m  cert^n  phrases,  as  t/iey-xtill, 
men's-strength.    L  5.    Certain  phrase-signs,  also,  are  written 
by  longer  forms,  in  order  to  render  it  practicable  for  more 
words  to  be  joined,  as  in  shall-not-have,  some-one-that,  etc. 
L  6.    In  these  phrases  the  n-hook  cannot  be  used  for  not, 
one,  or  own;  nor,  on  account  of  angularity,  can  the  lengthen- 
ing or  halving  principles  be  used  \nfor-there-came,  may-it-be, 
etc.    The  variable  letters,  I,  r,  sh,  are  struck  in  either  direc- 
tion in  phrases,  as  angularity  may  require,  as  in  this-will- 
make,  do-you-wish.    L  7.    Words  beginning  with  com  and 
con,  except  a  few  very  frequent  ones,  are  disjoined  from  the 
one  just  preceding,  as  in  you-should-not  condemn.    L  7. 

Position  words  are  sometimes  vocalized  when  occurring  in 
phrases.  This  requires  less  time  than  breaking  the  phi  UM\ 
(See  L  9.)  The  principle  of  contracting  outlines  by  menus 
of  hooks,  circles,  loops,  lengthening,  halving,  etc.,  is  also 
employed  to  some  extent  in  writing  such  phrases  as  in-rcply- 

to,  will-there-be,  it-will-not.    L  10. 

• 

470.  RULES. 

1.  Do  not  construct  phrases  inconveniently  long,  or  that 
extend  more  than  two  spaces  below  the  line. 

2.  Avoid  joinings  that  are  unangular;  also  difficult  ones, 

*  r 

as  be-not-elected,  correctly  written  (. — .  A  difficult  join- 
ing requires  more  time  than  breaking  the  phrase.  Adverbs 
ending  in  ly  are  rarely  joined  to  following  words. 

3.  Words  beginning  with  com  and  con  are  rarely  attached 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


to  preceding  words.    The  fact  of  separation  indicates  the 
prefix,  which  for  this  reason  need  not  be  written. 

4.  A  word  may  occasionally  be  written  by  a  longer  out- 
line, if  this  is  necessary  to  render  it  phraseable*    See  L  5. 

5.  Words  only  that  are  comparatively  common  should  be 
joined  together.    Unusual  words  are  written  disconnectedly. 

6.  Never  join  two  words  that  are  separated  by  a  mark  of 
punctuation,  nor  any  set  of  words  not  mutually  inter-de- 
pendent, or  grammatically  related. 

7.  As  far  as  practicable  connect  together  a  pronoun  and 
its  verb;  a  modifying  word  or  phrase,  and  the  word  modified; 
prepositions  and  the  words  they  govern;  verbs  and  their 
objects;  conjunctions  and  the  clauses  they  introduce. 

8.  The  artistic  writer,  whose  characters  are  small  and 
well  formed,  may  adopt  more  lengthy  phrases  than  writers 
lacking  these  qualifications. 

9.  An  assemblage  of  words  making  a  suitable  phrase 
should  invariably  be  written  together;  not  phrased  at  one  time, 
and  separated  at  another. 

10.  The  first  word  of  a  phrase,  called  the  leader,  is  usually 
given  its  proper  position;  but  exceptions  are    sometimes 
made  when  it  is  important  that  the  second  word  hold  its  own 
place,  as  in  -~ —  his-own,  .!!!!1._  give-out. 

11.  One,  then  and  own,  may  be  expressed  by  the  n-hook 
whenever  preceded  by  a  word  of  common  occurrence  to  which 
such  hook  may  be  joined  conveniently,  as  will-have-one,  bet- 
ter-then, my-own. 

12.  Of  may  be  expressed  by  the  f-hook  in  phrases  where 

the  tick  of  does  not  join  conveniently,  as  in  T      city -of -Bos- 
ton. 


in  P      cil 

J 


13.  As  a  rule  or  and  but  are  not  phrased,  but  may  be 
joined  when  there  is  no  possibility  of  conflict  with  a  or  and. 
His  is  not  commonly  joined  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase,  as 
his  business,  written  disconnectedly. 

14.  It  is  indispensable  tnat  tne  student  form  the  habit  of 


250  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND 

writing  the  words  connectedly,  always  within  the  limits 
above  specified.  This  habit  can  never  come  from  mere  r<  '<•/• 
ing,  or  even  study.  Much  actual  writing  is  ncaxsdry.  IV  r- 
haps  the  best  plan  would  be  to  copy  all  the  phrases  in  this 
book;  afterwards  taking  up  a  standard  phrase-book,  and 
systematically  writing  it  through  several  times. 

15.  The  advanced  writer  may  with  propriety  adopt  an 
abridged  outline  for  a  difficult  or  unusual  set  of  words, 
which  happens  to  be  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  particular 
report  he  is  making. 

PHRASES. 

471.  A-good-many-of-our    as-quick-as-possible    as-many- 
as-possible    cash-business    cash-trade    certain-of-their   cer- 
tain-of-your     certain-questions     dear-brother     dear-friend 
did-not-understand-the-matter  did-not-understand-it-so  did- 
not  -  undertake      extra -long     during-the-existence     extra- 
pains  necessary-delay    on-account-of-having  sometime-ago 
some-reason-for-this    special-order    spring-trade    sum-and- 
substance  understand-that -you  understund-that-we  we-are- 
anxious  we-are-anxiotis-to-have-you  we-are-always  we-are- 
aware  we-are-in-need  we-do-not-think-you-can. 

472.  EXERCISE  42. 
KEEP  YOUR  OWT*  COUNSEL. 

From  "One  Hundred  Valuable  Suggestions." — To  be  phrased. 
The  Stenographer,  like  everybody  else,  must,  in  a  certain 
sense,  be  a  machine.  This  arises  from  the  fact  that  in  many 
cases'  confidential  matter  of. the  greatest  importance  is  often 
dictated  to  him,  and  unless  he  exerts  the  utmost  care,  he  will 
be  apt,  inadvertently"  it  may  be,  to  betrays  knowledge  of 
his  employer's  affairs  to  those  who  would  take  advantage  of 
H  Again,  it  frequently'"  occurs  in  some  kinds  of  business 
thit  the  Stenographer  is  approached  for  the  special  purpose 
of  persuading  him  to  make  known  his  (1)  employer's  inten- 
tions or  plans.  Attempts  may  even  be  made  to  bribe  him  in 
order  to  secure  the  desired  information.  Aside  from  the 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  251 

moral  phase  of  the  question,  the  Stenographer  can,  by  no 
means,  afford  to  betray  his  employer's  secrets  to  others. 
Once  let  it  be"  proven  that  he  has  done  such  a  thin0  and  his 
prospects  as  a  reporter  will  be  ruined. 

Morally  it  is  wrong,  and  financially'"  it  is  a  losing  invest- 
ment. If  you  find  that  you  have  a  tendency  to  speak  oi 
things  pertaining  to  your  work  to  (2)  those  not  connected 
with  the  business,  it  would  be  well  to  form  the  habit  of 
rigidly  refusing  to  speak  of  your  employer's'  affairs  at  all. 
By  so  doing  there  is  no  risk  of  being  surprised  into  state- 
ments which  may  afterwards  be  regretted/' 

(226—2:30—1:30.) 


LESSON 

AMANUENSIS  REPORTING. 

473.  As  a  prerequisite  to  success  in  this  field,  a  thorough 
education  is  demanded  in  the  common  English  branches,  as 
arithmetic,  orthography,  grammar,  and  business  forms. 
Good  penmanship,  and  a  knowledge  of  type-writing,  book- 
keeping, and  in  rare  cases  telegraphy,  Volapuk,  and  some  of 
the  modern  languages,  are  also  valuable. 

Various  degrees  of  speed,  ranging  from  90  to  150  words 
per  minute,  are  required.  As  such  secretary,  it  becomes 
one's  duty  to  write  letters,  telegrams,  contracts,  agreements, 
newspaper  articles,  briefs,  editorials,  etc.,  at  the  dictation  of 
his  employer,' or  whoever  has  the  business  management,  and 
afterwards  transcribe  and  deliver  the  same.  A  better  under- 
standing of  the  secretary's  duties  may  be  gained  from  a  con- 
sideration of  the  relations  existing  between  him  and  his 
employer.  It  is  much  more  severe  mental  work  to  rapidly 
indite  important  business  lettei-s,  than  to  slowly  write  them 
out.  Dictating  is  iii  fact  as  much  an  accomplishment  as  re- 
porting. Perfect  quiet,  and  security  from  all  disturbance, 
are  essential  in  the  work  of  dictating  letters  and  papers  of 
I  


8  52  BEPOB  TINO  STYLE  OF  8HOR  T-HAND. 

this  kind.  Hence  the  stenographer,  to  the  fullest  extent 
possible,  should  refrain  from  everything  that  may  perplex  or 
disconcert  the  reflections  of  his  superior.  He  should  not 
only  maintain  quiet,  but  be  prepared  the  moment  called  upon 
to  read  what  he  has  written,  and  remain  in  constant  readi- 
ness to  record  every  word  spoken.  He  should  also  abstain 
from  all  show  of  nervousness  during  the  occasional  intervals 
in  the  dictation. 

When  the  matter  in  hand  is  entirely  finished,  he  may  ask 
for  the  spelling  of  proper  names,  insert  words  which  he  failed 
to  hear  or  record,  and  make  the  necessary  corrections.  Ap- 
parent grammatical  and  verbal  errors  need  not  be  called  up, 
but  should  be  corrected  by  himself  when  the  transcript  is 
made. 

KEY. 

474.  PHKASES.     1.     Additional-expenses     bona-fide    in- 
witness-whereof    picase-exchange     habeas-corpus     on-the- 
part-of-plaintiff  to-wit   to-such-an-extent.    2.    Abstract-of- 
title    affidavit-of-plaintiff    may-it-please-the-court     may-it- 
please-your-honor  are-you-able-to-state-whether-or-not  was- 
there-anything-said    by-the-court    called-and-sworn    docu- 
mentary-evidence.   8.    Bank-bill   bank-note    bank-account 
much-quicker-than   as-per-your-letter  acknowledge-receipt- 
of-your-letter.    4.    Balance-sheet   on-the-north-side  that-is- 
to-say  just-as-certain  let-us-be-satisfied  take-notes  burden- 
of -proof .    Translate  Ls  6  to  15  inclusive. 

PHRASES. 

475.  About-as-many-as    above-cost    accept-out    »ecppt- 
them  accept-my-thanks  answering-your-letter  a-short-tinit'- 
ago  a-short-time-since  by-returh-mail  contents-of-my-letter 
express-order  extra-order  J-presume-matters-will  I-received- 
your-letter    I-regret- very-much    my-last-order    pay -master 
please-be-kind-enough  please-let-us-know-whether  receivfd- 
his-letter  received-my-letter   received-our-letter  with-this- 
order  you-are-hereby. 


Messrs.  Stone  &  Ordean,  Duluth,  Minn. 


V     <-  v     < 


\ 


[9  1/7"       Glidden,  Grigga  &  Co. 

Mr.  T.  J.  Dowd,  Hastings,  Neb. 


'  L 


\_.  .  1       x" 

\  V 


6    — 


1 


C 


^ 


254  KEPOKTIXG  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAKD. 

476.  EXERCISE  43. 

GEO.  W.  CRANE  &  Co., 

Blank  Book  Manufacturers,  Printers  and-Binders, 

TOPEKA,  KAN.,  March  20,  1884/ 
MR.  A.  B.,  Los  Angeles,  Cal.  • 
Dear-Sir: — The-Dockets  sent  you  are-the  kind  which-are 
in-general  use  in-this-city.  The-full  printed  form  made  it 
necessary  in-a-great-many-cases  to  transfer  the-record"  to- 
the  back  of-the  book.  This-is  obviated  in-the  form  which 
we  send  you,  and-also  in-the"'  Justice's  Guide  which  we  en- 
close, and-which  will  give  the  Justice  the-forra  of  entry  of 
any  case  that-may-come  (1)  before-him.  We- will  exchange 
the-Docket  if-you-wish,  but  think  your  Justice  will-find  the- 
form  sent'  the  more  convenient.  Yours-very-truly, 

CRANE  &  Co. 

477.  ST.-PAUL,  MINN.,  Nov.  8, 1883. 
MESSRS.  A.  Ruiz  &  SONS/'  Malaga,  Spain. 

Gentlemen: — Referring  to-your  esteemed  favor  of-the  21st 
ult.,  we  wish  to  say,  that-when'"  you-are  ready  to  quote 
prices  on-your  brands  of  layer  raisins,  we  would-be  pleased 
to-receive  quotations,  (2)  with-the  view  of-placing  our  fall 
arid-winter  order  with-you.  We  would  also  kindly  request 
you  to'  inform  us  whether  you  have  any  arrangements  with 
any  line  of  steamers  running  from -your  port  to  New- York" 
or  Baltimore,  and- what  rates  of  freights  you-can  quote  us; 
also,  what-the  insurance  and-other  expenses  connected'" 
with-a  shipment  of  say  5,000  or  10,000  boxes  would-be.  Any- 
other  (3)  information  that-you-can  give  us,  that-you-think 
would-be  valuable  for-us,  will-be  appreciated/  Awaiting 
your  reply,  we-are  Very-truly-yours, 

GLIDDEN,  GBIGGS  &  Co. 

(To  be  phrased.) 

478.  AUGUSTA,  GEORGIA,  July  15,  1886." 
MESSRS.  DEVINNT  &  Co.,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Dear  Sirs: — Messrs.  J.  Sumraerville  &  Co.,  of  your  city, 
have  made  certain'"  offers  to  me  which  promise  great  pecun- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  255 

iary  profit  provided  they  are  stable;  but  which,  on  the  con- 
trary, would  involve  (4)  me  in.  heavy  responsibilities  if  iry 
correspondents  failed  to  meet  their  engagements. 

•  As  I  have  not  the  pleasure  of'  knowing  the  gentlemen 
named,  it  is  essential  that  I  should  be  on  my  guard.  To  you, 
therefore,  I  apply  in"  this  difficulty;  and  should  esteem  it  a 
great  favor  if  you  would  acquaint  me,  so  far  as  lies  in  your 
power/'7  with  information  respecting  the  character  and 
means  of  this  firm. 

The  readiness  with  which  you  have  complied  with  my  (5) 
requests  leads  me  to  hope  that  you  will  still  further  oblige 
me  on  this  particular  occasion;  I  need  scarcely  to  say  that 
you'  may  count  on  my  discretion  in  keeping  profoundly 
secret  such  information  as  you  may  kindly  offer.  I  am, 
gentlemen/'  Yours  respectfully, 

A.  L.  FARMER. 
(454—5:30—3.) 


LESSON  XLIV. 

AMANUENSIS  REPORTING,   (CONTINUED). 

479.  The  thoughtful  student  need  not  be  told  that,  since 
all  the  plans ^nd  secrets  of  his  employer's  business  must  be 
made  known  to  the  correspondence  clerk,  the  most  implicit 
confidence  is  reposed  in  him,  and  loyalty,  integrity,  and  de- 
votion to  business  are  presumed  by  the  relationship  estab- 
lished. He  should  not  only  be  so  discreet  as  not  to  divulge 
office  secrets,  or  betray  implied  confidence,  but  he  should 
show  plainly  by  his  conduct  that  he  is  faithful  to  his  employ- 
ers, and  interested  in  their  behalf. 

No  matter  how  accomplished  a  private  secretary  may  be, 

'    his  services  will  not  be  sought,  if  he  has  not  cultivated  habits 

of  prudence,  and  shown  himself  to  be  safe  and  trustworthy. 

In  talcing  difficult  matter  at  dictation,  in  which  corrections 

and  interlineations  are  afterwards  to  be  made,  it  is  well  to 

leave  the  alternate  lines  blank  for  this  purpose.    Letter 

j   books  should  be  paged,  and  evei-y  letter  indexed  in  a  separate 


856  REPORTING  STYLE  OFzSHORT-HAND. 

book  in  such  a  manner  that  it  can  be  quickly  referred  to 
afterwards. 

In  amanuensis  work  the  name  and  address  of  correspond- 
ents should,  as  a  rule,  be  written  in  long-hand. 

KEY. 

480.  PHRASES.    1.    As-a-matter-of -necessity  as-a-matter- 
of-course     in-order-to-have      it-is-no-doubt     postal-service 
enclosed-letter.    2.  I-am-in-receipt-of-your-favor  in-my-last- 
letter    your-obedient-servant     your-statement    we-will-not 
my-instructions   wholesale-store.    8.    Aceording-to-his-con- 
tract     as-per-his-order     confidential-communication     esti- 
mated-cost    estimated- weight    I-may-be-there    monthly-re- 
port.   4.  Postal-card  postage-stamp  we-al \vays-like-to-ha\r 
within -a-week-or-two   your-most-obedient-servant  just-say- 
so  our-instructions.    Translate  Ls  6  tc  15  inclusive. 

PHRASES- 

481.  According-(to)-my-agreement          ^ording-(to)-your- 
contract  account-book   another-class-(oij-goods  at-any-cost 
east-bound-shipments  I-shall-be-pleased  just-received-your- 
communication   letter-press  please-order   please-write  we- 
answer  we-will-forward-you   what-have-you-to-offer  wht>n- 
ever-you-are-ready    will-be-charged    will-be-collected    will- 
be-marked   will-be-expressed   will-you-please-acknowledge- 
receipt  your-loss  your-risk  your-order  your-humble-servant. 

482.  EXERCISE  44. 

OUR  HOME  ON-THE  HILLSIDE, 

DANSVILLE,  LIVINGSTON  Co.,  NEW- YORK,  March  1, 1884. 
ISAAC  BENNETT,  ESQ./  Carrollton,  111. 
My -Dear- Sir:— Our  mutual-friend,  Mr. -Peters,  who-is  at- 
present  in-the  employ  of  Our"  Home  on-the  Hillside,  as  one 
of-its  reporting  secretaries,  has  handed  me  your-letter  of 
Feb.  20/// wherein  you  express  a-desire  to-have  my  testimony 
in-respect-to  stenographic  writing.    It  gives  me  great  pleas- 
ure (1)  to  say  to-you,  that  for  twenty-six  years  I-have-had 
young-men-and-women  in-my-employment'  as  stenograph- 


Plate  44- 


L, 


.  C    '    V 


I     <5-N 


r 


.4  too  DeBemales,  New  York  City. 
'    19  C  "^ 


<L 


s^ 


\ 


r 


<r 


258  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

ers.  Such-is  my  estimate  of-the  value  of-the-art  of-short- 
hand,  that  1  would-have-it//  taught  in-all  our  graded- schools 
and-academies  throughout  the-land  to  young-men-and- 
women.  Taking7''7  all  our  institutions  into  account,  and-the 
wide  range  of  occupations  in-which  our  young-men  have  to(2) 
engage,  and-which-are  opening  to-our  young-women,  I 
would-rather  have  given  proficiency  in  stenography'  a<-a- 
part  of-a  young-man's  or-a  young-woman's  education,  than 
the-best  average  Collegiate77  accomplishment  which  any-of- 
our  Colleges  or  Universities  furnish  in-the  Latin  and-Greek 
languages.  It-is-not  simply'7'  as  scrit~s  for-others  that-this 
art  is-of  value;  for-it-is  of  quite  as-much  service  (3)  to-those- 
who  attain  it  in-their-own  private  affairs.  Wh;  in  excellent 
opportunity  it  furnishes  to-one7  who-has-it  at-hand  to-make 
memoranda  of  things  seen  and  heard,  and-thus  furnishing 
him77  with-the-means  of  fastening  in-his  mind,  and-Uaving 
at-liis  service,  most  useful  information!  I-have-had77'  on-an 
average  for  twenty-five  y«ars,  not-less-than  three  shori  -hand 
writers  in  constant  use;  (4)  and  I-do-not-know  of  an?  who, 
after  my  training,  have-not  secured  good  positions,  and-kt-pt7 
them,  and-obtained  entirely  satisfactory  compensation. 
Assuring  you  that-I-am  in-the  fullest  sense  a  believer77  in- 
the-worth  of-the-art  as-a  means  of  added  usefulness  in-what- 
ever profession  or  calling  any-person  may-be777  engaged, 
and  wishing  you  all-success  in-your  pursuit  of-it,  I-remain, 
Yours  faithfully, 

JAMES  C.  JACKSO*.  (5) 
(365— &—:>.) 
(To  be  phrased.) 

488.  NEW  YORK,  July  llth,  1886. 

W.  W.  GRIFFITH,  ESQ.,  Memphis,  Tenn. 
Dear  Sir: — We  regret7  exceedingly  the  non-delivery  of 
your  esteemed  order,  and  the  inconvenience  and  disappoint- 
ment occasioned  you  thereby.  We  can  assure  you,77  how- 
ever, that  we  are  in  no  way  responsible  for  the  delay;  but 
that,  on  the  contrary,  we  have  used777  evevy  effort  to  secure 
the  prompt  execution  and  despatch  of  the  .rder. 


''SPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  259 


It  happens,  unfortunately  for  us,  that  just  at  (1)  tL.;  pi'esent 
moment  the  manufacturers  are  overwhelmed  with  business; 
and,  in  a  juncture  such  as  this,  there  is  no  help'  for  it  but  to 
wait  patiently  the  execution  in  due  course  of  the  orders  sent. 

With  the  hope,  however/'  of  prevailing  on  the  manufac- 
turer in  this  particular  instance  to  make  a  little  extra  exer- 
tion, we  have  written  him,  by  this'"  evening's  mail,  a  most 
urgent  letter;  and  we  feel  almost  certain  that  if  our  request 
can  be  complied  with  (2)  it  most  certainly  will  be.  As  soon 
as  we  receive  an  answer  we  will  write  or  telegraph  to  you 
such'  positive  information  as  may  prevent  further  disap- 
pointment. We  must  apologize  for  not  having  written  to 
you  previously;  but,  the"  truth  is,  we  ourselves  were  ex- 
pecting every  day  to  hear  some  tidings  of  the  order  which 
we  might  send"' you.  Regretting  the  trouble  and  annoyance 
to  which  you  have  been  put,  we  are, 

Yours  faithfully, 

J.  L.  KING  &  Co.  (3) 
(234—3—1:30.) 


LESSON  XLV. 

SPEECH   REPORTING. 

484.  A  verbatim  report  of  a  rapid  public  speaker  is  the 
greatest  achievement  of  the  stenographic  art.  There  are, 
however,  but  comparatively  few  speeches  of  which  reports 
are  wanted;  and  it  is  a  fortunate  fact  that  the  best  orators, 
whose  speeches  are  the  most  frequently  published,  are  the 
easiest,  also,  to  report.  But  it  is  very  rare  that  a  speech 
appears  well  in  print,  in  the  precise  language  in  which  it 
was  delivered.  A  certain  amount  of  tautology  and  repetition 
add  to  the  force  of  a  spoken  address,  which  in  a  printed  re- 
port must  be  discarded.  Many  phrases,  and  even  whole 
sentences,  may  oftentimes  be  profitably  omitted;  and  the 
rhetoric  of  an  extemporaneous  speech  can  generally  be  im- 
proved. These  matters  lie  clearly  within  the  scope  of  the 
stenographer's  duty;  but  the  best  plan  is  always,  when  pos- 


260  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD 

sible,  to  submit  to  the  speaker  himself  an  exact  copy,  written 
on  paper  with  a  broad  margin,  in  order  that  he  may  amend 
and  remodel  as  he  sees  fit. 

485.  KEY.  1.  As-it-is-the-characteristic  of  great  wits  to  say- 
much  in  few  words,  so-it-is  of-small  wits  to  talk  much  and 
say  nothing.    2.    It-is-when    you-come    close  to-a-man    in 
conversation  that-you  discover  what-his  real  abilities,  are 
8.    Speech-making  is-a  knack.    4.    Men  are  born  with  two 
eyes,    but-with-one   tongue,  in-order-that-they   should   see 
twice  as-much-as  they-say. 

Matt.  5: 3-13.    Translate  without  referring  to  key. 

486.  The  student  will  find  the  following  suggestions  of 
value,  whether  he  intends  making  a  business  of  this  branch 
of  reporting  or  not: 

Fully  prepare  yourself  before  the  speech  begins.  Obtain 
a  seat,  one  at  a  desk  if  possible,  within  easy  hearing  of  the 
speaker.  Have  yourself  amply  provided  with  suitable  writ- 
ing material.  Use  a  pen,  if  you  are  accustomed  to  one; 
otherwise,  have  a  number  of  sharpened  pencils  at  hand. 

No  matter  what  the  purpose  of  your  report  may  be,  make 
it  a  point,  as  far  as  you  are  able,  to  take  every  word  that  is 
uttered.  If  the  entire  speech  is  not  wanted,  you  can  prepare 
an  intelligent  synopsis  from  your  full  short-hand  notes;  but 
an  abridgement  made  in  short-hand  while  the  speech  is  being 
delivered,  is  by  no  means  so  satisfactory. 

Beginners  are  sometimes  obliged,  however,  before  they 
can  follow  a  rapid  speaker,  to  make  as  full  a  synopsis  as  they 
are  able,  recording  the  substance  only  of  what  is  said.  And 
it  is  commonly  the  case,  indeed,  that  only  partial  reports  of 
very  rapid  speakers  are  wanted. 

A  complete  report  of  a  speech  requires  that  many  things 
be  inserted,  which,  verbally,  are  not  a  part  of  the  address 
itself,  things  acted  rather  than  said.  The  manner  and  ap- 
pearance of  the  speaker  should  be  described;  also,  the  char- 
acter of  the  audience,  and  the  demonstrations  of  approval, 
or  otherwise,  with  which  the  speaker's  utterances  are  re- 
ceived. 


$late  43* 


SENTENCES. 


m/ 


-V> 
K-^-\       - 

c^  "),     L 


W  X  ^-v  ?  ----- 1.  » 

/  b 

®  JL     -v-     ^^>   ^— >    ""  *\  _^L 


TRANSLATE. 

Matt.  chap.  5.  ® 


us)    x 


•  r 


)  p. 


\ 


)  v, 


862  SfPOSTTJfO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

PHRASES. 

487.  FUi  Jier-consideration      good-as-ever      great-many- 
times     I-suppose-you-can     I-suppose-there-will-be     1-takc- 
great-pleasure     knowledge-of-the-subject     little-as-possible 
little-less  local-affairs    local-interest  paper-money    per-day 
per-dozen  pcr-week  personal-affairs  personal-expenses  per- 
sonal-knowledge   personal-property    relating-to-the-subject 
we- want-to-find. 

EXERCISE  45. 

488.  THE-PRESEXT  AGE. — CHANNING. 

1.  The  remarks  now-made  on  literature  might  be  extended 
to-the  tine  arts.  2.  In-these  we  see,  too,  the-tendency  to 
universality/  It-is-said,  that-the-spirit  of-the  great  artists 
has  died  out;  but-the  taste  for-their  works  is  spreading. 
8.  By-the"  improvements  of  engraving,  and-the  invention 
of  casts,  the-genius  of-the  great  masters  is  going  abroad. 
4.  Their  conceptions  are  no  longer  pent"'  up  in  galleries 
open  to  but  few,  but  meet  us  in-our  homes,  and  are-the 
household  pleasures  of  millions.  5.  Works  designed  for- 
the  (1)  halls  and  eyes  of  emperors,  popes,  and-nobles,  find 
their-way,  in  no  poor  representations,  in  humble  dwellings, 
and  sometimes  give-a  consciousness'  of  kindred  powers  to- 
the  child  of  poverty.  .  The-art  of  drawing,  which  lies  at- 
the  foundation  of-most  of-the  tine  arts/'  and-is  the-best 
education  of-the  eye  for  nature,  is  becoming  a-branch  of 
common  education,  and  in-some  countries  is  taught"'  in 
schools  to-which  all  classes  are  admitted.  7.  I-am  reminded 
by-this  remark  of-the-most  striking  feature  of-our  times, 
as  (2)  showing  its  tendency  to-universality,  and-that-is-thr 
unparalleled  and-constantly  accelerated  diffusion  of  educa- 
tion. This  greatest  of  arts,  as  yet  little'  understood,  is 
making  sure  progress,  because  its  principles  are  more-and- 
more  sought  in-the-common  nature  of  man;  and-the  great 
truth"  is  spreading,  that-every-man  has-a  right  to-its  aid. 

8.  Accordingly  education  is  becoming  the-work  of  nations. 

9.  Even  in-the  despotic"' governments  of  Europe  schools 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND.  263 


are  open  for-every  child  without  distinction  ;and-noo  only  the 
elements  of  reading  and  writing,  but  music  and-dra\ving  (3) 
are  taught,  and-a  foundation  is  laid  for  future  progress  in 
history,  geography,  and-physical  science.  10.  The-greatest 
minds  are  at  work  on  popular' education.  11.  The-revenues 
of  states  are  applied  most  liberally,  not  to-the  universities 
for-the  few,  but  to-the  common-schools.  12.  Undoubtedly 
mue'ii"  remains  to-be-done;  especially  a-new  rank  in  society 
is-to-be  given  to-the  teacher;  but  even  in-this-respect'"  a- 
revolution  has  commenced,  and-we-are  beginning  to-look 
on-the  guides  of-the  young  as-the  chief  benefactors  of-man- 
kind.  (4)  (369—4—3.) 


LESSON  XL VI. 

CONVENTION  REPORTING. 

489.  Stenographers  are  employed  to  report  the  proceed- 
ings of  various  deliberative  assemblies,  as  legislatures,  con- 
stitutional, and  the  more  important  political  conventions, 
and  professional  and  trades-men's  associations.    These  re- 
ports are  commonly  furnished    to    newspapers,   and   also 
frequently  published  in  book  form.    The  purposes  for  which 
they  are  made,  and  the  degrees  of  fullness  required  are  so 
various,  that  no  comprehensive  rules  can  be  laid  down  suffi- 
cient to  govern  the  reporter  in  every  case.    The  following 
suggestions,  however,  will  be  found  of  value: 

490.  The  stenographer  should,  if  possible,  be  seated  near, 
or  at  the  same  tab.e  with  the  official  secretary,  in  order  that, 
as  the  business  progresses,  he  may  learn  the  names  of  speak- 
ers, and  those  taking  part  in  the  discussions. 

It  is  the  best  plan  always  to  take  as  full  notes  as  possible 
although  an  abridged  report  only  may  be  wanted,  since  the 
work  of  condensing  can  better  be  performed  when  the  tran- 
scribing is  being  done,  than  when  the  proceedings  are  in 
course. 


864  REPORTING  8TYLF  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

It  is  commonly  the  reporter's  duty  to  take  down  all  mo- 
tions and  resolutions,  except  those  in  writing;  also,  amend- 
ments thereto,  and  remarks  and  decisions  thereupon. 

Essays,  and  other  papers  which  are  read  to  the  association, 
are  filed  with  the  secretary,  and  need  not  be  taken  down  in 
short-hand; but  the  discussion  of  any  question  to  which  these 
may  give  rise,  should  be  noted  by  the  reporter. 

The  speaker's  name,  when  announced  by  the  chairman, 
should  be  written  in  long-hand  at  the  left  margin  of  the 
paper,  and  his  remarks  recorded  just  below. 

The  official  stenographer  of  the  convention  should  make  a 
record  of  everything  that  transpires.  Much  revision,  and 
the  judgment  of  an  editor,  are  needed  in  preparing  such 
verbatim  reports  for  publication.  This  is  usually  done  by 
the  secretary,  or  a  special  committee.  Short-hand  writers 
experienced  in  this  branch  of  the  profession,  are  often  em- 
ployed both  to  make  and  revise,  or  edit,  such  reports. 

The  successful  reporter  of  public  meetings  is  wide-awake 
and  observing;  on  the  alert  constantly  not  only  to  hear  what 
is  said,  but  to  know  what  is  meant  by  the  speaker.  The 
stenographer  who  does  not  know  the  meaning  of  what  he 
writes  cannot  be  relied  upon  to  make  a  correct  transcript. 

EXERCISE  46. 
491.  PROCEEDINGS 


THIRD  ANNUAL  MEETING  OF  THE  IOWA  STATE 
PHARMACEUTICAL  ASSOCIATION, 

HELD  IN  DES  MOINES,  FEBRUARY  14-15,  1882/ 
FIRST  DAT.— WEDNESDAY  AFTERNOON  SESSION. 

The-meeting  was  called  to  order  at  10  o'clock.  President 
Hogin  in-the  chair. 

The-minutes  of-the  last  session  were  read/'  corrected, 
and-approved. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  265 

The-President:  I-will-now  call  for- the  report  of-the  Com- 
mittee on  Legislation. 

The-report  was  read  by-the  Chairman, '"  Mr.  Bush,  and- 
the  paper  passed  to-the  Secretary. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Wallace,  the-Feport  of-the  Committee  on 
Legislation  was  adopted.  (1) 

The-President:  Dr.  Treat,  have-you  anything  further  to- 
report  on  Pharmacy  and  Queries? 

Dr.  Treat:  Yes-sir;  a-paper  by'  Mr.  W.  H.  Hardy,  of- 
Clinton. 

The-Secretary:  Mr. -Chairman,  I-would-like  to  say  first, 
that  our  Treasurer  has-a-letter  from  Mr.  Hardy/'  expressing 
regrets  for-his  inability  to-be  at-the  meeting. 

The-President:  We-will-now  listen  to-the  reading  of-the 
paper'"  by  Mr.  W.  H.  Hardy,  of-Clinton. 

The-paper  is  read  to-the  Association  by  Dr.  Treat. 

The-President:  Now  you  have  heard-the  (2)  reading  of- 
the  paper  by  Mr. -Hardy,  of-Clinton.  What-is-the  pleasure 
of-the  house  as-to-the  disposal  of -it?' 

Dr.  Treat:  I-move-you,  Mr. -Chairman,  that-the  communi- 
cation be-received. 

The-President:  You-mean  by-that,  that- it  shall-be  printed" 
in-the  proceedings? 

Dr.  Treat:    Yes-sir. 

The-motion  was-carried  and-the  thanks  of-the  Association 
tendered  the-writer. 

Mr.  Schafer:"'  I-will-now  present  the-report  of-the  com- 
mittee appointed  to  consider  the-President's  address. 

Vice-President  Townsend  assumes  the-chair. 

The  committee  (3)  referred  to  report  as  follows:  "  To-the 
President  and-members  of-the  Iowa  State  Pharmaceutical 
Association:  Your  committee  appointed  to  consider  the- 
address  of-our7  retiring  President,  ask  to-present  the-follow- 
ing  report: 

We-do  most  heartily  concur  in-the  leading  suggestions. 
We  would,  however,  call  your  special"  attention  to-the  fol- 
lowing recommendations: 


«6fl  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SITORT-ffAXD. 

1.  That  every  registered  Pharmacist  look  well  to  all  im- 
I    positions  from  unprincipled  persons,  in-obtaining  liquors  for 
I    improper  use'"  under  all  manner  of  representations. 

2.  That- we  heartily  endorse  the  aiding  and  sustaining  the- 
Commissioners  of  Pharmacy  in-their  duties  to-the  full  (4) 
extent  of-the  law. 

8.  The-subject  of  revising  the-By-Laws  had  our  attention, 
but  owing  to-the  necessities  of-the-case,  amendments  have7 
already  been  adopted,  which  fully  cover  this  point. 

4.  We-most  heartily  and-cheerfully  endoi'se  the  sugges- 
tion, that-the  Association  become  incorporated  under-the" 
laws  of-the  State.  A-motion  to  adopt  the-report  of-the  com- 
mittee prevailed. 

Mr. -Crawford:  Mr. -Chairman;  I-move-you  that-the"' 
Committee  on  Legislation,  as  expressing  the-sense  of-this 
Association,  be  instructed  to  procure  an-amendment  to-the- 
present  law,  making  it  a  (5)  penalty  not-exceeding  $200  for- 
a-person conducting  a-pharmacy  without  registration,  by 
having  that-matter  so  that-it-will  properly'  come  before-the 
Grand-Jury,  and-that-the  Court  may  act  at  discretion,  and- 
uiake-a  fine  not-exceeding  this  amount.  There-are"  c-oin- 
|  inanities  where-the  prohibitory  liquor  law  of  Iowa  is  prac- 
j  tically  a-dead-letter.  No  Grand-Jury  can-be  impaneled  to- 
take  proper  cognizance7"  of-the  law. 

The  law  maker  makes  the  law,  not-only  to  rule  subjects, 
but  also  to  rule  the  law  makers.  Now  I-think-that,  (6)  in- 
this-matter,  we  stand  between-the  law  maker  and-the  law 
breaker.  In-this-respect  we-are  handling,  unfortunately, 
patent  medicines/  one  of-the  giant  evils  of-the  day.  That- 
there  is-a-demand  for-them,  no-one  questions.  This-demand 
comes  as  well"  f  rom-the  law  maker  as-it  does  f  rom-the  law 
breaker.  While  one  man  claims  to  call  for-it  within-the 
limits  of-the'"  law,  there-is-a  question  at-last  about  what 
there-is-a,call  for.  Now-then,  we-are-not  only  standing  be- 
tween law  makers  (7)  and  law  breakers,  but-we  stand  be- 
tween-the patent  medicine  man  and-the  consumer,  between- 
the  physician  and-the  patient.  It-seems-to-me'  our  position 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  267 


is-a  very  peculiar  one.  For-instance,  some  nostrum  is  placed 
upon-the  market  and-it-is-so  advertised"  that-there-is-a  de- 
mand for-it,  aud-we,  as  retail  dealers,  purchase  some  and-sell 
it  to-our  customers  who  demand  it.  It-is-a"' spurious  article. 
Who  gets  the  blame?  I-think  those-who-are  doing  business 
on-honest  principles  and-living  up  to-the  law,  will  (8)  go 
forward  and  raise  the  standard  so  high  that-every-one  will- 
be  ashamed  to  engage  in-that  business. 

The-President:  The-motion'  now  is-that-the  Committee  on 
Legislation  procure  a-pharmacy  law  making-the  violator 
liable  to-a  penalty  not-exceeding  $200." 

Mr.  Parish:    Did-you  say  that-it-should-be  indictable? 

Mr. -Crawford:  Yes-sir.  I  said  that-it-should-be  a  misde- 
meanor/'''' and-that-the  penalty  should-be-that  amount. 

A-Member:  I-think-there  ought-to-be  a-way  of  getting 
out-of-it  without-making  (9)  it  a-Grand-Jury  affair.  I-think- 
Jt-is-an  offense  that-ought-to-be  punishable  before-a  justice- 
of-the-peace/ 

Mr.  Parish:  I-don't-think,  Mr. -Chairman,  that-you-can 
find-a  town  in  Iowa,  where  there-is-a  druggist,  but  who-has- 
a  delicacy"  about  filing  a  complaint  against-a  competitor. 
But  if-you-make  it  a-Grand-Jury  offense,  they-will  be  obliged 
to-take  action7"  in-these-matters.  You-may  take-it  in-any 
town.  There-is  one  in-our  town  who-is-not-a  pharmacist, 
not  eligible  by-reason-of  (10)  age,  and-he-is  violating  the- 
law,  and-there  ought-to-be  somebody  whose  duty  it-was  to- 
take  action  in-these-matters/ 

Mr.  Ellis:  Let-us-take-a  view  of-our  position  as  druggists, 
the-position  in-which  we-are  held  up  before-the  public,"  so 
fur-as  we-are  individually  concerned.  It-ought-to-be  our 
object  personally  to  abide  by-the  laws,  whatever  these  laws 
may-be."'  (1010—10:45—8.) 

492.  TRANSLATE. 


~7    >  ^  xi 

b  (    5_^       L/       c        /    |     -<%» 


968  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


13 


**      \ 

,  c  ^ 


u 


-7 


493. 


PHRASES. 


v^v  -^  *i.< 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  269 

LESSON  XL VII. 
LAW    REPORTING. 

494.  Law  Reporting,  or  the  business  of  recording  the 
proceedings  had  on  the  trial  of  causes,  is  one  of  the  most  im- 
portant branches  of  the  stenographic  profession.  In  this  day, 
all  important  cases  are  reported  in  short-hand/  and,  in- 
deed, of  so  great  advantage  is  this  art  found  to  be  in  the  ad- 
ministration of  justice,  that  in  many  states  the  appointment 
of  skilled  stenographers  is  authorized  by  law.  In  the  most 
perfect  methods  of  administering  justice  that  have  been 
devised,  it  has  been  required  that  some  kind  of  record  of  the 
evidence  be  preserved,  and  the  fuller  this  is  the  better. 

Stenography  has  revolutionized  the  methods  of  proceeding 
in  the  courts  ;  for  by  its  speed  much  time  is  saved,  and  de- 
lays, which,  during  a  trial,  are  prejudicial  to  justice,  are 
more  easily  prevented,  and  the  occasion  lor  expensive  re- 
trials oftentimes  precluded.  In  no  business  or  profession  is 
stenography  more  welcome  than  in  law,  where  so  much 
depends  on  a  record  being  kept  of  the  precise  words  made 
use  of. 

The  Law  Reporter  must  possess  various  qualifications  in- 
order  to  a  competent  discharge  of  the  duties  of  his  calling. 
He  should  be  able  to  write  at  least  one  hundred  and  seventy- 
five  words  a  minute,  and  read  his  notes  fluently.  In  addi- 
tion, also,  to  a  thorough  English  education,  good  memory, 
and  quickness  of  perception,  he  should  have  a  familiar  ac- 
quaintance with  the  various  forms  and  methods  of  proceed- 
ing in  Courts.  The  greater  his  knowledge  of  law,  especially 
that  of  evidence,  the  better.  No  student  should  neglect  the 
main  features  of  this  branch  of  the  profession.  Especially 
the  forms  of  such  reports  should  be  learned,  since  amanuen- 
ses, and  all  short-hand  writers  in  fact,  are  frequently  desired 
to  make  reports  of  depositions,  referred  cases,  and  the  testi- 
mony received  at  preliminary  hearings. 

1J>5.  The  Caption  of  a  law-stenographer's  report  should 
show  the  title,  number,  and  nature  of  the  cause,  the  Court 


Z7P  ^EPORTINQ  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

where  pending,  the  name  of  the  judge,  referee,  commission- 
er, or  other  tribunal  by  whom  the  same  is  heard  ;  the  term 
of  court,  building,  town,  county,  and  state  where  the  trial  is 
had  ;  the  name  of  counsel  appearing  on  either  side  ;  the 
name  and  address  of  the  stenographer  employed.  This 
should  occupy  the  first  page  and  be  drawn  up  in  the  follow- 
ing manner : 

CAPTION. 

JAMES  MORGAN,  et  al.    \  APPEARANCES: 

NINDE  &  ELLISON, 

I  No  781)  Attorneys  for  Plaintiffs. 

OSCAR  A.  SIMONS  "  R.  S.  TAYLOR  and 

a'jd  COOMBS.  MOKRIS  &  BELL, 

JOHN  H.  BASS.  j  Attorneys  for  Defendants. 

EJECTMENT. 

Pending  in  the  U.  S.  Circuit  Court  for  the  Northern  District 
of  Indiana,  June  Term,  A.  D.  1881.  At  the  Federal  Court 
room,  Fort  Wayne,  before  His  Honor,  Judge  Walter  Q. 
Gresham,  and  a  jury. 

ELDON  MORAN,  Official  Stenographer. 

496.  The  report  proper  begins  on  the  second  page,  the 
heading  of  which  should  show  for  what  party  litigant  the 
testimony  is  taken,  the  hour,  the  day  of  the  week  and  month, 
and  the  year,  when  the  trial  was  begun.  Names  of  witnesses 
should  be  written  in  long-hand.  The  record  should  also 
show  what  attorney  conducted  the  examination. 

The  main  body  of  a  law-report  consists  in  the  record  of 
question  and  answer,  or  what  is  said  by  the  lawyer  in  elicit- 
ing testimony,  and  by  the  witness  in  reply  thereto.  That 
which  is  spoken  by  the  lawyer  is  for  convenience  denomi- 
nated question,  and  the  reply  of  the  witness,  answer,  al- 
though the  reverse  is  sometimes  in  fact  true,  as  may  be  illus- 
trated by  the  following  colloquy  between  lawyer  and  wit- 
ness: 

Ques.  (lawyer)  Where  were  you  living  at  the  time? 

Ans.  (witness)  When  do  you  mean? 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  871 

Ques.  (lawyer)  I  mean  at  the  time  the  accident  happened. 

497.  Paper  about  five  inches  broad  is  the  most  convenient 
for  law-reports.    The  question  begins  at  the  left  margin  and 
extends  across  the  page.    The  answer  should  begin,  and  be 
entirely  written,  in  such  a  manner  as  that  no  part  of  it  shall 
be  nearer  than  one  and  one-half  inches  of  the  left  margin. 
Answers,  when  brief,  may  be  written  on  the  same  line  with 
the  question,  provided  a  space  of  at  least  one  inch  is  allowed 
to  intervene. 

The  proper  heading,  and  disposition  of  question  and  an- 
swer, is  illustrated  by  the  exercise  for  translation. 

PHRASES. 

498.  About-how-many  about-what-time  all-contracts  an- 
nual-report   enter-into-an-agreement    enter-into-a-contract 
enter-into-possession     further-consideration     give-evidence 
g'ive-possession    Grand-Jury  into-court   law-reports  about- 
how-long-was-it  by-the-evidence  court-of-claims  not-to-my- 
recollection  offers-in-evidence  state-when-it-was  state-how- 
many  take-into-consideration    I-do-not-know  I-know-noth- 
ing-about  it-is-only   in-its-exercise  in-all-such-cases. 

4C9.  EXERCISE  47. 

WILSON  H.  SWALES,  Guardian,      ^  APPEARANCES: 

pg  I  HOLMAN  &  McMULLEN, 

THE  WHITE-WATER  RAILROAD  f  N°"  146°'      BELL  &  BA^lSoaT 
COMPANY.  J  Atty'sfor  Deft.' 

DAMAGES. 

Tried  at  Lawrenceburg,  Indiana,  at  the  May  Term,  A.  D. 
1881,  of  the  Dearborn  County  Circuit  Court,  before"  his 
Honor,  Judge  Hayes,  and  a  jury. 

Charles  Ash  by, — sworn  on  the  part  of  Plaintiff. 

Examined  by  Mr.  McMullen. 

Q.     Where-do-you-residc  *'.'" 

A.    In  Harrison  Township,  Dearborn  Co.,  Ind. 

Q.     Do-you  know  where  Longnecker  station  is? 

A.    Yes-sir. 


272  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SffORT-HAXD. 

Q.  Tell-the-Jury  where  you-live  in-reference-to  the-sta- 
tion.  (1) 

A.  I-live  on-the  pike  about  one-quarter  of-a  mile  from- 
the-station.  Right  about  here,  (referring  to-the  map,  ex- 
hibit "B")/ 

Q.  How  far  is-it  from  where  you-live  straight  across  to- 
the  railroad? 

A.    About  forty  rods. 

Q.    Do-you-remember  when-this  accident  happened  ?" 

Ax  I-believe  it-was-the  9th  of  December,  1879,  between 
five  and  six  o'clock,  to-the-best  of-rny-knowledgf/" 

Q.    You-may-state-whether  it-was  light  or  dark. 

A.  It-was  on-the  darkish  order.  It-was-a  sort  of  cloudj 
evening.  (2) 

Q.  How  far  is-that  from  where-the  railroad  crosses  into 
Franklin  County? 

A.    About  two-miles. 

Q.  Where  were-you  on-the  evening  that-this-accident 
happened?7 

A.    At  my  house,  standing  out  on-the  porch. 

Q.  What-did-you  first  hear, — not  what-was-said  to-you — ; 
first  state-whether-or-not"  you  heard  any  collision  or  noise? 

A.    I  heard  the  collision,  that-is  what  drew  my-attention. 

Q.  State  to-the  Jury  whether-or-not  at-this-time'"  you 
saw-the  passenger-train. 

A.    I-did. 

Q.    Where-was-the  passenger-train  when  you  saw  it? 

A.     It-was  coming  along-down  here  by-the  dam'.  (3) 

Q.     Where-did  the-work  or  wild  train  whistle  if-at-all? 

A.     Right  here  at-the  graveyard — just  gave  one  bla.-t . 

Q.  You-rnay-state-whether/  that  work-train  gav«-  another 
signal  from-that-time  till-you  heard  the-collision  down  l»y- 
the  crossing. 

A.    Yes-sir,  that-is-all  I  heard"  till  the-collision. 

Q.  Now  how  near  was  this  train  to-the  passenger-train 
when-the  passenger  moved  away  from-the-station? 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  273 

A.  Well,  I-cannot  answe'  '"  that  because  I-cannot  see-the 
station  from  my  house. 

Q.  Was-there  any-time  when  you-could  see  both  trains 
at-once?  (4) 

A.  Yes-sir,  when-the  passenger-train  was  here  in  front 
of-the  graveyard,  (referring  to-the  map),  the  wild-train  was 
coming  around  the-dam/ 

Q.  Tell-the-Jury  about-how  far  apart  these  trains  were 
at-that-time. 

A.    Considerably  over  a-mile. 

Q.  That-is,  when-the  passenger-train"  was  at-the  grave- 
yard? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  How  far  down  toward-the-station  could -you  see-the 
passenger-train  from-your-house  ?"' 

A.  To-right  above  the  target  at-the  upper  end  of-the 
switch. 

Q.  How  far  above  the-railroad  is-this  ground  where-your- 
house  is  located?  (5) 

A.    Forty-five  feet  I  should  judge. 

Q.  How-long  was-it  f rom-the-time  you  heard  the  whistle 
till-you  heard-the  collision  ?' 

A.  I-didn't  pay  any-attention,  but  it-was  a-very  short- 
time. 

Q.  Have-you  anything  by-which-you-can  measure  the 
time?" 

A.  No-sir,  I-didn't  pay  much  attention  at-that-time.  It- 
was  so  short  a-time  that  I-made  remarks  to  my  wife — "' 

Q.  If-you  have  anything  by-which-you-can  fix  it  in-your 
mind  without  telling  what-was-said  and-done,  (6)  you-may 
give  us  your  best  knowledge  of-it. 

A.  It- was  a-minute  or  somewheres  about  there  ;  perhaps 
it-raight-have-been  that-long/  or  longer  to-the  best  of-my 
knowledge. 

Q.    Did-you  go  down  to-the  station  after-that? 

A.  Yes-sir,  they  came  after  me"  just  a-few  minutes  after 
it  happened,  a-very  short-time. 


874  SSPOETINQ  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Q.    You  went  down  then  ? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.    Who- went  with-you,  if-anybody?"' 

A.  Nobody  went  with-me,  only  the-gentleman  who-came 
for  me. 

Q.    Were-you  there  when-the-train  backed  up  again? 

A.    No-sir.    (7) 

Q.    Had-it  gone  on  when  you  arrived? 

A.     It-was  just  going  when  I-got  there. 

Q.    Where-was  Miss  Hurley? 

A.    Right  at-the  end  of-the  crib/ 

Q.    What- was  done  with  her? 

A.    She-was  picked  up  and  carried  to-my-house. 

Q.    How-long  did  she  remain  at-your-house?" 

A.    I-think  two-or-three  days. 

Q.  Did-you  ever  measure  the-distance  between  that  crib 
and-the  railroad? 

A.  I-measured  between-the"'  end  of-the  shingle  pile  and- 
the  rails  ;  I-t-hink  the-distance  was  about  one-hundred  feet. 

Q.    You  did-not  measure  the-crib  by-itself  ?  (8) 

A.  No-sir,  but  I  should  judge  the-crib  to-be  about  sixtjf 
feet  long. 

Q.    It-is  simply  a-pile  of  shingles  with-a  shed  over  it?' 

A.    Yes-sir,  that-is-it. 

Q.    Can-you  see  the-crossing  f rom-your-house  ? 

A.    No-sir,  I-cannot. 

Q.  Now  suppose  a-party  is"  seated  in-a  two  horse  spring 
wagon,  the  hind  wheels  being  past  this  end  of-the  shingle- 
shed,  how  far  above  the  crossing///  can-the  railroad  target 
be-seen? 

Mr.  Bell  objects  to-the-question,  as  calling  for-a  conclusion 
of-the  witness  rather-than  for-the  facts.  (9)  Question  with- 
drawn. 

Q.  I-wish  you-would  state  just  the-condition  of-the  lady, 
when-you  saw  her  there  at-the-time  when'  she-was  taken-up 
to-your-house. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  275 

A.  She-was  perfectly  unconscious,  did-not-know-anything 
for-a  couple  of  days/' 

Q.     What  bruises,  if-any,  die  ^a  see  upon  her? 

A.  She  had-a  wound  on  her  arm,  but  I-do-not  remem- 
ber"' now  which-one  ;  she  had  also  been  struck  on-the  head. 

Q.     Where-was-the  wound  dressed?    A.    At  my  house. 

Q.  Who-was-the  physician?  (10)  A.  Dr.  West,  of  Har- 
rison. 

Q.  Was  she-taken  away  from-your-house  before  she 
again  became  conscious? 

Mr.  Bell,  on-part  of  defendant'  objects  to-the-question  on- 
the  ground  that-it-is  leading.  Objection  sustained.  Plain- 
tiff-excepts."  '978—10:30—7.) 


500  BUSINESS   LETTEK.  —  TRANSLATE. 


Y 

;  x 

V 


278 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 


501. 
J 


TRANSLATE.  —  Charles  Ashby  —  Continued. 


LESSON  XLVHI. 

OBJECTIONS,  RULINGS,  EXCEPTIONS,  EXHIBITS  AND  INDICES. 

502.  The  main  purpose  in  reporting  a  law-suit  is  that  the 
party  aggrieved  may  be  secured  in  his  right  of  appeal  to  a 
higher  Court.  There  are  many  other  uses,  however,  which 
these  records  are  made  to  serve.  A  verbatim  report  is  use- 
ful in  various  ways  on  re-trials,  as,  for  instance,  when  im- 
peachments are  sought ;  also,  to  refresh  the  memory  of 
counsel  and  witnesses,  and  settle  disputes  in  regard  to  the 
testimony  formerly  elicited. 

For  the  same  reasons  they  are  often  serviceable  in  collate- 
ral proceedings ;  also,  to  perpetuate  the  testimony  of  wit- 
nesses who  subsequently  decease  or  become  insane.  Even 
during  the  trial,  the  presence  of  "Mr.  Reporter"  has  grown 
indispensable,  as  shown  by  the  fact  that  his  notes  are  hourly 
referred  to. 

The  stenographer's  notes  are  presumed  to  be  correct,  and 
cannot  be  changed  or  modified  except  with  the  consent  of 
the  judge,  and  agreement  of  interested  parties.  The  record 
•should  contain,  not  only  everything  that  is  said  pertain- 
ing to  the  trial,  but  by  whom  it  is  spoken.  When  questions 
are  asked,  or  remarks  made,  by  the  Court,  jurors,  or  attor- 
neys not  conducting  the  examination,  or  by  the  parties  them 
selves,  the  name  of  the  speaker  should  appear  parentheti- 
cally in  the  margin. 

Next  in  importance  to  the  evidence  itself  is  the  ^recording 
of  objections,  which  are  made  from  time  to  time  to  the  intro- 
duction of  the  same,  or  to  any  proceeding  which  either  party 
may  regard  as  illegal.  The  grounds  'upon  which  such  ob- 
jections are  based  should  be  noted  by  the  reporter ;  and 
should  they  not  be  stated  specifically,  the  counsel's  argu- 
ment in  presenting  the  matter  to  the  Court  should  be  taken 
down.  When  an  objection  is  decided,  the  exception,  if  any, 
taken  by  the  party  over-ruled,  should  also  be  recorded.  Ex- 
ceptions are  also  taken  to  the  decisions  of  the  Court  in  sus- 
taining or  over-ruling  various  motions  submitted  in  the 
course  of  the  trial. 

—277— 


«7S  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

In  reporting  depositions,  objections  are  recorded,  and 
testimony  taken  subject  thereto,  no  rulings  being  made,  or 
exceptions  taken,  at  the  time.  A  law-report  should  be  as 
nearly  as  possible  a  photograph  of  all  the  proceedings  had. 
Hence,  it  becomes  the  reporter's  duty  to  make  a  minute  of 
every  transaction  which  has  a  bearing  on  the  case.  Exam- 
ples of  such  notes  which  are  inserted  parenthetically  are  : 
"Witness  refuses  to  answer  the  question  ;"  "  12  o'clock  M. 
Court  adjourns  ;"  "The  railing  referred  to  by  the  witness  is 
about  twenty  feet  distant ;"  "Gentleman  referred  to  by  wit- 
ness is  Mr.  Jones,  attorney." 

In  some  civil  and  most  criminal  cases,  a  report  is  made  of 
the  impaneling  of  the  jury.  This  should  embrace  the  exami- 
nation of  each  juror  as  to  his  qualification  to  act,  challenges 
peremptoi-y  and  for  cause,  by  both  prosecution  and  defense, 
rulings  of  the  Court,  and  exceptions  of  counsel. 

The  reporter  is  at  liberty  at  all  times  to  check  witnesses 
who  speak  too  rapidly  or  indistinctly,  or  while  the  question 
is  being  put,  or  objection  made. 

503.  Written  documents,  as  deeds,  notes,  contracts, 
mortgages,  letters,  depositions,  etc.,  are  frequently  produced 
in  Court,  and  made  a  part  of  the  evidence  ;  and  for  the  pur- 
poses of  identification,  and  convenience  in  making  referen- 
ces, the  same  are  at  the  time  marked  by  the  reporter  as 
exhibit  "A",  "B",  etc.,  according  to  the  order  in  which  they 
are  introduced.  After  the  alphabet  has  been  exhausted,  the 
double  letters  "AA",  "BB",  etc.,  may  be  employed.  The 
paper,  besides  the  letter  "A",  should  be  marked  with  the 
initials  of  the  parties  to  the  suit ;  thus,  for  example,  in  the 
case  of  Frederick  vs.  Wilson,  the  certificate  of  a  County 
Auditor  is  offered  in  evidence,  and  marked  by  the  reporter, 
"Exhibit  'A',  F.  vs.  W."  This  prevents  ambiguity  in  cases 
where  the  same  document  has  already  been  marked  with  a 
different  latter,  as  an  exhibit  in  another  case. 

As  part  of  the  evidence,  also,  knives,  rings,  keys,  photo- 
graphs, or  any  article  whatever  which  may  be  important  for 
the  Court  and  Jury  to  examine,  are  from  time  to  time  intro- 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  879 

duced.  These  may  be  marked  by  attaching  a  written  card 
firmly  to  them,  The  reporter  should  be  careful  to  identify 
as  an  exhibit,  every  article  or  document  offered  by  either 
party,  whether  or  not  the  same  is  actually  admitted  in  evi- 
dence by  the  Court,  since  rejected  exhibits  are  necessary  to 
complete  the  appellant's  bill  of  exceptions. 

504.  Half  the  value  of  a  law-report  is  lost  by  not  having  it 
properly  indexed.  In  the  first  place,  the  paper  used  should 
be  accuratelv  paged,  and  each  separate  book  or  manuscript 
numbered  in  the  order  used.  Trials  vary  in  length  from  an 
hour  to  several  months.  Reference  is  frequently  made,  and 
the  reporter  ordered  to  read  sections  of  testimony  taken 
days  and  even  weeks  previously.  This  can  be  done  only  by 
means  of  a  running  index,  which  is  kept  making  from  hour 
to  hour,  just  as  the  proceedings  take  place.  This  should  give 
the  day  and  date  of  each  session  of  Court,  the  name  of  each 
witness,  and  the  page  where  his  testimony  and  cross-exami- 
nation begins. 

Agreements,  admissions,  stipulations,  and  the  introduction 
of  exhibits,  should  also  be  indexed.  Long-hand  transcripts 
are  paged  and  indexed  iu  a  similar  manner. 


505.  INDEX. 


)  EVIDENCE 

,  f 


THE  WHITE-WATER  RAILROAD.  ) 

FIRST  DAY,  MAY  19,  1881. 

THURSDAY  FORENOON  SESSION. 

Impaneling  of  the  Jury,  Vol.  1,  Page  1. 
M.  B.  Fox,    ....     Vol.  1,  Page  5. 

AFTERNOON    SESSION. 

Fox,  continued,    .     .    .    1-11    Chas.  Ashby,    .    .    .     1-37 
Cross-examination,     .     .  1-13    Cross-ex., 1-42 


280  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Re-direct  examination,  1-20  C.  Ashby,  recalled,  .  1-48 
Frank  Jackman,  .  .  .  1-22  Benj.  Holden,  .  .  .  1-48 
Cross-ex., 1-28 

SECOND  DAY,  May  20. 

FKIDAY   FORENOON  SESSION. 

B.  F.  Hurley 1-59  Guardianship.admitted,    2-3 

Cross-ex., 1-63  Exhibit   "B",  Map  of 

W.  H.  Swales,  .  .  Vol.  2-3  Longnecker,  admitted,  2-4 
Exhibit  "A",  Letters  of 

FRIDAY  AFTERNOON  SESSION. 

Cross-ex., 2-4      Dr.  L.  J.  Collins,    .    .    2-28 

Carrie  Hurley,  ....  2-15  Dr.  J.  P.  Green,  .  .  .  2-44 
Cross-ex.,  .  .  .  .  2-21  Dr.  J.  D.  Gatch,  .  .  2-47 

PHRASES. 

506.  Accept-service  in-chancery  it-is-also-agreed  judge's- 
order  Law-courts  Law-journal  legal-proceedure  legal-pro- 
ceedings    legal-representative      new-trial     personal-estate 
plaintiff-and-defendant    police-court    supreme-court    with- 
out-prejudice    your-honor     according-(to)-your-recollection 
along-about-that-time     according-(to)-my-recollection     did- 
you-recognize    do-you-recollect-anything-about-this    if-the- 
court-please   if-your-honor-please    this-is-an-action   where- 
did-you-go  will-you-examine  what-has-been. 

507.  EXERCISE  48. 

FREDERICK     ) 

vs.          [    EVIDENCE  ON  PART  OF  CONTESTEE. 
WILSON.       ) 

Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa,  April  12,  1883. 

James  K.  Johnson,  sworn/    Examined  by  Judge  Bradley. 

Q.    What  official  position  if-any  do-you  hold? 

A    I-am  deputy  clerk. 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  281 

Q.  Have-you  examined  the  naturalization  records  of-this- 
county?" 

A.  Yes-sir,  also  all-the  records  of  naturalization  that- 
have-been  kept  by-the  Circuit  and-District-Courts. 

Q.  Have-you-made-a  memorandum  of  what"'  these  re- 
cords show  concerning-the  naturalization  of  certain  persons? 

A.    I-have.  . 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects  to-the  testimony 
of-this  witness  (1)  on-the  ground  that-it-is  incompetent  and- 
immaterial,  the-original  record  books  only  being  admissible 
as  evidence. 

Q.  I-will  ask  your  attention  to-the7  declaratory  statement 
made  by  James  Dunn.  State-whether  you  ever  examined 
the-record  of-the  naturalization  of-such-a-person,  and-if  so, 
when-did-you"  find  that-it-was  made? 

Mr. -Brown  ou-part  of  Contestant  objects  to-the-question 
on-the  ground  that-it-is  incompetent  and-immaterial/"  The- 
original  books  themselves  are-the-best  evidence,  and-the 
witness  should-not-be  allowed  to  testify  from  any  document 
other-than  these  books  themselves.  (2) 

A.  I-have  examined  the-records  carefully,  and-find  that- 
there-are  two  James  Dunns.  One  made  his  declaratory 
statement  on-the  28th  of  July,  1856  ;'  the-other  made  his  de- 
claratory statement  on-the  12th  of  December,  1866.  I  also 
found  from-a  careful  examination  of-the  naturalization" 
records  of-the  District  and  Circuit-Court  Journals  from-the 
beginning,  that-is  from  Journal  A  down  to-the  time  when- 
the  naturalization  records  were  begun, '"  that-there-is-no 
record  of  James  Dunn's  having-been  naturalized. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects  to  answer  of 
witness  on-the  ground  (3)  that-it-is  incompetent  and-imma- 
terial,  since-it  purports  to-be-a  statement  of-the  official 
records,  the-same  not-being  produced. 

Q.  Then  we  understand'  you  as  testifying  that-there-is-no 
record  of  any  second  papers  ever  having-been  issued  to  any- 
tiuch-person? 

A     No-sir/' 


REPORTING  STYLE  OP  SHORT-HANI). 


Q.    To  any  James  Dunn,  or  James  Dunn,  Jr.? 

A.    No-sir. 

Q.  What-do-the  records  show  with-reference-to  Patrick 
Dunn? 

A.  On-the  27th  of  August/"  1866,  Patrick  Dunn  made  his 
declaratory  statement,  but  there-is-no  record  of-his  ever 
having-been  naturalized. 

Mr.  -Brown  on-part  (4)  of  Contestant  moves  that-the  answer 
be  stricken  out  as  incompetent  and-immaterial,  being  the 
statement  of  what  the-records  contain,  without-the  same' 
being  produced. 

Q.    No  evidence  at-all? 

A.    No-sir,  none. 

Q.    Now  I-will  ask  your  attention  to  William  Broadhead. 

A.  He  filed  his  declaratory  statement  on-the//3rdof  Nov.. 
1868.  There-are  no  records  of-his  subsequent  naturaliza- 
tion. 

Contestant  moves  to  strike  same  as  above/" 

Q.  Is-this-the  gentleman  known  as  Uncle  Billy  Broad- 
head,  who  lives  in-the  poor  house? 

A.  The-name  is-the-sanie,  aud-I  suppose  it-is-the  same- 
man.  (5) 

Q.  Did-you  find  that  any  papers  had-been  issued  to  Frank 
Delaware? 

A.    No-sir,  I-did-not. 

Contestant  moves  to  strike  same  as  above/ 

Q.  I-will  ask-you  if-yxm  have  gone  through  these  natural- 
ization and  -Court  records  by-the  index,  or  if  -not,  how  did- 
you  examine,  them?" 

A.  I  examined  them  both  ways  ;  first  by  index,  and-then 
by  looking  carefully  over  each  page. 

Q.  State-whether-or-not  you  found  any  record'"  of-the 
naturalization  of  Edward  Willigrod  ;  if  so,  what-is-the  date 
of-it? 

A.  I  can  state  the-book  and-the  page  from-memory.  (6) 
It-is  in  Minute  Book  Number  One,  page  fourteen,  of-the 
records  of-the  County-Court.  The-date  is  somewhere  be- 
tween 1856  and  1858/ 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  283 

Contestant  moves  to  strike  same  as  above. 

Q.    Does-the  record  show  that  two  papers  were  issued? 

A.  No-sir,  but-the  record"  I-raention  is  of-the  issue  of-the 
second,  or  official  naturalization  papers. 

C.    What  Court  were-they  issued  from? 

A.  From-the  County-Court,  when//r/  Wm.  C.  Smith  was 
judge. 

Contestant  moves  to  strike  same  as  above. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  you  say  you  have  examined  these  re- 
cords from-the  beginning,  page  by  page,  (7)  will-you  please 
state  more  specifically  as-to  what-records  you-refer? 

A.  I-have  examined  Journals  1,  2  and  3,  of-the  Circuit- 
Court  of  Marshall-County,  arid-Journals  A,  B  and  C,  of-the 
District-Court.  The-remaining  records  form  a-book  called 
First  Paper  or  Declaratory  book/7  I  examined  them  all 
page  by  page. 

Q.  Are  there  more  Journals  than  this  in-the  Circuit- 
Court? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  How  far  does-the  third  Circuit-Court  Journal  ex- 
tend?"7 

A.  Down  to  1873,  when-the  first  naturalization  record 
was  begun. 

Q.  And-the  District-Court  Journal  you  have  referred  to 
covered  the-same  period?  (8) 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  will-you  please  bring  over  the-book  con- 
taining the-record  of-the  papers  issued  to  Mr.  Willigrod? 

Witness  produces  Naturalization7  Record-Book  Number  2. 

Q.  Did-you  find  this-book  in-the  office  and-custody  of-the 
clerk  of-the  District  and  Circuit-Courts  of-this-County? 

A.  Yes-sir,  it-is-one  of-the  official  records,  kept  in-the 
office  of-the  clerk  whose  deputy  I  am. 

Q.  Please  state-the  title  and-character  of-the77  third  book 
you  now  have  in-your  possession. 

A.  It-is  called  Minute  Book  Number  1,  of-the  Marshall 
County-Court,  kept  when  Wm.  C.  Smith  was  judge.777 

(907—8:45—7) 


284 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 


508. 


SWALES  )       IMPANELING 

vs  OF 

THE  WHITE-WATER  RAILROAD.       \        THE  JURY. 


6 


P 


n 


..V 


"i 


•J 


t,  •> 

;  v     -...! 


11   V  V 

)  %-. 

.f.^p......'r±r...  >  ?' 


^—  1      i 

1     v^ 


S. 


\ 


1     ) 


LESSON  XLIX. 

TBANSCKIPTS   AND   PROFESSIONAL    CONDUCT. 

509.  All  short-hand  reports  should  be  securely  filed  away, 
either  by  the  Clerk  of  the  Court,  or  by  the  stenographer 
himself.    A  transcript  iu  long-hand  may  be  ordered  at  once, 
or  not  till  after  years  ;  possibly  never.    Before  making  such 
transcript,  the  reporter  would  do  well  to  ascertain  whether 
more  than  one  copy  is  wanted,  since,  should  he  make  use  of 
a  type-writer,  which  is  much  the  best  plan,  two  or  more 
copies  can  be  made  simultaneously.    The  testimony  of  cer- 
tain witnesses  only,  or  a  brief  of  all  the  evidence  in  narra- 
tive form  not  containing  objections,  etc.,  is  sometimes  or- 
dered ;  while  again,  only  an  abstract  is  wanted,  giving  the 
testimony  to  which  objections  were  made,  together  with  the 
rulings  and  exceptions.    In  addition  to  the  usual  fee  allowed 
for  making  transcripts,  the  reporter  receives  extra  compen- 
sation for  the  work  of  making  such  briefs  and  abstracts.    In 
all  cases,  the  stenographer  has  a  right  to  hold  the  transcript 
until  his  fees  are  paid. 

510.  Original  notes  are  always  taken  hurriedly,  and  need 
more  or  less  revision  and  condensation  when  transcribed 
into  long-hand.    In  this  matter  the  repoi'ter  is  allowed  some 
discretion.    Answers    of   witnesses,    with   few   exceptions, 
should  be  written  as  spoken,  but  the  language  of  interroga- 
tories should    be    corrected  if  ungramatical,   and   may  be 
abbreviated  often  with  advantage.  Lawyers  not  uncommonly 
indulge  in  repetitions  which  have  only  the  effect  of  lumber- 
ing the  record,  and  should  in  many  cases  be  entirely  ex- 
cluded fi-oni  the  transcript. 

511.  Notes  should  be  transcribed  in  the  order  taken,  and 
one  .side  only  of  the  paper  be  written  upon.    Ample  margin 
for  the  notes  of  counsel  should  be  allowed  to  remain  at  the 
left  of  each  page  ;  also  at  the  top,  so  that  the  sheets  may  be 
bound  together. 

Every  interrogatory  should  be  numbered,  beginning  anew 
with  the  testimony  of  each  witness.  The  transci'ipt,  when 
complete,  is  paged  and  indexed,  and  bound  firmly  into 
volumes  of  convenient  size. 

—285— 


tS6  REPORTING  STTLF  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

TRANSCRIPT. 

512.  APPEARANCES. 

STATE  OP  INDIANA    ]         W.  H.  HARRINGTON, 

on  part  of  Prosecution. 
DANIEL  W.  VOORHEES. 
LYON.  J  for  Defendant. 

CROSS-EXAMINATION  OP  MRS.  RACHEL  8TOWE,  Continued. 

Ques.  81.  How  far  were  you  standing  from  the  corner 
tree  when  you  heard  the  report  of  the  pistol? 

Ans.  About  as  far  from  it  as  I  am  from  the  stove  there 
(referring  to  the  stove  about  sixteen  feet  distant). 

Ques.  82.  You  say  you  heard  two  shots ;  now  was  it  a 
long  or  short  space  of  time  that  elapsed  between  them? 

Ans.    It  seemed  to  me  rather  long. 

Ques.  83.    Well,  how  long? 

Ans.    Perhaps  a  minute. 

Ques.  84.    You  are  certain  as  much  as  that? 

Ans.    Yes  sir,  that  long  anyway. 

Ques.  85.  Will  you  please  indicate  the  time  that  elapsed 
as  nearly  as  you  can  remember  it,  by  tapping  with  my  knife 
upon  the  desk? 

(Mrs.  Stowe  taps  twice  ;  time,  eighteen  seconds,  by  the 
reporter's  watch). 

Ques.  86.  How  far  was  your  boy  standing  from  you  at  the 
time? 

Ans.  About  as  far  away  from  me  as  that  gentleman,  (re- 
ferring to  Senator  Voorhees). 

Ques.  87.  Were  not  remarks  passed  between  you  and  the 
boy  during  the  time  between  the  shots? 

Ans.    Yes  sir,  my  boy  first  said Objection. 

Ques.  88.  Did  not  he  know  one  of  the  men  on  horse-back, 
and  did  not  he  say  "He  has  shot "  ? 

Mr.  Griffith  objects  to  the  question  on  the  ground  that 
it  is  not  proper  cross-examination  ;  also  that  it  misrepre- 
sents the  witness. 

Objection  over-ruled.    Defendant  excepts. 


Plate  49* 

s 


5V 


-  \ 


r 


IP 


\ 


\ 

\ 


- 


r \> 


V- 


888  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

513.  The  reporter  should  be  prompt  in  his  attendance 
upon  Court,  and  in  the  preparation  of  transcripts  ;  diligent 
and  accommodating  as  an  officer. 

It  is  not  unusual  for  him  to  be  made  the  confidant  of  the 
Judge,  and  for  this  reason  he  should  exercise  the  greater 
caution,  since  he  is  the  more  subject  to  interested  inquiry. 
He  is  expected  to  make  a  true  and  impartial  record  ;  and  to 
avoid  all  inference  of  prejudice,  it  is  by  far  the  best  policy  to 
say  nothing  whatever  about  the  case  during  the  trial.  He 
should  be  trustworthy,  and  mix  suavity  with  discretion. 

In  the  heat  of  an  exciting  trial,  when  the  feelings  and 
apprehensions  of  adverse  parties  are  most  awakened,  the 
slightest  look,  movement,  or  insinuation  on  the  reporter's 
part,  is  liable  to  be  construed  into  an  indication  of  prejudice 
or  partiality.  The  utmost  care  and  circumspection  are 
necessary  to  prevent  such  reflections,  which  are  sometimes 
carried  even  to  the  extent  of  a  question  as  to  the  integrity  of 
the  report. 

514.  PHRASES. 

Balance-due  breach-(of)-contract  certiflcate-(of)-marriage 
circumstantial-evidence  common-law  contempt-(of)-court 
Court -ol-law  Court-of-Record  custom-(of-the) -country  laws- 
(of-the)-land  laws-(of)-England  learned-judge  matter-of- 
fonn  on-the-south-side  records-(of-the)-court  subject-mat- 
ter verdict-(of-the)-jury  according-(to-the) -evidence  place- 
(of)-business  do-you-mean-(to)-say. 

EXERCISE  49. 

515.  [Heading,  Question   and  Answer,  Objections,    etc., 
to  be  arranged  by  the  student  in  the  proper  manner]. 

Benj.  T.  Frederick  vs.  James  Wilson.  Appearances : 
Timothy  Brown,  Attorney  for  Contestant.  J.  H.  Bradley, 
Attorney  for  Contestee.  Contested  Election.  For  the  office 
of  Representative  in  Congress  foiy  the  Fifth  District  of  Iowa. 
Cause  pending  in  the  House  of  Representatives  of  the 
United  States  of  America.  Testimony  taken  before  Eldon 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  289 

Moran,  Stenographer  and  Commissioner,  during  the  months 
of  February/'  March,  April  and  May,  1883.  Evidence  on 
part  of  Contestant.  Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa,  March 
5,1883.  A.  N.  French,  sworn  on-part'"  of  contestant.  You- 
rnay-state  if-you-are  the-Auditor  of  Marshall  County,  Iowa, 
and-have-now  in-your  possession  the-poll-books  which-were 
returned  to-you  from  (1)  Washington  Township?  Yes-sir, 
I-am  Auditor,  and-have  them.  Please  take-the  poll-book, 
and  read  so  that-the  Commissioner  can  take-it  down,  giving 
the-number'  of  votes  that-were  cast  in-that  Township,  for 
each  Candidate  for  Congress  at-the  November  election,  1882. 
I-understand  you  want-the  certificates  just-as"  they-were 
returned?  Yes-sir.  For  Representative  in  Congress  there- 
were  110  votes  cast,  of-which  James  Wilson  had  45  ;  Benj. 
T.  Frederick  52  •/"  and  David  Plainer  13.  Is-that-the  num- 
ber of  votes  for  each  candidate  returned  in-the  abstract 
made  by-the  County  canvassers  to-the  Board  of  State  can- 
vassers? (2)  Yes-sir,  the  same-number.  Please  turn  to-the 
poll-book  of  Marietta  Township  and-state  how-many-votes 
were  returned  from-that  township  for-the  office'  of  Repre- 
sentative in  Congress  by-the  Trustees  of-that  township,  as 
shown  by-the  poll-books,  and  read  it  off  so  that  it-may-be 
taken-down  by-the  Commissioner/'  'Reading  from  poll- 
book)  For  Representative  in  Congress,  Fifth  District,  there 
were  123  ballots,  of-which  James  Wilson  had  81 ;  Benj.  T. 
Frederick  37  ;'"  and  David  Platner  5.  Please  turn  to-the 
poll-book  of  Le-Grande  Township,  and-state  how-many  votes 
were  cast  for  each  Candidate  at-the  last  November  election, 
(3)  for-the  office  of  Representative  in  Congress,  Fifth  Dis- 
trict (Reading  from  poll-book)  For-the  office  of-Repi-esen- 
tative  in  Congress,  Fifth  District,  there  were  263  ballots 
cast,  of-which  James  Wilson'  had  180  ;  Benj.  T.  Frederick 
78  ;  and  David  Platner  5.  Now  state  if-your  returns  made 
for  Washington,  Bangor,  and-Marietta  Townships,  were-the 
same"  as  shown  by-the  poll-books  I-will-have  to  look  and 
see.  First,  I- will  ask-you,  if -you  have-a  copy  of-the  returns 
made  by-the  County  canvasser"'  to-the  State-canvasser? 


990  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Yes-sir,  I-have.  Now  state  as-to  Washington  Township, 
how-many  votes  for-the  office  of  Representative  in  Congress 
were  returned  to-the  State  canvassers  (4)  for-this  Township. 
For  James  Wilson  45  ;  B.  T.  Frederick  52  ;  David  Plainer  18. 
Now  state  with-reference-to  Marietta  Township/  James 
Wilson  81 ;  B.  T.  Frederick  37  ;  David  Plainer  5.  These 
numbers  correspond  with-the  poll-book.  State,  also,  with- 
reference-to  Le-Grande  Township.  The  schedule  shows'7 
James  Wilson  received  180  votes  ;  B.  T.  Frederick  78  ;  and- 
David  Platner  5.  These  numbers  are  the-same  as  those  I 
read  from-the  poll-book.  Now  state'"  with-reference-to 
Bangor.  For-the  office  of  Representative  in  Congress,  there 
were  89  ballots  cast,  of- which  James  Wilson  had  75;  (5)  B.  T. 
Frederick  2;  and-David  Platner  12.  The-abstract  also 
shows  Wilson  to-have  received  75  ;  Frederick  2  ;  and  Plat- 
ner 12/  EXCUSED.  (595—5:15 — 4) 


LESSON  L. 
SYSTEMS  AND  IMPKOVEMENTS. 

516.  Isaac  Pitman,  inventor  of  Phonography,  the  most 
popular  of  all  short-hand  systems,  began  publishing  half  a 
century  ago.  Within  this  time  the  sale  of  his  principal  in- 
struction books  may  be  roughly  estimated  as  follows  :  The 
Reporter's  Companion,  about  145,000  copies  ;  the  Manual, 
475,000  ;  the  Teacher,  nearly  one  and  a  quarter  million.  He 
has  also  published  a  dictionary,  a  phrase-book,  and  various 
lesser  works.  His  weekly  Journal  numbers  twenty  thousand 
subscribers.  This,  however,  does  not  convey  an  adequate 
idea  of  the  extent  to  which  the  system,  of  which  he  was  the 
chief  originator,  has  spread  abroad.  Various  teachers  and 
author?,  embracing  Mr.  Pitman's  own  brothers  and  sons, 
have  published  books,  many  of  which  have  met  with  a  large 
sale.  The  Manual  of  Benn  Pitman,  the  chief  American 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND.  291 

author,  has  sold  to  the  extent  of  about  four  hundred 
thousand  copies.  The  Muiison,  Graham,  Longley,  and  a 
number  of  other  systems,  are  all  Pitmanic,  each  one  however 
being  characterized  by  certain  modifications,  or  improve- 
ments, most  of  which  are  introduced  in  this  chapter.  The 
Pitman  system  as  a  whole,  in  its  present  state  of  perfection, 
is  a  growth,  the  result  of  almost  countless  experiments  made 
by  conscientious  workmen  and  thoughtful  writers.  Each 
author  has  to  some  extent  modified  his  own  original  presen- 
tation of  the  system,  but  none,  perhaps,  have  made  so  many 
changes  as  Mr.  Pitman  himself.  One  of  the  inevitable  con- 
sequences of  this  gradual  developement  is  that  reporters 
who  learned  ten,  twenty,  or  thirty  years  ago,  write  the  system 
somewhat  differently  from  each  other,  and  a  style  differing 
also  from  the  system  as  it  is  taught  to-day.  The  system  as 
presented  by  the  inventor  is  that  most  employed  in  England 
and  the/British  Provinces.  The  Benn  Pitman  system  is  the 
one  most  followed  in  America.  The  chief  features  wherein 
the  English  differs  from  the  American  Short-hand,  are  the 
following:  A  new  sign  for  h,  struck  both  upwards  and 
downwards ;  also  different  characters  for  to  and  y,  and 
compound  characters  for  rch,  rj,  Ir,  wh,  hwl;  a  large  initial 
hook  attached  to  curves  for  I;  a  large  w-hook,  changed  to  a 
circle  to  indicate  a  preceding  s,  a  somewhat  different  mark 
for  01,  etc.  Within  certain  limits  the  straight  stems  are 
lengthened  to  add  tr,  dr,  thr.  A  final  hook  attached  to  a 
lengthened  stem  is  given  force  before  the  added  tr  or  thr  is 
pronounced,  as  in  thunder  (lengthened  th-n).  For  illustra- 
tive words  see  Ls  1,  2  and  3. 

The  chief  differences,  however,  consist  in  what  is  known 
as  the  inverted  vowel  scale,  by  which  the  first  place  dots  are 
make  to  change  places  with  the  third  place,  it  and  tah  being 
written  as  we  would  write  at  and  tea.  The  principal  effect 
of  this  change  is  this  :  that  many  first  position  words  are 
written  in  the  third  position,  and  vice  versa.  See  L  3. 


*98  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAXD. 

517.  KEY. 

1.  (Isaac  Pitman)  Heaven  hall  yes  widow  torch  dirge 
whisper  whalebone.  2.  Printer  conductor  ponder  slander 
thunder  color  spoil  square  former.  3.  Flesh  flame  eat  tah 
it  at  keep  king  knack.  4.  (Munson)  Hurry  cure  do-you  pay- 
your  clatter  tether  to-receive  to-trade  by-our  ought-we.  5. 
(Graham)  Active  combative  thief  leave  trial  timbrel  clerk 
would-there.  6.  I-have  or-not  but-not  but-are-not  of- 
our-own  and-of  we-were  what-would  ye-were  you- 
wcre  you-would.  7.  Explanatory  perniciousness  in- 
considerateness  examination  exasperation  episcopacy  in- 
temperance we-were-to-have  twenty  forty.  8.  (Longley) 
Heap  hawk  gather  has-there  is-there  building  sinfulness 
have-been.  9.  (Scott-Browne)  Dated  talented  mastered  re- 
mitted mentioned  help  inhale  harbor.  10.  (Watson)  Plat- 
ter trader  damp  poke  beg  puff  cling  pang.  11.  Yoke 
rambling  receiving  mason  jealousy  addition  alienation 
unmarried.  12.  (Lindsley)  Eat  key  tay  sea  oat  ought 
ooze  saw  taw  aid.  13.  (Other  Authors)  Loosest  nicest 
voted  invaded  charm  warm  sermon ,  thrive.  14.  Sir  Dear- 
sir  mar  mortar  mat  extra.  15.  Cap  poke  papa  view  love 
lad  do. 

518.  James  E.  Munson,  author  of  the  Complete  Phono- 
grapher,  follows  Isaac  Pitman  in  the  manner  of  vowel  ex- 
pression. He  also  adds  a  y-hook,  attached  to  straight  letters, 
as  in  cure.    It  is  employed  chiefly,  however,  in  phrases,  as 
do-you,  pay-your.    A  large  final  hook,  when  written  on  the 
r-hook  side  of  straight  stems,  expresses  tr,  dr,  thr,  as  in 
clatter,  tether.    He  also  has  a  different  character  for  h,  and 
writes  words  entirely  below  the  line,  or  in  what  is  called 
the  fourth  position,  to  express  a  preceding  to,  as  in  to-receive. 
He  employs  the  w  and  y  hooks  quite  extensively  in  phrase 
signs,  as  in  by-your  ought-we.    L  4. 

519.  Andrew  J.  Graham,  author  of  Standard  Phonogra- 
phy, uses  a  hook  similar  to  Munson 's  ter  hook  to  express 
tivc,  and  lengthens  the  n-hook  when  attached  to  curved 


Plate  50* 


«>  p  ; 

8          V_X 


>....    T 

Zl 


8  L 

JO 

ie  ^ 

13  / 

14  \ 


V 


L 


> 


r    i   i 

I  .1  I 


[/       \       \ 


C  3 


c\ 


-    I 


294  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORTHAND. 

stems  to  express,/"  or  v,  as  in  thief  or  leave.  When  joined  to 
straight  stems  the  r-hook  is  enlarged  to  add  I,  as  in  trial, 
timbrel;  and  the  1-hook  is  enlarged  to  add  r,  as  in  tumble. , 
clerk.  A  short,  heavy  dash  is  used  in  phrases  for  ther,  as  in 
would-there.  See  L  5.  A  characteristic  feature  is  a  srrics 
of  phrase  signs  obtained  by  attaching  hooks  to  vowel  word- 
signs,  as  in  I-have,  or-not,  but-nol,  etc.  The  coalescents  are 
enlarged  to  add  were  and  would,  as  in  we-were,  what-would, 
etc.  See  L  6.  It  is  safe  to  say  that  no  other  system  has  been 
elaborated  to  an  equal  extent.  It  is  quite  perfect  in  what 
may  be  termed  the  mathematical  sense;  but  there  are  so 
many  fine  turns  and  delicately  contrived  characters  in  his 
reporting  style,  that  persons  only  who  are  hard  students, 
and  possess  considerable  artistic  ability,  are  capable  of 
making  a  success  of  it.  The  .common  objection  is  the  un- 
usual number  of  contractions,  a  few  of  which,  selected  at 
random,  are  given  in  L  7. 

520.  Elias  Longley,  author  of  the  Eclectic  Series,  has  a 
still    different  character  for  h,  struck  both  upwards  and 
downwards.    He  also  uses  the  tr  hook  on  straight  stems, 
writes  vowels  by  the  inverted  scale,  and  adopts  the  Isaac 
Pitman  I  and  r  hooks.    Other  features  also  of  his  system  are 
shown  in  L  8.    His  books  are  clearly  written,  and  unusually 
well  suited  to  the  purpose  of  instruction. 

521.  Scott-Browne.     A  popular  device  of  this  author  is 
the  ed-tick,  affixed  to  stems  to  signify  the  past  tense,  as  in 
added,  talented,  etc.  L  9.     He    modifies  h  to  indicate  the 
added  I  and  r,  enlarging  the  hook  to  indicate  the  first,  and 
shading  the  stem  to  indicate  the  second,  as  in  help,  harbor. 
Mr.  Scott-Browne  has  been  a  close  student  of  the  philosophy 
of  short-hand,  and  his  theories  are  clearly  set  forth  in  his 
text-books. 

522.  John  Watson,  of  Maryland,  has  produced  an  excep- 
tional book  in  regard  both  to  the  originality  of  its  principles, 
and  the  novelty  of  its  teaching.  He  adopts  the  inverted  .scale, 
and  lengthens  all  straight  stems  to  add  ter,  as  in  platter, 
trader.    He  employs  a  shaded  up-stroke  for  mp,  also  writes 


BEPOBTINO  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND  -  295 

the  f-hook  large,  and  uses  the  old  f-hook  to  express  k  and  g. 
The  1-hook  also  is  made  large,  and  ing  inverted  when  more 
convenient,  as  in  pang,  L  10.  He  also  makes  various  other 
changes,  a  few  of  which  are  shown  in  L  11. 

523.  D.  P.  Lindsley,  author  of  Takigraphy,  transforms  the 
system  completely,  making  use  of  the  old  material  in  con- 
structing what  is  known  as  the  connective  vowel  system. 
Vowel  signs  of  such  a  character  are  selected  that  they  can  be 
written  between  stems  without  the  pen  being  lifted  from  the 
paper.    Consonant  position  is  not  made  use  of,  and  hence 
ruled  paper  is  not  strictly  necessary  in  taking  notes.    In  the 
reporting  style,   however,  most  vowels  are  dropped,   and 
many  word-signs  and  contractions  made  use  of.    The  simple 
style  is  easily  learned,  and  the  writing  very  legible.    An 
obvious  disadvantage  is  that  an  entirely  new  style  must  be 
learned  before  the  student  can  report  verbatim,  or  fill  a 
situation  requiring  a  high  degree  of  speed.    For  illustrative 
words  see  L  12. 

524.  W.  W.  Osgoodby,   author  of  Phonetic  Short-hand, 
•adds  a  number  of  improvements,  among  which  are  the  re- 
duplicated loop,  as  in  loosest,  and  the  slanting  ed-tick,  as  in 
voted.    See  L  13. 

525.  Curtis  Haven   employs  an  entirely  original  vowel 
scale,  and  makes  use  of  consonant  position  to  quite  a  con- 
siderable  extent.    In  the  consonant  alphabet  he  discards 
several  shaded  stems,  allowing  the  light  mates  to  represent 
both  the  cognate  sounds.    He  employs  a  shaded  up-stroke 
forrrn,  as  in  charm,  warm.    R  is  expressed  by  the  up-stroke 
only,  the  curved  sign  being  used  for  v,  as  in  thieve.    L  13. 

526.  Prof.  J.  G.  Cross,  author  of  "Eclectic  Short-Hand," 
presents   an  entirely  original  system,  of  which  one  main 
feature  is  that  it  is  not  phonetic,  but  rather  what  may  be 
termed  orthographical,  following  the  old  spelling  to  a  large 
extent.    Only  a  few  shaded  strokes  are  used,  and  there  are 
five  consonant  positions  significant  of  the  principal  vowels. 
These  are  also  provided  with  stem  signs,  which  are  some- 
times used.     The  alphabet  is  derived,  not  from  the  circle, 


206  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

like  the  Pitman,  but  from  the  ellipse,  like  the  German  system 
of  Gabelsberger.  The  common  abbreviations,  but  not  many 
word-signs,  are  used.  The  system  is  expeditious,  but  it  pos- 
sesses neither  the  philosophical  basis  nor  the  broad  capabili- 
ties of  the  Pitman  system.  For  illustrative  words  see  L  14. 

527.  H.   M.   Pernin,  author   of  Universal  Phonography, 
presents  a  system  bearing  some  resemblance  to  the  French 
system  of   Duploye.     Light  lines  only  are   used,  the  sub- 
vocals,  as  6,  d,  j,  being  written  longer  for  distinction.    The 
chief  vowels  are  written  connectedly  between  stems,   and 
consonant   position  is  not  made  use  of.    For  illustrative 
words  see  L  15. 

528.  There    are  numerous  other  authors  and  teachers, 
more  or  less  known  to  fame,  who  have  devoted  their  efforts 
to  invent  new  systems  or  improve  the  old.    A  partial  list  of 
these  is  given  (American)  :  Morris,  Marsh,  Burns,   Bishop, 
Kimball,  Day,  Eames,  Thornton,  Dement,  Jenkins,  Barnes, 
Rogers,  Humphrey,  Allen,  Howard,  Scovil,  Boyle.  Andrews, 
Webster,  Towndrow,  Palmer,  et  al. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

529.  So  far  as  the  student  has  time  and  disposition  to  do 
so,  he  will  find  it  both  agreeable  and  profitable  to  examine 
more  closely  the  various  systems,  particularly  the  different 
Pitman  authors.    After  he  has  had  considerable  experience 
in  actual  reporting,  he  may  so  far  as  he  judges  expedient, 
adopt  and  incorporate  into  his  style  contrivances,  hooks, 
and  word  and  phrase  signs  of  other  authors.     He  will  need 
of  course  to  use  discrimination  in  writing  letters,  employing 
only  those  signs  with  which  his  correspondent  is  familiar. 
But  comparatively  little  time  is  required,  and  considerable 
advantage  may  be  gained,  from  learning  enough  of  the  dif- 
ferent authors  to  enable  the  student  to  read  the  notes  and 
correspondence  of  other  reporters. 

530.  EXERCISE  50. 

Practice    on    the  Vocabulary    iintil    you    can   write   the 
whole  of  it  at  dictation  in  twenty  minutes. 


VOCABULARY. 

A 

Anno  Domini 

A  hie-to 

C       ^ 

(A.D.) 

l[              / 

Able-to-glve-lt 

•                    \      "> 

Annual 

«  ^1         I  **~~      t/ 

Antiquarian 

Abundant 

~ 

Accomplish 

\         \ 

Antiquity 

^"^      S    ^—  9        ^^ 

According 

v   \  

Anxiety 

\        \    **•  —  ' 

_/ 

Anyhow 

Accordlng-to 
Accordiug-to- 
his-contract 

c-     ^c-^' 

Anything 
Apostle 

rr  Y  \. 

According-to- 

Appear 

the-instruction 

Accuracy 
Ace  u  rale 

n  n  v 

Appearance 
Appeared 
Applied 

* 

^ 

Acknowledge 

\ 

Apply 

\       \ 

Acquiesce 
Acquit 
Act-of^congress 

~~)  n^-° 

Appoint 
Appointed 

e           »         ^ 

""T- 

Actual 
Acute 

/ 

Appointment 
Appoints 

^        *        \4 

Advantage 

Zf               1 

pprec 

Advantageous 
Advertise-iug 
Advertisement 

/ 

Apprehend 
Apprehensive 
Approve 

, 

1          ~t~> 

vl^l        ^—  C         » 

Affirmative 

• 

Are 

V 

After 

CN 

Aristocrat 

\^ 

Afternoon 

^v 

Arrange 

r 

Afterward 

v_ 

Article 

Again-and- 
again 

^/  a- 

As 
As-a-matter-of- 

^  0        Q^  

Ago 

^  — 

fact 

^ 

Agriculture 
All 

r—  T^-Tl           \ 

As-fast-as 
As-great-as 

o-°        O 

Allow 

(' 

As-has 

v> 

Almighty 
Almost 
Almost-always 

V,     V^V^^ 

As-his 
As-it 
As-lt-will 

0         )    .....P... 

Already 

As-is 

All-the-  world 
Altogether 

I/    > 

As-soon-as 
Associate 

O     Q_J>      I/ 

Astonish 

Always 
Amanuensis 
Ambiguity 

(O^^o^^n 

Astonishment 
As-well 

5    )    c 

Amendment 

At 

An 

At-all 

Analogy 

/-.^        ^ 

At-all-events 

_  1  p  p  

And 

Angel 

/  —  -7 

At-all-lt8 
At-all-times 

Anguish 

At-any-rate 

b           l^b        <L> 

206                       nEPOn  77.V3  S  TYL  F  OF  STIOR  T-HAXD. 

At-flrat 

Call 



At-lt                           .                             p 

Campaign 

—  ^"^         —  D 

At-length                -jr  -j  —       -J-— 

Cau-ii 



At-once                                             <•>. 

Cannot 

—  3                                     \ 

Avenue                      .         V^^          \ 
Average                                              / 

Can  '  i 
Capable 

-    A 

i 

Capital 

Aware 

V 

Care 

X*"                                           9 

Awful 

/                       X-— 

Catholic 

c  —         V 

Awhile 

Cs                        d 

Bank-note 
Baptist 
Barrier 

\—\  V/ 

Censure 
Certain 
Certificate 

<5  /) 

Be 

V 

Certify 

| 

Because 
Become 

\      v_ 

Challenge 
Change-d 

<y\.      /      / 

Before 
Beforehand 
Began 

1              1 

Chaplain 
Chapter 
Character 

J        /c  

Begin 

HcKU" 

—*                          V 

Characterize 
Characterizes 

n  ^ 

Behalf 

~3      \ 

Child 

*-          *•        

Behind 
l.eliold 
Belief 

_L  \  v 

Children 
Christian 
Christianity 

/  _mn 

Belong 
Belonged 
Beneficial 

I 

Christianize 
Circuit 
Circulate 

C-         C^_^ 

Benevolence 

^- 

Circulation 

Benevolent 
Be-not 

Bequest 

V\             ^ 
N 

Circumstance 
Circumstanced 

Collect 

*^>t   cf 

^L 

Belter-not                                                - 

Collect-on-de- 

f     1 

Belter-Ulan             \                »  xi    .    / 

livery  (C.O.I).) 

*"                    1  c  —  0 

\    ^->         V        N/ 

Collector 

1 

Bevond 

Bll'l-of-sale 

n          \    ^\ 

Come 

— 

Blunder 

Nr          S> 

Commercial 

Board 
Board-ot-trade 
Brilliancy 

•v      -v,   V^ 

Commonwealth 
Communication 
Company 

_n      v 

^  x  —  ^ 

Brother 
Brotherhood 
But 

By-the-flrst 

V-^j  ' 

Comparative' 
Compliance 
Comprehend 

x  A_v, 

By-way  -of-lllus- 

\         v^  t£2 

Comprehensive      (\              o-^     | 

t  ration 

ir™"^  *" 

Concern 

V_^         J     \_3 

Calculate 

Confession 

VOCABULARY.                                             899 

Confidential 

Definition 

* 

Confidenual- 

V        V               /r—  ' 

Degree 

<- 

Congesuon 

J        \_s  —  _ 

Congratulate 
Connection 
Conscientious 

C^                         .-  *^>\ 

Deliberation 
Delight 
Delinquent 

k     r   L 

>J 

Consequence 
Consequent 
Consequential 

<^-o     «,     °-= 

Deliver 
Deliverance 
Delivery 

f        J          f 

Consider 
Consideration 
Consistent 

1    1  .p 

Demonstration 
Demoralize 
Demoralization 

L 

Consonant 
Constantly 
Constitution 

p     p 

Q  '    ~P       J 

Denominate 
Denomination 
Denominational 

J       J     J 

{....  ._ 

Constitution-of- 
the-U.-S.   . 
Construct 
Construction 

u>-  vi 

Denounce 
Dependent 
Derivative 

j-  1  v 

Constructive 

^l                   1 

Derive 

I      °—    ^ 

Continue 

L-/    L>i 

Describe 

Continued 

Convenience 
Co-operate 
Correct 

V^-Nt± 

Descriptive 
Destiny 
Determination 

-  Ki 

Correspond 
Countenance 
Counterbalance 

c  $                            ^ 
~^_9             " 

Determine 
Develop 
Development 

w 

\  I   <L 

Courageous 
Creature 
Criticise 

7  ...I...  HD 

Dld-not 
Differ 
Difference 

JL  l     l 

Criticism 

Cross-examina- 

— .     ..  —  ^ 

Different 

tion 

d^.  

Difficult 
Difficulty 

1        c  c  

Cultivation 

Dignity 

Cure 
Danger 

0 

Disadvantage 
Disagree 

L_        JD        J- 

Dark 
Darken 
Darkness 

a  A  A_.. 
1        x       J 

Disappear 
Disconnect 
Dishonor 

Dare-not 
Day-ol-the- 
week 
Dear 

Dear-sir 
December 
Defendant 

Jx          cl~N        L»^ 

Dls-member-ed 
Dissatisfaction 
Dissatisfy 

Doctor 
Doctrine 
Do-it 

K^b   b 
1     3  l 

800 


REPOR  r/.VO  STYLE  Of  SHORT-HAXD. 


Dollar-s 

Everlasting-life 

Domestic 
Dominion 

1              , 

k-a  —  l'"7i_x 

Every 
Every-one 

^/*-    "  ^       ^ 

Do-not 

Evidence 

Downward 

Examination 

Due 

J     _„  I  L  

Example 

v-s_9  —  sTTi—  e-/ 

During 
Dwarf 

1  7      ' 

Excellence 
Excellent 

Each 

n  I/      

Exchange 

Each-are 

7       fl      fl 

Expect 

. 

Each-will 

Expected 

Q                              Q                             O. 

Each-will-have 

t        /       (j 

Experience 

\     "V-,      i 

East-and-west 
E  Ilk-lent 
Elaborate 

\  ^Jr\ 

Explanation 
Express 
Expression 

Electricity 

1 

Exquisite 

Eloquence 
Embezzle 

C    C*  oT 

External 
Extinguish 

~^t  1  ~L 

Emphatic 

Extraordinary 

Emphatically 
Enclosure 

'  —  V  x  —  X   ^^^  —  9 

Eye 
Eye-sight 

s^>           V              P 

Endeavor 

Fact 

Endless 
Energy 

^r\              W 

*^^                » 

Failure 
Faithful 

Vj^   V. 

English-lan- 

I 

Falsehood 

[ 

guage 

^_~^_^                v-X\ 

Familiar 

^Tt 

Enlarge 

^-/                 X) 

Fear-of-God 

\^f\   \-—       V 

Enterprise 

/ 

> 

Equal 
Equator 
Especially 

^       ) 

Feature 
February 
Fellow-citizen 

L 
i 

\ 

\.        t 

Essentially 
Establlah-ed 
Establishment 

\ 

L    )    ) 

Fellow-creature 
Few 
Fewest 

^_...^...U- 

Estate 

Finally 

Estliuated-cost 
Estlmated- 

)      X-      X 

Finance 
Finish 

V    Wj>  w' 

welght 

1 

First 

—  ' 

1 

First-class 

Estimation 
Et  ctetera  (etc.) 

^~D        P/       « 

Flve-or-slx 

0  O-o    ^ 

Eternal 

Follow 

\y 

For 

^fc_/^ 

Eulogy 

Foreign 

\^_      i         \       /) 

Europe 

European 

}              ^'* 

F«rever-and- 

Ever 

V          V        v  /^^^ 

ever 

Ever-and-ever 

\. 

For-instance 

V      V.     v 

Ever  las  ting 

For-it 

\  J 

VOCABULARY.                                             801 

Forsake 
For-the-first- 
tirae 
For-the-most- 
part 

For-the-sake-of 
Forthwith 
Fortunate 

Forward 
Four-or-flve 
Franklin 

Frequent 
From 
From-flrst-to- 
laat 

Full 
Fundamental 
Furniture 

Future 
Gave-lt 
Generation 

Genial 
Gentleman 
Gentlemen 

Give 

Give-it 
Given 

Glve-us 
Glorious 
Glory 

Good 
Good-and-bad 
Govern 

Government 
Governor 
Great-Britain 

Greater-than 
Great-extent 
Guilt 

Guilty 
Gypsy 

uka 

Had-lt 
Had-not 
Hall 

Hand 
Hand-in-hand 
Hcudsome 

-"           ^ 

Handwriting 
Handy 
Happen 

Happiness 
Happy 
Hard 

Hardware 
Has 

lias-Ilia 

Hath 
Have 
Have-hai 

Have-lf 
Have-not 
Hazard 

He 
Health 
Hear 

Heard 
Heart 
Heathen 

Heaven 
Height 
Held 

Help 
Hence 
Herald 

Herein 
Heretofore 
Hesitate 

Hesitation 
He-supposed 
High 

Higher 
Highest 
Highly 

Highway 
Him 
His 

Hls-ls 
Historian 
History 

Hold 
Holiness 
Holy 

.S*  '...ir^l.-A.-.. 
1          0 

'       * 

^        ^        S 

s  (\  ~^ 

C 

^        1       r 

r\  ^   } 
Z^     1 

)         \i 

-  —  -      —  — 

—          ~\       —  D 

^  rf 

u        ~ 

V^\                                 0 

o  '  ^  V 

±_  (       i_ 

S  ' 

"1       J"" 

r     ^^ 

~            >      ^S^ 

808                         REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Home 
Honestly 
Honor 

r  ^ 

ndivlduality 
ndolence 
Indulge 

^  r   r 

(a 

^  —  . 

/ 

Honorable 

ndustrions 

Hope 
How 

However 
How-long 
Howsoever 

^-VA 

ndustry                 v  —  A         "^\     "  —  *\o 
Infinite                         A              J|  

nfluence                      °            r 
nfluentlal               v_j>    •^^nj   V-J? 
nformatlon 

~  V"                    ^ 

ngenlouB 

Human 

In-hlB-descrip-  ;    ^     ^       7=s  —  J       ^ 

Human-life 

tlon 

/     ^       >a 

Human-nature 

..  

n-hls-estlma- 

O 

Humor 

^_  ^^ 

tion 
In-hls-experl- 

Hundred 

f\         *""      ^ 

ence 

x^v        ^^'^^    \       jj\\. 

Humble 

^""—     1                  ^^ 

o           >»J           ^^ 

2*^ 

slon 

I 

f~**^^ 

In-hls-life 

,^ 

I-am-wllllng 
Idea 

v     ^~~f               ^ 

;n-hlB-secret 
In-his-uaual 

O"    y  ^~<<J 

Il-lt 

Initial 

If-vou-wlsh 
Illegible 

Imagine 

^"          ^n-S           f 
/ 

n-order-that 
n-order-to 
n-polnt-of-faot 

^     ^  *^ 

' 

Imaginable 

.        —  . 

nquest 

C~  ^-.sf 

1-ina)  -be-there 

/                       J                     ^J 

n-regard-to 

"  —  '     ^                       ""\ 

J                      ^f 

In-reply-to 

Imbecile 

\ 

Immediately 
Importance 

<~f                    ^ 

n-response-to 
n-seemlng 

co  -a-^^^a-^ 

D 

nslgulticance 

Important 
Impossibility 

^^ 

nslgnlficant 

« 

Impossible 

„... 

n-some 
nstructlon 

/8-^         U 

Improve-d 
Improvement 
In 

_         _      - 

nstructlve 
n-supposlng 
ntellect 

<y     -~_fl         v- 

ll                     X—  X     ^— 

Inaccurate 

In-as-many 
Inclination 

Income 

^n^j^ 

ntelllgence 
ntelllgeut 
Intelligible 

ntent 

7  -  ^ 

Incompetent 
Incomplete 

In-consldera- 

^—  -^  ^ 

nterchange 
nterfere 

tion 

nternal 

/ 

Indefinite 

a/        ~^—*\ 

nterrogatlon 

Independent 

U            L^    '    ^ 

n-tlie-flrst- 

X_y               ^NO 

place 

In-describing 
Indicate 



In-the-world 

^—  ^  ^-r      "-1 

Individual 

^s—     —  \_ 

In-thls-clty 

V    ^^^^ 

1             ) 

VOCABULARY.                                             308 

Invention               _    _        _    ^     ^^.    _ 

Just-what                    ..        ^  ^. 

Investigate 
Investigation 

^o^yVsr' 

'Knowledge 
Ladies-and- 

/     7   f 

gentlemen 

Iowa 

Irregular 

V*V        -v               ""X 

Landlord 

s~^*i 

Irresistible 

'          ~"~      0 

Language 

/^\        N—  ff     (     _/ 

Languish 

Is 

0 

Is-as 

o         O      O  \ 

Large 

Is-his 



Larger 
Larger-  than 

..  /      .   2  7 

/       r    (/   " 

Is-it 

^^ 

^^.^ 

Island 

)          v°        p 

Largest 

s~§    I 

Is-said 

Last-mail 

/          ^f^^^I 



Laws-of-health 

—/•—  S& 

Is-sald-to-have 

o 

Laws-of-lile 

/-\       X~N 

Is-seen 

r           **-*s    /^ 

Lawyer 

<*                  /^7 

Is-such 

/ 

Legible-y 

/  f 

Issue 
It-had 
It-had-not 

. 

Liberty 
Liberty-of-the- 
people 
Liberty-of-the- 

.\.        .NO 

It-is  simply 

l"            J 

press 

s> 

It-is-something 

1              1 

Lord  -Jesus- 

s*~t        S\        s  —  o 

It-is-sumcient 

L          L-s.      1 

Christ 

(£—  l\Df 

O  "^    GI^~^  D    ) 

Loves-ua 

It-ought 

^^/ 

Luxurious 

It-ought-not 
It-ought-to- 
have-had 

'        J          t 

Magazine 
Magnanimous 

^-N_       X-N_T 

Maintain 

Its 
It-  will 
It-will-have 

L    r    r 

Majestic 

7-  7  ^ 

b                        u 

Majority 

It-will  have-had 

It-will-not 

Malpractice 

d  ^*\     ^~^~~^y 

It-would 

r      .r 

Man 

^  ^~^i   / 

l»             u       ....  . 

Manager 

It-would-have- 

had 
It-would-not 
January 

.-.       .—. 

Manner 
Manuscript 
Marshall 

V,Or-\*V 

Jesus-Christ 

May-as-well 

Joint-committee 

May-be 

/^~  ^—  ^ 

Journal 

May-not 

^~6                 '"a 

Joyous 
Junior 

Just-as  -certain 

Just-as-much-as 

...{....  ^  ^- 

Measure 
Medium 
Member 

Member-ol-the- 
bar 

->  --  -  ^ 

Just-as-well-aa 

/      ^/       «/ 

Member  of-the- 

\\  ^  ^—  »/v^» 

Just-been 

>o      X*1"         °\ 

Legislature 

\ 

o         o                o 

Memorandum 

* 

Just-had 

<*'~3 

Justlce-of-the- 

/         /       o/ 

Men 

/^^v 

Psace 

Merciful 

_.-—..    C  >          C 

Just-say-so 

1            V      J 

Mercy 

804                     REPORTING  3TYLF  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Mere                        ^—^       ^—  ^    ,.      '  New-  York-City 

Messenger 
Method 

/          ( 

Next 
Next-  time 

T^Z>          I^-N 

Methodlcal-ly 

Non-appear- 

Million 

^      7               \^      J 

ance 

*}t\         ^_Oi               f* 

Minimum 

(.  ^  >^->>^-^> 

Non-conductor 

\                 •» 

Nor 

O          I  —  ^  — 

Mlnlster-ed 

^_ 

1 

Ministerial 

s    *^£J 

North 

C-^v                         /J 

Ministry 

s~~**^  f)  s~^^  /"I 

North-America 

^—  /    ^_>^—  ^-*Cf 

^^~~L-S      ^^L^— 

North-eastern 

V   —     vi 

Minority 

,—  >. 

North-west 

Monarch 

1  '"""S 

North-western 

^^^"v   C^'v/'  vLx 

1  — 

Ing 

J             0           1 

Monthly-report 

More 

'  —  *""  —  f     s\                        /^c 

November 

More-or-less 

V/Vr^^-/ 

Now 
Number 

"^    ^^    ^ 

More-than 

Mortgage 
Most-Important 

Most-likely 

«  **-r** 

Numerous- 
questions 
Nutshell 
Obedience 

j     \ 
} 

Mostly 

C.    "N 

Mr. 

s-g^  S~£~ 

Obey 

\     \    V 

Object 
Objection 

\           \       \J 

Much 

Much-are 
Much-qulcker- 

/     7   /•- 

Objective 
Obvious 

V            V 

than 

"/             /          Z_C-  D 

Occur 

X 

Much-will 
Much-  will-have 
Must-be 

..f.  -/.-.^.-.- 

Occurrence 
Of 
Official. 

^  N  ^J 

Must-expect 

Oh 

/ 

Must-like 

^         n            £~^,f~~^ 

Ohio 

Must-make 

S~t!—  S 

On 

1         C      

Mv  instructions 

/~n         ^_^        —^^ 

On-either-hand 

Myself 

1  Q                           ^"^ 

One-of-the-most 

J 

Mystery 

^  

One-of-the-best 

<^^z  ^-^ 

Natural-ly 
Nature 

*-s 

One-or-two 
On-the-one- 

Near 

rNfc-^ 

hand 

f*                                    rv 

On-the-otber- 

<;~—  A          CL?            J 

Neglect 

hand 

Negligent 

V  •          1 

X/ 

Negotiation 

«.  ^      ^*  *               (_^/ 

Only 

Q__x<                   \ 

Onward 

.  O 

Neighborhood 

Opens 

Never 
Nevertheless 

Kevertheless-lt- 

1 

Opinion 
Opportunity 
Or 

<\       k 

New-Hamp- 
Bhlre 

vU-     ^-^~v^      ^y^ 

Organize 
Ornamental 

..I?  /^_H. 

New-York 

D         ^                    Or-not 

VOCABULARY. 


805 


Other 
Ought 
Ouglit-to-have 

Our-instrnc- 

tions 
Our  own 
Ourselves 


Postal-card 

Posterity 

Postmark 

Post-master 

Post-office 

Postal-service 


Poverty 

Practicable 

Practical 


Recollect 

Recollection 

Recommend 


Recommenda- 
tion 

Reconsider 
Record 


"\- 


- 


806                     REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

'  Reduction 

X* 

Seltlsh 

Reference 
Reflection 

/\>  /  x^ 

Senior 
Sensation 

Q       Q-^N 
-X                      I      Q_C, 

Reform 

' 

Reformation 
Regular 

xv.  /v>/~" 

Sentence 
Sentiment 
Set-forth 

a^_i>   ^      C 

Regularity 
Regulate 
Regulation 

X-1AV-3 

Set-off 
Seven-or-elght 
Several 

1  M    <L 

Relattnjr-to-the- 

Shall 

-_^// 

subject 
,  Reliable 
Reliance 

c/4_^.^± 

Shalt 
Shelf 

J       J       cX^ 

\ 

Religion 

Religious 
Rely 

</    /  cX 

Short-hand 
Should 

Significance 

z    /   °™ 

Remark 

Significant 

Remarkable 

^-^.         C~>        ~ 

Signification 

n                  e\              ^  —  s 

Remember 

\       \ 

Similar 

•?_  

Renounce 

Similarity 

Represent-ed 
Representation 

/***  /\  /\) 

Simple 
Simply 

<5^^     tf^    tf^ 

Republic 

Singular. 

Requisite 
Respect 

/\X-f  A 

Six-or-seven 
Slander 

o-rf'V.  f\ 

Respectability 

\ 

Some-one 

1 

Respectable 

» 

Something 

Responsible 

A.     A     A 

Sometime 

s*\s\  /\ 

6     ^      (T"NS_./  ^s/  —  ~N 

Revelation 
Revolution 

\       \ 

Somewhat 
South  America 

CO 

Roll 

i    /Q__.  cX 

South-eastern 

/°                     &" 

Romantic 

' 

Speak 

\ir^—  ^ 

Rule 

Special 

Said-to-hare 

~Va_^.  ,/....£ 

Specially 

\     \J 

Salvation 

^^ 

Satisfaction 
Satisfactory 

Satisfactory- 
manner 
Satisfactory- 
proof 
Satlsfy-Hwt 

"•       u      t~~ 

Specialty 
Speech 
Spirit 

Spiritual 
Spoke 
Spoken 

M-AJL 
^C  \  \ 

Savior 
Scorn 

e         y»  *~" 

Square 
Squirrel 

Q  ,    p 

Scripture 

X^             ft       / 

Stability 

\  ^rX  l\ 

Season 

DA 

Statesman 

Secure 

*~^^ 

Stenographer 

f_       t^"^>\  Q^_X 

Self-esteem 

° 

Stenographic 

VOCABULARY.                                             8OT 

Stenography 
StenoKraphic- 
society 
Stumble 

-~^ 

There 
Therefore 
There-  would- 
not 

9     \ 

>     9 

Subject 
Subjective 
Subsequent 

\     V    %, 

They 
They-are 
They-are-not 

C        0       3 

Such-are 
Such-are-not 
8uch-a-on« 

/     9      S 

Thev-wlll 
This-ls 
Thls-has-never 

f    ^    ^, 

Such  have 
Such-have-had 
Such-ought-to- 
have 

Such-ought-  to- 
hv-hd 
Such-were 
Such-were-not 

f            f 

Thls-system 
Thls-will 
Those 

Thou 
Though 
Three-or  four 

^  /  H-- 

f 

~T~ 

1 

Such-will 
Such-would 
Suifcient 

^  -r*~> 

Throughout 
Thus 
Till 

/     r 

5    -\ 

Suggestion 
Suppress 
Supremacy 

£xX^ 

J 

Till-lt 
To 
To-be 

f           x              v 

>    ' 

Surprise 
Suspension 
Systematic 

\o    p 
i        *~- 

To-become 
Together 
Told 

.j^_  r 

Takes-us 
Tavern 
Tedious 

Lo  Lj  1 

Too 
Toward 
Towards 

\       i      t 

Telegram 
Tell 
Tell-lt 

p           r 

To-wlt 
Transcript 
Treacherous 

>      K    } 

Tell-us 
Temperament 
Temperance 

Temperate 
Temporal 
Tendency 

E    U,    k 

k      ^*\/  ^—  -\ 

True 
Try-to-have 
Tuition 

Twelve 
Twist 
Two 

1       j 
4  J    i 

C    f      v 

Termination 
Territory 
Testament 

V\P     V     <k 

Two-or-three 
Unconcern 
Under 

vv  - 

Testimony 
Thank 
That 

That-  la^to-  say 
The 
Them 

K-*  ^L   ( 

Undergone 
Uniform 
Union 

Unite 

United-States 
Unity 

i 

V  '   ( 

80S                    REPORTING  6TYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

Universal 

Wben-lt 

Universe 

^\f^~      *X      ^\ 

Whensoever 

C^          ^"~"v           / 

University 

v                      | 

Where 

^"   ^ 

Unless 

' 

rVTieresoever 

^^^ 

Unpractlced 
Unquestionable 

Q__P    V^N.^—  '  —  ? 

Wherewith 
Whether 

^  <s    \^ 

^ 

IVhlch 

' 

Unscrlptaral 

Unseasonable 
Unselfish 

_Li  "3 

W  Inch-are 
iV'hlch  are-not 

/   ?  ' 

\ 

iVhlch-are-to- 

Until 

have 

Until-lt 
Upon-bls 

c.               \ 
r 

Whichever 
Whi3h-had-not 

/  

Upon-lt 
Upward 

i               1 

>    V     N 

WJ.lch-have- 
had 
Whlch-oughV- 
to-have 

i  .„.{  Jl. 

* 

Whlch-ought- 

Use  (noun) 

. 

not 

Use  (verb) 
Usually 

-X    -_}       s 

7       I 

Whlch-not 
Which-  were-not 
Which-will-not 

<y        */* 

3 

Vacanoy 
Value 

1                 ^\ 

Whlch-would- 

f    (T 

Very 

V_        C         ' 

have-had 
While 

r~rr~ 

/ 

Very-well 

) 

Whilst 

• 

Virtue 

^^\S~            cv             J 

Washington 

'~~" 

White 
Who 

/        c 

Watch 

.                     J 

Whoever 

"Water 

/       """^v       c 

We 

Who  -have 

/      _/^           XJJ             \ 

—       A 

Whole 

^  .—  -yUJT. 

We-always-Uke- 

Wholesale-store 

to-have 
We-are 

C~X~~\.1/  s 

Wholly 
Whom 

s~       . 

We-are-not 

Whosoever 

I         ^^      £ 

Welcome 
We-may 
"We-may-be 

c~^  ^ 

Why-not 
Will 
Willingly 

.l...r  cr 

We-may-be- 

Will-not 

c  ^ 

able-to 

^^**>       C^^fek           C 

Wilt 

f3                         (J       cX_x 

We-must-b« 

Wisconsin 

Were 

\ 

Western 
We*t-Vlrglr.li 

S" 

•*}/>     ^\       6 

Q              ON  „.„,•„, 

Wisdom 
With 
Withdraw 

^  c  S 

We-wlll 

j 

W«-  will-not 

\^^^ 

Wlth-hlm 

Within 

(j    (r> 

What 
Whatever 

(j 

Wlthln-a-week- 
or-two 

C^^                            *~  ^ 

When 

^—  ^     (i—  9     C^-/V 

Wlth-me 

Whence 

^. 

Wlth-iny 

_ 

Whenever 

Without 

VOCABULARY. 


309 


With-reference- 

to 

With-regard-to 
Wltu-respect-to 

"With-whom 

Witness 

Woman 


Women 

Word 

Word-of-God 

Worker 

World 

Would 

Ye 

Year-s 
Yearly 

Yesterday 

Yet 

You 


Against 
Kmcacy 
Perfect 

Mystery 

Manufacture 

Manufactory 

Right-hand 

Signify 

You  re-rery-truly 


Young 

Youngest 

Your 


Your-favor 

Yourself 

Yourselves 


Your-Btatement 

Yours-trmly 

Youth 


r 


APPENDIX. 


\ 


SPIRITUAL  FREEDOM. 


^~t_s    \      /      U>    J     "N? 

/V^V^^X^^^.^/ 


-V 


rv 


/  L 


) '   1^1   '  1 

/,     — +^^rjr  \^^s      — 

?  •  '  ^   ^C-p  * 

../    Vo  L           ,   '    )/\3  v 


/ 

- 


"1       o 


V    - 

.No    L..^ 


L 


-          -P 
' 


7^1 


V,  r 


, 


FAC  SIMILES. 

Short-hand  notes  as  actually  produced  at  a  high  rate  of 
speed,  present  an  appearance  very  different  from  the  char- 
acters contained  in  the  engraved  pages  of  this  book.  The 
higher  the  speed,  the  greater  the  variance  from  an  exact 
standard.  We  present  a  few  specimens,  but  not  for  criti- 
cism or  imitation.  They  were  executed  by  teachers  in 
different  schools  in  which  this  book  is  used.  The  transla- 
tion is:  "  You  may  state  your  name,  age,  place  of  residence 
and  occupation;  also,  whether  or  not  you  are  acquainted  with 
the  plaintiff"  in  this  action."  The  student,  while  he  may  ad- 
mire the  ease  with  which  a  stenographer  may  read  very 
wretched  looking  notes,  should  nevertheless  stick  as  close  to 
the  standard  as  possible. 

No.  1  was  written  at  the  rate  of  150  words  per  minute; 
No.  2,  175  per  minute;  No.  3,  216;  No.  4,  200;  No.  5,  200. 


f  "->  /  H"  u~l 


•\     s. 

v^ 


(311) 


DEFINITION  OF  TERMS. 

Stenography.— A.  system  of  rapid  writing;  Short-band. 

PhonegrapKg.— Sound- writing;  a  phonetic  system  of  Short-hand. 

Word-Sign.— An  abbreviated  outline  from  which  some  of  the  conso- 
nants are  omitted. 

Sign-  Word.— A  word  which  Is  provided  with  a  sign,  or  abbreviated  out- 
line. 

Phrateograph. — A  character  expressing  more  words  than  one,  formed  by 
writing  a  number  of  words  without  lifting  the  pen. 

Phrate-^Hgn. — An  abbreviated  phraseograph. 

Phraseogram.—  An  assemblage  of  words  which  are  expressed  by  a 
phrase-sign. 

Consonant  Stem.  -Any  letter  of  the  consonant  alphabet,  whether  stand- 
ard length,  shortened  or  lengthened. 

Adjvnctive  Sign.— Any  character  or  expedient,  other  than  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet,  which  is  employed  to  express  a  consonant  sound ;  e.  g.,  the 
s-circle,  n-hook,  st-loop,  einp,  etc. 

Verbatim.  —Word  for  word. 

Notes.— Matter  written  in  Short-hand ;  Stenographic  manuscript. 

IAst-  Wordt.  Series  of  words  to  be  written  according  to  the  rules  which 
Just  precede  them.  See  sections  24  and  54. 

Speed  Sentence. — The  sentence  which  is  to  be  written  a  given  number  of 
times  in  one  or  two  minutes.  See  sec.  89. 

Abbreviations.— L 1,  L  2,  L  8,  etc.,  refer  respectively  to  Lines  1.  2,  8.  of  the 
engraved  plates. 

Type-  Writer.—  Refers  either  to  a  writing  machine,  or  the  person  who 
operates  it.  For  distinction,  the  operator  is  sometimes  called  a  type- 
writist,  or  a  type-operator.  The  name  "  type-writer,"  however,  as  desig- 
nating the  person,  is  gaining  currency,  and  may  well  be  adopted,  since 
writing  machines  are  usually  called  by  a  specific  name,  as  the  Remington, 
Caligraph,  Hammond,  etc. 

Typoicript.— Refers  to  type-written  manuscript,  sometimes  called  simply 
"type-writing."  The  name  Typograph  has  also  been  applied  to  the  instru- 
ment itself. 


SUGGESTIONS. 


"  HAVE  FAITH  IN  SHORT-HAND.— There  IB  probably  no  other  one  thing 
that  has  caused  BO  many  people  to  fail  in  their  endeavors  to  become  re- 
porters as  a  lack  of  confidence  in  Short-hand.  Too  often  we  hear  begi  ti- 
ners  say.  •  I  will  try  it  and  see  whether  I  can  succeed  or  not.'  The  young 
man  or  woman  who,  after  seeing  that  thousands  of  others  have  m  de  a 
success  of  Short-hand,  cannot  say,  'I  w'M  succeed,'  had  better  not  -peril 
time  or  money  upon  it,  or,  in  fact,  upon  anything  else  that  requires  a  li  ;tle 
study  and  application. 

•'  Nothing  is  more  absurd  than  to  hear  a  certain  class  of  people  decry- 
ing Short-hand,  when  in  fact  they  know  nothing  at  all  about  it.  We  h«t  - 
known  many  young  people  who  would  have  become  excellent  reporter- , 
had  they  not  been  induced  to  give  up  the  idea  of  learning  Short-hand  by 
the  advice  of  persons  who  had  never  before  even  heard  of  Stenography. 

"The  young  man  or  woman  who  takes  up  the  study  of  Short-hand  will 
surely  be  compelled  to  endure  the  constant  cry  that  there  is  an  ove>- 
supply.  To  be  sure  there  is  an  '  over-supply '  of  Short-hand  writers,  bo 
ra  there  an  over-supply  of  workmen  in  every  industrial  pursuit;  yet 
people  go  on  learning  the  various  trades  just  as  though  the  cry  had  never 
been  heard.  The  over-supply  comes  from  that  large  class  who  oi.ly  do 
things  by  halves.  We  have  all  heard  the  cry  of  an  over-supply  of  law- 
yers, teachers,  carpenters,  blacksmiths,  etc.,  yet  a  good  lawyer,  teacher 
or  carpenter  is  never  at  a  loss  for  something  to  do.  You  never  hear  of  a 
man  who  stands  well  up  in  his  business  or  profession  making  any  com* 
plaint  of  the  competition  which  he  may  have.  People  who  can  do  their 
part  well  are  always  in  demand." 

"The  Stenographer,  like  everybody  else,  must,  in  a  certain  sense,  be  a 
machine.  This  arises  from  the  fact  that  in  many  cases  confidential  mat- 
ter of  the  gravest  importance  is  dictated  to  him,  and  unless  he 
exerts  the  utmost  care,  he  will  be  apt,  inadvertently  it  may  be,  to  betray 
a  knowledge  of  his  employer's  affairs  to  those  who  would  take  advantage 
of  It.  Again,  it  frequently  occurs  in  some  kinds  of  business  that  the 
Stenographer  is  approached  for  the  special  purpose  of  getting  him  to 
divulge  his  employer's  intentions  or  plans.  Attempts  may  even  be  made 
to  bribe  him,  in  order  to  secure  the  desired  information.  Aside  from  the 
moral  phase  of  the  question,  the  Stenographer  can  by  no  means  afford  to 
betray  his  employer's  secrets  to  others.  Once  let  it  be  proved  that  he  has 
done  such  a  thing,  and  his  prospects  as  a  reporter  will  be  ruined." 

— From  "Orm  HUNDRED  VALUABLE  SUGGESTIONS  TO  SHORT-HAND 
STUDENTS,"  by  StUby  A.  Moron,  Short-Hand  InatituU,  Michigan  University. 


SttORT-HfVND   DICTIONARY 


8KNT  POSTPAID  TO  ANY  ADDRESS   FOB  $1.00 


Prepared  specially  for  young  stenographers  and  stu- 
dents of  the  Pitman  System 

Handy  size;  fits  the  pocket.  Dimensions:  Thick- 
ness, 8-8  of  an  Inch;  width,  8  8-4  Inches:  length,  Q%  In- 
ches; weight,  6  oz. 

Bound  In  cloth;  stained  edges;  enameled  paper; 
clear  type  and  engraving;  excellent  press-work. 

The  book  contains  150  pages;  6000  characters  rep- 
resenting all  commonly  occurring  words  whose  out- 
lines are  doubtful  or  uneertain. 

The  Intelligent  learner  does  not  require  a  Dictionary 
of  huge  size  containing  thousands  of  words  which 
are  perfectly  easy,  and  ten  of  thousands  of  rare  words 
which  occur  only  once  in  a  life-time.  The  engraved 
characters  and  corresponding  words  are  printed  two 
columns  to  the  page  and  arranged  alphabetically. 

Most  common  words  are  easy  to  write  In  Short-hand 
the  proper  forms  being  determined  at  a  glance.  Such 
are  MAKE,  BLAME,  TIME,  DO,  MUSCLE,  PRESERVE,  MIM- 
EOGRAPH. To  know  how  to  express  such  words  no 
student  ever  needs  a  dictionary.  They  are  omitted 
from  this  list  because  they  would  only  be  In  the  way. 
Those  only  are  included  which  are  both  common  and 
difficult;  and  since  the  list  Is  not  lengthy,  this  little 
book  Is  suitable  not  only  as  a  pocket  reference  book, 
but  for  actual  school  room  use.  It  will  be  time  well 
spent  If  the  learner  will  copy  each  page  a  score  of 
times. 

Get  a  Pocket  Dictionary— because— It  makes  hard 
words  easy;  it  saves  labor  and  prevents  discourage- 
ment; It  will  make  you  a  better  stenographer;  because 
it  Is  low-priced  and  amply  complete. 


Published  and  for  sale  by 

THE  MOHAX  SHORT-HAND  Co.,  ST.  Louis,  Mo. 


WOR                     —  1 

49  —                     YOU 

o^      Worse 

x^          Yawl 

<\       Worship 

<y 

"\           Worshipper 

fc/l       Worth 

t          Yawn 

u 

Ye 
-Year 

V             TT  \Ji  111 

(^(/v  Worthless 

^V        Yearly 

A        Worthlessness 
3          Would 

^         Yearn 

/>"     Yellow 

Xl          Write 
Writing 

f       Yes 
\s\      Yesterday 

/^-^      Written 

X- 

Yet 
^       Yield 

Lxenia 
0 

^,       Xenophon 
\^^      Xerxes 

<^s  S  Yonder 
'C           York 

n               YOU 

Y 

s^x       Young 

1           Yacht 

x^?     Youngster 

O??  —  Yankee 

f           Your 

^-^    ^j     Yankton 

^         Your-favor 

£         Yard 
S           Yarn 

S^-t        Your-last-letter 
C        Yourself 

RIGHT  TO  THE  POINT.      , 

The  beat  email  Dictionary  extant.—  H.  D.  CADMAW  , 
Principal  Short-hand  Department,  lleald's  Bu&iueu 
College,  San  Krunciaco. 

Most  practical  series  of  short-hand  text-books  ever 
pnblUhed.— W.  P.  POTTEB.  Short-hand  Teacher,  St. 
Louis. 

Best  adapted*  of  all  for  actual  School-room  use.— 
LYMAM  HAKFOBD,  Teacher  H.gh  School,  Watsonville, 
Calif. 

Tour  Dictionary  is  just  the  thing.— W.  N.  PHILIPS, 
Principal  Mas-t-y  business  College,  Montgomery,  Ala. 
.  The  Reporting  Style  is  admirable— the  best  Short- 
hand instruction  book  I  ever  examined.  J NO.  C. 
HUGH,  Teacher  Femcle  College,  Mansfield,  La. 

Tour  Dictionary  is  the  finest  book  of  the  kind  I 
have  ever  Be--n.  —  KMELINB  D.  MAHSTON,  Teacher, 
aomerviile,  Teuu. 

The  very  best  text-books  on  the  market. — B.  E. 
PABKEK.  Prin  ipal  Department  of  Business,  Otterbein 
University,  tte&terville,  Ohio. 

The  Reporting  Style  is  the  most  practical  Short-hand 
book  I  have  ever  seen  — W.  C.  HOLMES,  Law  Sten- 
ographer, Waycross,  Ga. 

Have  tried  many  books— find  Moran's  Reporting 
Style  to  be  the  be.-t.— F.  L.  HAMLIN,  President  Col- 
lege of  Commerce,  East  St.  Louis,  111. 

The  handy  little  Sign-book  is  especially  useful. — 
J.  M.  BAUNKS,  Short-hand  Teacher,  St.  Louis. 

Have  ased  the  Reporting  Style  some  years — find  It 
very  satisfactory.— S.  L.  OLVKB.  Principal  St.  LouiB 
Commercial  College. 

Tour  Dictionary  gives  eminent  satisfaction.  -E. 
H.  FRITCU,  Principal  Southwestern  Business  College, 
St.  Louis. 

TheReporiing  Style  is  superior  to  any  other  text- 
book on  the  market — ased  it  eight  years. — ELIZABETH 
IRISH.  University  Business  College,  Iowa  City. 

Tour  Short-hand  instruction  book  was  last  evening 
adopted  for  use  in  our  Hi^h  School  —W.  W.  CHAL- 
MXBS,  Snpt.  of  Instruction,  Toledo,  O. 

Ths  Reporting  Style  is  eminently  practical— con- 
venient for  the  teacher,  stimu  ating  to  the  student.— 
F.  V.  BBOCK,  Teacher  High  School,  Evansville,  Ind. 

No  other  Short-hand  text-book  even  approaches 
the  Reporting  Style  in  thoroughness,  clearness  and 
directness  —M.  O.  GBAYK?,  Principal  Normal  Col- 
lege, I'et-.skey,  Mich. 


PtTBLISHBD  BY 

MORAN  SHORT-HAND  COMPANY 

SAINT  L«U1S,  U.  S,  A. 


PRICE  25    CENTS. 


MORAN'S 

Shorthand  Sign-Book. 

FITS  YOUR  VEST  POCKET 

o 

Contains  all  the  abbreviated  Word 
and  Phrase  Signs  in  the  Pilman  Sys- 
tem. Arranged  both  Alphabetically 
and  in  Lessons.  Since  all  v.hese 
characters  are  to  be  memorized,  it 
requires  no  argument  to  convince 
you  that  it  is  a  sensible  plan  always 
to  have  this  little  Sign-book  with  you 
to  refer  to  and  study  spare  hours.  It 
is  complete,  handy,  cloth-bound. 
The  demand  for  it  proves  its  popu- 
larity, We  have  sold  upwards  of 
30,000  of  these  wonderful  little  book- 
lets. They  are  used  regularly  in 
many  of  the  best  Colleges,  such  as 

The  Heald  Business  College  Chain,  Calif. 

The  Ann  Arbor  High  School. 

Lyons  Business  College,  Terre  Haute,  Ind. 

City  High  School,  East  St.  Louis,  111. 

Caswell  School  of  Short-hand,  New  Bed- 
ford, Mass, 

Fettipas  School  of  Short-hand,  Halifax, 
Nova  Scotia. 

CentralBusiness  College,  St.  Louis. 

Johnson  Business  College,  Ft.  Madison,  la. 

The  very  idea  of  a  Sign-Book  is  our 
own  invention,  the  popularity  of  which 
is  attested  by  the  number  of  imitations. 
The  Moran  Sign-Book,  however,  will 
continue  to  be  the  standard.  Send  the 
price,  250,  in  stamps. 

ORDER  TO-DAY. 

Address 

MORAN  SHORT-HAUD  Co.? 
1523  Hickory  St.  ST.  LOUIS. 


LETTER-WRITING  CLUB. 


Membership,  one  year 


50c 


Persons  studiously  Inclined,  seeking  self-Improve- 
ment, may  become  members,  and  are  Introduced  by 
card  to  other  members  with  whom  they  may  cor- 
respond, discussing  some  topic  of  mutual  interest. 

In  this  way  the  habit  Is  formed  of  study,  reflection 
and  the  expression  of  thought  in  good  language. 

The  way  to  learn  Letter-writing  is  to  write  letters. 
As  a  business  qualification  and  social  accomplish- 
ment, the  art  of  letter-writing  stands  at  the  head.  In 
this  age  it  is  simply  indispensable. 

A  well-written,  clearly  composed,  intelligible  letter, 
Is  the  golden  key  which  unlocks  the  gates  leading  to 
business  success  and  social  preferment. 

The  practice  of  corresponding  with  Intellectual 
friends  is  a  source  of  pleasure,  profit  and  encourage- 
ment. The  Club  numbers  hundreds  of  members  and 
the  enrollment  Is  growing  constantly. 

The  purpose  of  this 'Bureau  is  to  enable  students  and 
others  to  become  acquainted,  in  order  that  they  may 
discuss  on  paper  the  subjects  studied,  also  various 
topics  of  mutual  interest- 
Through  this  medium  any  earnest  student  may  se- 
cure one  or  more  desirable  correspondents  for  the 
purpose  of  exchanging  opinions,  examining  one  an- 
other's exercises,  comparing  notes  and  giving  mutual 
encouragement. 

Skill  in  letter-writing,  a  ready  knowledge  of  English 
composition,  accuracy  of  expression,  self-reliance  and 
the  habit  of  Independent  thought,  are  amongst  the 
favorable  results  attained. 

When  applying  for  membership,  give  your  full  name 
and  address,  age,  occupation,  educational  advance- 
ment, naming  branch  of  study  in  which  you  are  most 
Interested. 

Address  orders  and  inquiries  to  the 

CENTRAL  BUSINESS  COLLEGE,  ST.  Louis. 


DEMAND  FOR  SHORT- HAND  TEACHERS. 

A  practical  knowledge  of  Short-hand  and  Typewrit- 
ing is  so  useful  and  so  great  a  personal  convenience  to 
business  men,  professional  people,  teachers,  students, 
almost  everyone  in  fact,  that  it  is  not  surprising  that 
millions  of  people  are  wanting  to  learn.  Teachers  are 
scarce. 

Stenography  is  now  taught  in  the  High  Schools  of 
all  the  leading  cities,  and  many  smaller  cities  and 
towns  are  wanting  instructor^;  but  they  are  not  to  be 
had.  1  do  not  hesitate  to  recommend  educated  young 
people  to  qualify  as  Short-hand  teacherg;  providing  of 
course'you  have  a  natural  bent  for  the  teaching  profes- 
sion. When  you  become  a  skillful  Short-hand  In- 
structor, profitable  employment  is  assured.  The  work 
is  interesting  and  affords  ample  scope  for  promotion- 
The  teachers  are  paid  from  $50  to  $150  a  month. 

We  conduct  a  special  Normal  Class  in  which  stu- 
dents are  fitted  for  positions  as  teachers  of  Sten- 
ography. Through  our  Book  Publishing  business  we 
have  frequent  calls  for  competent  instructors.  It  18 
simply  a  matter  of  business  advantage  for  us  to  fur- 
nish teachers  who  are  qualified  and  able  to  render 
satisfaction.  In  most  instances  it  is  required  that  the 
teacher  be  reasonably  well  acquainted  with  the  series 
of  books  we  publish. 

If  you  wish  to  become  a  Short- hand  teacher,  attend 
our  Normal  Class,  conducted  by  Eldon  Moran, author, 
or  take  i  special  course  by  mall.  Terms  very  reason- 
able. In  most  every  instance  we  have  been  able  to  se- 
cure desirable  positions  for  those  finishing  this  course. 


For  particulars  address 

MORAN  SHORT-HAND  Co.,  ST.  Louis,  Mo. 


+*•  AFFORDING  THE  YOUNG  •*•• 

Inspiration  XCntertaJnment; 

Instruction 


SELF-HELPER 

A  MAGAZINE  OF  OPTIMISM  AND  SELF-BETTERMENT. 

PUBLISHED  MOlfTHLY  IN   THK  INTEREST  OF 

MORAN-PITMAN  SHORT-HAND  STUDENTS 

POPULAR  EDUCATION,  HOME  STUDY,  SELF-HELP 

SHORT-HAND  DEPARTMENT  CONDUCTED   PERSON- 
ALLY BY  ELDON  MORAN,  EDITOR 

Forty-eight  pages.    Handy  size.    Snbsc-'- :  -r.  ririce,  25c.  a  year  (stamps) 
Send  2-cent  stamp  r~    ..:».     .  -opy. 

ADDRESS  The  SELF-HELPER  PUB.  CO., 

SAINT  LOUIS,  U.  8.  A. 

^M  OUR  SPECIALTY- 

X^x-3** . _J—  


OOtiTLiEGEJ   OATAIXXJS 
SCHOOLi   JOURNALS 
FOLDERS 

TEACHERS'   TESTIMONIALS 
LEAFLETS 

PORTRAIT  OA.RDS  ^-  -J OFFICE   STATIONBRT 

— —^GENERAL    JOB    PRINTING-- 

SEND  FOR  ESTIMATES  AND  PRICES. 

No  matter  whit  you  may  want  in  the  printing  line,  send  us  a 
brief  description  of  your  requirements,  and  a  reasonable  and  prompt 
estimate  will  be  furnished.  Have  on  hand  extensive  supply  of  educa- 
tional cuts,  Shorthand  engravings,  etc.,  for  free  use  of  patrons. 

HOME  PRINTING  COMPANY, 

.  LOUIS.  MO. 


UNIVERSUTY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


r 


Form  L9-25r;i-9,'47(A5618)444 


UNIVERSITY  ol  CALIFORNIA 

AT 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000137187     1 


_    >    •/.  . 

^;- 

,  AS 


M?93r 
1909 


